You are on page 1of 741

No.

B-E 07 467
Page 1 from 9

Maintenance Instruction and Spare Parts List


Type:

G5F15/26-HVDR-37-36-3-R36D

Special:

--

Drawing No.:

G-3839-00

Ident No.:

10019878

Hartmann & Knig


S t ro m zuf h ru n gs A G
Leitungstrommeln - Schlauch - Seil - Sondertrommeln - Schleifringkrper
Postfach 1260
Siemensstrae 6

76677 Graben-Neudorf
76676 Graben-Neudorf

www.hukag.com
E - Mail: info@ hukag.com

Telefon: 07255 / 7120-0


Telefax: 07255 / 5038

Maintenance Instruction and Spare Parts List


Type: G5F15/26-HVDR-37-36-3-R36D

No.:

B-E 07 467
Page 2 from 9

List of Contents
1.0

Assembly of the Drum.......................................................................................................3

2.0

Drum Body Dimensions ....................................................................................................3

3.0

Observance at Spiral Type Drum Body ............................................................................3

4.0

Connection of the Main Power Cable ...............................................................................4

5.0

Connection of the Payout Cable.......................................................................................4

6.0

Checks before Commissioning ........................................................................................4

7.0

Maintenance.......................................................................................................................5

a.)

Wear Part............................................................................................................................5

b.) Hydraulic Motor .................................................................................................................5


c.)

Bevel Gearbox....................................................................................................................5

8.0

Liability for Faults..............................................................................................................6

9.0

Enclosure ...........................................................................................................................6

10.0

Spare Parts List .................................................................................................................6

11.0

Spare Parts Drawing..........................................................................................................9

Hartmann & Knig 76676 Graben-Neudorf

Date: 25.02.2004

Drawn by.: Chr. Fricke

No:

Maintenance Instruction and Spare Parts List


Type: G5F15/26-HVDR-37-36-3-R36D

B-E 07 467
Page 3 from 9

ATTENTION: Technical operations should only be carried out by qualified technical personnel!
1.0

Assembly of the Drum


The cable reeling drum is constructed for heavy duty. Its construction consists of the following main parts which is apparent from the attached spare parts drawing SK-5237-00-2.
The drum body (1) is fixed to the gearbox (16) on the hallow shaft (15) with the drum
flange (2). Safety device for the drum flange to the hallow shaft (3) and (4). On the opposite side of the drum body (1) the slip ring body (30) and brush holder unit (33) is installed.
The driving of the drum body (1) is a hydraulic motor (19) with a hydraulic air multiple disc
brake spring brake (17) which is controlled through a motor controller. The function of the
control device is to adjust the tension of the cable reeling drum. Through that control device, it is guaranteed that the cable is treated gentle. The heating (28) prevent the accumulation of the condensation water inside the slip ring housing (heating must run in continuous operation). The installed limit switch (58) is for stop positions.

2.0

Drum Body Dimensions


Diameter: 1470 x 2600 x 33 mm width.

3.0

Observance at Spiral Type Drum Body


Before presenting the cable the drum body on accuracy to size is related to drum body
width (pipe diameter + approx. 5%) and plan parallelism to examine possibly align.
Note that there is enough seal between the round plate and
the bottom of the terminal box. Optionally this must be accomplished by the customer side locally. Control the sealing
in regular intervals and renew it every 3-5 years.
You receive this necessary sealant H&K-Sikaflex 221 over
our spare part sales.

Hartmann & Knig 76676 Graben-Neudorf

Date: 18.12.2006

Drawn by.: Chr. Fricke

No:

Maintenance Instruction and Spare Parts List


Type: G5F15/26-HVDR-37-36-3-R36D

B-E 07 467
Page 4 from 9

Note! Please considered the operating manual and handling instructions of the cable manufacture!!!
4.0

Connection of the Main Power Cable


Remove the slip ring cover (63), (62) and (61) connect your fixed cable to the terminal
block (42) through the gland (29) at the slip ring housing (25). The terminal block (42) is already connected to the brushes. Then the cores of the cable goes through the hallow shaft
(13) of the gear box (16) and have to be connected at both sides.
Note: The 1st, slip ring () nearest the axle is always earth .

5.0

Connection of the Payout Cable


Go with the cable through the gland (7) at the housing (6) to the terminal strip (10) and
connect it to the terminal strip. Fix the cable with the strain relief clamps at the drum body
(1). Coil on the payout cable adding 2 safety windings for strain-relief on the drum body.

6.0

Checks before Commissioning


We recommend the following check.
a.)
b.)
c.)
d.)

check cable glands for proper sealing


check slip ring unit for dampness, no moisture must be present
check brush holders for proper contacts to the slip rings a rotation must be smooth
grease slip rings lightly with contact grease.

Hartmann & Knig 76676 Graben-Neudorf

Date: 18.12.2006

Drawn by.: Chr. Fricke

No:

Maintenance Instruction and Spare Parts List


Type: G5F15/26-HVDR-37-36-3-R36D

7.0

B-E 07 467
Page 5 from 9

Maintenance
a.) Wear Part
The brush holders/collector and slip rings/plane slip rings are subject to a natural wear and
are depending upon need to be replaced. The brush bearing surfaces are to be cleaned
and the mobility of the pendulum brush holders are to examine (with wire brush holding the
pressure * is to the slip rings to examine), if necessarily should take place a cleaning or an
exchange (during 2/3 wear of the brush coals). After cleaning of the slip rings these should
be injected with contact spray. You receive the for this necessary special spray over our
spare part sales. It is to be made certain that the slip rings are always clean and no brush
coal dust at the slip rings set (flash over). After running in (after commissioning for the first
time after 3 months) of the brush coals the brush coal dust in the slip ring area is to be removed. You have to made weekly maintenance in the running-in period (approx. 4-8
weeks) after commissioning. Thats important to ensure correct function further on. Afterwards in regular intervals (every 6 months and / or depending upon turnings of the slip
rings) repeat this procedure. If you fall into no pattern, please you request a maintenance
plan from us (with description of your data e.g. turnings, layer duration, travel speed). The
inserted grooved ball bearings are by the factory plentifully provided with camp fat, so that
a greasing is necessary only in larger time intervals. It is to be made certain by the customer that the steel flange is closely screwed on and the cable entry is well after IP54
(IP65) sealed.
Pressure* = when easy one-sided taking from 3-4 mm off should set itself the hook again
well on the slip ring course. If this effected can take place re-bent and/or must an exchange.
The electrical connection must be done according to VDE 0100 - 0113 resp. IEC-Nr.: 2041:1992 or CENELEC.
According the EC recommendation 89/382/EEC, we point out that rotating parts have to be
secured against danger of accident.

b.) Hydraulic Motor


Sizes:
Series:
Nominal Pressure:
Peak Pressure:

12
6
400 bar
450 bar

See maintenance instruction B+E 00 051.

c.) Bevel Gearbox


Type:
Ratio:
Model:
Type of oil:
Oil quantity:

size 5
i= 85.98
H-032-A
PAO 220
124.4 liter

See maintenance instruction B+E 00 060.

Hartmann & Knig 76676 Graben-Neudorf

Date: 18.12.2006

Drawn by.: Chr. Fricke

No:

Maintenance Instruction and Spare Parts List


Type: G5F15/26-HVDR-37-36-3-R36D

8.0

B-E 07 467
Page 6 from 9

Liability for Faults


If any alterations or repairs to the cable reeling drum are done by anyone else within the
time of warranty, we do not take any further liability for faults.
Notice
According the EC recommendation 89/392/EEC, we point out that rotating parts have to be
secured against danger of accident.

9.0

Enclosure
General security advices for motor driven cable reeling drums
Screws / tightening torque
Maintenances instruction for hydraulic motor
Maintenances instruction for hydraulic air multiple disc brake

B+E 00 049
B+E 00 069
B+E 00 060
B+E 00 06

10.0 Spare Parts List


Item Drawing-/Article no.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

G-3232-20a-00-1-4
G-3232-21a-00-3-2
X5053-0003
X5115-0002
X5200-0043
G-3839-30-00-3-5
X6027-1004
X06-05-015-0-00-4-3
X06-07-024-0-00-3-5
X6501-0015
X6501-0016
X6503-0002
X6502-0001
X6505-0001
SK-4789-02-00-4
X6505-0001
X6501-0002
X6502-0001
X5009-0147
X5750-5006-A
G-3839-32-00-3-1
X5498-0002
G-3839-02-00-4-1

Description

Piece

drum body 1470 x 2600 x 33


drum flange
shaft nut KM 20 M100 x 2
safety plate
feather key
housing for terminal strip
gland M50 x 1.5
cover
clamp ring
terminal block EK 4 mm
terminal block SAK 4 mm
endplate AP 4-10
endplate EWK 1
mounting rail
owner terminal block
mounting rail
terminal block SAK 2.5 mm CAN BUS
endplatte EWK 1
hexagon nut M20 x 80
gearbox size 5; i=85.98
gearbox foot
hydraulic air multiple disc brake
motor flange

1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
36
1
2
1
1
1
3
2
6
1
1
1
1

Hartmann & Knig 76676 Graben-Neudorf

Date: 18.12.2006

Drawn by.: Chr. Fricke

No:

Maintenance Instruction and Spare Parts List


Type: G5F15/26-HVDR-37-36-3-R36D

Item Drawing-/Article-no.
19
23
24
25
26
27
28
29

X5490-0008
G-3232-22a-00-3-2
X5210-0055
G-3839-31-00-3-5
G-3232-23-00-3-1
X06-03-063-0-00-4-1
X6000-0001
X6027-1003
X6027-1010
X6027-1001
X5441-0001

30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42

43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54

G-1662-16-00-4-0
G-1662-15-00-4-0
X41-12-106-0-00-3-0
X41-12-107-0-00-3-0
G-3697-04-00-4-0
Y-2028-01-00-4-7
G-3232-11-00-4-0
G-3232-24a-00-3-1
G-3232-09-00-4-1
G-3232-10-00-4-1
X6505-0001
X6501-0015
X6501-0016
X6503-0002
X6502-0001
X41-13-026-1-00-4-0
SK-4789-10-00-3-1
X5270-0016
SK-4789-11-00-3-0
X01-10-008-0-00-4-1
X41-12-045-0-00-4-10
SK-4789-12a00-3-0
SK-4789-03-00-4-1
M-504-16-00-4-0
X41-12-107-1-00-3-0
G-3697-07-00-4-0
G-3232-09-00-4-1
G-3232-10-00-4-1

B-E 07 467
Page 7 from 9

Description

Piece

hydraulic motor
intermediate flange
shaft sealing
slip ring housing
slip ring carrier
angle for heating
heating 33 W, 230 V
gland at the slip ring housing
gland M40 x 1.5
gland M25 x 1.5
gland M20 x 1.5
vent connection
slip ring body 36 poles + earth 36 A
slip ring earth 36 A
slip ring phase 36 A
brush holder unit 36 poles + earth 36 A
brush holder earth 36 A
brush holder phase 36 A
supporting ring
intermediate ring
slip ring
supporting plate
fixing device for terminal strip
fixing for terminal strip
mounting rail
terminal block EK 4 mm
terminal block SAK 4 mm
end plate AP 4-10
end plate EWK 1
insulation disc
bearing flange
ball-bearing
follower slip ring
slip ring boss
slip ring phase R32 A CAN BUS
follower for limit switch
follower
bush
brush holder phase S 32 A CAN BUS
Spacer rod
fixing device for terminal strip
fixing for terminal strip

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Hartmann & Knig 76676 Graben-Neudorf

Date: 18.12.2006

1
2
1
1
1
1
36
1
1
36
1
1
1
1
4
4
2
1
36
1
4
41
2
2
1
1
3
1
1
1
6
1
2
2

Drawn by.: Chr. Fricke

No:

Maintenance Instruction and Spare Parts List


Type: G5F15/26-HVDR-37-36-3-R36D

B-E 07 467
Page 8 from 9

Item Drawing-/article-no. Description


55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66

X6505-0001
X6501-0002
X6502-0001
G-3232-15-00-4-6
X5400-0034
G-3232-31a-00-3-1
G-3697-06-00-4-0
G-3697-20-00-3-5
G-3697-20-00-3-5
G-3697-23-00-3-5
G-3839-33-00-3-1
X7100-0027
X6874-0021
G-3232-34-00-4-0
X6874-0020
X6451-0002
X6874-0009
X6874-0022
X6874-0011
X6874-0012
X6874-0008
X5440-0037
X6874-0023

Piece

mounting rail
terminal block SAK 2.5 mm CAN BUS
endplate EWK 1
plate for limit switch
limit switch
takener
spacer rod
between cover
between cover
cover
fixing device for vent
oil level glass
fitting glands
vent threaded pipe 100 mm length
vent threaded pipe 280 mm length
vent threaded pipe - 60 mm length
1/3 gland
strew plug
angle
curve piece 90 with inner and outer thread 1/2
T-piece 1/2 with inner thread
muff 1/2
vent 1/2
reduction piece

1
3
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
4
1
2
2

When ordering spare parts, please state our order- and our serial number, to avoid wrong
deliveries. The order- and our serial number are on the type plate on the drum.

Hartmann & Knig 76676 Graben-Neudorf

Date: 18.12.2006

Drawn by.: Chr. Fricke

No:

Maintenance Instruction and Spare Parts List


Type: G5F15/26-HVDR-37-36-3-R36D

B-E 07 467
Page 9 from 9

11.0 Spare Parts Drawing


Drawing-no.: SK-5237-00-2

Hartmann & Knig 76676 Graben-Neudorf

Date: 18.12.2006

Drawn by.: Chr. Fricke

Nr.:

General Security Advices


for Motor Driven Cable Reeling Drums

B 00 049
Seite 1 von 1

Safety References

The cable reeling drum is built and is reliable in service delivered after the newest
state design. Arbitrary changes, which impair the working reliability, are not permissible. That concerns also protection device, which is appropriate as contact protection.

The cable reeling drum may be used and operated only in the context of the conditions specified in the achievement and supply contract.

The operator has to ensure that with the assembly, the commissioning , servicing and
maintenance as well as the repair assigned persons consider the manual. Make sure
that they read and understood it in all points to prevent:
dangers for life and health of the user and other persons.
To guarantee the working reliability of the device.
loss of use and environmental pollutions by wrong handling.

for transport, assembling and disassembly, the operation as well as servicing and
maintenance, the relevant regulations are to be considered to the industrial safety
and to environmental protection.

the cable reeling drum may only maintained or repaired by authorized, trained and instructed personnel.

all work is to be accomplished carefully and under the aspect of "security".

work on the cable reeling drum may be accomplished only in the switched off condition.

The changed oil has to be filled into suitable container. Possibly developed oil on the
floor are to be eliminated immediately with an oil bonding agent. Strongly oil-soaked
cloths has to be kept in suitable containers. The waste oil is just like the oil bonding
agent and the cleaning cloths to be thrown according to the relevant environmentalprotection regulations.

rotary drive components, like clutches, gear wheels or belt drives must be secured
against danger of accidents.

at the cable reeling drum appropriate references, e.g. identification plate, rotation arrow etc. are to be considered. They must be free by colour and dirt. Missing ones describe have to be replaced.

No.:

B 00 069
page 1 from 2

Maintenance instruction
Screws/tightening torque

Hartmann & Knig


Stromzufhrungs AG
Cable reeling drum Hose Special drums Slip ring bodies
p.o.box 0100
Siemensstrae 6

76674 Graben-Neudorf
76676 Graben-Neudorf

www.hukag.com
E - Mail: info@hukag.com

phone:
fax:

+0049-7255 / 7120-0
+0049-7255 / 5038

No.:

Maintenance instruction
Screws/tightening torque

1.0

B 00 069
page 2 from 2

Screws/tightening torque
Caution:
To avoid overloading the individual screws, the maximum tightening torque (see
table 6.1) must not be exceeded, what is more important is that the faces are flush. If
this flushness cannot be reached during clamping, consolations of us is necessary

Clamping screw
thread

maximum tightening torque per screw (with =0.1)


Property class
8.8 Nm

Property class
10.9 Nm

Property class
12.9 Nm

M6

10

12

14.5

M8

25

29

35

M 10

50

58

70

M 12

90

100

121

M 14

--

160

193

M 16

210

240

295

M 20

450

470

570

M 24

750

820

980

M 27

--

1210

1450

M 30

1500

1640

1970

M 33

--

2210

2650

M 36

2500

2850

3420

Table 6.1: Maximum tightening torque of the clamping screws


Note: Unserviceable screws should be replaced by new ones of the same property class
and type.

Hartmann & Knig 76676 Graben-Neudorf

Date: 04.03.2005

Drawn by.: Chr. Fricke

No.:

B 00 090
page 1 from 8

Maintenance Instruction
and Spare Parts List
for
Replacement of the Springs Type LT

Hartmann & Knig


Stromzufhrungs AG
Cable Reeling Drum Hose Special Drums Slip Ring Bodies
p.o.box 0100
Siemensstrae 6

76674 Graben-Neudorf
76676 Graben-Neudorf

www.hukag.com
EMail: info@hukag.com

phone:
fax:

+0049-7255 / 7120-0
+0049-7255 / 5038

No.:

Maintenance Instruction and Spare Parts List


Type: LT parallel or in serial

B-00 090
page 2 from 8

List of Contents
1.0

Cable Reeling Drum parallel ............................................................................................. 3

1.1

Replacement of the broken Springs ................................................................................ 3

1.2

Installation of the new Springs......................................................................................... 4

1.3

Spare Parts List ................................................................................................................. 4

1.4

Spare Part Drawing ........................................................................................................... 5

2.0

Cable Reeling Drum in serial ............................................................................................ 6

2.1

Replacement of the broken Springs ................................................................................ 6

2.2

Installation of the new Springs......................................................................................... 7

2.3

Spare Parts List ................................................................................................................. 7

2.4

Spare Part Drawing ........................................................................................................... 8

Hartmann & Knig 76676 Graben-Neudorf

date: 22.08.2006

Draw.: C. Fricke

No.:

Maintenance Instruction and Spare Parts List


Type: LT parallel or in serial

1.0

B-00 090
page 3 from 8

Cable Reeling Drum parallel

1.1 Replacement of the broken Springs


The Replacement of the springs are only accomplish by qualified technical personnel.
Attention: The springs are made of rolled flat steel. The consequences of this
properties are, that they want to go back to its primitive state. So you have to look
and be carefully about the danger of accidents by using this kind of springs.
Disconnect the main power cable from the slip rings and pull the cable out of the hollow
shaft. The winding cable can remains on the drum body if it is secured against automatic
unwinding. Otherwise it must be uncoil completely from the drum body.
Remove the reeling drum from the fixing flange by loosen the screws (customer side).
Now remove the cable gland (1), the circlip ring (2) and the fixing flange from the hollow
shaft and the feather key. Remove the shield (7) with the spring housing (10), the ball
bearing (8) and the bearing cover (9) by unscrewing of the fixing nuts (5 and 6). The ball
bearing (8) should not be removed from the shield (7).
Attention! If the shield (7) is lifting up itself from the spring housing (16) by loosening one of the last nut you have to tighten it immediately. After that please contact
us for specify the next procedure.
The springs (12) were now visible and can be replaced out of the spring housing (10),
with the spacer plate and with their bandage.
Handle with care!
If you have a cable reeling drum with more springs you have to repeat the procedure until
all springs are took out of the spring housing.

Hartmann & Knig 76676 Graben-Neudorf

date: 22.08.2006

Draw.: C. Fricke

No.:

Maintenance Instruction and Spare Parts List


Type: LT parallel or in serial

B-00 090
page 4 from 8

1.2 Installation of the new Springs


Before you attach the new spring make sure that the hollow shaft with the takener (14) is
clean and all broken spring parts are removed from the compartment (16).
Attention! The new springs should be handle with care. Never remove the spring
bandage because this could cause very serious accidents.
The new springs must be placed into position with the bandage on. It is also important to
ensure that the inner eyelet of the spring engages properly in the groove of the takener
(14) which is fixed on the hollow shaft. After that you have to grease the new spring well.
Further take into consideration that all springs have the same direction of rotating. Consider the type designation for example LT300/ on the type plate. After that you have to
grease the springs well. Now you can assemble the cable reeling drum in reverse order.
Attention! The hollow shaft (15) has to be proper cleaned and the shield (7) with the ball
bearing (8) must be slide easier on it.

1.3 Spare Parts List

Item
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Description

Piece

cable gland
circlip ring
fixing flange
nut M6
nut M6
nut M8
shield
ball bearing
bearing cover
spring housing
spacer plate
spring
spacer plate
takener (hollow shaft)
spring bolt
spring housing

Hartmann & Knig 76676 Graben-Neudorf

1
1
1
4
8
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

date: 22.08.2006

Draw.: C. Fricke

No.:

Maintenance Instruction and Spare Parts List


Type: LT parallel or in serial

B-00 090
page 5 from 8

1.4 Spare Part Drawing


Drawing no.: SK-5579-00

Hartmann & Knig 76676 Graben-Neudorf

date: 22.08.2006

Draw.: C. Fricke

No.:

Maintenance Instruction and Spare Parts List


Type: LT parallel or in serial

2.0

B-00 090
page 6 from 8

Cable Reeling Drum in serial

2.1 Replacement of the broken Springs


The Replacement of the springs are only accomplish by qualified technical personnel.
Attention: The springs are made of rolled flat steel. The consequences of this
properties are, that they want to go back to its primitive state. So you have to look
and be carefully about the danger of accidents by using this kind of springs.
Disconnect the main power cable from the slip rings and pull out the cable of the hollow
shaft. The winding cable can remains on the drum body if it is secured against automatic
unwinding. Otherwise it must be uncoil completely from the drum body.
Remove the reeling drum from the fixing flange by loosen the screws (customer side).
Now remove the cable gland (1), the circlip ring (2) and the fixing flange from the hollow
shaft and the feather key. Remove the shield (7) the spring housing (10), the ball bearing
(8) and the bearing cover (9) by unscrewing of the fixing nuts (5 and 6). The ball bearing
(8) should not be removed from the shield (7).
Attention! If the shield (7) is lifting up itself from the spring housing (16) by loosening one of the last nut you have to tighten it immediately. After that please contact
us for specify the next procedure.
The springs were now visible and can be replaced out of the spring housing (16) with the
spring housing (10), the spacer plate and with their bandage.
Handle with care!
Attention! This applies only for cable reeling drum types LT220 and LT530.
During the replacement of the spring you have to press down the takener (14) by
using an screwdriver for example. Otherwise the inner eyelet of the lower spring
can jump out of the spring housing (10).
A circlip ring is constructional handled that by the other cable reeling drum types.

Hartmann & Knig 76676 Graben-Neudorf

date: 22.08.2006

Draw.: C. Fricke

No.:

Maintenance Instruction and Spare Parts List


Type: LT parallel or in serial

B-00 090
page 7 from 8

2.2 Installation of the new Springs


Before you attach the new spring make sure that the axle is clean and all broken spring
parts are removed from the compartment (11).
Attention! The new springs should be handle with care. Never remove the spring
bandage because this could cause very serious accidents.
The new springs must be placed into position with the bandage on. It is also important to
ensure that the inner eyelet of the spring engages properly in the groove of the Takener
(14) which is fixed on the hollow shaft. Pay
attention by the last spring, because you
dont see it correctly, that the spring bolt
engages properly in the outer eyelet of the
spring. Otherwise you have a malfunction
of the spring (see pic.).
Further take into consideration that one
spring should be placed with inverted
direction to the other to cause a serial
effect. Consider the type designation on the
type plate LT300 /H (H = in serial) for
example. After that you have to grease the
spring well. Now you can assemble the cable
reeling drum in reverse order. Attention!
The shield (7) with the ball bearing (8) must
be slide easier on it.

2.3 Spare Parts List


Item
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

Description

Piece

cable gland
circlip ring
fixing flange
nut M6
nut M6
nut M8
shield
ball bearing
bearing cover
spring housing
spacer plate
spring
spacer plate
takener
spring bolt
spring housing
hollow shaft

Hartmann & Knig 76676 Graben-Neudorf

1
1
1
4
8
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

date: 22.08.2006

Draw.: C. Fricke

No.:

Maintenance Instruction and Spare Parts List


Type: LT parallel or in serial

B-00 090
page 8 from 8

2.4 Spare Part Drawing


Drawing no.: SK-5578-00

Hartmann & Knig 76676 Graben-Neudorf

date: 22.08.2006

Draw.: C. Fricke

no.:

B-E 00 061
page 1 from 7

Maintenance Instruction
for
Hydraulically Released
Spring-applied Multi-plate Brakes

Hartmann & Knig


S t ro m zuf h ru n gs A G
Cable Reeling Drum - Hose - Rope - Special Drums - Slip Ring Bodies
p.o.box 0100
Siemens Street 6

76674 Graben-Neudorf
76676 Graben-Neudorf

www.hukag.com
E - Mail: info@hukag

phone:
fax:

+49-7255 / 7120-0
+49-7255 / 5038

Nr.:

Maintenance Instruction
Hydraulically Released Spring-applied
Multi-plate Brakes series 0-022-..0/..9

Hartmann & Knig 76676 Graben-Neudorf

Date: 25.03.2008

B-E 00 061
Seite 2 von 7

Drawn by Lippmann

Maintenance Instruction
Hydraulically Released Spring-applied
Multi-plate Brakes series 0-022-..0/..9

Hartmann & Knig 76676 Graben-Neudorf

date: 25.03.2008

No.:

B-E 00 061
Page 3 from 7

draw.: Lippmann

Maintenance Instruction
Hydraulically Released Spring-applied
Multi-plate Brakes series 0-022-..0/..9

Hartmann & Knig 76676 Graben-Neudorf

date: 25.03.2008

No.:

B-E 00 061
Page 4 from 7

draw.: Lippmann

Maintenance Instruction
Hydraulically Released Spring-applied
Multi-plate Brakes series 0-022-..0/..9

Hartmann & Knig 76676 Graben-Neudorf

date: 25.03.2008

No.:

B-E 00 061
Page 5 from 7

draw.: Lippmann

Maintenance Instruction
Hydraulically Released Spring-applied
Multi-plate Brakes series 0-022-..0/..9

Hartmann & Knig 76676 Graben-Neudorf

date: 25.03.2008

No.:

B-E 00 061
Page 6 from 7

draw.: Lippmann

Maintenance Instruction
Hydraulically Released Spring-applied
Multi-plate Brakes series 0-022-..0/..9

Hartmann & Knig 76676 Graben-Neudorf

date: 25.03.2008

No.:

B-E 00 061
Page 7 from 7

draw.: Lippmann

Tighten the strap ...

www.draeger.com

ST-9725-2007

ST-9724-2007

... until the inner mask lies firmly over your mouth
and nose.

ST-9727-2007

90 46 332 | POe | 097 | UUU-PR-ED | Marketing Communications | Printed in Germany | chlorine free - ecological | subject to modification!

Pull the hood over your head. Make sure that your
nose and chin sit comfortably in the inner mask
and that all your hair is tucked into the hood.

First insert your chin into the hood resting it


inside the inner mask.

ST-9717-2007

Open the elastic neck seal using both hands.

ST-9712-2007

... using both thumbs.

Push out the filter ...

ST-9713-2007

Take the hood into both hands.

ST-9721-2007

ST-9709-2007

ST-1587-2003

Drger Parat C
Smoke hood

ST-1596-2003

Drger Parat C
Smoke hood

Hold the red pull cords in one hand


and use your other hand to pull the
hood until both filter seals are
opened.

Pull firm on the cover of the wall box


to detach the security seal. Remove
the hood.

Wall box containing two hoods.

ST-9706-2007

ST-9701-2007

ST-9700-2007

ST-9689-2007

TWIN PACK

The filter openings must be free to


ensure unrestricted breathing.

Open the zipper of the Soft Pack


and remove the hood.

Handy travel case.

Hold the red pull cords in one hand


and use your other hand to pull the
hood until both filter seals are
opened.

ST-9735-2007

ST-9734-2007

ST-9731-2007

ST-9730-27

SOFT PACK

The filter openings must be free to


ensure unrestricted breathing.

Hold the red pull cords in one hand


and use your other hand to pull the
hood until both filter seals are
opened.

ST-9745-2007

The filter openings must be free to


ensure unrestricted breathing.

Robust plastic casing for rough


environments.

www.draeger.com

Remove the metal clamp to open the


box and remove the hood.

Hold the red pull cords in one hand


and use your other hand to pull the
hood until both filter seals are
opened.

The filter openings must be free to


ensure unrestricted breathing.

ST-9759-2007

ST-9755-2007

ST-9749-2007

ST-9747-2007

TRAVELLER PACK

90 46 332 | POe | 097 | UUU-PR-ED | Marketing Communications | Printed in Germany | chlorine free - ecological | subject to modification!

Open the box and pull out the inner


carton. Remove the hood from the
inner carton.

Environmentally-friendly cardboard
box.

ST-9743-2007

ST-9736-2007

ST-278-2002

CARTON

DOCUMENTATION
Schwenkwerk-Typ / Slewing Unit Type:

SW 100 DISK
Bestell-Nr. / Order-no.:

2308.0295
Version / Version:

11452
Ident-Nummer / Identification-no.:

691658114-009
gltig ab Seriennummer:
valid from serial number:

1110

Salzgitter Maschinenbau AG
Windmhlenbergstrae 20-22
38259 Salzgitter / Germany

Telefon:
+49 (0)53 41 / 3 024 36
Telefax:
+49 (0)53 41 / 3 024 24

(bis zur Festlegung des Gltigkeitsbereichs)


(until the application range is specified)

E-mail:
peiner@smag.de
Internet:
www.smag.de
www.peiner.de

Vorstand:
Sebastian H. Brandes (Vorsitzender),
Jrgen Bialek
Vorsitzender des Aufsichtsrates:
Ulrich Decker

Sitz der Gesellschaft: Salzgitter Bad


Registergericht:
Amtsgericht Braunschweig
Registernummer:
HRB 201 389

21.07.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.0136-1 E

1-1

C o n t e n t s
Page-no.

Class-no.

Data Sheet / Technical Data


1.0

Safety

1.1
1.2
1.3

About this Document


Audience
Intended Use

2-1
2-1
2-1

A 16.0200-1 E
A 16.0200-1 E
A 16.0200-1 E

1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.4.5

Fundamental Safety Notes


Warning Notes
Safety Symbols
Organizational Measures
Personnel Selection and Qualification
Measures to be Performed by the Operating
Company
Measures to be Performed by the Operator
Measures for the Maintenance, Servicing and Repair
Safety Notes for the Electrical System
Safety Notes for the Hydraulic System
Handling of Oil, Grease and Other Chemical
Substances

2-2
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-4

A 16.0200-2 E
A 16.0200-2 E
A 16.0200-2 E
A 16.0200-3 E
A 16.0200-4 E
A 16.0200-4 E

2-5
2/5-6
2/6-7
2-7
2-7

A 16.0200-5 E
A 16.0200/5-6 E
A 16.0200/6-7 E
A 16.0200-7 E
A 16.0200-7 E

3-1
4-1
4/2-3

A 16.0322 E
A 16.0424/1-2 E
A 16.0403/1-2 E

5-1

A 16.0832 E

7-1

A 16.1036 E

8/1-2

A 16.0619/1-2 E

8/3-4
8-5

A 16.0619/3-4E
A 16.0619-5 E

9-1

A 16.1218 E

1.4.6
1.4.7
1.4.8
1.4.9
1.4.10

2.0

Description and Survey of Features

2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2

Base unit: Constructional and Functional Description


Constructional Description
Functional Description

2.2

Hydraulic diagram

2.4

Parts list

3.0

Operating instructions

3.1

Details for safe use

3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.3
3.3.1

Putting into operation


Initial start-up
Daily start-up
Operation
Information for operation

3.4

Shut-down

9-1

A 16.1218 E

3.5

Reoperation

9-1

A 16.1218 E

2308. 4631 ( 2308. 4718 )

Original operating instructions


Salzgitter Maschinenbau AG
Windmhlenbergstrae 20-22
38259 Salzgitter / Germany

Phone:
+49 53 41 / 302 647
Fax:
+49 53 41 / 302 424

E-mail:
peiner@smag.de
Internet:
www.smag.de
www.peiner.de

Board of management:
Sebastian H. Brandes (Chairman),
Jrgen Bialek
Chairman of the Supervisory Board:
Ulrich Decker

Domicile of company: Salzgitter Bad


Registration court:
Amtsgericht Braunschweig
Registration number:
HRB 201 389

21.07.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.0136-2 E

1-2

C o n t e n t s
Page-no.

Class-no.

3.6

Transportation

9-1

A 16.1218 E

4.0

Maintenance and repair

10-1

A 16.1220-1 E

4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3

10-2
10-2
10-2
10-2

A 16.1220-2 E
A 16.1220-3 E
A 16.1220-4 E
A 16.1220-4 E

4.1.4
4.1.5
4.1.6
4.1.7
4.1.8
4.1.9
4.1.10
4.1.11
4.1.12

Maintenance
Maintenance Overview
Maintenance interval after the first 50 operating hours
Maintenance interval after the first 500 operating
hours
Maintenance interval weekly
Maintenance interval every 1000 operating hours
Maintenance interval every 2000 operating hours
Oil change
Oil filter
Lubricating instructions
Lubrication points
Motor
Slip-ring transmitter

10-2
10-2
10-2
10-2
10-2
10-2
10-2
10-2
10-2

A 16.1220-5 E
A 16.1220-6 E
A 16.1220-7 E
A 16.1220/8-9 E
A 16.1220-9 E
A 16.1220-9 E
A 16.1220-10 E
A 16.1220-11 E
A 16.1220-12 E

4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4

Required checks
Check oil level
Check and adjust pressure
Wear
Miscellaneous checks

10-2
10-2
10-2
10-2

A 16.1220-13 E
A 16.1220/13-14 E
A 16.1220-15 E
A 16.1220/15-17 E

4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
4.3.5

Repair
General
Replacement of hydraulic motor
Replacement of hydraulic pump
Replacement of axle bearing
Replacement of pinion

10-3
10-3
10-3
10-3
10-3

A 16.0718/1-2 E
A 16.0718/3-4 E
A 16.0718-5 E
A 16.0718-6 E
A 16.0718/7-8 E

4.4

4.5

Table: Oil recommendation - Hydraulic fluids


Lubricant recommendation

11/1-3
11/3-5

A 16.0719/1-2 E
A 16.0719/3-5 E

5.0

Failure - Symptoms - Sources of failures

5.1

Slewing unit not functioning

12-1

A 16.0757 E

5.2

Slewing unit malfunctioning

12-1

A 16.0757 E

6.0

Spare parts list and electric equipment

Original operating instructions


Salzgitter Maschinenbau AG
Windmhlenbergstrae 20-22
38259 Salzgitter / Germany

Phone:
+49 53 41 / 302 647
Fax:
+49 53 41 / 302 424

E-mail:
peiner@smag.de
Internet:
www.smag.de
www.peiner.de

Board of management:
Sebastian H. Brandes (Chairman),
Jrgen Bialek
Chairman of the Supervisory Board:
Ulrich Decker

Domicile of company: Salzgitter Bad


Registration court:
Amtsgericht Braunschweig
Registration number:
HRB 201 389

Data Sheet / Technical Data

Product:

SW 100 DISK

Material-Nr.:

2308.0295

Serial no.:

from 1110 (until the application range is specified)

Deadweight:

Operating instructions: A 16.0136

3.840 kg

Lifting capacity SWL:

100.000 kg

Required crane lifting capacity:

103.840 kg

Mechanical Data
-1

Rotational speed / axle:


Torque / axle:

5 / 6 min adjusted
3400 Nm

Electric Data
Mode of operation:
Motor type:
Intermittent service:
Motor power:
2,2 / 2,6
Voltage:
400
Frequency:
50 / 60
Current:
Rated current (full load):
5,5
Current consumption:

S3
100L-4
40 % ED
kW
V
Hz
threephase
A 10 %

System of protection:
Insulation class:
max. duty classification:
Circuit diagram no.:
Plug-in connector:
Control voltage:
No. of slip rings:

1)

IP 56
F
120/h
2307.9288
ODU-UW
230 V AC
31pol.x36A+PE+2 CAN
BUS

Hydraulic Data
max. service pressure

Rotational sense right [ 10 bar]

Measuring point MA
Measuring point MB
Pump type / output:
Control block:
Hydromotor:
Filled oil quality:
Oil quantity:
Filter type:
Filter mesh:
Admissible service temperature:
used grease:
used grease for electric motor:
used grease for toothed wheel works:

2)

200
200
P3DB2004L10 / 6 litre/min
NG 8
MR 300
HLP 46
25 l
Argo
16(c) = 200 Exapor
- 15 C up to + 85 C
Renolit size 2 FUCHS EUROPE SCHMIERSTOFFE GMBH
PETAMO GY 193 KLBER LUBRICATION
Zhlit VZ Mllenberg & Sonntag OHG

Accessories
1)
2)

Crosspiece with double hook no. 25


System of protection ensured only with mounted and closed hood
top view onto hood / slip ring transmitter

Author :

28.07.2010 / GK - Skiba

Rotational sense left [ 10 bar]

2)

Data Sheet / Technical Data

Dimensions

Author :

28.07.2010 / GK - Skiba

27.05.2009

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

1.0

Safety

1.1

About this Document

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.0200-1 E

2-1

This operating manual is part of the machine and describes the safe and correct use in
all operational phases.
We reserve the right to make changes to our products in the interest of further
development.

1.2

Adhere to the operating instructions when using this machine.

Always keep the service manual close to the machine.

Retain this service manual for further use.

Hand over the service manual to any further proprietor or user of the machine.

Audience
The audience of this operating manual is the technical personnel.
The machine must only be used, maintained and/or repaired by technically skilled
personnel that is used to carry out such work.

1.3

Intended use
The slewing unit has been designed for industrial applications.
It must only be used to lift free-standing loads and to turn and handle freely suspended
charges.
Intended use includes adherence to the operating instructions of this slewing unit and to
the inspection and maintenance instructions.
The manufacturer does not accept any responsibility for any resulting damage caused
by improper use. The operating company alone carries the risk here.
An improper use is, for example:

- Breaking loose of non-freestanding loads


- Horizontal movement of non-freely hanging loads
- Adding to the load once it has already been raised
- Causing the load to oscillate
- Any loading that exceeds the permitted capacity (see SWL indicated on the slewing
unit)

- Lifting or dragging loads diagonally from the location


- Riding on the load or on the slewing unit
- Operation of the slewing unit at a higher working pressure than allowed..
- Use of the slewing unit in explosive atmosphere

27.05.2009

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

1.4

Fundamental Safety Notes

1.4.1

Warning Notes

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.0200-2 E

2-2

Warning notes in this operating manual indicate particular dangers and mention
measures for the avoidance of the danger.
There are four levels of warning notes:

Signal word

Meaning

DANGER

Immediate potential danger


Death or severe injury occurs
Possible potential danger

WARNING

Death or severe injury can occur


CAUTION
(personal injury)

Possible potential danger

CAUTION
(damage to property)

Possible potential danger

Minor injury can occur


Damage to property can occur

Warning notes have the following form:


Type and source of the danger
Possible consequences, explanation of the danger.
DANGER

1.4.2

 Do not do ...
 Perform these measures.

Safety Symbols
Warning of electrical dangers

27.05.2009

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

1.4.3

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.0200-3 E

2-3

Organizational Measures
Always keep the service manual at the place of operation of the slewing unit!
In addition to the operating manual, observe generally valid legal and other binding
regulations for accident prevention and for environmental protection! Such obligations
can also concern, for example, the handling of dangerous materials or the
provision/wearing of personal protective equipment or traffic safety regulations.
The slewing unit has been built in accordance with the state of the art and is reliable if
used as specified. However, dangers might emanate from this machine if it is operated
improperly by uninstructed or disregardful personal or used for any other purpose than it
is intended for. (see 1.3 Intended use, page no. 1-1). The manufacturer will not be liable
for any other use in excess of the intended use nor for any damages resulting
therefrom. The user alone will bear such risk.
The slewing unit must only be operated in perfect technical condition.
During operation of the slewing unit keep sufficient safe distance to the load and to the
slewing unit! Dont stay under the slewing unit!
The personnel who is assigned to work on the slewing unit must have read the operating
instructions, in particular the chapter Safety before starting to work. This applies
particularly to personnel who only works on the slewing unit occasionally, e. g. for setup
or maintenance.
Adhere to all warnings and safety instructions applied to the slewing unit and make sure
they are always completely legible!
For safety-relevant malfunctions or changes to the operational state, stop the slewing
unit immediately and report the fault to the responsible office/person!
Augment the operating manual with instructions, including supervisory and reporting
obligations, to cater for special operational situations, for example, with regard to the
work organization, work procedures and the delegated personnel.
Only sling any slinging gear (slinging ropes or chains) to the devices provided fort his
purpose (e. g. at the double hook).
Check that the carrying capacity of the lifting tackle is adequate for the task before
starting hoisting!
Do not make any changes, additions or modifications to the machine that could impair
the safety without approval of the vendor! This is also the case for the installation and
the calibration of safety equipment and valves. The machine must not be subjected to
welding work without prior consent and specifications of the manufacturer.
Spare parts must conform to the technical specifications stipulated by the manufacturer.
This always the case when genuine spare parts are used.
Genuine spare parts are specially designed for the particular machine. Parts and special
equipment not supplied by the manufacturer have not been approved. The installation
and/or the use of such products can impair the safety. The manufacturer does not
accept any liability for damage caused by the use of non-genuine parts or any special
equipment.

27.05.2009

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

1.4.4

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.0200-4 E

2-4

Personnel Selection and Qualification


Any person who is responsible for assembly/disassembly, putting into operation,
operation, maintenance and repair of the slewing unit must have read, understood and
adhere to the complete service manual, in particular the chapter Safety.
Only authorised, trained and instructed personnel is allowed to run, to maintain and to
repair the slewing unit. Such personnel must have been given special instruction in the
possible dangers. The personnel must be allowed to reject any safety-endangering
instructions from third-parties.
The responsibilities of the personnel for the installation/dismantling, commissioning,
operation, maintenance, servicing and repair must be clearly defined and observed!
Make sure that only personnel assigned to run the slewing unit will do so!
Only specialist electricians or instructed personnel under direction and supervision of a
specialist electrician are allowed to work on the electric systems of the slewing unit and
they must do this in compliance with the electrotechnical regulations.
Work on the hydraulic equipment may be performed only by personnel with special
hydraulics knowledge and experience!
The personnel being trained, instructed or participating in a general training may work
on the slewing unit only under the continuous supervision of an experienced person!

1.4.5

Measures to be Performed by the Operating Company


The owner must take appropriate maintenance and inspection measures to make sure
the slewing unit is always run in a perfect technical condition.
The owner must evidently manage and define the responsibilities for assembly /
installation, operation, maintenance and repair.
The owner shall be obliged to make sure that any work on the slewing unit is carried out
by well-trained and instructed personnel only who
- is aware of the basic instructions about working safety and prevention of accidents
and has been instructed to run the slewing unit;
- has read and understood the safety instructions and warnings in this service
manual.
The owner shall be obliged to verify regularly if the personnel works safety-consciously.
The owner shall be obliged to make sure that this service manual is always easily
accessible.

27.05.2009

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

1.4.6

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.0200-5 E

2-5

Measures to be Performed by the Operator


The regulations applicable to the place of operation must be adhered to. The operation
of the slewing unit is in any case subject to the local safety regulations and instructions
for the prevention of accidents.
Before putting the slewing unit into operation make sure that nobody might be
endangered by operation of the slewing unit! Slewing unit components might
automatically restart when the slewing unit is restarted!
The crane operator must at all times be able to see the working area and the load!
Ensure adequate lighting in conditions of poor sight and darkness.
Do nor stand or work under suspended loads!
Avoid any safety-compromising working!
Examine the slewing unit at least once per shift to make sure it is exempt from damages
or defects! Notify the responsible post/person of any occurred abnormality (including
abnormal operating behaviour)! Immediately shut down and secure the slewing unit if
necessary! Remedy any failure immediately!

1.4.7

Measures for the Maintenance, Servicing and Repair


Observe the adjustment, maintenance and inspection tasks and schedules, including
details concerning the replacement of parts and equipment prescribed in the operating
manual! These tasks may only be performed by specialized personnel.
Inform the operations personnel before commencing maintenance and servicing work!
Designate a supervisory person.
The shutdown instructions according to the operating instructions must be adhered to
during any work referring to assembly/disassembly, putting into operation, operation,
maintenance and repair.
Carry out repair work on the hydraulic and electric system in a clean and dust-free
environment.
If necessary, secure the work area!
Before carrying out any maintenance or repair work completely shut down the slewing
unit and protect it against any unauthorized restart:
- Unplug electric plug-in connector.
Remove protective equipment only after the machine has been shut down!
Carefully fasten and secure spare parts and modules being replaced to the lifting gear
so that they do not endanger anyone. Use only suitable and technically perfect lifting
gear and load carrying equipment with adequate carrying capacity!
Do not stand or work under suspended loads!
If necessary, use security-conform ladders and work platforms for installation and
servicing work! Do not use machine parts as steps! Wear fall-prevention gear for work
performed at height.

27.05.2009

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.0200-6 E

2-6

Because contact with hot parts and the discharge of oil during maintenance and
servicing work cannot be excluded, always wear protective glasses and protective
gloves.
Clean electric components in voltage-free state only. Unplug electric plug-in connector
for this purpose. This regulation also applies to non-touch cleaning (air-blasting).
Do not bypass pressure-operated switches, pressure-operated valves, safety valves and
other sensors.
The pressure-operated switches, pressure-operated valves, safety valves and other
sensors may only be adjusted with the written approval of the manufacturer.
Safety valves may only be replaced with the same valves.
Replace immediately any damaged hydraulic hoses, pipes, cables and valves.
Replace hydraulic hoses at indicated or reasonable intervals, even if no safety-relevant
defects can be detected (see check of hydraulic hose lines, page 10-2).
Observe the prescribed tightening torques and check regularly.
For maintenance and repair work, always tighten loosened screwed joints as specified in
the guidelines.
Before cleaning the slewing unit with water or by means of a vapour stream (highpressure cleaner) or with other detergents cover or obturate all openings in which no
water/vapour/detergent may penetrate for safety or functional reasons. Electromotors,
switch cabinets, stop switches, ball bearings, gears and chains are especially
vulnerable.
Regularly check all electrical cables and hydraulic oil lines for damage and abrasion.
Also inspect hydraulic oil lines for leaks.
Before resuming operation after completing maintenance or repair work, check whether
all safety equipment has been reattached to the machine and is operational! Check all
functions of the slewing unit and the working pressure!

1.4.8

Safety Notes for the Electrical System


In accordance with the electro-technical regulations, work on electrical systems may
only be performed by an electrician or by instructed persons under the guidance and
supervision of an electrician.
Only use original fuses with specified amperage (see spare parts list)! Shutdown the
slewing unit immediately should any malfunctions occur in the electrical power supply!
When prescribed, machine and system components for which inspection, maintenance
or repair work is to be performed, must be disconnected from the power supply. First
check that the disconnected parts are in fact free of power, then ground and shortcircuit, and insulate any neighboring parts still under power!
Check the electric equipment of the slewing unit regularly. Any defect, such as loose
connections or damaged cables, must be eliminated immediately.
If work needs to be performed on live parts, a second person must be present who must
always has visual or wireless contact and, in the case of an emergency, can active the
emergency-off switch or disconnect the master switch from the power supply. Secure

27.05.2009

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.0200-7 E

2-7

the work area with a red-white safety chain and a warning notice. Use only insulated
tools!
After the associated electrical installation or repair, test the installed protective measures
(e.g., earthing resistance).

1.4.9

Safety Notes for the Hydraulic System


Work on the hydraulic system may be performed only by persons with special
knowledge and experience in hydraulics. The personnel must be able to read and
completely understand the hydraulic diagram, in particular the correlations of the
integrated safety systems.
Wear your personal protective equipment, e. g. gloves, protective clothes, protective
goggles or helmet with visor when working on the hydraulic system.
Avoid any oil leakages when working on the hydraulic units. Leaking oil must be
collected in appropriate receptacles and disposed of in compliance with the
corresponding regulations.
The hydraulic system is under high pressure! Do not detach or tighten any screw fittings
of the hydraulic lines (hydraulic couplings) as long as the system is under pressure!
Immediately eliminate any leakages.
Prevent the components (such as the double hook) from moving accidentally!
Utmost cleanliness must be observed for all work performed on the hydraulics! The
external vicinity must be cleaned before removing the connections. Close all openings
with protective caps so that no dirt can enter.
Regularly inspect all lines, hoses and connections for leaks and externally visible
damage! Repair any damage without delay! Tighten untight screw fittings in pressurefree state only. Escaping oil can cause injuries, fire and environmental contamination.
Before starting the repair work on system sections and pressure lines of the hydraulics
system to be opened, remove pressure in accordance with the construction and function
description! When present: remove pressure from system sections using the manometer
connections (MA1, etc., in the hydraulics diagram).
Route and install the hydraulic lines correctly! Do not interchange the connections! The
fittings, length and quality of the hose lines must be appropriate for the requirements.
Unapproved modifications and changes to the hydraulic system are prohibited.

1.4.10 Handling of Oil, Grease and Other Chemical Substances


Observe the appropriate product safety and environmental regulations for the handling
of oil, grease and other chemical substances!
Take care with the handling of hot fuels and agents (such as hydraulic oil), there is
danger of burning and scalding!

15.10.2008

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.0322 E

3-1

2.0

Description and Survey of Features

2.1

Base unit: Constructional and Functional Description

2.1.1

Constructional Description (see parts list, page no. 7-1)


The PEINER Motor Slewing Unit is designed as follows:
The slewing unit consists of a traverse (1), which incorporates the hydraulic unit (22), the
hydraulic motor (3) and the hub (4). The hub holds the axle (5). Via a nut (6) that is
mounted on the axle, the loads are absorbed by an axial deep groove thrust ball bearing
(7) that is screwed into the hub. Depending on the requirement, a multi-pole slipring body
(8) may be fixed on the hollow axle. Through this axle, a cable (9) with a corresponding
number of leads, is led from the slipring body to the suspended load-lifting member.
The hydraulic unit (22) has been mounted vertically into the traverse, as a complete unit.
It consists of motor (2) and pump (20).
By loosening the fastening screws, the complete hydraulic unit can be taken out of the
slewing unit. The hydraulic control block (17) is mounted on the side wall of the traverse.
The solenoid valve (18) sits on a block and is connected directly to the hydraulic motor
(3).
By means of the assembly opening in the hood, all important maintenance jobs can be
carried out on the hydraulic unit (e. g. re-fill the hydraulic oil).
The components hydraulic unit, hydraulic motor and slipring body are protected against
mechanical damages by means of a hood.
The cross piece with the double hook that is fixed to the hollow axle guarantees that most
of the forces are led centrically into the hollow axle and thus protects it against excessive
bending stress. A cable tension relief prevents mechanical stressing of the electric plugin connector.

14.04.2009

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

2.1.2

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.0424-1 E

4-1

Functional description
(see hydraulic diagram, page no. 5-1)
The hydraulic pump is driven by an electric motor. The motor may drive the pump in an
either clockwise or anti-clockwise sense of rotation.
Upon starting the electric motor (M), the solenoid valve (Y1) must be switched on
simultaneously.

To turn slewing unit to the right:


As soon as the drive motor (M) is turned on and the solenoid valve (Y1) is activated, the
hydraulic pump (P) sucks hydraulic oil from the tank via the nonreturn valve (RV2) and
pumps it into pressure line (P1). The oil flows via the nonreturn valve (RV3) and through
line (A) into the hydraulic motor (H). The oil flows from the motor through line (B) via the
stop valve (SP1) that has been opened by the control pressure, through return line (T)
and the filter (F) back into the tank.
The maximum pressure in line (P1) is determined by the pressure relief valve (DV1).
The pressure setting can be checked at manometer connection (MA) with the ball valve
(KH2) being closed; for pressure setting refer to page-no. 10-2.

To turn slewing unit to the left:


As soon as the drive motor (M) is turned on and the solenoid valve (Y1) is activated, the
hydraulic pump (P) sucks hydraulic oil from the tank via the nonreturn valve (RV1) and
pumps it into pressure line (P2). The oil flows via the nonreturn valve (RV4) and line (B)
into the hydraulic motor (H). The oil flows from the motor through line (A) via the stop
valve (SP2) that has been opened by the control pressure, through return line (T) and
the filter (F) back into the tank.
The maximum pressure in line (P2) is determined by the pressure relief valve (DV2).
The pressure setting can be checked at manometer connection (MB) with the ball valve
(KH3) being closed; for pressure setting refer to page-no. 10-2.
Note:

When the axle turns without load, vibrations might cause a chattering noise.
This problem can be remedied by adjusting the stop valves (SP1) and (SP2).
(Please refer to paragraph 4.2.2 Pressure adjustment, page no. 10-2).

Free rotation of the load hook:


In case the solenoid valve (Y1) is not switched on, the axle (load hook) may rotate
freely.

14.04.2009

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.0424-2 E

4-1

Design version:
Continuous speed control:
With slewing unit that are equipped with a flow regulator (24) (see page no. 7-1
Legend), the rotational speed of the axle can be continuously regulated within the range
-1
from 0 to 5 min by means of this valve. Part of the oil stream is in this case deviated
via the filter to the tank directly.

30.05.2008

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.0403-1 E

4-2

Slewing load
Danger of life, due to moving loads
f Ensure that no person is within the slewing range of the load or
underneath the load.
DANGER

ATTENTION!

f Ensure that no hazard arises through the movement of the load or the
slewing gear.
If rotation of the slewing gear axle is engaged in the opposite direction of
rotation of the load, it can lead to damage to the slewing gear.

Prerequisite: The load must hang freely, so that it can be slewed without bumping against
anything.
1. Switch on the slewing gear in the direction Slew load.
When switching on the slewing gear, for instance with the direction of rotation to the right,
the cable plane is tensioned in the opposite direction (see Figure 4-1) (The cable plane is
formed by the cables on which the slewing gear hangs.)
Required direction of rotation

Load

Figure 4-1 Slewing gear with twisted cable plane


ATTENTION!

The cable plane may not be twisted by more than 45 (see Figure 4-1).
Otherwise the risk arises of the electrical connection cable to the slewing
gear being damaged by the cables, and the slewing gear could move in an
uncontrolled fashion.
f Switch off the rotational movement of the slewing before this happens!

The cable plane is twisted (see Figure 4-1) and the slewing gear has rotated by
approximately 45 or the load starts to rotate.
2. Switch off rotation of the slewing gear axle now.
Switching off the slewing gear results in the twisted cable plane rotating the slewing gear
together with the load in the required direction.

30.05.2008

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.0403-2 E

4-3

Figure 4-2 Load in the required position, slanting cables


The load has reached the required position (see Figure 4-2) or the load does not rotate in the
required direction any more.
3. Now switch on the freewheel mode of the slewing gear.
Freewheel mode allows the slewing gear to be rotated back into its starting position by the
twisted cables, without the load being rotated.
If the load has not yet reached the required position and the slewing gear does not turn any
further:
fRepeat the entire procedure.

Slowing down the slewing motion of the load


f Switch off the freewheel mode of the slewing gear.
The load and the slewing gear are slowed down by the twisting of the cable plane.
When the cable plane has been twisted by 45 (see Figure 4-1), or when the motion has
stopped:
f Switch on the freewheel mode of the slewing gear.
ATTENTION! Only engage the rotation of the slewing gear in the opposite direction of
rotation of the load in case of an emergency, because this can lead to damage
to the slewing gear.

14.04.2009

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

2.2

Hydraulic diagram

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.0832 E

5-1

2308.4631 ( 2308. 4718 )

max. working pressure: 200 bar


Legend:
A

= pipe (turn right)

= pipe (turn left)

DV1, DV2

= pressure relief valve

DV3

= pressure relief valve


(safety valve)

= filter

= hydraulic motor

KH2, KH3

= ball cock

= pipe for leakage oi

= motor

MB, MA

= pressure gauge
connection

= pump

P1, P2

= pump connection

RV1, RV2

= nonreturn valve

SB

= control block

SP1, SP2

= stop valve

TA

= tank

Y1

= solenoid valve

Design version:
Speed control
S

= flow regulator

WE

= shuttle valve

19.07.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

2.4

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.1036 E

7-1

Parts list

Legend:
1 traverse
2 motor
3 hydraulic motor
5 axle
7 ball bearing slewing gear
8 slipring transmitter
9 cable
12 gimbal suspension
17 control block

18
20
21
22
23
27
29
32
33

solenoid valve
pump
pinion
hydraulic unit
oil filter
double hook
screw plug (ventilation screw)
plug-in connector
power supply cable

27.01.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

3.0

Operating instructions

3.1

Details for safe use

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.0619-1 E

8-1

 Follow the regulations in the relevant accident prevention specifications for "Load

suspension devices".
 Always adhere to the service manual.
 Only instructed personnel is authorized to operate the slewing unit.
 It is not permitted to move the load over people.

When necessary, the crane operator must give warning signs. If the crane operator
becomes aware of the presence of people who could be endangered by the crane, the
operator must immediately shut down the crane and not start moving the crane again
until the people are no longer found in the area of danger.
 It is forbidden to transport people on the load or the slewing unit!
 Only operate the slewing unit in its original condition or in a condition released by the

manufacturer.
 Make sure that during operation of the grab all hoses, lines, pipes and fittings are in

good order and tight.


 Dont exceed the lifting capacity of the crane!
 It is forbidden to tear off stuck loads.
 It is not permitted to ever load the slewing unit, the double hook, and the sling gear

more than their load-bearing capacity!


 It is not permitted to load the tip of the double hook.
 Grommets, becket, gimbals, and other suspended elements must be positioned in the

base of the hook and be able to move freely on the double hook.
 The double hooks safety hood must be fully functioning to prevent accidental

unhinging.
 Avoid hitting the slewing unit against objects to prevent damage.
 It is not permitted to hang the double hook directly in the load. The exception here is

hanging the double hook in suspension equipment especially designed for this
purpose.
 The double hook is to be used so that accidental unhinging of the load-carrying

equipment, the sling gear, or the load is prevented.


 Never use a damaged sling gear or a sling gear where the identification mark is no

longer present!

27.01.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.0619-2 E

8-2

 Chains are not allowed to be twisted or knotted.


 The crane operator must particularly observe the load or the empty run of the load-

carrying equipment during all crane movements. If this is not possible, the crane
operator is only allowed to operate the crane when following a signalpersons signals.
 Avoid any jerky starting, lifting, stopping or lowering of the slewing unit.
 Immediately inform the responsible supervising person of any slewing unit failure or

any lifting accessory failure as well as of any watched circumstance that might give rise
to expectations of a failure (e. g. noises, elevated temperatures, unusual behaviour of
the slewing unit, etc.).
 Only operate the slewing unit, the hydraulic fluid and the lubricants within the

admissible temperature range (see Technical Data or Recommended Oil).


 In case of any failures stop the slewing unit operation immediately and prevent it from

being restarted. Failures must immediately be remedied!


 Dismantle protective equipment when and only when the slewing unit is at standstill.

27.01.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

3.2

Putting into operation

3.2.1

Assembly instructions - Initial start-up

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.0619-3 E

8-3

The assembly and initial start-up may only be carried out by qualified personnel.
Personal protective equipment must be worn during all work. It includes:
Protective clothes
Protective helmet
Safety shoes with toe caps and puncture-resistant base
Protective goggles
Protective gloves

Risk of injury due to improper work and improper start-up!


 Work at the slewing unit may be carried out only in accordance with all safety
instructions, safety regulations and accident prevention regulations.
WARNUNG

 Tools and other parts must be stored in such a way as to prevent them from
falling down.
 The movable parts of the slewing unit, such as the double hook, must be
secured against unintentional displacement.

Danger of life due to electric shock!


 Make sure that the power is switched off and secured against switching on
again.
DANGER

 Make sure that voltage and frequency correspond to the data indicated on the
nameplate.
 Make sure that the power supply cable is not damaged.

27.01.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.0619-4 E

8-4

Requirements for the assembly:


Voltage and frequency of the power supply must correspond to the data indicated
on the nameplate.
The power supply cable must be equipped with a tension relief.
The parts with which the slewing unit is fastened to the carrying device, such as the
crane rope, must fit in size and lifting capacity to the slewing unit and the crane.
Smooth communication with the crane operator must be ensured.

Assembly:
1. Check hosepipes, connecting elements and gaskets of the hydraulic system for
leaks.
2. Connect the suspension of the slewing unit with the carrying device and observe the
SWL of the lifting appliance.
3. Connect the slewing unit with the plug-in connector of the power supply cable.
4. Fit the cable tension relief. Take care that the rubber-sheathed power supply cable
does not stress the plug-in connector (for fastening points, see Fig. 4.1.5
Schmierstellen). Attach the tension relief in such a way as to avoid any chafing of
the power supply cable.
5. Make sure that nobody remains in the danger area of the slewing unit. Lift the
slewing unit until the double hook hangs freely.
6. Check the oil level and refill as needed (see chapter 4.2.1)
For oil recommendations, see sheet no. 11-1
7. Check the sense of rotation of the slewing unit. If the sense of rotation is wrong,
swap the two external cables. If the plug-in connector is not assembled, connect
them according to the wiring diagram.
8. Check that the locking devices on all pins and shackles are present and secured.
9. Before the initial commissioning, the proper assembly and the correct working of the
slewing unit must be inspected by a person qualified to do so.
 If the temperature of the hydraulic fluid is below the start-up temperature (see page
no. 8-5 Table: 3.2.1 Oil temperature), then the hydraulic fluid must be preheated by
means of a heating up to the temperature that is necessary to put the system into
operation (Please refer to chapter 2.4 Nomenclature and Hydraulic Diagram in the
Spare parts list to see if the slewing unit is equipped with a heating). If no heating is
available, change hydraulic fluid and use preheated hydraulic fluid if necessary.
If the temperature is between the start up temperature and the temperature that is
necessary to put the system into operation, (see page no. 8-5 Table: 3.2.1 Oil
temperature), use a heating to preheat the hydraulic fluid up to the temperature that
is necessary to put the system into operation or
Close the ball cocks KH2 and KH3 (see page no. 10-1), if any,
or move the slewing unit until the stop, if any, is reached (see number 36 chapter
2.4 Legend)
Turn on the slewing unit and keep it turned on for one minute to ensure the pump
pumps oil via the pressure relief valve into the tank.
Then pause for two minutes.
Repeat this procedure until the oil is warmed-up to the temperature that is
necessary to put the system into operation.
Open ball cocks KH2 and KH3, if any (see page no. 10-1).

27.01.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.0619-5 E

8-5

Table: 3.2.1 Oil temperature


Max. upper
working
temperature

Hydraulic fluid

Start up
temperature

Temperature that is
necessary to put the
system into operation

Shell Tellus Arctic 32


NATO-code: H 540

-30 C

-20 C

+70 C

-25 C

-15 C

+85 C

HVLP 32
acc. to DIN 51524/3 HV

-15 C

-5 C

+70 C

HLP 46
acc. to DIN51524/2

-5 C

+5 C

+80 C

HLP 68
acc. to DIN51524/2

+5 C

+12 C

+85 C

 After about 50 operating hours, change the oil filter set (see sheet no. 10-1) and
check that screws and nuts are tightly secured; for tightening torques, see the spare
parts list..

3.2.2

Daily start-up
 Check the oil level (see point 4.2.1)
 If the temperature of the hydraulic fluid is below the start-up temperature (see page
no. 8-5 Table: 3.2.1 Oil temperature), then the hydraulic fluid must be preheated by
means of a heating up to the temperature that is necessary to put the system into
operation (Please refer to chapter 2.4 Nomenclature and Hydraulic Diagram in the
Spare parts list to see if the slewing unit is equipped with a heating). If no heating is
available, change hydraulic fluid and use preheated hydraulic fluid if necessary.
If the temperature is between the start up temperature and the temperature that is
necessary to put the system into operation, (see page no. 8-5 Table: 3.2.1 Oil
temperature), use a heating to preheat the hydraulic fluid up to the temperature that
is necessary to put the system into operation or
Close the ball cocks KH2 and KH3 (see page no. 10-1), if any,
or move the slewing unit until the stop, if any, is reached (see number 36 chapter
2.4 Legend)
Turn on the rotator and keep it turned on for one minute to ensure the pump
pumps oil via the pressure relief valve into the tank.
Then pause for two minutes.
Repeat this procedure until the oil is warmed-up to the temperature that is
necessary to put the system into operation.
Open ball cocks KH2 and KH3, if any (see page no. 10-1).
 Check hosepipes, connecting elements and gaskets of the hydraulic system for leaks
 Check the coupler for firmness. The strain relief must be located in such a manner
that the power supply cable does not exert any kind of traction on the coupler.
 Supply the lubricating points with grease in accordance with 4.1.9 Lubricating
instructions (for lubricating points, see 4.1.10, For greases used by the manufacturer
please refer to data sheet).

21.07.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

3.3

Operation

3.3.1

Information for operation


ATTENTION!

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.1218 E

9-1

Collisions of the slewing unit with other objects are to be avoided in


order to prevent damages.

Instructions for safe operation, see 3.1 page no.. 8-1


Function description, see page no. 4-1 to 4-3
 Please note that the possible load weight of the crane is reduced by the weight of the
slewing unit.
 The double hook must always be positioned above the centre of gravity.
 The specific operating instructions for each sling gear must be followed.
 The suspension links of the sling gear must be of such size that they can move freely
in the double hook.
 Lifting straps or round slings must never be allowed to run loosely over the double
hook. The load could topple!
 Lopsided loads must be lowered and fastened again.
 The function of the hook safety catch of the double hook must be checked regularly.

3.4

Shut-down
 The slewing unit must be put down on a suitable support (wooden beam) since
otherwise the turner can be damaged.
 During putting down it is to be seen to it that the hanging cable is neither broken nor
pinched.
 The plug-in connector is to be provided with protective caps.
 In addition, for longer periods out of service, the slewing unit should be exercised
every 3 month to prevent corrosion and gumming of the hydraulic oil in the control
elements.
 In case the slewing unit is intended to be put out of operation for a longer period of
time, grease must be applied to all lubricating points.

3.5

Reoperation
 Observe all the specifications of point 3.2 and 3.3
 Check the device for possible damages
 Supply the lubricating points with grease in accordance with 4.4 Oil
Recommendation (for lubricating instructions, see 4.1.4, for lubricating points, see
4.1.5; for the greases used by the manufacturer please refer to data sheet).

3.6

Transportation
 The slewing unit must be transported on a suitable support since otherwise
damages can occur.
 The slewing unit is to be secured against overturning.

19.07.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

4.0

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.1220-1 E

10-1

Maintenance and repair

Figure 4.0
Legend:
1 ball cock (KH1)
2 measuring point (MT)
3 pressure relief valve (DV3)
4 measuring point (MB)
5 measuring point (MA)
6 ball cock (KH2)
7 ball cock (KH3)
8 ventilation screw

9
10
11
15
17
18

oil level glass


hosepipes
oil filter
tank cap mounting
control block (SB)
solenoid valve

Design version:
24 flow regulator (flow control valve)
(speed control)

19.07.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

4.1

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.1220-2 E

10-2

Maintenance
Insufficient and improper maintenance might result in operating troubles and thus high
repair costs and downtimes. This is why regular maintenance is imperative.
Risk of injury due to maintenance work that has been carried out
improperly!
Improper working might cause considerable personal and material damages.

WARNING

 Maintenance and repair of the slewing unit must only be carried out by
authorized, well-trained and instructed specialized personnel. This personnel
must be specifically instructed in the imminent dangers. the personnel must be
allowed to reject any instructions of third parties that might breach the safety
instructions.
 The operating staff must be informed about any maintenance work carried out
before starting the maintenance work.
 Responsibilities of the staff for assembly/disassembly, putting into operation,
operation, maintenance and repair must be clearly defined and adhered to!
 Make sure that only such personnel works on the slewing unit who is assigned
to do so!
 Before starting the maintenance work disconnect the power supply of the
slewing unit and protect it against accidental restart. To do this, it is also
possible to unplug the electric plug-in connector.
 The product-specific safety instructions must be complied with when handling
oils and greases.

Only qualified technical personnel may carry out any work on the hydraulic system
and the electrical system in accordance with the valid circuit diagrams.
Personnel must be instructed regarding the possible hazards and the protective
measures that need to be taken.
DANGER

DANGER

Danger to life from hydraulic oil discharge at high pressure


 Ensure that parts of the hydraulic system on which you are working have been
relieved of pressure. Tighten untight hydraulic couplings in unpressurized
condition only.
 Rectify any leakage immediately.

19.07.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

Maintenance Overview

Page-no.

A 16.1220-3 E

10-2

Table: 4.1.1 Maintenance Overview

Item. Maintenance work

Maintenance interval

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

Change the filter element of the return filter


Check the hydraulic hoses for proper assembly and
operational safety
Check all screw connections for firm seating
Check the double hook for wear and cracks
Check the slewing unit for cracks and signs of
breakage in the material and at welding joints
Check the parts and fittings for damage, wear or
other changes
Check the integrity and function of safety devices
(e.g. pin locking devices)
Maintenance work on the slip-ring transmitter

12
13
14
15
16
17
a)

b)
c)
d)

weekly b)

after 500 h

every 2000 h

Grease lubricating points G (pin) (and M)


Grease lubricating points H (toothing)
Grease lubricating points K (axle)
Grease lubricating points L (bearing) and S
(shackles and chains)
Check hoses, connecting elements and gaskets of
the hydraulics for tightness
Check the plug-in connector and the tension relief
for firm seating (see chapter 3.2.2)
Check the hydraulic oil level
Change the hydraulic oil
Check the filter element for clogging

after 50 h

a)

daily

c)

*)

every 1000 h

4.1.1

Class-no.

X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X

X
X

X
Xd)

Xd)
X

X
X

X
X

Xc)

for container handling: grease weekly, after 100 operating hours at the latest; for
other loads: grease monthly, after 300 operating hours at the latest
after every 100 operating hours at the latest
after one year at the latest; see maintenance instructions in the spare parts list
An extension of the useful life of the hydraulic oil is possible if a laboratory testing of
the hydraulic oil will allow it.

*) The values in the column correspond to the items in the sections with the individual
maintenance intervals.

19.07.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

4.1.2

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.1220-4 E

10-2

Maintenance interval after the first 50 operating hours


 Carry out the following maintenance work after the first 50 operating hours:
Table: 4.1.2
Item
*)

Maintenance work after the first 50 operating hours

Maintenance work

Maintenance work
performed
Date

Grease lubricating points G (and M)

Check hoses, connecting elements and gaskets


of the hydraulics for tightness

Check the plug-in connector and the tension


relief for firm seating (see chapter 3.2.2)

Check the hydraulic oil level

11

Change the filter element of the return filter

13

Check all screw connections for firm seating

Signature

*) The values in the column correspond to the items in the maintenance overview (see
4.1.1 Maintenance Overview).

4.1.3

Maintenance interval after the first 500 operating hours


 Carry out the following maintenance work after the first 500 operating hours:
Table: 4.1.3
Item
*)

Maintenance work after the first 500 operating hours

Maintenance work

Maintenance work
performed
Date

Grease lubricating points G (and M)

Check hoses, connecting elements and gaskets


of the hydraulics for tightness

Check the plug-in connector and the tension


relief for firm seating (see chapter 3.2.2)

Change the hydraulic oil

Check the hydraulic oil level

Signature

*) The values in the column correspond to the items in the maintenance overview (see
4.1.1 Maintenance Overview).

19.07.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

4.1.4

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.1220-5 E

10-2

Maintenance interval weekly


 Maintenance interval weekly; after each 100 operating hours at the latest:
Table: 4.1.4
Item
*)

Maintenance work weekly

Maintenance work

Maintenance work
performed
Date
a)

Grease lubricating points G (pin)

Grease lubricating points K (axle) and S (rope


pulley)

Check the hydraulic oil level

Signature

(and M)

*) The values in the column correspond to the items in the maintenance overview (see
4.1.1 Maintenance Overview).
a)

for container handling: grease weekly, after 100 operating hours at the latest; for
other loads: grease monthly, after 300 operating hours at the latest

19.07.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

4.1.5

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.1220-6 E

10-2

Maintenance interval every 1000 operating hours


 Maintenance interval every 1000 operating hours; after one year at the latest:
Table: 4.1.5
Item
*)

Maintenance work every 1000 operating hours

Maintenance work

Maintenance work
performed
Date
a)

Grease lubricating points G (pin)

Grease lubricating points H (toothing)

Grease lubricating points K (axle)

Grease lubricating points L (bearing) and S


(shackles and chains)

Check hoses, connecting elements and gaskets


of the hydraulics for tightness

Check the plug-in connector and the tension


relief for firm seating (see chapter 3.2.2)

Check the hydraulic oil level

Check the filter element for clogging

Signature

(and M)

10

Check the hydraulic hoses for proper assembly


and operational safety

12

Check all screw connections for firm seating

13

Check the double hook for wear and cracks

14

Check the slewing unit for cracks and signs of


breakage in the material and at welding joints

15

Check the parts and fittings for damage, wear or


other changes

16

Check the integrity and function of safety


devices (e.g. pin locking devices)

*) The values in the column correspond to the items in the maintenance overview (see
4.1.1 Maintenance Overview).
a)

for container handling: grease weekly, after 100 operating hours at the latest; for
other loads: grease monthly, after 300 operating hours at the latest

19.07.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

4.1.6

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.1220-7 E

10-2

Maintenance interval every 2000 operating hours


 Maintenance interval every 2000 operating hours:
Table: 4.1.6
Item
*)

Maintenance work every 2000 operating hours

Maintenance work

Maintenance work
performed
Date
a)

Grease lubricating points G (pin)

Grease lubricating points H (toothing)

Grease lubricating points K (axle)

Grease lubricating points L (drive end bearing) and S


(shackles and chains)

Check hoses, connecting elements and gaskets of the


hydraulics for tightness

Check the plug-in connector and the tension relief for


firm seating (see chapter 3.2.2)

Check the hydraulic oil level

Change the hydraulic oil

Check the filter element for clogging

Signature

(and M)

d)

d)

10

Change the filter element of the return filter

11
12

Check the hydraulic hoses for proper assembly and


operational safety
Check all screw connections for firm seating

13

Check the double hook for wear and cracks

14

Check the slewing unit for cracks and signs of


breakage in the material and at welding joints

15

Check the parts and fittings for damage, wear or other


changes

16

Check the integrity and function of safety devices (e.g.


pin locking devices)

17

Maintenance work on the slip-ring transmitter

c)

*) The values in the column correspond to the items in the maintenance overview (see
4.1.1 Maintenance Overview).
a)

for container handling: grease weekly, after 100 operating hours at the latest; for
other loads: grease monthly, after 300 operating hours at the latest
d)
An extension of the useful life of the hydraulic oil is possible if a laboratory testing of
the hydraulic oil will allow it.
c)

after one year at the latest; see maintenance instructions in the spare parts list

Clean and grease the bearings of the electric motor every 15000 operating hours (see
4.1.11 )

19.07.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

4.1.7

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.1220-8 E

10-2

Oil change
The first oil change is to be carried out after about 500 service hours. Further oil
changes every 2000 service hours - after one year at the latest. An extension of the
useful life of the hydraulic oil is possible if a laboratory testing of the hydraulic oil will
allow it.
Extraordinary service conditions may cause excessive pollution or an ageing of the oil.
In such cases, we recommend to have an oil analysis carried out in the laboratories of
the oil supplier.
Oil brands, see table oil recommendation, page no. 11-1 Filled oil grade see data
sheet.
In order to protect the hydraulic components, the oil must be in accordance with purity
level 20/18/15 according to ISO 4406 at least (approximately corresponding to class 9
according to NAS 1638).
Since the purity level of new oil is generally lower, the new oil must be filtered. To do this
either refill oil via the filter or use special filling devices that filter the oil to reach the
required purity class.
N O T I C E ! Pay attention to utmost cleanliness during the oil change. Any pollution
might cause malfunctions and damages of the hydraulic system. Make
sure that parts of the hydraulic system such as tank, pump, hoses, etc.
never are open longer than necessary.
Proceeding: (Components see figure 4.0 and figure 4.1.10)
1. Set down the slewing unit
2. Put a suitable collection basin under the oil drain plug (5)
3. Unscrew and clean drain plug (5) (figure 4.1.10)
4. Unscrew ventilation screw (8) (figure 4.0) to ventilate the tank
5. Drain oil out of tank (the unit should have its operational temperature)
6. Clean tank:
Clean the area around the tank cap.
Depressurize the hoses (10) (see figure 4.0). For this purpose connect a
MINIMESS hose to the test point (MA) in such a way to ensure the oil flows
into a basin at the other end of the MINIMESS hose. Repeat this procedure at
test point (MB) and (MT).
Unscrew hoses (10) (see figure 4.0) from the tank cap.
Unscrew the tank cap from the traverse (15) and take the hydraulic unit
including tank cap out of the traverse.
Clean the tank by means of a plain plastic scraper. Dont use cleaning wool,
cloths or cleaning paper since they might leave fibers. Clean the tank by
rinsing it by means of a suitable detergent, e. g. benzene.
If metal particles are found in the tank, this might be a sign of pump
wear.
Check the threaded holes of the tank cap mounting (15). Clean and/or recut
thread if necessary.
Pay attention to utmost cleanliness during assembly of the hydraulic unit and
hoses.
Note:

19.07.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

4.1.8

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.1220-9 E

10-2

Replace oil filter insert (11)


Rescrew oil drain plug
Fill tank (via filter (11))
Check oil level (see chapter 4.2.1)
Make a test run of the slewing unit.
Check tightness of hydraulic system.
Dispose of the waste oil in accordance with local regulations.

Oil filter
In case of new units, the filter insert is to be replaced after about 50 service hours, in
any other case after every oil change. Furthermore, the oil filter must be checked after
repairs of the hydraulic system and, if necessary, the filter insert must be replaced.

4.1.9

Lubricating instructions
Regular lubrication is required in order to ensure trouble free operation of the slewing
unit (see lubrication points figure 4.1.10).
 Grease lubricating points G weekly, after 100 service hours at the latest, if
containers are handled.
 Grease lubricating points G monthly, after 300 service hours at the latest, if other
loads are handled.
 Grease lubricating point H, K and S every three months, after 1000 service hours at
the latest.
 Grease lubricating point M weekly, after 100 service hours at the latest.

For greases used by the manufacturer please refer to data sheet!


(Grease recommendation see chapter 4.4)
If you mix different greases, please ensure compatibility of grease grades. If you have
any questions regarding grease compatibility, please ask the corresponding grease
manufacturer.
In general, we recommend the following:
At temperatures up to -20C:
Recommended grease for lubrication of lubrication point G and K:
lithium-saponified grease, DIN 51825- KP 2 K
Recommended grease for lubrication of lubrication point H:
M2E-20; DIN 51502, e. g. Zhlit VZ
(Zhlit VZ is a calcium-saponified grease on a mineral oil base from the MLLENBERG &
SONNTAG company, with a penetration of 265-295 mm/s )
At temperatures up to -50C:
Recommended grease for lubrication of lubrication point G and K:
KE1N-50; DIN 51502, z. B. URETHYN LT 60
Recommended grease for lubrication of lubrication point H:
KE1N-50; DIN 51502, z. B. URETHYN LT 60
(URETHYN LT 60 is a synthetic low-temperature grease from the company FUCHS
LUBRITECH GMBH)
Note: Do not mix synthetic lubricants with each other, neither with mineral lubricants!

19.07.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.1220-10 E

10-2

4.1.10 Lubrication points

Legend:
lubrication point H (toothing)
lubrication point K (axle)
lubrication point L (drive end
bearing)
lubrication point G (pin)
lubrication point S (shackles and
chains)
Design version:
suspension with pin
lubrication point M (pin)
1 fastening point for tension relief

Figure 4.1.10

Note:

Regular lubrication of the chain, suspension links and shackles can ensure a
significantly longer permissible service life compared to unlubricated parts. It
is recommended to lubricate all chain links and shackles before the initial
start-up. During lubrication, make sure that you lubricate the contact surfaces
to prevent premature wear. Suitable lubricants are those used for lubrication
of wire ropes or toothing (see Chapter 4.4)

19.07.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.1220-11 E

10-2

4.1.11 Electric motor


Beware! Danger of burning!
High temperatures of over 80C can occur on the surface of the electric motor.
 The motor must be allowed to cool before the start of the maintenance work.
WARNING
Maintenance intervals: every 15,000 operating hours, after 3 years at the latest
 Before the start of the maintenance work, the power supply of the slewing unit must
be disconnected and secured against restart.
 Clean the bearings and fill them to the half with grease, according to Chapter 4.5
Lubricant recommendation.

19.07.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.1220-12 E

10-2

4.1.12 Slip-ring transmitter


Installation, maintenance or repair may only be carried out by qualified and
authorized electrician!
DANGER

Maintenance rate: 1x yearly


 Before the start of the maintenance work, disconnect the power supply of the slewing
unit and secure it against restart.
C a u t i o n ! All work on the slip-ring transmitter may only be carried out after
disconnecting the power supply!
 Open and remove the hood of the slewing unit.
 Remove the accumulated dust by vacuum cleaning.
B e w a r e ! The bow contacts can be slightly bent during this process.
If vacuum cleaning is not possible: Remove the dust by dry, clean and oil-free
compressed air.
 Protect the carbon brush holder and its slip ring against moisture with contact oil.
 The contact points of the slip ring and wire bow contact must be sprayed very lightly
with the prescribed contact oil: CRAMOLIN Protection (ITW Chemische Produkte
GmbH)
B e w a r e ! Do n o t spray the carbon brush holder and its slip ring!
 Check the wear of the bow contacts.
 Check the wear of the carbon brushes. The parts of the carbon brush holder must not
touch any insulating rings or slip rings.
 Mount the hood again after the cleaning.
Do not damage or squeeze any cable insulations!

Legend:
1 carbon-brush
2 carbon-brush holder
3 slip-ring way
4 insulating ring

Figure 4.1.12

19.07.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

4.2

Required checks

4.2.1

Check oil level

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.1220-13 E

10-2

The slewing unit must be levelled horizontally.


The maximum or minimum oil level can be read on the oil dipstick or on the oil level
glass.
Too much oil causes inadmissible overpessure in the tank.
Too little oil causes an overheating of the hydraulic system and might lead to pump
damages.
To replenish oil, please see table of recommended fluids, page no. 11-1.

4.2.2

Check and adjust pressure (see figure 4.0)


N O T I C E ! It is not allowed to change the settings of the pressure relief valves DV3,
without SMAGs prior explicit approval. The warranty will be void if the
settings of the valves are changed without prior approval.
N O T I C E ! Pressures to be set when the unit is at operating state temperature!
Safety valve DV3:
The entire hydraulic system ist protected by means of a safety valve (DV3). The
standard pressure has been set to about 200 bar in the factory and should never be
changed.
Check and adjustment of DV3:
N O T I C E ! Please adjust the pressure as quickly as possible in order to avoid any
excessive overlaod of the system.
 Connect the manometer to measuring points (MA) and (MB)
 Close ball cocks (KH2) and (KH3)
 Increase pressure of safety valve (DV3) by means of the setting screw (completely
screw in the setting screw)
 Set pressure relief valve (DV3) to 200 bar
 Open the ball cocks (KH2) and (KH3)

19.07.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

Note:

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.1220-14 E

10-2

When the axle turns without load, vibrations might cause a chattering noise.
This problem can be remedied by adjusting the stop valves (SP1) and (SP2).

To adjust the stop valves proceed as described below:


 The system must be at operating state temperature
 Completely unscrew the adjustment screws (SP1) and (SP2) (see figure 4.2.2.:
control block (SB) )
 To turn to the right, screw the adjustment screws (SP1) until the chattering noise
stops.
 To turn to the left, screw the adjustment screws (SP2) until the chattering noise
stops.
 Pressure check:
The banking pressure (right-hand rotation measured at (MB), left-hand rotation
measured at (MA)) should not exceed 35 bar, unless the hydraulic oil is unnecessarily
heated or troublefree operation of the slewing unit cannot be guaranteed.
Only adjust the adjustment screws (SP1) and (SP2) if the slewing unit chatters when
rotating.

adjusting screw for


stop valve (SP1)

adjusting screw for


stop valve (SP2)

Figure 4.2.2 control block (SB)

DV3

19.07.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

4.2.3

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.1220-15 E

10-2

Wear
Depending on the conditions of use and the circumstances of operation, the double
hook must be assessed by a competent person as required. This must occur at least
once a year. A competent person is someone who has sufficient knowledge of loadcarrying equipment due to their specialist training and experience. They must be familiar
with the corresponding state work safety rules, accident prevention rules, and general
recognised rules of engineering to an extent that they can evaluate the work safety
conditions for slewing units and crane hooks.
The permissible wearing is listed in Table 4-1. Calliper gauge (sliding calliper) precision
is sufficient when measuring.
Grooves of wear may be reground to remove grooves within the amount of wearing
permissible. Parts that are impermissibly worn or damaged must be replaced.
Welding on double hooks and bolts, e.g., to repair signs of wear, is not permitted.

4.2.4

Miscellaneous checks
Check of hydraulic hose lines
The hydraulic hose lines must be checked as required, but at least once a year, in case
of multishift operation every six months. After any maintenance and repair work the
hydraulic hose lines must be checked to make sure they are assembled properly and in
an operational safety state.
The hose lines must be replaced if one of the following criteria has been detected:
- Damages of the external layer event to the wire braid reenforcement (e. g. chafe
marks, cuts, cracks)
- Brittleness of the external layer (formation of cracks in the hose material)
- Deformations that do not correspond to the natural form of the hose or of the hose
line, in unpressurized as well as in pressurized condition or when bended, e. g.
separation of layers, bubbling
- Leakages
- Damage or deformation of the hose fitting (prejudiced sealing function)
- Detaching of the hose out of the fitting
- Corrosion of hose fitting impairing the function and rigidity
- Specified period of storage and/or use of the hose or of the hose line is exceeded.
 Hydraulic hoses must not be stored longer than 2 years.
 Hydraulic hoses must not be used longer than 6 years (including
maximum storage period of 2 years).
 Any defect must be eliminated immediately.
 Only use hose lines according to the spare parts list to replace defective hose lines.
 Make sure that the replacement lines are clean; close them with dust covers until
they are fitted.
 Make sure thate the hydraulic hoses are admitted for the required pressures.

19.07.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.1220-16 E

10-2

A marking on the hydraulic hoses indicates the date of their manufacture (quarter
and year). For example, the mark 2 Q 09 means that the hose was manufactured in
the second quarter of 2009.
Inspection of chains and individual chain links
The chains and individual chain links or suspension links (see Fig. Data Sheet Dimensions) must be inspected by a specialist  at intervals of not more than 12
months. Shorter intervals are required under unfavourable conditions of use such as
increased wear or intensified corrosion. In addition to visual inspections, a magnetic
testing for absence of cracks must be performed at intervals of maximum three years.
The inspections have to be documented in accordance with the regulations of the
country where the chain is used.
Prior to the inspection, the chain links must be thoroughly cleaned to ensure that they
are free from oil, dirt and rust. The cleaning method may not corrode the base material
and may not cover cracks or surface defects.
The chains or suspension links must be replaced:
a) If a chain link is deformed or broken and if it has deposits that cannot be removed.
b) If chain links were straightened, welded, bent, burned or otherwise changed.
c) If a chain link has dents, cracks, grooves, cuts, corrosion pits or deformations.
Minor dents can be repaired by a specialist , provided that the remaining material
thickness in that place is more than 90% of the original diameter and no abrupt
change in cross section is noticeable.
d) If, as a result of plastic deformation, the outside length of a chain link has increased
by more than 3% of the outside nominal dimension.
e) If wear or excessive corrosion is present anywhere on a chain link. The wear of up
to 90 % of the original diameter (dn) is permissible, calculated as the average value
of two measurements of the diameters d1 und d2 performed at 90 to each other
(see Fig. 4.2.4).
f) If, as a result of wear, the inside length has increased by at least L=8%
( L = L1 Lo ) for suspension links
by at least L=5% for a chain link
by at least L=2% for a chain with 11 pitches (links)
g) In the event of discolouration caused by heat or damage due to chemical influences

Chains to be replaced if:

d1+d2
> 0,9 dn
2

Figure 4.2.4

19.07.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.1220-17 E

10-2

The repairs may only be carried out by the manufacturer or, for minor dents (see Point
c) ), by a specialist .


Specialists are persons who, by virtue of their professional training and


experience, have sufficient knowledge in the field of lifting equipment for loading
of bulk materials and who are acquainted with relevant national work safety
regulations, accident prevention regulations, rules for safety and health at work,
guidelines and generally recognised technical standards (e.g. ISO sheets) as
well as the present operating instructions to the extent that they are able to judge
the safe working condition of lifting equipment, shackles and chains.

Note: Regular lubrication of the chain, suspension links and shackles can ensure a
significantly longer permissible service life compared to unlubricated parts. It is
recommended to lubricate all chain links and shackles before the initial start-up.
During lubrication, make sure that you lubricate the contact surfaces to prevent
premature wear. Suitable lubricants are those used for lubrication of wire ropes
or toothing (see Chapter 4.4)

Miscellaneous checks
 Check the hydraulic couplings to tightness.
 Check the screw connections.
 Check the bearing wear.
 Check the plug-in connector and tension relief.
 Monitor the oil temperature.

20.07.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

4.3

Repairs

4.3.1

General

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.0718-1 E

10-3

For major repairs please consult the after-sales service of Salzgitter Maschinenbau AG.
Risk of injury in case of insufficient qualification!
Improper working might cause considerable personal and material damages.
WARNING

 Maintenance and repair of the slewing unit must only be carried out by
authorized, well-trained and instructed specialized personnel. This personnel
must be specifically instructed in the imminent dangers. the personnel must be
allowed to reject any instructions of third parties that might breach the safety
instructions.
 Only specialist electricians or instructed personnel under direction and
supervision of a specialist electrician are allowed to work on the electric systems
of the slewing unit in compliance with the electrotechnical regulations.
 Only personnel who has special knowledge of and experience in hydraulic
systems is allowed to work on hydraulic systems!
 Responsibilities of the staff for assembly/disassembly, putting into operation,
operation, maintenance and repair must be clearly defined and adhered to!
 Make sure that only such personnel works on the slewing unit who is assigned to
do so!
 Secure the parts against unintentional movement.
 Disconnect power supply to the slewing unit and protect it against accidental
restart before starting repair work. If available, remove the electric plug-in
connector (32) (see 2.4 Parts list).

Wear the following personal when carrying out any maintenance or repair work:
- Protective helmet
- Protective goggles
- Protective clothes
- Protective gloves
- Safety shoes with toe caps and puncture-resistant base
The following must be observed for any repair:
Shift the slewing unit in such a way that the double hook and the movable parts do not
move accidentally.
After each disassembly or repair the maximum pressure indicated on the nameplate
must be checked. Use appropriate test manometers for this purpose.

20.07.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.0718-2 E

10-3

As a basic principle, supply all the lubricating points with grease in accordance with 4.4
Oil Recommendation before any restart (for lubricating instructions see 4.1.4, for
lubricating points see 4.1.5).
Only start the slewing unit after repairs or modifications if
- the reliable operating state is restored,
- the work is definitely declared completed by authorized qualified personnel
- nobody is within the area of danger.
Before restarting the slewing unit adhere to the instructions specified in chapter
3.2 Putting into operation.

20.07.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

4.3.2

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.0718-3 E

10-3

Replacement of hydraulic motor

Legend:
1
2
3,4
5
7
8

measuring point MA
pressure relief valve
hosepipes
hosepipe (drain connection)
hydraulic motor
pinion screw (tightening torque
70 Nm)
9
valve block
10
screw (tightening torque 47 Nm)
11
pinion
12,14 standpipe elbow
13
mounting
Figure 4.3.2

DANGER

Danger to life from hydraulic oil discharge at high pressure


 Ensure that parts of the hydraulic system on which you are working have been
relieved of pressure.
 Rectify any leakage immediately.

1.

Disconnect power supply to the slewing unit and secure it against restart. If one or
more plug-in connectors are available, remove them.

2.

Dismantle the hood.

3.

Depressurise the hydraulics via the Minimess connectors MA and MB.


For this purpose, a Minimess hose must be connected to the Minimess connector of
the relevant section in such a way that the oil at the other end of the Minimess hose
can flow into a tank. (The connector MB is opposite to MA.)

4.

Unscrew the mounting (13) and put it down carefully on the slewing unit.

5.

Release the hoses (3) and (4) on the ball cocks and collect the hydraulic fluid.

6.

Unscrew the standpipe elbows (12) and (14) and collect the hydraulic fluid.

7.

Protect the dismantled pipe section from dirt.

20.07.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.0718-4 E

10-3

8.

Release the hose (5) on the hydraulic motor (7), protect the opening of the hose
from dirt.

9.

Dismantle the valve block (9) and protect it from dirt.

10. Unscrew the screws (8) and (10) and lift the hydraulic motor (7) from the slewing
unit.
11. Assemble the new hydraulic motor in reverse order.
12. Fill the hydraulic motor with hydraulic oil through the drain connection (5) !

20.07.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

4.3.3

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.0718-5 E

10-3

Replacement of hydraulic pump

Legend:
1, 2 hosepipes
3
screw (47 Nm)
4
hydraulic unit
5
cover
6
intermediate flange
7
distributor part
8
pump
9
plastic plug
10 screw (25 Nm)
11 measuring point MA
Figure 4.3.3

DANGER

Danger to life from hydraulic oil discharge at high pressure


 Ensure that parts of the hydraulic system on which you are working have been
relieved of pressure.
 Rectify any leakage immediately.

1. Disconnect power supply to the slewing unit and secure it against restart. If one or
more plug-in connectors are available, remove them.
2. Dismantle the hood.
3. Depressurise the hydraulics via the Minimess connectors MA and MB.
For this purpose, a Minimess hose must be connected to the Minimess connector
of the relevant section in such a way that the oil at the other end of the Minimess
hose can flow into a tank. (The connector MB is opposite to MA.)
4. Release the hoses (1) and (2) and protect them from dirt.
3. Unscrew the screws (3) and lift the hydraulic unit (4) from the slewing unit.
4. Unscrew the distributor parts (7) and protect them from dirt.
5. Unscrew the pump (8).
6. Remove the plastic plug (9) on the underside of the new pump !
7. Assemble the new pump in reverse order.

20.07.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

4.3.4

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.0718-6 E

10-3

Replacement of axle bearing

Figure 4.3.4
Legend:
1 traverse
3 slip-ring transmitter
6 socket head cap screw

7
9
10
11

axle
slip-ring body
brush holder
axial cylindrical roller bearing

Before repair work and before replacement of the axle bearing, please consult
the after-sales service of Salzgitter Maschinenbau AG. Only specialist service
centres who have experience of handling with axial cylindrical roller bearings are
allowed to carry out this work.
Manager Service:
Mr. Kevin Wenke

+49 -5341 / 302 - 493

kevin.wenke@smag.de

Service Administration:
Mrs. Schwarz
+49 -5341 / 302 - 673

elke.schwarz@smag.de

Service Technicians:
Mr. Mller
Mr. Olbrich
Mr. Schmerschneider

marcus.mller@smag.de
olaf.olbrich@smag.de
bernd.schmerschneider@smag.de

+49 -5341 / 302 - 672


+49 -5341 / 302 - 491
+49 -5341 / 302 - 492

20.07.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

4.3.5

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.0718-7 E

10-3

Replacement of pinion

Figure 4.3.5
Legend:
2 measuring point MB
3 hosepipes
4 hosepipes
5 ball cock
7 hosepipe
8 hydraulic motor
9 hexagon screw (tightening
torque 70 Nm)

DANGER

10 socket head cap screws (tightening


torque 47 Nm)
11 socket head cap screws (tightening
torque 250 Nm)
12 flange
13 lubricant duct
14 pinion
15 control block
16 pinion holder
17 cover

Danger to life from hydraulic oil discharge at high pressure


 Ensure that parts of the hydraulic system on which you are working have been
relieved of pressure.
 Rectify any leakage immediately.

1. Disconnect power supply to the slewing unit and secure it against restart. If one or
more plug-in connectors are available, remove them.
2. Dismantle the hood.

20.07.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.0718-8 E

10-3

3. Depressurise the hydraulics via the Minimess connectors MA and MB (2)


(measuring point MA see figure 4.3.3). (The connector MB is opposite to MA.)
For this purpose, a Minimess hose must be connected to the Minimess connector
of the relevant section in such a way that the oil at the other end of the Minimess
hose can flow into a tank.
4. Unscrew the cover (17).
5. Unscrew the screw (9)
6. Unscrew the screw (11)
7. Pull out the pinion (14) and dismantle the pinion holder (16). If the pinion cannot
be pulled out easily, proceed as described below. Use an extractor tool to
dismantle the pinion.
8. Assemble the new pinion in reverse order. For tightening torque of the screws,
see the spare parts list.
If the pinion cannot be pulled out easily:
8.a Dismantle the hydraulic motor (8) as described under 4.3.2.
9.

Unscrew the screws (11), unscrew the lubricant duct (13) and lift the flange (12).

10. Pull out the pinion (14) and dismantle the pinion holder (16).
11. Assemble the new pinion in reverse order. For tightening torque of the screws,
see the spare parts list.

03.06.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
OIL RECOMMENDATION

PEINER Greifer

4.4

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.0719-1 E

11-1

Table: Oil recommendation - Hydraulic fluids


For normal operation, a hydraulic fluid of ISO-viscosity VG 46 shall be used. For
summer or winter operation, a hydraulic fluid of ISO-viscosity VG 68 or FB 32 is to be
used according to the ambient temperature.
In order to protect the hydraulic components, the oil must be in accordance with purity
level 20/18/15 according to ISO 4406 at least (approximately corresponding to class 9
according to NAS 1638).
Since the purity level of new oil is generally lower, the new oil must be filtered. To do this
either refill oil via the filter or use special filling devices that filter the oil to reach the
required purity class.
The following oil grades are appropriate and released by SMAG:
Winter

ISO viscosity

Summer

VG 32

VG 46

VG 68

HVLP 32

HLP 46

HLP 68

acc. to DIN 51524/3 HV

acc. to DIN51524/2

acc. to DIN51524/2

-15C

-5C

+5C

-5C

+5C

+12C

+70C

+80C

+85C

< -5C to -20C

-5C to +30C

> +30C

ARAL

Vitam HF 32

Vitam GF 46

Vitam GF 68

AVIA

AVIA FLUID HVI 32

Standard
Start up temperature *)
Temperature that is
necessary to put the
system into operation
Max. upper working
temperature
Ambient temperature

BP

AVIA FLUID RSL46 AVIA FLUID RSL68

ENERGOL
SHF-HV 32

ENERGOL
HLP-S 46

ENERGOL
HLP-HM 46

HYSPIN AWH-M 32

HYSPIN AWS 46

HYSPIN AWS 68

UNIVIS J 32

NUTO H 46

NUTO H 68

RENOLIN MR 32 MC

RENOLIN MR 15

RENOLIN MR 20

RENOLIN B 32 HVI

RENOLIN B 15

RENOLIN B 20

MOBIL

Univis N 32

DTE 25

DTE 26

SHELL

Tellus T 32
Tellus S2 V 32

Tellus 46
Tellus S2 M 46

Tellus 68
Tellus S2 M 68

TEXACO

Equivis ZS 32

Azolla ZS 46

Azolla ZS 68

CASTROL
ESSO
FUCHS
FUCHS LUBRITECH

*) Temperature from which the hydraulic pump may be started in order to preheat the
oil by means of the pressure relief valve up to the temperature that is necessary to
put the system into operation.

03.06.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
OIL RECOMMENDATION

PEINER Greifer

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.0719-2 E

11-2

Do not use other hydraulic fluids without SMAGs prior release.


Mixing of different hydraulic fluids is not allowed without prior consultation of the
corresponding manufacturer and without prior release.
Do not use biodegradable hydraulic oil without SMAGs prior release. It is generally not
allowed to mix mineral and biodegradable hydraulic oil!

A hydraulic oil of type HVLP according to DIN 51524-3 NATO code: H 540 should be
used for operation at -50C to +40C. In case of temperatures below -25C, the
hydraulic oil must be pre-heated.

Winter
Standard

Winter

HVLP
acc. to DIN 51524/3 HV

NATO-code: H 540
Start up temperature *)

-25C

-30C

Temperature that is
necessary to put the
system into operation

-15C

-20C

Max. upper working


temperature

+85C

+70C

< - 50C bis +40C

< - 50C bis +40C

Ambient temperature

ARAL

Vitam H 540

AVIA

AVILUB HYDRAULIKFL H 540

SHELL
H&R ChemPharm GmbH

Hydraulikflssigkeit H-540

Shell Tellus Arctic

SRS Wiolan H-540

*) Temperature from which the hydraulic pump may be started in order to preheat the
oil by means of the pressure relief valve up to the temperature that is necessary to
put the system into operation.

03.06.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
OIL RECOMMENDATION

PEINER Greifer

4.5

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.0719-3 E

11-3

Lubricant recommendation
Grease for sliding and
rolling bearings

Grease for sliding and


rolling bearings
Low-temperature range

DIN 51502 KP 2 K
mineral lubricant
lithium thickener
AGIP
ARAL
AVIA
BP

DIN 51502 KPHC2N-50


synthetic lubricant
organic thickener

Agip GR MU EP 2

Agip Longtime Grease 2

-20C to +120C *)

- 35C to + 135C

Aralub HLP 2

Aralub SKL 2

-20C to +120C

- 50C to + 130C

AVIALITH 2 EP

AVIA SYNTOGREASE PE-T

-30C to +120C

-60 to +140C

Energrease LS-EP 2

Energrease SY 2202

-25C to +130C

- 40C to + 170C

BREMER &
LEGUIL GMBH

Rivolta S.K.D. 3602

Castrol

Spheerol E PL 2

Optitemp LG 2

-20C to +140C

-50C to +120C

FUCHS
EUROPE
SCHMIERSTOFFE GMBH

RENOLIT LZR 2 H

RENOLIT HLT 2

-30C to +140C

- 40C to + 140C

FUCHS
LUBRITECH

Lagermeister EP 2

URETHYN LT 60

-20C to +130C

- 50C to + 140C

KLBER
LUBRICATION

Klberplex BEM 41-132

ISOFLEX TOPAS NB 52

-40C to +150C

- 50C to + 120C

Mobil Oil

Mobilux EP 2

Mobilith SHC 100

-20C to +120C

(KPHC2N-40)
- 40C to + 150C

Shell

Retinax HD2 (Li/Ca)

AeroShell Grease 33

-25C to +120C

-70 to + 120C

Multis EP 2

Multis XLT 2

-25C to +120C

-60C to +130C

Total

-20C to +140C

RENOLIT MP
-40C to +120C

*) operating temperature range


For greases used by the manufacturer please refer to data sheet!

03.06.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
OIL RECOMMENDATION

PEINER Greifer

Note:

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.0719-4 E

11-4

Do not mix synthetic lubricants with mineral lubricants!


Mix synthetic lubricants with another synthetic lubricant only after
consultation with the lubricant manufacturer.

Lubricant for the bearings


in the electric motor

Lubricant for the bearings


in the electric motor
Low-temperature range

synthetic lubricant

synthetic lubricant

BREMER &
LEGUIL GMBH

Rivolta S.K.D. 4002


-50C to +210C *)

Castrol

Firetemp XT 2
- 25C to + 180C

Fuchs

RENOLIT PU 8-061/2

RENOLIT HLT 1

-20C to +180C

FUCHS
LUBRITECH

URETHYN E/M 2

URETHYN LT 60

- 20C to + 180C

- 50C to + 140C

KLBER
LUBRICATION

PETAMO GY 193

ISOFLEX TOPAS NB 52

approx. - 20C to + 180C

- 50C to + 120C

Shell

Gadus S3 T100/2

Gadus S2 V100/2

- 20C to + 160C

- 30C to + 130C

*) operating temperature range


For greases used by the manufacturer please refer to data sheet!
If you change over to a grease based on another soap type or another thickening agent,
the grease that had been used so far should be completely removed if possible. After
changeover the regreasing periods should be reduced in order to ensure the old grease
is removed as quickly as possible. If greases are mixed, this will impair the lubricating
properties and thus reduce the service life of the parts.

03.06.2010

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
OIL RECOMMENDATION

PEINER Greifer

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 16.0719-5 E

11-5

Grease for toothing


Low-temperature range
DIN 51502 KP2 K (KPF2 N) DIN 51502 KE 1 N -50
mineral lubricant
synthetic lubricant
calcium thickener
organic thickener
Grease for toothing

AGIP

AUTOL TOP 2000

AVIA

AVIACAL 2 LD

-30 to +120C *)
-30 to +120C

CERITOL PK 1

BREMER &
LEGUIL GMBH

-60C to +140C

Energrease Mp-MG 2

BP

-30C to +175C

Fuchs

RENOLIT CA-LZ

FUCHS
LUBRITECH

LAGERMEISTER 3000
PLUS
-30 to +120C

URETHYN LT 60

KLBER
LUBRICATION

Klberplex AG 11-462

ISOFLEX TOPAS NB 52

- 40C to + 180C

- 50C to + 120C

Mllenberg &
Sonntag

Zhlit VZ

Shell

Retinax HD2
-20C to +130C

-30C to +120C
- 50C to + 140C

- 20C to + 90C

AeroShell Grease 7
- 73C to + 135C

*) operating temperature range


For greases used by the manufacturer please refer to data sheet!
Slip-ring transmitter: the contact oil is solely intended for very light spraying of
wire contact bows and their slip ring.
CRAMOLIN Protection
Manufacturer: ITW CHEMISCHE PRODUKTE GMBH & Co KG
Mhlacker Strasse 149
D-75417 Mhlacker
Phone: +49 (0) 7041-9634-0
Fax: +49 (0) 7041-9634-29
Website: www.itwcp.de

E-mail: info@itwcp.de

CAUTION: Too much contact oil may cause short circuits.


Do not spray the brush holder and its slip ring!
After spraying with contact oil, turn the slip-ring transmitter 5 times by 360.

13.09.1999

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SLEWING UNIT

PEINER Greifer

5.0

5.2

Page-no.

A 16.0757 E

12-1

Failure - Symptoms - Sources of failures


- Failure

5.1

Class-no.

- Symptoms

- motor is not running,


Slewing unit does
motor does not receive
not work (axle does
current
not turn)

Slewing unit does


not render enough
out-put (axle turns)

- Sources of failures
-

fuses
contactors
hoses
connecting terminal
sliprings and brushes in cable
drum
- plug-in connector

- current o.k.

- motor defect

- motor running

- nonreturn valve on the pump's


suction hole is jammed (due to
dirty oil)
- pressure line pump / control block
is defect
- spring inside the pressure relief
valve is broken
- tubes are not tight
- shut-off valve is still open
- solenoid valve is defect (jammed)
- motor is defect
- pinion is defect
- flow regulator is opened too wide
- shuttle valve is defect
- nonreturn valves are defect

- turning time and number - pressure relief valve is


of rotations are
maladjusted (see 4.2.2)
considerably slower
- pump is worn
- torque is too low
- either dirt in the pressure relief
valve or the spring is too old pressure adjustment is required
- oil level in the tank is too low
In case the pump sucks air, this
mostly leads to a destruction of the
pump.
- connection between pump and
control block is loose or damaged
- slide piston in the control block is
jammed; this might be caused by
foreign matter in the oil or a
broken spring
- tubes are not tight
- solenoid valve is defect (jammed)
- flow regulator

25.06.2010

-1/2-

P
PEINER Greifer

Inhaltsverzeichnis
Contents

Erzeugnis / Product: SW 100 DISK-L-B

Sach-Nr. / Subject no.:

Benennung

Bestell-Nr. /

Gruppe-Nr. /

Order-no.

Group-no.

Description

S 23080295

Zusammenstellung

compilation

23080295

1.0

Grundgert

basic unit

23080305

3.0

Haube

hood

23082943

5.0

Schelle fr Elektro-Leitung

clamp for cable

23084214

5.6

Bgel, kpl.

frame, cpl.

23082017

8.0

Hydraulikaggregat

hydraulic unit

23082063

10.0

Rckschlagventil, kpl.

nonreturn valve, cpl.

23084713

10.1

Rcklauffilter

return filter

00020900

11.0

Steuerblock

control block

27690044

13.0

Doppelhaken mit Aufhngung

double hook with suspension

23082580

25.4

Hydraulikmotor mit Anbaublock hydraulic motor with valve plate

23084827

37.0

Hydraulikmotor

hydraulic motor

00041083

37.4

Antriebslager

drive end bearing

23084920

37.5

Schleifringbertrager

slip-ring transmitter

00040328

38.0

Bei Ersatzteilbestellung ist auer der Bestellnummer das Erzeugnis, die Werks-Nr. und Kommissions-Nr.
anzugeben.
For spare part orders, the product, serial-no. and commission-no. must be given in addition to the
requisition-no.
Salzgitter Maschinenbau AG
Windmhlenbergstrae 20-22
38259 Salzgitter / Germany

Phone:
+49 53 41 / 302 647
Fax:
+49 53 41 / 302 424

E-mail:
peiner@smag.de
Internet:
www.smag.de
www.peiner.de

Board of management:
Sebastian H. Brandes (Chairman),
Jrgen Bialek
Chairman of the Supervisory Board:
Ulrich Decker

Domicile of company: Salzgitter Bad


Registration court:
Amtsgericht Braunschweig
Registration number:
HRB 201 389

02.06.2009 (11015)

P
PEINER Greifer

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list

Motor-Schwenkwerk SW 100 DISK-L-B CAN BUS


Motor Slewing Unit
SW 100 DISK-L-B CAN BUS

B 23080295
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
1.0

1/1

30.04.2009 (11015)

P
PEINER Greifer

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list

Motor-Schwenkwerk SW 100 DISK-L-B CAN BUS


Motor Slewing Unit SW 100 DISK-L-B CAN BUS
Pos.
Item

Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.

Menge
Quantity

Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.

23080295
1.0

Benennung
Description

01

23080305

Grundgert (s. Gruppe-Nr. 3.0)


basic unit (see group-no. 3.0)

02

23083462

Traverse
traverse

03

23082943

Haube (s. Gruppe-Nr. 5.0)


hood (see group-no. 5.0)

04

23083884

Achse
axle

05

23082580

Doppelhaken mit Aufhngung (s. Gruppe-Nr. 25.4)


double hook with suspension (see group-no. 25.4)

06

23084893

4/2 Wegeventil NG6 205VDC


4/2-way valve

07

65165309

6kt.-Shr. M 20x40 / 8.8A3P / DIN EN ISO 4017


hexagon screw

08

65161503

6kt.-Shr. M 16x40 / 8.8A3P / DIN EN ISO 4014


hexagon screw

09

23082111

Blinddeckel
blind cover

15

74731980

O-Ring 80x3
o-ring

16

65150203

16

6kt.-Shr. M 8x25 / 8.8A2P / DIN EN ISO 4017


hexagon screw

17

00016708

16

Federring A 8 / F-StA3P
spring washer

18

66828403

6kt.-Mu M 8 / 8A2P / DIN EN ISO 4032


hexagon nut

1/3
B 23080295

30.04.2009 (11015)

P
PEINER Greifer

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list

Motor-Schwenkwerk SW 100 DISK-L-B CAN BUS


Motor Slewing Unit SW 100 DISK-L-B CAN BUS
Pos.
Item
19

Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.

Menge
Quantity

Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.

23080295
1.0

Benennung
Description

65169511

6kt.-Shr. M 16x20 / 8.8A3P / DIN EN ISO 4017


hexagon screw

21

23082496

Stopfen
plug

22

23004907

Dichtung
gasket

26

23082553

Bolzen 130x315
pin

27

69520310

Schmiernippel AM 10x1 / 5.8Zn / DIN 71412


lubricating nipple

28

23082703

Achshalter 190x60x12
axle holder

29

23079288

E-Installation (s. Gerteausrstung Elektrik)


electrical installation (see electric equipment)

31

00016710

Federring A 20 / F-StA3P
spring washer

32

23083469

Deckel
cover

23083438

Dichtung
gasket

20

30

33
34

2/3
B 23080295

30.04.2009 (11015)

P
PEINER Greifer

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list

Motor-Schwenkwerk SW 100 DISK-L-B CAN BUS


Motor Slewing Unit SW 100 DISK-L-B CAN BUS
Pos.
Item

Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.

Menge
Quantity

Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.

23080295
1.0

Benennung
Description

35

23084510

Anschluplatte
connecting plate

36

65145109

6kt.-Shr. M 5x10 / 8.8A2P / DIN EN ISO 4017


hexagon screw

3/3
B 23080295

22.06.2010

P
PEINER Greifer

Grundgert
basic unit

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 23080305
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
3.0

1/1

28.07.2010 (11493)

P
PEINER Greifer

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.

Grundgert
basic unit
Pos.
Item

Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.

Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.

Menge
Quantity

23080305
3.0

Benennung
Description

01

23082063

Hydraulikaggregat (s. Gruppe-Nr. 10.0)


hydraulic unit (see group-no. 10.0)

02

23084827

Hydraulikmotor mit Anbaublock (s. Gruppe-Nr. 37.0)


hydraulic motor with valve plate (see group-no. 37.0)

03

23084920

Antriebslager (s. Gruppe-Nr. 37.5)


drive end bearing (see group-no. 37.5)

04

27690044

Steuerblock AV5383-3, DN8 (s. Gruppe-Nr. 13.0)


control block (see group-no. 13.0)

05

00040328

Schleifringbertrager 31x36A (s. Gruppe-Nr. 38.0)


slip-ring transmitter (see group-no. 38.0)

06

23082558

Stirnrad
spur gear

07

23082059

Flansch
flange

08

23082586

Halterung
mounting

11

65985303

Zyl.-Shr. M 10x25 / 8.8A3P / DIN EN ISO 4762


cap screw, socket head

12

23082027

Keil
fitting key

13

23082196

Mutter
nut

14

00021749

Axial-Zylinderrollenlager 81234
axial-cylindrical roller bearing

15

23082556

Buchse 195/175x120
bush

1/6
B 23080305

28.07.2010 (11493)

P
PEINER Greifer

Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.

Grundgert
basic unit
Pos.
Item

Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.

Menge
Quantity

23080305
3.0

Benennung
Description

16
17

65984107

12

Zyl.-Shr. M 6x16 / 8.8A2P / DIN EN ISO 4762


cap screw, socket head

18

65988408

Zyl.-Shr. M 20x50 / 8.8 / DIN EN ISO 4762


cap screw, socket head

00023191

Verschlu-Shr. VSTI R-ED/A3C


screw plug

22

69372501

Schraubkupplung Minime
screw coupling

23

65161603

6kt.-Shr. M 16x45 / 8.8A3P / DIN EN ISO 4017


hexagon screw

24

65547211

16

Senk-Shr. M 8x20 / 8.8A2P / DIN EN ISO 10642


countersunk screw

25

23082060

Ring
ring

26

02416228

Kerbstift 12x50 / 6.8 / DIN 1EN ISO 8745


grooved dowel pin

27

65153607

6kt.-Shr. M 10x30 / 8.8A3P / DIN EN ISO 4017


hexagon screw

28

65150002

6kt.-Shr. M 8x20 / Ms / DIN EN ISO 4017


hexagon screw

29

63871925

Scheibe 8 / Ms / DIN EN ISO 7090


disc

19
20
21

2/6
B 23080305

28.07.2010 (11493)

P
PEINER Greifer

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.

Grundgert
basic unit
Pos.
Item

Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.

Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.

Menge
Quantity

23080305
3.0

Benennung
Description

30

00020722

Fcherscheibe A 8,4 / F-StZn / DIN 6798


serrated lock washer

31

65153410

6kt.-Shr. M 10x25 / 8.8A3P / DIN EN ISO 4017


hexagon screw

32

23082600

Ring
ring

33

23082601

Schauglas
side glass

34

08022741

Verschlu-Shr. R
screw plug

35

00022845

Dichtring C 27x32x2,5 / CuFa / DIN 7603


sealing ring

36

63873003

Scheibe 16 / 200HV-A3P / DIN EN ISO 7090


disc

37

63872402

Scheibe 10 / 200HV-A3P / DIN EN ISO 7090


disc

38

25 l

Hydraulikl HLP 46 (siehe lempfehlung)


hydraulic oil (look to oil recommendation)

39

65984603

Zyl.-Shr. M 8x20 / 8.8A2P / DIN EN ISO 4762


cap screw, socket head

40

00022499

O-Ring 65x2,5 / 70NBR/769


o-ring

41

00022404

Verschraubung EVW 10-PLR/A3C


bolted joint

42

00022403

Verschraubung RED 14/12-PS/A3C


bolted joint

43

27993613

Schlauchltg. DN 8x590
hose

3/6
B 23080305

28.07.2010 (11493)

P
PEINER Greifer

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.

Grundgert
basic unit
Pos.
Item

Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.

Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.

Menge
Quantity

23080305
3.0

Benennung
Description

44

00022795

Verschraubung SNV 14-S


bolted joint

45

27992799

Schlauchltg. DN 8x540
hose

46

27992102

Schlauchltg. DN 8x650
hose

49

00022463

V-Ring V-250A
V-ring

50

00028878

17

Nord-Lock-Sicherungsscheibe NL 10
locking washer Nord-Lock

51

00022409

Verschraubung EL 12-PS/A3C
bolted joint

52

65985507

Zyl.-Shr. M 10x35 / 8.8A3P / DIN EN ISO 4762


cap screw, socket head

53

00040612

Druckbegrenzungsventil
pressure relief valve

54

00022468

Verschraubung GE 12-PSR/A3C
bolted joint

55

00021138

Ro. 12x1,5 150 mm / 1,0255-NBK/C /


DIN EN 10305-4
pipe

56

00021138

Ro. 12x1,5 80 mm / 1,0255-NBK/C / DIN EN 10305-4


pipe

57

69359309

Verschraubung GE 10-PLR
bolted joint

4/6
B 23080305

28.07.2010 (11493)

P
PEINER Greifer

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.

Grundgert
basic unit
Pos.
Item

Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.

Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.

Menge
Quantity

23080305
3.0

Benennung
Description

58

60000118

Ro. 10x1,5 170 mm / 1,0255-NBK/C /


DIN EN 10305-4
pipe

59

00022405

Verschraubung GE 12-PS/R/A3C
bolted joint

70

08031074

Blockkugelhahn
ball cock

73

00022414

Verschraubung EVW 12-PS/A3C


bolted joint

74

27993614

Schlauchltg. DN 8x800
hose

75

27992104

Schlauchltg. DN 8x680
hose

76

27993615

Schlauchltg. DN 8x850
hose

78

00020900

Rcklauffilter D 043-88 (s. Gruppe-Nr. 11.0)


return filter (see group-no. 11.0)

82

60000517

Zyl.-Shr. M 10x80 / 8.8A3P / DIN EN ISO 4762


cap screw, socket head

83

69106713

Verschraubung EWSD 12-S


bolted joint

77

5/6
B 23080305

28.07.2010 (11493)

P
PEINER Greifer

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.

Grundgert
basic unit
Pos.
Item

Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.

Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.

Menge
Quantity

23080305
3.0

Benennung
Description

84

65987358

Zyl.-Shr. M 16x55 / 8.8 / DIN EN ISO 4762


cap screw, socket head

85

00025799

Nord-Lock-Sicherungsscheibe NL 16
locking washer Nord-Lock

86

23084947

Schmierverlngerung
lubricating extension

87

23084948

Schmierverlngerung
lubricating extension

88

69520310

Schmiernippel AM 10x1 / 5.8Zn / DIN 71412


lubricating nipple

91

23082557

Deckel
cover

92

00041314

Steckverschrauubng GEK6 M 10x1


bolted joint

93

00030881

Druckkunststoffrohr 6x1,5
plastic pipe

94

00022411

Verschraubung EVL 14-PS/A3C


bolted joint

95

00022412

Verschlubutzen VKA 12/A3C


locking slug

96

00022413

Verschlubutzen VKA 14/A3C


locking slug

97

65985503

Zyl.-Shr. M 10x35 / 10.9 / DIN EN ISO 4762


cap screw, socket head

90

6/6
B 23080305

10.11.2006

P
PEINER Greifer

Haube
hood

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 23082943
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
5.0

1/1

23.01.2009 (10686)

P
PEINER Greifer

Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.

Haube 31pol.
hood
Pos.
Item

Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.

Menge
Quantity

23082943
5.0

Benennung
Description

01

07

23082017

Bgel, kpl. (s. Gruppe-Nr. 8.0)


frame, cpl. (see group-no. 8.0)

10

23083391

Deckel, kpl.
cover, cpl.

11

65157002

6kt.-Shr. M 12x25 / 8.8A3P / DIN EN ISO 4017


hexagon screw

12

63872804

Scheibe 12,0 / 200HV-A2 / DIN EN ISO 7090


disc

13

63959512

Fcherscheibe A 13 / F-StZn / DIN 6798


serrated lock washer

14

66908300

Hut-Mu M 12 / 6A3P / DIN 1587


cap nut

23084214

Schelle, kpl. fr E-Leitung (s. Gruppe-Nr. 5.6)


clamp, cpl. for cable (see group-no. 5.6)

15
16

1/1
B 23082943

05.11.2007

P
PEINER Greifer

Schelle fr Elektro-Leitung
clamp for cable

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 23084214
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
5.6

1/1

23.01.2009

P
PEINER Greifer

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.

Schelle fr Elektro-Leitung
clamp for cable
Pos.
Item

Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.

Menge
Quantity

Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.

23084214
5.6

Benennung
Description

01

00030146

Anschweiplatte SPAL 6 S
welding plate

02

23084231

Schellenkrper, kpl.
clamp body, cpl.

04

23084229

Deckplatte
cover plate

05

23084227

Spezialschraube M 12x100
special screw

06

23084228

Scheibe
disc

07

68531840

Sprengring A 12 / DIN 7993


snap ring

08

P0000335

Knotenkette 2 500 mm / St / DIN 5686


knotted-link chain

09

65169538

6kt.-Shr. M 6x12 / A2-70 / DIN EN ISO 4017


hexagon screw

03

1/1
B 23084214

18.01.2006

P
PEINER Greifer

Bgel, kpl.
frame, cpl.

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 23082017
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
8.0

1/1

09.12.2008

PEINER Greifer

Bgel, kpl.
frame, cpl.
Pos.
Item
01

Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.

Menge
Quantity

23082017
8.0

Benennung
Description

23082018

Bgel
frame

03

65150600

6kt.-Shr. M 8x40 / 8.8A2P / DIN EN ISO 4017


hexagon screw

04

63871908

Scheibe 8,0 / 200HV-A3P / DIN EN ISO 7090


disc

05

66828403

6kt.-Mu M 8 / 8A2P / DIN EN ISO 4032


hexagon nut

02

1/1
B 23082017

10.02.2009

P
PEINER Greifer

Hydraulikaggregat
hydraulic unit

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 23082063
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
10.0

1/1

09.12.2008

P
PEINER Greifer

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.

Hydraulikaggregat
hydraulic unit
Pos.
Item

Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.

Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.

Menge
Quantity

23082063
10.0

Benennung
Description

01

23082116

Zwischenflansch fr Pumpe
intermediate flange for pump

02

23005109

Verteilerstck
distributor part

04

08059424

Kupplung 24/28, kpl.


coupling, cpl.

05

00021689

E-Motor (siehe Maschinenkarte)


electric motor (see machine card)

06

08040466

Zahnradpumpe P3 DB2004 L10, kpl.


gear pump, cpl.

07

65157002

6kt.-Shr. M 12x25 / 8.8A3P / DIN EN ISO 4017


hexagon screw

08

65984700

Zyl.-Shr. M 8x25 / 8.8 / DIN EN ISO 4762


cap screw, socket head

09

65984450

Zyl.-Shr. M 6x50 / 8.8 / DIN EN ISO 4762


cap screw, socket head

11

00022426

Verschraubung WSV 14-PS/A3C


bolted joint

12

00022428

Verschraubung EVW 14-PSR


bolted joint

13

23084713

Rckschlagventil, kpl. (s. Gruppe-Nr. 10.1)


nonreturn valve, cpl. (see group-no. 10.1)

14

08014374

O-Ring 22x3
o-ring

03

10

1/2
B 23082063

09.12.2008

P
PEINER Greifer

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.

Hydraulikaggregat
hydraulic unit
Pos.
Item

Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.

Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.

Menge
Quantity

23082063
10.0

Benennung
Description

15
16

23004916

17

Dichtung
gasket

Ro. 14x2 - 500 mm / 1,0255-NBK/C / DIN EN 10305-4


pipe

18

23082117

Zwischenstck
intermediate piece

19

74577027

Dichtring A 22x27x1,5 / Cu / DIN 7603


sealing ring

2/2
B 23082063

02.02.2009

P
PEINER Greifer

Rckschlagventil, kpl.
nonreturn valve, cpl.

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 23084713
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
10.1

1/1

09.12.2008

P
PEINER Greifer

Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.

Rckschlagventil, kpl.
nonreturn valve, cpl.
Pos.
Item

Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.

Menge
Quantity

23084713
10.1

Benennung
Description

01

08031720

Rckschlagventil
nonreturn valve

02

69697702

Kugel
ball

1/1
B 23084713

11.11.2008

P
PEINER Greifer

Rcklauffilter D 043-88 25 m
return filter

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 00020900
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
11.0

1/1

11.11.2008

P
PEINER Greifer

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.

Rcklauffilter D 043-88 25m


return filter

Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.

Pos.
Item

Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.

Menge
Quantity

Benennung
Description

01

D 043.2202

Deckel, kpl.
cover, cpl.

02

N 031.0562

Flachdichtung
gasket

03

D 023.0704

Flachdichtung
gasket

04

D 043-1104

Gehuse mit Rohr, kpl.


housing with pipe, cpl.

05

00021735

Exapor-Filterelement
filter element Exapor

00020900
11.0

1/1
B 00020900

29.10.2004

P
PEINER Greifer

Steuerblock AV 5383, DN 8
control block

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 27690044
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
13.0

1/1

11.11.2008

P
PEINER Greifer

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.

Steuerblock AV 5383-3, DN 8
control block
Pos.
Item

Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.

Menge
Quantity

Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.

27690044
13.0

Benennung
Description

01

00027626

Rckschlagventil, kpl.
nonreturn valve, cpl.

OF-1004-1-4

02

00020281

Druckventil, kpl.
pressure valve, cpl.

OF-473-0-4-2

03

00027628

Rckschlagventil, kpl. mit Einstellung


nonreturn valve, cpl. with adjustment

OF-473-1-4-3

05

00020282

Vorsteuerung, kpl.
pilot control unit, cpl.

OF-473-0-4-5

06

00020283

Druckfeder fr Pos. 05
pressure spring for item 05

OF-473-0-4-6

07

Druckfeder fr Pos. 03
pressure spring for item 03

OF-473-1-4-7

08

Druckfeder fr Pos. 01
pressure spring for item 01

OF-1004-3

04

09

00020286

Druckfeder fr Pos. 02
pressure spring for item 02

OF-473-0-4-9

10

00027629

Dichtungssatz fr Pos. 01
packing set for item 01

OF-1004-2

11

00020288

Dichtungssatz fr Pos. 05
packing set for item 05

OF-473-0-4-11

12

00027630

Dichtungssatz fr Pos. 03
packing set for item 03

OF-473-1-4-12

13

00020290

Dichtungssatz fr Pos. 02
packing set for item 02

OF-473-0-4-13

Dse fr Pos. 15
nozzle for item 15

OF-473-0-4-14

14

1/2
B 27690044

11.11.2008

P
PEINER Greifer

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.

Steuerblock AV 5383-3, DN 8
control block
Pos.
Item

Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.

Menge
Quantity

Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.

27690044
13.0

Benennung
Description

15

Verschluschraube
screw plug

OF-473-0-4-15

16

Verschluschraube mit Hubbegrenzung, kpl.


screw plug with lift stop, cpl.
OF-473-1-4-16

2/2
B 27690044

31.01.2007

P
PEINER Greifer

Doppelhaken mit Aufhngung


double hook with suspension

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 23082580
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
25.4

1/1

09.12.2008

P
PEINER Greifer

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.

Doppelhaken mit Aufhngung


double hook with suspension
Pos.
Item

Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.

Menge
Quantity

Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.

23082580
25.4

Benennung
Description

01

23082584

Kreuzstck
gimbal suspension

02

00022287

Doppelhaken Gr. 25
double hook

03

23082585

Bolzen 110x310
pin

04

27608405

Achshalter 190x50x12
axle holder

05

65165309

6kt.-Shr. M 20x40 / 8.8A3P / DIN EN ISO 4017


hexagon screw

69520310

Schmiernippel AM 10x1 / 5.8Zn / DIN 71412


lubricating nipple

06
07

1/1
B 23082580

05.08.2009 (10735)

P
PEINER Greifer

Hydraulikmotor mit Anbaublock


hydraulic motor with valve plate

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 23084827
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
37.0

1/1

29.07.2009 (11237)

P
PEINER Greifer

Hydraulikmotor mit Anbaublock


hydraulic motor with valve plate
Pos.
Item

Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.

Menge
Quantity

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.

23084827
37.0

Benennung
Description

01

00041083

Hydraulikmotor HCC-M300 (s. Gruppe-Nr. 37.4)


hydraulic motor (see group-no. 37.4)

02

23005095

Ventilblock NG 6
valve block

03

65985068

Zyl.-Shr. M 8x60 / 8.8 / DIN EN ISO 4762


cap screw, socket head

04

08014374

O-Ring 22x3
o-ring

05

00016261

Verschlu-Shr. GA / 5.8A3P / DIN 908


screw plug

06

74576418

Dichtring A 14x18x1,5 / Cu / DIN 7603


sealing ring

07

00022428

Verschraubung EVW 14-PSR/A3C


bolted joint

08

00022427

Verschraubung GE 10-PL/R3/8/A3C
bolted joint

09

00016264

Verschlu-Shr. GA / 5.8A3P / DIN 908


screw plug

10

74576616

Dichtring A 17x21x1,5 / Cu / DIN 7603


sealing ring

1/1
B 23084827

11.06.2010

P
PEINER Greifer

Hydraulikmotor HCC - M300


hydraulic motor HCC - M300

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 00041083
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
37.4

1/1

11.06.2010

P
PEINER Greifer

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.

Hydraulikmotor HCC - M300


hydraulic motor HCC - M300
Pos.
Item

Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.

Menge
Quantity

Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.

00041083
37.4

Benennung
Description

1.2

74429104

O-Ring 15,54x2,62 2-114


o-ring

2.2

00041834

Wellendichtring 55x72x8
shaft seal

2.4

00040897

O-Ring 129,77x3,53
o-ring

3.7

00041835

O-Ring 82,27x1,78 2-042


o-ring

5.6

00041836

Zylinderdichtung fr HCC-M300 50x5,5


cylinder sealing

9.1

74429107

O-Ring 21,89x2,62 2-118


o-ring

9.2

00030441

O-Ring 82,14x3,53 2-236


o-ring

10.5

00030441

O-Ring 82,14x3,53 2-236


o-ring

12.1

74429152

O-Ring 39,34x2,62 2-129


o-ring

12.2

00041837

Dichtring fr HCC-M300 47,2x3


sealing ring

00041838

Dichtungssatz, kpl. fr HCC-M300


seal kit, cpl.

Zur fehlerfreien und schnellen Ersatzteillieferung sind folgende Daten anzugeben:


To ensure the correct and fast delivery of spare
parts, the following data must be specified:
Hydraulikmotor:
hydraulic motor:
Typ
Fabr.
Nr.
Sach
Nr.
1/1
B 00041083

22.06.2010

P
PEINER Greifer

Antriebslager
drive end bearing

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 23084920
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
37.5

1/1

29.07.2009

P
PEINER Greifer

Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.

Antriebslager
drive end bearing
Pos.
Item

Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.

Menge
Quantity

23084920
37.5

Benennung
Description

01

23084924

Ritzel
pinion

02

23084567

Ritzelhalter
pinion holder

03

23084568

Flansch
flange

04

23084569

Distanzring
spacer ring

10

00041172

Rillenkugellager
deep groove ball bearing

11

63912500

Sicherungsring 125x4 / F-St / DIN 472


circlip

12

65158200

6kt.-Shr. M 12x80 / 8.8A3P / DIN EN ISO 4017


hexagon screw

13

00018419

Spannstift 6x20 / StA3P / DIN EN ISO 8752


dowel pin

14

63965502

Scheibe 13 / StTZn / DIN 432


disc

1/1
B 23084920

01.04.2009

1/1

P
PEINER Greifer

Beschreibung 00040328
Description

Wartungsanweisung fr Schleifringbertrager
ACHTUNG!
Installation, Wartung und Reparatur darf nur durch elektrotechnisch qualifiziertes und autorisiertes
Personal durchgefhrt werden. Der Schleifringbertrager muss vor Beginn der Wartung
spannungsfrei geschaltet werden.
Wartung:
Wartungsintervall: 1 x jhrlich oder nach 100000 Umdrehungen
Vorgehensweise:
1.

Der Schleifringbertrager muss vor Beginn der Wartung spannungsfrei geschaltet werden.

2.

Hauchdnnes Einsprhen der Kontaktstelle von Schleifring und Schleifbgel mit


Kontaktl. Es darf nur das Kontaktl CRAMOLIN Schutz verwendet warden.
Achtung! Zuviel Kontaktl kann Kurzschlsse verursachen.

3.

Nach dem Einsprhen mit Kontaktl Schleifringbertrager 5x um 360 drehen.

Kontaktl CRAMOLIN Schutz ist unter der Artikelnummer 920809000011 zu beziehen.

Maintenance instruction for slip ring transmitter


WARNING!
Installation, maintenance and repair may only carried out by authorised electrically qualified
personal. Before the start of any work on the slip ring assembly it be separated from the
electrical supply.
Maintenance:
Maintenance interval: Once per year or after every 100000 revolutions.
Procedure:
1.

The slip ring assembly must be separated from the electrical source before any work takes
place.

2.

Spray a very fine film of contact oil on the slip ring ways and wire brushes. Only the
contact oil CRAMOLIN Schutz may be used.
WARNING: Too much contact oil can cause short-circuiting.

3.

After spraying the slip ring assembly with contact oil turn it 5 times 360 degrees.

Contact oil CRAMOLIN Schutz can be ordered under article no. 920809000011.

03.12.2008

P
PEINER Greifer

Schleifringbertrager 31x36A + PE, 150 A


slip-ring transmitter

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 00040328
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
38.0

18.06.2008

P
PEINER Greifer

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list

Schleifringbertrager 31x36A + PE, 150A


slip-ring transmitter
Pos.
Item

Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.

Menge
Quantity

Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.

00040328
38.0

Benennung
Description

01

920401600080

33

Schleifbgel 3xD1,2
slip bracket

02

920415000005

PE-Brstenhalter 150 A
brush holders

03

921100001319

Klemmscheibe oben, kpl.


terminal plate above, cpl.

04

921100001421

Klemmleiste
terminal strip

1/1
B 00040328

25.06.2010

-2/2-

Inhaltsverzeichnis
Contents

PEINER Greifer

Erzeugnis / Product: SW 100 DISK-L-B

Gerteausrstung Elektrik
electric equipment

Benennung

Schaltplan
wiring diagram

Description

Sach-Nr. / Subject no.:

S 23080295

2307.9288 D / E

Bestell-Nr. /

Gruppe-Nr. /

Order-no.

Group-no.

Gerteteil, Stifte

male part with pins

23079903

16.1

Gerteteil, Buchsen

female part with bushes

23079904

16.1

Kabelbaum Bron

wiring harness

23079272

16.11

Kabelbaum UW

wiring harness

23079273

16.11

Installation Elektrik

installation electric

23079288

40.0

Bei Ersatzteilbestellung ist auer der Bestellnummer das Erzeugnis, die Werks-Nr. und Kommissions-Nr.
anzugeben.
For spare part orders, the product, serial-no. and commission-no. must be given in addition to the
requisition-no.
Salzgitter Maschinenbau AG
Windmhlenbergstrae 20-22
38259 Salzgitter / Germany

Phone:
+49 53 41 / 302 647
Fax:
+49 53 41 / 302 424

E-mail:
peiner@smag.de
Internet:
www.smag.de
www.peiner.de

Board of management:
Sebastian H. Brandes (Chairman),
Jrgen Bialek
Chairman of the Supervisory Board:
Ulrich Decker

Domicile of company: Salzgitter Bad


Registration court:
Amtsgericht Braunschweig
Registration number:
HRB 201 389

-K1

nderung

3~

PE

-X03

PE

-X1.2

-W1

PE

PE

2 4 6

1 3 5

PE (37)

PE

PE

PE (37)

PE

26

-Y1

HO7RN-F3G1,5
3G1,5
-V1 +
-

-S2

25

-S1

-K1
A2

A1

22

21

-K2

-K1

A2

A1

22

21

Datum

Gepr.
Name Abt.

GK

Datum 12.03.2009Longwitz
Bearb. Longwitz

Ersatz durch:

Ersatz fr:

PeinerGreifer
Greifer

K1,K2
M1
Q1
S1
S2
V1
W1
X02,X03
X02.1
X1,X1.2
Y1

Urheberrecht nach DIN 34

Salzgitter Maschinenbau

SCHWENKWERK

-X1

-X02.1

26

CAN L

CAN L

CAN L2

CAN L1

23079288 D

NUR ZUR INFORMATION

1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 2 A

1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 2 A

1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 2 A

SCHALTPLAN

=*

27

CAN H

CAN H

CAN H2

CAN H1

SCHTZE
MOTOR
MOTORSCHUTZSCHALTER
STEUERSCHALTER *LINKS-RECHTS*
DRUCKTASTE *ENTKUPPELN*
GLEICHRICHTER
SCHLEIFRINGE
STECKVORRICHTUNGEN
STECKVORRICHTUNG CAN-BUS
KLEMMEN
MAGNETVENTIL

1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

-K2

VERDRAHTUNG IM SCHWENKWERK H07V-K 2,5 IM WELLSCHLAUCH NW29

-M1

-K2

L1 L2 L2 L3 PE

27 28 29

2 4 6

1 3 5

HO7RN-F4G2,5
4G2,5

-X1

-X02

I>> I>> I>>

5-8A

2 4 6

1 3 5

-Q1

L1
L2
L3
PE

Bl. 1
Fbl. -

-K1

nderung

3~

PE

-X03

PE

-X1.2

-W1

PE

PE

2 4 6

1 3 5

PE (37)

PE

PE

PE (37)

PE

26

-Y1

HO7RN-F3G1,5
3G1,5
-V1 +
-

-S2

25

-S1

-K1
A2

A1

22

21

-K2

-K1

Datum

Gepr.
Name Abt.

GK

Datum 19.12.2007Longwitz
Bearb. Longwitz

Ersatz durch:

Ersatz fr:

PeinerGreifer
Greifer

A2

A1

22

21

K1,K2
M1
Q1
S1
S2
V1
W1
X02,X03
X02.1
X1,X1.2
Y1

Urheberrecht nach DIN 34

Salzgitter Maschinenbau

SLEWING UNIT

-X1

-X02.1

26

CAN L

CAN L

CAN L2

CAN L1

23079288 E

ONLY FOR INFORMATION

1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 2 A

1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 2 A

1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 2 A

WIRING DIAGRAM

=**

27

CAN H

CAN H

CAN H2

CAN H1

Bl. 1
Fbl. -

CONTACTORS
MOTOR
MOTOR-PROTECTION CIRCUIT-BREAKER
OPERATION SWITCH *LEFT-RIGHT*
PUSH BUTTON *UNCOUPLE*
RECTIFIER (SUPPRESSOR)
SLIP-RINGS
PLUG CONNECTORS
PLUG CONNECTOR CAN-BUS
TERMINALS
MAGNETIC VALVE

1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

-K2

WIRING IN THE SLEWING UNIT H07V-K 2,5 IN FLEXIBLE TUBE NW29

-M1

-K2

L1 L2 L2 L3 PE

27 28 29

2 4 6

1 3 5

HO7RN-F4G2,5
4G2,5

-X1

-X02

I>> I>> I>>

5-8A

2 4 6

1 3 5

-Q1

L1
L2
L3
PE

24.11.2008

P
PEINER Greifer

Gerteteil UW-SEE
plug connection, mounted part

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 23079944
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
16.1

1/1

09.06.2009

P
PEINER Greifer

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list

Gerteteil UW-SEE, 37pol., 27A, Stifte


male part, pins
Pos.
Item

Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.

Menge
Quantity

Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.

23079903
16.1

Benennung
Description

01
02
03

00023644

37

Schrumpfschlauch CPX 50 5x25


shrink hose

12

06165984

Schlssel 309 098 000 719


mounting key

16

06172240

Gerteteilgehuse 309 013 000 554


male part

17

00022868

Stifteinsatz 309 803 160 037 151, 37polig


male insert

19

06171808

Schutzring 309 001 151 721


protective ring

20

06171801

Zwischenring 802-0105
intermediate ring

21

74731980

O-Ring 80x3 / 70 NBR/769


o-ring

22

06172265

Deckel 309 097 005 926


cover

23

06172248

Schraubensatz 100 000 000 12


set of screw

18

1/2
B 23079944

09.06.2009

P
PEINER Greifer

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list

Gerteteil UW-SEE, 37pol., 27A, Stifte


male part, pins
Pos.
Item

Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.

Menge
Quantity

Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.

23079903
16.1

Benennung
Description

24
25

06172273

Kette 021 338 020 902


chain

27

08014726

O-Ring 80x6 / 70 NBR/769


o-ring

28

06171802

Gewindering 802-0107
threaded ring

26

2/2
B 23079944

30.05.2006

P
PEINER Greifer

Gerteteil
plug connection, mounted part

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 23079997
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
16.1

1/1

28.08.2009

P
PEINER Greifer

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list

Gerteteil 3.09, Bron., 37pol., 27A, Buchsen


female part with bushes
Pos.
Item

Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.

Menge
Quantity

Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.

23079904
16.1

Benennung
Description

01
02
03

00023644

37

Schrumpfschlauch CPX 50 5x25


shrink hose

08

06171802

Gewindering 802-0107
threaded pin

09

06171809

Zwischenscheibe 802-0106
intermediate washer

10

06172306

Gerteteilgehuse 309 010 554 00


female part housing

11

00022867

Buchseneinsatz 309 703 160 037, 37polig


female insert

12

06171801

Zwischenring 802-0105
intermediate ring

13

08013040

Dichtung 309 010 113 945 00


gasket

14

06165984

Schlssel 309 098 000 719


mouting key

1/1
B 23079997

25.09.2008

P
PEINER Greifer

Kabelbaum SW LWN Bron


wiring harness

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 23079272
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
16.11

1/1

15.05.2009

P
PEINER Greifer

Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.

Kabelbaum SW LWN Bron


wiring harness
Pos.
Item

Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.

Menge
Quantity

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.

23079272
16.11

Benennung
Description

01

90017100

33

Leitung H07V-K 1x2,5 1,8 m


electric cable

02

90017108

Leitung H07V-K 1G2,5 1,8 m


electric cable

03

00024490

PVC-Isolierschlauch 35 mm 1,5 m
PVC insolating hose

07

23079904

Gerteteil 3.09, Bron, 37pol. (s. Gruppe-Nr. 16.1)


female part (see group-no. 16.1)

09

98900046

31

Adernendhlse 2,5 mm / 51342


cable end pieces

10

00027205

Quetschkabelschuh 1,5-2,5 mm / 42028


crimp type socket

08

1/1
B 23079272

25.09.2008

P
PEINER Greifer

Kabelbaum SW LWN UW
wiring harness

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
B 23079273
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.
16.11

1/1

15.05.2009

P
PEINER Greifer

Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.

Kabelbaum SW LWN UW
wiring harness
Pos.
Item

Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.

Menge
Quantity

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.

23079273
16.11

Benennung
Description

01

90017100

35

Leitung H07V-K 1x2,5 1,9 m


electric cable

02

90017108

Leitung H07V-K 1G2,5 1,9 m


electric cable

03

00024490

PVC-Isolierschlauch 35 mm 1,6 m
PVC insolating hose

07

23079903

Gerteteil UW-SEE, 37pol. (s. Gruppe-Nr. 16.1)


male part (see group-no. 16.1)

09

93140000

31

Stecker
plug

10

74731980

O-Ring 80x3
o-ring

11

98900046

Adernendhlse
cable end pieces

08

1/1
B 23079273

02.03.2010

P
PEINER Greifer

Ersatzteilliste
Spare parts list
Bestell-Nr.
Order-no.

Installation Elektrik
installation electric
Pos.
Item

Bestell - Nr.
Order - no.

Gruppe-Nr.
Group-no.

Menge
Quantity

23079288
40.0

Benennung
Description

01

23079272

Kabelbaum SW LWN Bron 31pol. (s. Gruppe-Nr. 16.11)


wiring harness (see group-no. 16.11)

02

23079273

Kabelbaum SW LWN UW 31pol. (s. Gruppe-Nr. 16.11)


wiring harness (see group-no. 16.11)

03

00030133

Gertesteckdose mit Gleichrichter und 2 m Leitung


socket with rectifier and 2 m electric cable

08

90106900

Leitung H07RN-F 4G2,5 1,5 m


electric cable

09

00023342

Kabelverschraubung M 25x1,5
cable gland

11

00040329

Einbaustecker 10pol. Stifte mit Datenleitung


male plug with cable

12

00023355

Blindstopfen-Rund M 25x1,5
blind plug

13

08014259

Vergussmasse
sealing compound

14

91440010

Spiralwickelband 1 m
wrapping tape

15

90017508

Leitung H07V-K 1G16 2,5 m


electric cable

16

00024426

Quetschkabelschuh
crimp type socket

10

1/1
B ----------

Operations manual
for
BROMMA TELESCOPIC SPREADER
TYPE: EH5U
General assembly drawing No: 1012408
Serial number: 0000
SWL: 41 tonne
Customer: Liebherr
End User: xxxx
Date of shipping: 2011

_____________________________________________________________________________________
BROMMA CONQUIP AB

00 01 ENG
rev.

Warning!
This Operations manual is intended as a guide to the use and maintenance of
Bromma spreaders.

READ AND UNDERSTAND THE MANUAL BEFORE THE SPREADER IS


PLACED INTO OPERATION!

Bromma Conquip AB or its affiliated - companies (to the extent permitted


by law) accept no liability for loss or damage suffered as a result of the use
of this manual.

If in doubt always refer to the original equipment manufacturer.

Refer at all time to the Safety precautions under section 5!

DO NOT exeed the Safe Working Load (SWL) of the spreader bar. The
Safe Working Load is found on the nameplate that is permanently affixed
to the side frame of the spreader.

__________________________________________________________________________________
BROMMA CONQUIP AB

00 02 ENG
rev.

Table of contents
1 INTRODUCTION
2 SPREADER DATA SHEET
3 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION SPREADER
Functional description
Design calculations
Safety features
In-plant testing
4 TESTING RECORDS AND CERTIFICATE
5 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
6 START-UP PROCEDURES
7 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Maintenance instructions
Periodic maintenance procedure
Lubrication instructions
Instructions for adjustment and repairs of major items
8 SPARE PARTS AND SERVICE
Spare parts list by major groups
How to order spare parts and/or service
9 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
10 ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS
11 FAULT FINDING DIAGNOSTICS
Hydraulic system
Electrical system
12 APPENDICES
Units and conversion tables
Hydraulic symbols
Electrical symbols
Cargotec Sweden AB 2009
Bromma Conquip
Box 1133
SE-164 22 Kista Sweden
www.bromma.com

_________________________________________________________________________________
BROMMA CONQUIP

00 03 ENG
rev.01

BrommaGroupManual

0-1-may02rev.00

BrommaConquip

1 Introduction
BROMMA Conquip has since 1967 been the leading manufacturer of
telescopic container handling spreaders. A great number of BROMMA
spreaders are in service today in ports and terminals around the world.
A complete range of fixed length and telescopic spreaders are available,
and each one provides high handling efficiency, excellent reliability,
ease of maintenance and repair.
This Operation Manual describes the many features of the
BROMMA spreader. It will guide you in:

Maintenance.
Repairs.
Trouble-shooting.
Service.
Spare parts.

In the event You should need additional information or support, our


sales and/or technical staff will be pleased to assist you.

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

01 01 ENG
rev.

BrommaGroupManual

0-1-may02rev.00

BrommaConquip

2 Spreader - Datasheet
Type

EH5U

Art.nr:

1012408

Container Range

20- 40

Capacity
Lifting capacity (evenly loaded)
Lifting capacity (10% gravity point off set)
Lifting lug capacity (end beam)
Lifting lug capacity (main beam)

41 tonne
41 tonne
4 x 10 tonne
4 x 10 tonne

Operating Movements
Telescoping
20 to 40 or 40 to 20
Twistlock rotation locking or unlocking 90o

30 s
1,5 s

Electrical Equipment
Power voltage
Frequency
Control voltage
Control valve
Total power consumption
Electrical protection

400 V AC
50 Hz
230 V AC
24 V DC
2x2,2+3+5,5=12,9 kW
IP 65

Hydraulic Equipment
Pump running pressure
Pump flow
Tank capacity
Normal running temperature
Filter type

100 bar
2x15 l/min
2 x 50 l
50 C
10 m

Filter
Pressure line

10 m

Corrosion protection
All surfaces are grit blasted
Interzink 72 EPA 069/073 (Interzink 72 EPA 069/073)
Intervinux VL-Serie
(Intervinux VL-Serie)
Intervinux VS-Serie
(Intervinux VS-Serie)
Min. coating thickness, total

SA 2.5
50 m
2 x 50 m
50 m
200 m

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

02 01 ENG
rev..1

BrommaGroupManual

0-1-may02rev.00

BrommaConquip

3 Technical description
GENERAL
BROMMA telescopic spreaders are fabricated as an all welded, high quality
steel, construction. Two pairs of telescopic arms, slide in the centre main
frame construction. The telescopic arms are joined together by end beams,
which house the twistlocks, guide arms and hydraulic valves.
The telescopic arms run on low friction bearing slide plates, one at each
bottom corner of the mainframe (totally 4) and on the top and bottom at the
end on each telescopic arm (totally 8). Sufficient clearance is provided
between the slide plates and the structure to allow the beams to flex,
enabling slightly distorted containers to be handled.
Lifting lugs are located inside the main frame, 2 at each end and 2 lugs in
each end beam. This makes it possible to attach slings for handling of
damaged containers or non-containerised cargo.
A built-in clearance (see General assembly drawing) under the main frame
compared to the bottom of end beam corner is incorporated. These enables
hatch covers and slightly overstuffed containers to be handled. If larger
clearances are required overweight extension legs need to be fitted.
TELESCOPIC SYSTEM
The telescopic system is driven by means of a hydraulic motor and reduction
gearbox connected to an endless chain. A valve locks the motor when it is in
non-operation. This will keep the spreader in position during operation.
This chain is fitted with blocks of springs, where it is attached to the
drawbars. The springs allow changes in the length of the spreader up to
15mm (5/8") and act as shock absorbers.
POSITIONING THE SPREADER
Positioning the spreader in the different required lengths is carried out by a
screw limit switch box (EH 5, EH 170), a system with proximity switches or a
pulse encoder (see spreader data sheet). All three systems make it possible
to adjust the length to an accuracy of 3 mm.
HYDRAULIC UNIT
The hydraulic unit is mounted on heavy-duty rubber shock absorbers in the
main frame. The unit consists of a tank, a pump/motor unit and a filter.
The hydraulic components used are designed to work at over 200 bar, which
gives a good margin to working pressure. The hydraulic valves are solenoid
operated and can be tested by hand operating.

____________________________________________________________________________________________________
1 of 2
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
03 01 ENG
rev.2

MAIN ELECTRICAL CABINET


The main electrical cabinet is mounted on heavy-duty rubber shock
absorbers and is well protected being placed on, or within the mainframe,
depending on headblock design.
TWISTLOCK
The twistlock are manoeuvred by a separate hydraulic cylinder and
controlled by two switches, indicating the locked and unlocked position. The
twistlock can be manually operated in an emergency by loosening the rear
attachment of the cylinder.
The blockading pin (landing pin) prevents electrically and mechanically the
twistlock from turning unless it is in the "up" position. This position occurs,
when the spreader is correctly "landed" on a container. During hoisting the
blockading pin is in the "down" position and prevents the twistlock from
turning.
GUIDE ARMS (Flippers, if such are fitted)
Spreaders are normally fitted with automatic, manual or fixed guidearms.
Automatic flippers are normally fitted on the corners or ends of the end
beams. They are of strong construction and are driven by a powerful
hydraulic motor, which enables easy and fast location of the spreader onto
the containers. The flipper gather is normally 155 mm (6") and has a
gathering torque of app. 1250 Nm. Each arm has a shock relief valve, which
opens at a pre-set pressure of 50 bar above the normal working pressure,
which gives a resistance torque in down position of app. 1800 Nm. As soon
as the shock load ends the flipper returns to the vertical position.
The flipper is controlled by solenoid valves and can be manually operated.
The speed of the flipper is approximately 180 in 6 seconds and is controlled
by an orifice plug in the pipe connection to the motor.
Manual flippers can be manually retracted within the plan area of the
spreader by the removal of the fixing bolts.
A specially designed slotted adapter fits fixed flippers to the end of beam. If
the guide arm gets damaged and the fastening bolts are sheared, these bolts
can be easily slid out of the retaining slot for replacement.
SERVICE PANEL (If such is fitted.)
The service panel makes it possible to operate the spreader when it is
not connected to the crane for testing the functions as twistlocks,
telescoping, flippers etc. This is an option facility.

____________________________________________________________________________________________________
2 of 2
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
03 01 ENG
rev.2

Design calculations
The spreader structure is designed according to DIN 15018 and to the
following loading group which represents a container handling crane.

HOISTING GROUP H2
LOADING GROUP B4

LIFTING CASES
The following lifting cases are considered:
1. Most frequent load case
A symmetrically loaded container of 41 tonnes. The permissible stress is
determined by analysis of direct loading and fatigue conditions. Depending
on intensity of use the structure is suitable for:
2 X 106 lifting cycles
"H load case is determining.
2. Exceptional load cases
Permissible stresses are determined by analysis of direct loading only.
a) A container of 30,5 tonnes weight but loaded unsymmetrically by 10%
in the longitudinal direction.
"H.Z" load case is determining.
b) A container of 30,5 tonnes weight but loaded unsymmetrically by 10%
in the longitudinal and lateral direction.
"H.S" load case is determining

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

03 02 ENG
rev.

Safety features
The following safety features are normally included in the crane:
1. The spreader should only be hoisted/lowered when all four twistlocks are
fully locked/unlocked.
2. The spreader twistlocks should be locked/unlocked when the spreader is
Properly "landed" on a container. This being when all four landing switches
are actuated.
3. A delay feature on the twistlocks locked/unlocked circuit is installed to
ensure the spreader is properly "landed" and not bouncing. This is in the
form of a timer whom is adjustable, but normally set to between 1 and 2
seconds.
4. During hoisting the four blockading pins move to the "down" position.
This prevents electrically the twistlocks from moving.
NOTE ! When carrying out maintenance on the twistlocks, the blockading pin clamps can
be fitted to each corner, to by pass the electric and mechanical blockading when running
the twistlock.

5. Telescoping of the spreader is prevented unless all four blockading pins


are in the "down" position and the twistlocks are unlocked.
Individual switches indicate twistlocks locked, twistlocks unlocked and
blockading pins "up".
The following safety features are fitted on the spreader:
6. A mechanical blockading device prevents each twistlock from locking/
unlocking unless the blockading pin is "up" position.

__________________________________________________________________________________
BROMMA CONQUIP AB

03 03 ENG
rev.

In-plant testing
STRUCTURAL
Each spreader is fully proof tested in the factory to a minimum of 50%
overload prior to delivery. The proof test loading report enclosed illustrates the
loads applied to the spreader.
All lifting lugs are also proof tested in the factory.
The testing is witnessed and certified by a third part inspection official.
All spreader twistlocks are individually proof tested, stamped and certified to a
loading of 37 tonne.
FUNCTIONAL
Each spreader is run in the factory prior to delivery being controlled by a
specially designed simulator.

__________________________________________________________________________________
BROMMA CONQUIP AB

03 04 ENG
rev. x

BrommaGroupManual

0-1-may02rev.00

BrommaConquip

4 Testing records and certificates


See Appendix

______________________________________________________________________________________________________
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
04 01 ENG
rev.

BrommaGroupManual

0-1-may02rev.00

BrommaConquip

5 Safety precautions
Warnings

READ AND UNDERSTAND THE MANUAL BEFORE THE SPREADER IS PUT


INTO OPERATION.
The manual contains vital information for the safety of personnel and the
correct use of the spreader.
Bromma Group will not accept any liability for the use of the spreader for
any purposes outside what is described in the manual.
DO NOT exeed the Safe Working Load (SWL) of the spreader bar. The Safe
Working Load is shown on the nameplate that is permanently affixed to the
side frame of the spreader.

Safety precautions
1. The spreader shall be operated and serviced only by authorized
personnel.
2. The spreader must only be used for the purpose for which it is
designed.
3. DO NOT change system settings and functions.
4. Perform a functional test after any maintenance or repair work.
5. Stay clear of the spreader when in operation.
6. Stay clear of all moving parts, such as guide arms (flippers), moving
beams, telescopic chains, etc. A safe distance is 5 meters.
7. DO NOT connect or disconnect electrical connectors while the power is
on.
8. DO NOT tamper with hydraulic pressure settings once adjusted by
qualified personnel. See chapter 9. Hydraulic system for proper
pressure adjustment.
9. DO NOT unlock the spreader while a container is suspended in the air. It
could cause personnel injury or property damage.

1 of 2

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

05 01 ENG
rev.. 3

10. Maintain adjustment of all electrical and hydraulic components


11. Inspect the spreader for damage daily.
12. Care must be taken when performing any maintenance inside the
spreader frame. It must be carried out under extreme caution and by
personnel familiar with risks related to spreader function and
movements. Serious injury by crushing can occur
13. Contact Bromma Conquip AB before doing any repair work on the
spreader apart from replacing normal wear parts.
14. DO NOT walk or stand beneath the spreader bar during operation.
15. DO NOT attempt to lift a container that is not level (+/- 5).
16. DO NOT crawl beneath a spreader bar for maintenance, repair or
adjustment. Never put any body extremity beneath the spreader bar.
17. NEVER STAND BENEATH A SUSPENDED LOAD.
18. DO NOT attempt to restrain the movement of a container, whether laden
or empty, by hand or by tagline.
19. DO NOT stand between a container and any construction that many
prevent your movement to safety. A definite hazard exists that could
cause serious injury or death by being crushed between the container
and an obstruction (such as a building or another container).
20. Mobile work platforms which are used in repair and service work on the
spreader must be equipped with safety rails and kick plates.
21. It is incumbent on the operator in charge of the crane to restrict the
movements of the crane when repair or service work is being performed
on crane-mounted spreader.
22. The tower must be moved back to the centre of the spreader before it
leaves the container. There must be a good clearance between the
Spreader and the container before slewing the crane boom.
23. When welding might be needed on the spreader with SCS2 assembled,
make sure that it is properly grounded or dismantle the plug connection
and earth cable.

2 of 2

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

05 01 ENG
rev.. 3

WARNING!
Because this spreader is equipped with single-coil flipper
arm valves, the following may occur:
If the operating voltage to the flipper arm valves
disappears (intentionally or accidentally), the FLIPPER
ARMS move upwards to their starting position.
If EMERGENCY SPREADER STOP is used or if the
power supply to the electric motor of the hydraulic power
unit is cut of in some other way, the flipper arms stop
immediately. The flipper arms start moving again when
the power supply to the electric motor of the hydraulic
power unit is restored.
It is essential to inform the personnel who work close to
the spreader about this.

_____________________________________________________________
BROMMA CONQUIP AB

05 02s ENG.
rev.

BrommaGroupManual

0-1-may02rev.00

BrommaConquip

6 Start - Up procedure
ASSEMBLY OF TOWER (drg no 34476)
1 Check spreader and tower for damage.
2 Suspend the tower from a suitable forklift or crane (tower weight 1,4 t)
using
the main lifting pin (pos 1).
3 Remove the protective material from the robalon pads on tower (pos 2).
Remove the drive sprocket cover (pos 6).
Remove the (2) lifting lugs from main frame of the spreader at the
assembly end
(pos 3).
5 Lower the flipper arm, at assembly end of the spreader, by slackening
hydraulic hoses on the motor.
NOTE: Take care that flipper does not fall down and cause injury!
6 Remove top fixings for rubber covers (pos 4).
7 Remove lamp assembly by taking out the quick release fastening from
the four pins and lay the lamp assembly in the main frame.
8 Release the gravity point chain, by removing the two screws and the
locking device from adjuster.
9 You are now able to slide the tower into the main frame close to the
centre.
Note the direction of assembly. Arrows are painted on the tower and
frame.
10 Now replace the lamp assembly, rubber covers and lifting lugs. If the
flipper is rise at this time, care should be taken as it is liable to fall, now
that the motor is empty.

______________________________________________________________________________________________________
1
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
06 02 ENG
rev.

11 Remove the drive sprocket cover (pos 6).


It is now possible to install the chain, complete with the anchor block
fitted.
The chain goes, under the first sprocket, over the centre one and under
the third.
To assist with the chain installation, pull the brake release lever, towards
the back of the motor. It is then possible to turn the motor, using the
handle supplied.
12 Replace the chain back into it's fixing point and tighten the adjusting
screws, until the chain is tight (allow a sag of about 30 mm and place the
tower in middle position) and replace the locking device. Grease the chain.
13 Replace sprocket cover.
14 Pass the main plug up through the tower and fix conduit pipes with screws
supplied.
15 Place the cable into the top support clamp.
16 Connect the tower motor. The connections are marked u1 and w1 to give
correct position.
NOTE: Take care, incorrect rotation may result in serious damage!
17 Secure the cable to bracket with suitable cable ties.
18 Fix limit switch detection bar into place (pos 7).
19 Check all bolts are tight and the spreader is clear of all discarded material
and tools. Take care that nothing had fallen into the chain.

______________________________________________________________________________________________________
2
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
06 02 ENG
rev.

TOWER FUNCTIONS AND TESTING


The tower function is to level/unlevel loaded containers. Any other use of the
tower is an abuse of the equipment and could result in serious damage.
When the spreader is locked onto a container, it is possible to move the tower
in any direction. The tower will stay where it is placed. The return to the middle
position is done by the crane driver. When he has driven the tower to yellow or
blue, it goes always to the middle position.
To test the newly assembled unit, place the blockading pin clamps onto the
spreader and lock the twistlocks. With the spreader on the ground, commence
to travel the tower towards one end of the spreader. Now hold a piece of
metal, i.e. spanner or screwdriver, in front of the stop switch, for the end that
the tower is travelling. The tower should now stop.
Try the other direction. If both of the limits work, travel the tower to both ends
of the spreader, to confirm the limits work on the detection bar. When at each
end, unlock the twistlocks and release a clamp, to confirm the tower returns to
it's centre position. If any of these functions fail, please seek advice.
WARNING!
Use the tower only to level loads, or serious damage may occur!
Never use the hand crank on the motor with power connected, or serious
injury may occur!

______________________________________________________________________________________________________
3
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
06 02 ENG
rev.

Start - Up the spreader


1. Before any connection to container crane, place the main frame of the spreader
on trestles or similar about 0,7 m height and in such a way that the flipper arms
can be lowered.
2 Inspect the spreader for visible damage.
3. Connect the main current and control supply to the spreader. Connect the 24
pin plug to the service panel.
4. Start the electric motor of the hydraulic units by turning the pump on switch on
service panel.
5. For testing of the twistlocks all 4 blockading pins should be in up position. This
is achieved by using a blockading pin clamp. In the down position the
blockading pins electrically and mechanically block all twistlock rotation.
6. Test all functions of the spreader using the push buttons and switches on
service panel.

the

a) When pump on switch is on, both electric motors should be running in gable
ends.
b) Operate the push buttons to put the spreader in the different length positions.
As an additional length, check that the twistlock centre length is marked on
the plate positioned on side of the main beam.
c) Check that the flippers works in pairs along the length of the spreader,
individually at the gable ends, or all together by pressing the appropriate
buttons.
d) Check that when clamps are fitted to the blockading pins and all pins are up,
this will be indicated by the white lights on the spreader.
e) Check that the twistlocks lock/unlock and that the light indicators on the top
of the spreader main frame indicate red when locked and green when
unlocked.
7. Check that the pump operating pressure is 100 bar.

______________________________________________________________________________________________________
4
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
06 02 ENG
rev.

8. Check each end hydraulic assembly to ensure there are no oil leaks.
9. Note that the solenoid valves operating flippers and twistlocks can be manually
operated if required.This is achieved by pushing the end of the solenoid with a
small screwdriver. As power is generally always on the solenoid, the plug
connection has to be disconnected first.
10. Service and lubrication should be carried out in accordance with the
lubrication manual.

______________________________________________________________________________________________________
5
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
06 02 ENG
rev.

7 Maintenance procedures
Maintenance Instructions
Pos. 1

TWISTLOCK (drg no 22606)


All twistlock are to be greased through the grease nipples, 4 (8 twinlift) per
spreader.

Pos. 2a

CYLINDER EAR (drg no 22606)


Piston rod ends are to be greased through the grease nipples, 8 (24 twinlift)
per spreader.

Pos. 2b

SPHERICAL BEARING (drg no 22606)


Spherical bearings are to be greased, 4 (8 twinlift) per spreader.

Pos. 3

HYDRAULIC UNIT (drg no 22607)


Oil is to be changed after first 50 hours, then after every 1000 hours.
Equal oil can be used (pls refer to hydraulic parts list).

Pos. 4

OIL FILTER (drg no 22607)


Filter is to be changed after first 50 hours, then after every 1000 hours of
operation or when the indicator is red.

Pos. 5

LIFTING SHAFTS (drg no 22606)


(If the spreader/headblock is equipped with lifting shafts).
ACTION! To be greased.

Pos. 6

GLIDE PLATE (drg no 22619)


The robalon glide plates are to be replaced when the thickness is down to
17 mm.
ACTION! To be checked.

______________________________________________________________________________________________________
1 of 2
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
07 01 ENG
rev 2

Pos. 7

GUIDE ARMS (drg no 22606)


Shafts are to be greased.

Pos. 9a

ALL ROLLER CHAINS (drg no 22606)


Roller chains and tension wheels are to be checked for abrasion and greased.

Pos. 9b

TENSION WHEEL (drg no 22606)


Bearings at the pedestal are to be greased through grease nipples.

Pos. 10

SIGNAL LAMPS (drg no 22619)


Vibration proof glow lamp.
ACTION! To be checked.

Pos. 11

TELESCOPIC BEAMS (drg no 22606)


To be greased as follows:
1. In 20'- position, through grease nipple underneath the mainframe approx.
50g/week.
2. In fully expanded position, with a brush on the sliding area under the
telescopic beams approx. 100g/ at interval min.1000 hour. The amount of
grease and service interval depends on spreader use and environmental
circumstances, which vary from place to place.

______________________________________________________________________________________________________
2 of 2
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
07 01 ENG
rev 2

Page 1 of 1
Article No:
Drawing No:
Serial No:
Customer:
Standard:
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

Quant
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
6
3
1
4
2
1
4
6
3
6
3
1

1002945
1002945
Title
TWISTLOCK PIN
GUIDE BLOCK
SPHERICAL WASHER
TWISTLOCK ARM, ASSY.
TWISTLOCK KEY
NUT
SCREW
SPACER RING
HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
BLOCKADING PIN
SPRING
NUT LOCK-KING
WASHER NORD-LOCK
LOCK PIN
GREASE FITTING
SWITCH ATTACH. STD.
SCREW
SWITCH PAD h=10
SCREW
SCREW
BLOCKADING PIECE
NUT
WASHER
BOLTING PLATE
WASHER NORD-LOCK
COVER PLATE DEP4
SENSOR PLATE ASSY. LEFT

TWISTLOCK ASSEMBLY
ISO, STD, LEFT
BGS

Material / Article No.

sign:
rev:

PWH
b / SC

Dwg No.
1000431
1000430
41683
43653
1000434
1000432

Art. No.
1000431
1000430
53968
43653
1000434
1000432
1000600
54049
74147
37704
70429
77891
701440
74044
71328
74970
1000596
1001482
1000585
1000587
43654
76460
77798
48916
701433
79850
1002453

A4
41731
37704
A4
A4

A4
1001482
A4
A4
43654
A4
A4
48916
A4
1002453

date
18.2.2005
23.1.2007

Remarks

TYPE 1
(M39x4-6H)
M6S 8x75, Art. No. was 70165
(CA 32/20-100/65)
FZB
SF-TF 4.5x22x90 SS 1774-04
M12, Art. No was 75055
M12, Art. No. was 75295
R.R 3.0
R 1/8"
(SENSOR D=30)
M6S 8x50, Art. No. was 75226
M6S 6x55, Art. No. was 75694
M6S 6x65, Art. No. was 700686
FZB
LOC-KING M8, Art. No. was 75090
BRB 8.4x16x1.6, Art. No. was 75328
FZB
M6, Art. No. was 75268
FZB
FZB

Page 1 of 1
Article No:
Drawing No:
Serial No:
Customer:
Standard:
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

Quant
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
6
3
1
4
2
1
4
6
3
6
3
1

1002946
1002946
Title
TWISTLOCK PIN
GUIDE BLOCK
SPHERICAL WASHER
TWISTLOCK ARM, ASSY.
TWISTLOCK KEY
NUT
SCREW
SPACER RING
HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
BLOCKADING PIN
SPRING
NUT LOCK-KING
WASHER NORD-LOCK
LOCK PIN
GREASE FITTING
SWITCH ATTACH. STD.
SCREW
SWITCH PAD h=10
SCREW
SCREW
BLOCKADING PIECE
NUT
WASHER
BOLTING PLATE
WASHER NORD-LOCK
COVER PLATE DEP4
SENSOR PLATE ASSY. RIGHT

TWISTLOCK ASSEMBLY
ISO, STD, RIGHT
BGS

Material / Article No.

sign:
rev:

PWH
b / SC

Dwg No.
1000431
1000430
41683
43653
1000434
1000432

Art. No.
1000431
1000430
53968
57059
1000434
1000432
1000600
54049
74147
37704
70429
77891
701440
74044
71328
74970
1000596
1001482
1000585
1000587
43654
76460
77798
48916
701433
79850
1002454

A4
41731
37704
A4
A4

A4
1001482
A4
A4
43654
A4
A4
48916
A4
1002454

date
18.2.2005
23.1.2007

Remarks

TYPE 2
(M39x4-6H)
M6S 8x75, Art. No. was 70165
(CA 32/20-100/65)
FZB
SF-TF 4.5x22x90 SS 1774-04
M12, Art. No was 75055
M12, Art. No. was 75295
R.R 3.0
R 1/8"
(SENSOR D=30)
M6S 8x50, Art. No. was 75226
M6S 6x55, Art. No. was 75694
M6S 6x65, Art. No. was 700686
FZB
LOC-KING M8, Art. No. was 75090
BRB 8.4x16x1.6, Art. No. was 75328
FZB
M6, Art. No. was 75268
FZB
FZB

A-A
1:5

H:\DWG\A3\A38\38073A.dwg

1 of 2

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE


RUNNING-IN OF A NEW SPREADER
After 50 and 250 hours
1. Lubricate and check the various points as per the lubrication instructions.
2. Check the telescopic chain. Tighten if it can be moved more than 25 mm
in vertical direction.
EVERY 100 WORKING HOURS

Nut

1. Twistlock: Check the nut and the floating


mechanism and ensure that all parts are
properly tightened down. Check that the
locking pin can be moved easily and that it
indicates the correct position
(see 'Adjusting the locking pin').
2. Check that all hydraulic tank mountings are tight.

Twistlock pin

3. Check that the hydraulic pump pressure is correct.


4. Carefully inspect all hoses, hose clips and hose connections. Defective
hydraulic hoses and connections may cause personal injury when jets of
liquid escape under high pressure.
5. Leaking hose connections and defective hoses should be rectified
immediately.
EVERY 1000 WORKING HOURS
Lubricate and check the various points as per the lubrication instructions.
CAUTION! When working on or in the vicinity of the spreader the electrical
supply to the spreader should be disconnected, if possible, to prevent
personal injury and material damage. This can be done using the main switch
or by disconnecting the power cable.
If the work requires that the electrical supply remains connected then staff on
or in the vicinity of the spreader must be informed that it could move.

1 of 10

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

07 02 ENG
rev. x

TWISTLOCK MAINTENANCE
Every 3000 working hours (100,000 containers handled2 or once annually3)
1. Dismantle all four twistlocks (eight on twin-liftspreaders).

Nut

2. Inspect all parts. Look for any damage which


necessitate their replacement.

Spherical
washer

3. Check that there are no cracks (or other faults)


in the threads of the twistlock pins or 'heads'.
Use penetrating fluid to detect fissures.
4. Replace the twistlock pin if cracks are detected.

Twistlock
pin

5. Clean all parts.


6. Lubricate the parts.
7. Reassemble the twistlocks.

Every 6000 working hours (200,000 containers handled4 or every other


year5)
The twistlock pins and the spherical washers6 shall be replaced.
NOTE. See the twistlock drawing and/or the separate adjustment instructions
for the adjustment of the twistlock end stop switches after reassembly.

-------------------------2

If the spreader is equipped with twistlock counter


If there is no hour counter or twistlockcounter
4
If the spreader is equipped with twistlock counter
5
If there is no hour counter or twistlock counter
6
Only for floating twistlocks
3

2 of 10

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

07 02 ENG
rev. x

PROCEDURE FOR ADJUSTMENT AND REPAIR


OF MAJOR ITEMS OF THE SPREADER
REPLACING THE HYDRAULIC PUMP
When ordering a new hydraulic pump always state the direction of rotation as
marked on the old pump housing.
To replace the hydraulic pump (free-standing pump unit):
1.Turn off the electrical supply using the main switch.
2. Disconnect the inlet , outlet hoses and drainhoses from the pump.
3. Reconnect the inlet and outlet hoses once the pump has been fitted.
4. Reconnect the drain hose to the pump.
5. See drawing no.45316 for setting the pump flow and pressure.
NOTE. Every time the pump is emptied, new oil must be added until it starts
to run out of the drain hose.
SHOCK RELIEF VALVES, general
These are cross over relief valves which relieves excess hydraulic pressure
caused by external forces on the flipper arms or the telescopic system. The
rising hydraulic pressure acts against the spring to open the flow path to the
other port.
All leakages through these valves at the normal operating pressure of the
pump (lower setting than the pump's operating pressure) cause a substantial
increase in the temperature of the hydraulic oil. Leaks of this type are often
indicated by a hissing sound coming from the relief valve.
Possible causes are:
* Slides jamming due to poor hydraulic oil
* Defective seals
* Incorrect pressure setting

3 of 10

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

07 02 ENG
rev. x

ADJUSTING THE TELESCOPIC CHAIN


(Drawing no. 38073)
1. Run the spreader to the maximum
position (40 foot).
2. Disconnect the power.
3. Remove the locking screws from
the adjuster nut.
4. Tighten the adjuster nuts on both sides
with a torque wrench to 50 Nm (37 ft-lbs.)
alternately one turn at a time . It is important
to adjust both sides equally. If not done
properly this could cause future problems
in operation and reduce the life of the chain.
5. Reinstall the locking screws in the adjusting nut .

Locking
screws

Adjusting
nut

Cotter pin

Chain lock

REPLACING A BROKEN CHAIN


If the chain should break and jump over the chain wheel, repair as follows:
1. Disconnect the electrical supply in the spreader control cabinet by turning
off the main switch.
2. Place the telescopic beams in the approximate position for a 30 foot
container using a fork lift truck or similar.
3. Turn the adjusting nut counterclockwise a quarter of a turn.
4. Remove the chain pin connected to the shock absorber by pulling out the
cotter pin.
5. Remove the chain.
6. Install a new chain or insert a joining link and reinstall the chain and the
adjusting nut.
7. Perform the steps described above (Adjusting the telescopic chain).
8. Connect the power supply and make a fine adjustment as per the
instructions in 'Setting the spreader length'.
9. Check the distance between the twistlocks as per the instructions in
Spreader lengths with different twistlocks'.
10. Lubricate the chain according to drawing 22808, Lubrication points.

4 of 10

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

07 02 ENG
rev. x

REPLACING ROBALON PLATES


Robalon plate in main frame
1. Extend the spreader to at least the 30 foot position.
2. Remove the locking plate and replace the Robalon plate.

Telescopic beam lower plates


1. Set the spreader to at least the 20 foot position.
2. Remove the electrical connectors from the electromagnetic telescopic
valves.
3. Operate the telescopic drive by manually pressing the valves until the
Robalon plate mounting bolts are accessible through the aperture in the
lower flange of the main beam. Replace the plates.

Telescopic beam upper plates


1. Set the spreader to at least the 20 foot position.
2. Remove the electrical connectors from the electromagnetic telescopic
valves.
3. Operate the telescopic drive by manually pressing the valves until the
Robalon plate mounting bolts are accessible.
4. Replace the plates.

DISMANTLING THE TELESCOPIC BEAMS AND END BEAM UNIT


If the telescopic beams require checking.
1. Start by removing all the Robalon plates from the ends of telescopic
beams. Leave the plates on the main frame in place.
2. Disconnect the power cables and the hydraulic hoses from the end units.
Seal all hydraulic hoses correctly.
3. Remove the stud from the drawbar connection in the end beam.
4. Take the weight off the end unit using a fork lift truck and extend the unit to
the 40 foot position.
5 of 10

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

07 02 ENG
rev. x

5. Secure a spacer between the telescopic beams to prevent lateral


movement.
6. Extract the beams from the main frame and inspect them as required.
6. Reassemble the beams and the end units in the reverse order to that in
the instructions above.

FLIPPER ARM UNIT (AUTOMATIC FLIPPER ARMS)


1. Remove the outlet plug to alter flipper arm speed.
NOTE. When replacing the flipper arm motor ensure that the outlet plug is
correctly positioned.
2. Removing and installing bearings
a) Remove the flipper arms
b) Remove the key
c) Drift out the shaft. Once the shaft has been removed the bearing will be
pushed out by the middle key.
d) Drift out the second bearing.
e) Install the parts in the reverse order to dismantle except for that both
bearings have to be drifted into position using a pipe of a suitable bore.

6 of 10

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

07 02 ENG
rev. x

ADJUSTING SPREADER LENGTH


Sensors:
a) Adjust the centre to centre distance
between twistlocks for each position
by moving the sensors.
b) For 30' check the centre to centre
distance between twistlock both when
extending and retracing the spreader.
The accurate distances between the
twistlocks are shown in Spreader
length with different twistlocks.

Sensor

Sensor
plate

SPREADER LENGTH WITH TWISTLOCKS


BROMMA ISO Twistlock
20'
30'
Floating:

5852

8918

40'
11984

ADJUSTING THE LANDING PIN


a) Attach blockading pin clamps
at three of the corners.
b) At the fourth corner, press the
pin upwards.
c) When the lower part of the pin
is 6 - 7 mm from the bottom plate
of the corner, the lamp indicating
"spreader landed", shall go on.

Landing
switch

d) If the distance is not correct,


adjust the landing switch and
do the test again.

Landing pin

7 of 10

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

07 02 ENG
rev. x

e) Proceed in the same way for all four corners.


DISMOUNTING THE TWISTLOCK PIN
1. Dismout the twistlock cylinder as
described on the next page.
2. Remove the M6 screw and nut
from the top of the twistlock.
3. Grab hold of twistlock head.
4. Slack off the twistlock nut.
5. Lower the twistlock pin and guide
block.
6. Do not lose the twistlock pin key.

Twistlock
nut

M6 nut

M6 screw

Guide
neck

Twistlock
MOUNTING
housing
1. Perform the steps above in the
Twistlock
head
reverse order.
2. Carry out the adjustment below
3. before mounting the M6 screw and nut.
4. Lubricate according to instructions on drawing 22808, Lubrication points.

Distance between top of twistlock head


and bottom of guide block 1-2 mm

Checking the Float


1. Grab hold of the twistlock head.
2. Push or pull the twistlock to one of the corners.
3. Ensure the guide block is touching the twistlock
housing bottom plate. If not, the twistlock needs to be
adjusted /lowered.
4. If the twistlock is touching the bottom plate, press the
twistlock upwards while holding it in the corner.
5. The twistlock should be moving up slightly. If it
moves a lot, adjust it higher.
6. If the twistlock does not move at all, it needs to be
adjusted down.
Adjusting
1. Remove the M6 screw from the top of the twistlock.
2. To lower the twistlock, loosen the twistlock nut
slightly. To raise the twistlock, tighten the nut.
The distance between the top of twistlock head and the
bottom of guide block 1 -2 mm
3. Recheck the float of the twistlock.
4. Reinstall the M6 screw.

8 of 10

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

Twistlock nut
Spherical
washer

Key

Twistlock pin

Twistlock
head
07 02 ENG
rev. x

Removing the Twistlock Cylinder


1. Make sure the power supply is disconnected
and the oil pressure is relieved from the
Split pin
system.
2. Remove the hoses from the cylinder.
3. To avoid oil leakage, thread a plastic bag Spacer
over the end of the hoses and secure
ring
them with straps.
4. Pull out the split pins. Remove the spacer
rings and the cylinder.
Installing the Twistlock Cylinder
1. Perform the steps above in the reverse
order.
2. The hoses must be tightened to 95 Nm
(70 ft-lbs) torque.
3. De-aerate the system by running the
cylinder several times.

Cylinder

Removing Sensors
1. Unscrew the cable connection from
the sensor.
2. Loosen the two screws on the switch
attachment.
3. Remove the sensor.

Sensor
Installing Sensors
1. Perform the steps above in the reverse
order, using blue Loctite to the cable
connection.
2. The distance between sensor face and
flag is approximately 5-6 mm. Check
the sensor by grabbing the twistlock
head and moving it around in different
positions. If the signal is lost, adjust the
sensor closer to its flag. Make sure the
flag does not come in contact with
the sensor.

9 of 10

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

Signal
cable
connection

07 02 ENG
rev. x

Checking the tower motor brake


1. Disconnect the power.
2. Remove the crank from its stowed position in the tower.
3. Install the crank at the rear end of the
tower motor.
4. Place a torque wrench in the socket on the crank
5. Adjust the torque to 65 Nm.
6. If the torque wrench releases as the 65 Nm torque is
reached, the brake adjustment is OK. If it does not release and
the motorshaft rotates, the brake must be adjusted.
See Inspection and maintenance of BGM8 Tower motor
at the end of this section.

Tower
motor

Crank

65 Nm

Torque
wrench

10 of 10

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

07 02 ENG
rev. x

Bromma Manual

Important tightening torques EH5/EH170


Tower and
main frame

434Nm

222Nm

434Nm
434Nm

434Nm

End beam

91Nm

6.5 Nm

52Nm

Telescopic motor
EH5 / EH170

Telescopic motor
EH5U / EH170U

434Nm

52Nm
434Nm

0-1- Month. 03 rev.00

Bromma Conquip

Bromma Manual

Limit switch box


EH5 / EH170
91Nm

Twistlock
EH5 / EH170

Twistlock
EH5U / EH170U

100 Nm
95 Nm

91Nm

Flipper motor and gearbox


250Nm
after 200
test
cycles

385Nm
91Nm

103Nm
after 200
test cycles

Bromma Conquip

0-2- Month. 03 .00


rev

Inspection and maintenance periods

Inspection and Maintenance

8.1

Inspection and maintenance periods


Equ ipm ent/com po nen ts

Frequency

BMG4 =Telescopic Motor

Every Year

BMG8 = Tower Motor

Every third month

What to do ?
Inspecting the brake:
Mea sure and set working air gap
brake disc, lining
P ressure plate
C arrier / gearing
P ressure rings
E xtract the ab raded ma tter
Inspect the switch elemen ts and
repla ce if necessary (e.g . in case o f
burn-out)

Inspection and maintenance of brake BMG 4 and 8

8.6

Inspection and maintenance of brake


BMG4 = Telescopic Motor
BMG8 = Tower Motor

9
8
6

5
2

22
21
e
10
b

20

19

a
15
11

12 13

14

16

17

18

Inspection and maintenance of brake BMG 4 and 8

Inspecting brake BMG 4 and 8

, setting the working air gap

1. Isolate the moto r and brake from the supply, safeguarding them against
un inten tional power -up.
2. Remove the following:
If fitted, forced- cooling fan for
motor and brake maintenance.
F lange co ver or fa n guard (21 ).
3. Pu sh the rubber sealing co llar (5) aside.
R elease the clip to do this, if necessary .
E xtract the abr aded ma tter.
4. Measure the brake disc (7 ):
If the brak e d isc is:
9 mm on b rake motors up to size 100 .(BMG4)
10 mm on bra ke motor s up to size 1 12.(BMG8)
Fit a new brake disc ( Section "Ch anging brake disc on BMG

4 and 8

Inspection and maintenance of brake BMG 4 and 8

Changing thebrake disk BMG 4 and 8


When fitting a ne w brake disc, in spect the other removed pa rts as well and fit new one s
if nece ss ary
1. Iso late the moto r and brake from the supply,, safeguarding them against
un inten tional power -up.
2. Remove the following:
If fitted, forced coolin g fan
F lange co ver or fa n guard (21 ), ci rclip (2 0) and fan (19).
3. Rem ove the ru bber sea ling colla r (5 ) an d the ma nual brake release:
S etting nuts ( 18), con ica l coil sp rings (1 7), studs (16), rele ase lever (1 5), dowel
pin (1 4).
4. Unscr ew hex nuts (1 0e ), ca refully pull off the brake co il body (1 2) (brake ca ble!) an d
take out the brak e spr ings (11).
5. Rem ove the dam ping plate (9 ), pres sur e pla te (8) and brake disc (7, 7b) an d cle an
the br ak e com ponents .
6. Fit a ne w brake d isc.
7. Re- install th e br ake comp onents.
E xcept fo r the r ubber sea ling colla r, fan and fan guard, se t the working air gap
( Inspe cting brake BMG 4 and 8, settin g the wor king air gap , points 5
through 8)
8. With m anual brake r elease: Use se tting n uts to set the flo ating clear ance "s"
between the conical co il springs (pressed flat) an d the settin g nuts ( following
illustration).

Brak e
BMG 4 and 8

Floa ting clear ance s [mm]


2

Importan t: This flo ating clerance "s" is necessary so that the pressure plate
can move up as the brake lining wears. Otherwise, reliable braking is not
gu ara nteed.
9. Fit the r ubber sea ling colla r ba ck in place and re-install th e dismantled pa rts.

Note:

T he locka ble man ual brake r elea s e ( type HF) is a lready r elea s ed if a re sistan ce is
encountered whe n ope rating the gr ub scre w.
T he se lf-reengaging manual b rake re lea s e (type HR) ca n be operated with normal
hand pressu re.
Imp ortant: In brake motors with self-reengaging manual brake release, the
manual brake release lever must be removed after startup/maintenance. A bracket
is provided for storing it on the outside of the motor.

Inspection and maintenance of brake BMG 4 and 8

Changing Springs

1. Isolate the moto r and brake from the supply, safeguarding them against
un inten tional po wer -up.
2. Remove the following:
If fitted, fo rced -cooling fan ,
For motor and brake ma intenance .
F lange cover or fa n guard (21 ), ci rclip (2 0) and fan (19).
3. Remove the ru bber sea ling colla r (5) an d the ma nual brake release:
s etting nuts (18 ), conical coil sp rings (1 7), studs ( 16) , release le ver ( 15) , dowel
pin (1 4).
4. Unscrew he x nuts ( 10e ), pull o ff the co il body ( 12) .
B y app rox. 50 mm (watch the bra ke ca ble!) .
5. Cha nge

brake springs (11).

P os ition the bra ke sp rings symme trically.


6. Re- install th e br ake components..
E xcept fo r the r ubber sea ling colla r, fan an d fan gu ard,
set the wor king air ga p ( Ins pecting brake BMG 4 and 8 setting the
working air gap , points 5 th rough 8)
7. With manual brake release: Use setting nuts to s et floating c learance "s" between
the co nical coil springs (pressed fla t) an d the setting nuts ( following illustration.)

Brak e

Floa ting clear ance s [mm]

BMG 4 and 8

Importan t: This floating clearance "s" is necessary so that the pressure plate
can move up as the brake lining wears. Otherwise, reliable braking is not
gu aranteed.
8. Fit the rubber sealing colla r ba ck in place and re-install th e dismantled pa rts.

Note

Fit new settingnuts (18) an d hexag on nuts ( 10e ) if the re moval pr oced ure is r epeated!

kVA

i
9.3

Brak e
type

Work done, working air gap, braking torques of brake BMG 4 - 8

P Hz

Work done, working air gap, braking torques of brake BMG 4-8

Fo r
motor size

Work do ne
until
main tenance
[10 6 J]

Workin g air gap


[mm]
min. 1)

0.25

ma x.

Br aking torque se ttings


Br aking
torque
[N m]

Type an d n o. of
springs

Order n umber o f
spr ings

Nor mal

Norma l

Red

Red

0.6

135 150 8 135 151 6


BMG 4

BMG 8

1)

100

112M
132S

40

75

260

600

0.3

1.2

184 845 3 135 570 8

Please note when checking the air gap:


Parallelism tolerances on the brake disk may give rice to deviation of 0.1 after
a test run.

A ddres s lis t

C o n t a c t y o u r B R O M M A l o c a l r e p r e s e n t a t i v e o r S E W A ddres s es below.
G ermany
Headquarters
P roduc tion
S ales
S ervic e

B ruc hs al

S E W-E UR ODR IV E G mbH & C o


E rnst-B lickle-S tra e 42
D-76646 B ruchs al
P.O. B ox
P os tfach 3023 D-76642 B ruchsal

Tel. (0 72 51) 75-0


F ax (0 72 51) 75-19 70
http://www.S E W-E UR ODR IV E .de
s ew@ s ew-eurodrive.de

P roduc tion

G raben

S E W-E UR ODR IV E G mbH & C o


E rnst-B lickle-S tra e 1
D-76676 G raben-Neudorf
P.O. B ox
P os tfach 1220 D-76671 G raben-Neudorf

Tel. (0 72 51) 75-0


F ax (0 72 51) 75-29 70
Telex 7 822 276

A s s embly
S ervic e

G arbs en
(near Hannover)

S E W-E UR ODR IV E G mbH & C o


Alte R icklinger S tra e 40-42
D-30823 G arbs en
P.O. B ox
P os tfach 110453 D-30804 G arbs en

Tel. (0 51 37) 87 98-30


F ax (0 51 37) 87 98-55
s cm-garbs en@ s ew-eurodrive.de

K irc hheim
(near Mnchen)

S E W-E UR ODR IV E G mbH & C o


Domagks tra e 5
D-85551 K irchheim

Tel. (0 89) 90 95 52-10


F ax (0 89) 90 95 52-50
s cm-kirchheim@ s ew-eurodrive.de

L angenfeld
(near Ds s eldorf)

S E W-E UR ODR IV E G mbH & C o


S iemens s tra e 1
D-40764 Langenfeld

Tel. (0 21 73) 85 07-30


F ax (0 21 73) 85 07-55
s cm-langenfeld@ s ew-eurodrive.de

Meerane
(near Zwickau)

S E W-E UR ODR IV E G mbH & C o


Dnkritzer Weg 1
D-08393 Meerane

Tel. (0 37 64) 76 06-0


F ax (0 37 64) 76 06-30
s cm-meerane@ s ew-eurodrive.de

Additional address es for s ervice in G ermany provided on reques t!


F ranc e
P roduc tion
S ales
S ervic e

Haguenau

S E W-US OC OME S AS
48-54, route de S oufflenheim
B . P. 185
F -67506 Haguenau C edex

Tel. 03 88 73 67 00
F ax 03 88 73 66 00
http://www.us ocome.com
s ew@ us ocome.com

A s s embly
S ales
S ervic e

B ordeaux

S E W-US OC OME S AS
P arc da ctivit s de Magellan
62, avenue de Magellan - B . P. 182
F -33607 P es s ac C edex

Tel. 05 57 26 39 00
F ax 05 57 26 39 09

Lyon

S E W-US OC OME S AS
P arc dA f faires R oos evelt
R ue J acques Tati
F -69120 Vaulx en Velin

Tel. 04 72 15 37 00
F ax 04 72 15 37 15

P aris

S E W-US OC OME S AS
Zone indus trielle
2, rue Denis P apin
F -77390 Verneuil IE t ang

Tel. 01 64 42 40 80
F ax 01 64 42 40 88

Additional address es for s ervice in F rance provided on reques t!


A rgentina
A s s embly
S ales
S ervic e

B uenos A ires

S E W E UR ODR IV E AR G E NT INA S .A.


C entro Indus trial G arin, Lote 35
R uta P anamericana K m 37,5
1619 G arin

Tel. (3327) 45 72 84
F ax (3327) 45 72 21
s ewar@ s ew-eurodrive.com.ar

Melbourne

S E W-E UR ODR IV E P T Y. LT D.
27 B everage Drive
Tullamarine, Victoria 3043

Tel. (03) 99 33 10 00
F ax (03) 99 33 10 03

S ydney

S E W-E UR ODR IV E P T Y. LT D.
9, S leigh P lace, Wetherill P ark
New S outh Wales , 2164

Tel. (02) 97 25 99 00
F ax (02) 97 25 99 05

Wien

S E W-E UR ODR IV E G es .m.b.H.


R ichard-S traus s -S tras s e 24
A-1230 Wien

Tel. (01) 6 17 55 00-0


F ax (01) 6 17 55 00-30
s ew@ s ew-eurodrive.at

A us tralia
A s s embly
S ales
S ervic e

A us tria
A s s embly
S ales
S ervic e

Address list

Belgium
Assembly
Sales
Service

Brssel

CARON-VECTOR S.A.
Avenue Eiffel 5
B-1300 Wavre

Tel. (010) 23 13 11
Fax (010) 2313 36
http://www.caron-vector.be
info@caron-vector.be

Sao Paulo

SEW DO BRASIL
Motores-Redutores Ltda.
Rodovia Presidente Dutra, km 208
CEP 07210-000 - Guarulhos - SP

Tel. (011) 64 60-64 33


Fax (011) 64 80 33 28
sew@sew.com.br

Brazil
Production
Sales
Service

Additional addresses for service in Brazil provided on request!


Bulgaria
Sales

Sofia

BEVER-DRIVE GMBH
Bogdanovetz Str.1
BG-1606 Sofia

Tel. (92) 9 53 25 65
Fax (92) 9 54 93 45
bever@mbox.infotel.bg

Toronto

SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD.


210 Walker Drive
Bramalea, Ontario L6T3W1

Tel. (905) 7 91-15 53


Fax (905) 7 91-29 99
www.sew-eurodrive.ca

Vancouver

SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD.


7188 Honeyman Street
Delta. B.C. V4G 1 E2

Tel. (604) 9 46-55 35


Fax (604) 946-2513

Montreal

SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD.


2555 Rue Leger Street
LaSalle, Quebec H8N 2V9

Tel. (514) 3 67-11 24


Fax (514) 3 67-36 77

Canada
Assembly
Sales
Service

Additional addresses for service in Canada provided on request!


Chile
Assembly
Sales
Service

Santiago de
Chile

SEW-EURODRIVE CHILE
Motores-Reductores LTDA.
Panamericana Norte No 9261
Casilla 23 - Correo Quilicura
RCH-Santiago de Chile

Tel. (02) 6 23 82 03+6 23 81 63


Fax (02) 6 23 81 79

Tianjin

SEW-EURODRIVE (Tianjin) Co., Ltd.


No. 46, 7th Avenue, TEDA
Tianjin 300457

Tel. (022) 25 32 26 12
Fax (022) 25 32 26 11

Bogot

SEW-EURODRIVE COLOMBIA LTDA.


Calle 22 No. 132-60
Bodega 6, Manzana B
Santaf de Bogot

Tel. (0571) 5 47 50 50
Fax (0571) 5 47 50 44
sewcol@andinet.com

Zagreb

KOMPEKS d. o. o.
PIT Erddy 4 II
HR 10 000 Zagreb

Tel. +385 14 61 31 58
Fax +385 14 61 31 58

Praha

SEW-EURODRIVE S.R.O.
Business Centrum Praha
Lun 591
16000 Praha 6

Tel. 02/20 12 12 34 + 20 12 12 36
Fax 02/20 12 12 37
sew@sew-eurodrive.cz

Kopenhagen

SEW-EURODRIVEA/S
Geminivej 28-30, P.O. Box 100
DK-2670 Greve

Tel. 4395 8500


Fax 4395 8509
http://www.sew-eurodrive.dk
sew@sew-eurodrive.dk

Tallin

ALAS-KUUL AS
Paldiski mnt.125
EE 0006 Tallin

Tel. 6 59 32 30
Fax 6 59 32 31

China
Production
Assembly
Sales
Service
Colombia
Assembly
Sales
Service
Croatia
Sales
Service
Czech Republic
Sales

Denmark
Assembly
Sales
Service
Estonia
Sales

Address list

Finland
Assembly
Sales
Service

Lahti

SEW-EURODRIVE OY
Vesimentie 4
FIN-15860 Hollola 2

Tel. (3) 589 300


Fax (3) 780 6211

Normanton

SEW-EURODRIVE Ltd.
Beckbridge Industrial Estate
P.O. Box No.1
GB-Normanton, West- Yorkshire WF6 1QR

Tel. 19 24 89 38 55
Fax 19 24 89 37 02

Athen

Christ. Boznos & Son S.A.


12, Mavromichali Street
P.O. Box 80136, GR-18545 Piraeus

Tel. 14 22 51 34
Fax 14 22 51 59
Boznos@otenet.gr

Hong Kong

SEW-EURODRIVE LTD.
Unit No. 801-806, 8th Floor
Hong Leong Industrial Complex
No. 4, Wang Kwong Road
Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel. 2-7 96 04 77 + 79 60 46 54
Fax 2-7 95-91 29
sew@sewhk.com

Budapest

SEW-EURODRIVE Kft.
H-1037 Budapest
Kunigunda u. 18

Tel. +36 1 437 06 58


Fax +36 1 437 06 50

Baroda

SEW-EURODRIVE India Pvt. Ltd.


Plot No. 4, Gidc
Por Ramangamdi Baroda - 391 243
Gujarat

Tel. 0 265-83 10 86
Fax 0 265-83 10 87
sew.baroda@gecsl.com

Dublin

Alperton Engineering Ltd.


48 Moyle Road
Dublin Industrial Estate
Glasnevin, Dublin 11

Tel. (01) 8 30 62 77
Fax (01) 8 30 64 58

Milano

SEW-EURODRIVE di R. Blickle & Co.s.a.s.


Via Bernini,14
I-20020 Solaro (Milano)

Tel. (02) 96 98 01
Fax (02) 96 79 97 81

Toyoda-cho

SEW-EURODRIVE JAPAN CO., LTD


250-1, Shimoman-no,
Toyoda-cho, Iwata gun
Shizuoka prefecture, P.O. Box 438-0818

Tel. (0 53 83) 7 3811-13


Fax (0 53 83) 7 3814

Ansan-City

SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA CO., LTD.


B 601-4, Banweol Industrial Estate
Unit 1048-4, Shingil-Dong
Ansan 425-120

Tel. (031) 4 92-80 51


Fax (031) 4 92-80 56
master@sew-korea.co.kr

Brssel

CARON-VECTOR S.A.
Avenue Eiffel 5
B-1300 Wavre

Tel. (010) 23 13 11
Fax (010) 2313 36
http://www.caron-vector.be
info@caron-vector.be

Skopje

SGS-Skopje / Macedonia
"Teodosij Sinactaski
6691000 Skopje / Macedonia

Tel. (0991) 38 43 90
Fax (0991) 38 43 90

Johore

SEW-EURODRIVE SDN BHD


No. 95, Jalan Seroja 39, Taman Johor Jaya
81000 Johor Bahru, Johor
West Malaysia

Tel. (07) 3 54 57 07 + 3 54 94 09
Fax (07) 3 5414 04

Great Britain
Assembly
Sales
Service
Greece
Sales
Service
Hong Kong
Assembly
Sales
Service

Hungary
Sales
Service
India
Assembly
Sales
Service
Ireland
Sales
Service

Italy
Assembly
Sales
Service
Japan
Assembly
Sales
Service
Korea
Assembly
Sales
Service
Luxembourg
Assembly
Sales
Service
Macedonia
Sales

Malaysia
Assembly
Sales
Service

Address list

Netherlands
Assembly
Sales
Service

Rotterdam

VECTOR Aandrijftechniek B.V.


Industrieweg 175
NL-3044 AS Rotterdam
Postbus 10085
NL-3004 AB Rotterdam

Tel. +31 10 44 63 700


Fax +31 10 41 55 552
http://www.vector.nu
info@vector.nu

Auckland

SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD.


P.O. Box 58-428
82 Greenmount drive
East Tamaki Auckland

Tel. 0064-9-2 74 56 27
Fax 0064-9-2 74 01 65
sales@sew-eurodrive.co.za

Christchurch

SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD.


10 Settlers Crescent, Ferrymead
Christchurch

Tel. 0064-3-3 84 62 51
Fax 0064-3-3 85 64 55
sales@sew-eurodrive.co.nz

Moss

SEW-EURODRIVE A/S
Solgaard skog 71
N-1599 Moss

Tel. (69) 2410 20


Fax (69) 2410 40
sew@sew-eurodrive.no

Lima

SEW DEL PERU MOTORES REDUCTORES


S.A.C.
Los Calderos # 120-124
Urbanizacion Industrial Vulcano, ATE, Lima

Tel. (511) 349-52 80


Fax (511) 349-30 02
sewperu@terra.com.pe

Lodz

SEW-EURODRIVE Polska Sp.z.o.o.


ul. Pojezierska 63
91-338 Lodz

Tel. (042) 6 16 22 00
Fax (042) 6 16 22 10
sew@sew-eurodrive.pl

Coimbra

SEW-EURODRIVE, LDA.
Apartado 15
P-3050-901 Mealhada

Tel. (0231) 20 96 70
Fax (0231) 20 36 85
infosew@sew-eurodrive.pt

Bucuresti

Sialco Trading SRL


str. Madrid nr.4
71222 Bucuresti

Tel. (01) 2 30 13 28
Fax (01) 2 30 71 70
sialco@mediasat.ro

St. Petersburg

ZAO SEW-EURODRIVE
P.O. Box 193
193015 St. Petersburg

Tel. (812) 3 26 09 41 + 5 35 04 30
Fax (812) 5 35 22 87
sew@sew-eurodrive.ru

SEW-EURODRIVE PTE. LTD.


No 9, Tuas Drive 2
Jurong Industrial Estate
Singapore 638644

Tel. 8 62 17 01-705
Fax 8 61 28 27
Telex 38 659

Pakman - Pogonska Tehnika d.o.o.


UI. XIV. divizije 14
SLO 3000 Celje

Tel. 00386 3 490 83 20


Fax 00386 3 490 83 21
pakman@siol.net

New Zealand
Assembly
Sales
Service

Norway
Assembly
Sales
Service
Peru
Assembly
Sales
Service
Poland
Sales

Portugal
Assembly
Sales
Service
Romania
Sales
Service
Russia
Sales

Singapore
Assembly
Sales
Service
Slovenia
Sales
Service

10

Celje

Address list

South Africa
Assembly
Sales
Service

Johannesburg

SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED


Eurodrive House
Cnr. Adcock Ingram and Aerodrome Roads
Aeroton Ext. 2
Johannesburg 2013
P.O.Box 90004
Bertsham 2013

Tel. + 27 11 248 70 00
Fax +27 11 494 23 11
ljansen@sew.co.za

Capetown

SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED


Rainbow Park
Cnr. Racecourse & Omuramba Road
Montague Gardens
Cape Town
P.O.Box 36556
Chempet 7442
Cape Town

Tel. +27 21 552 98 20


Fax +27 21 552 98 30
Telex 576 062

Durban

SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED


2 Monaceo Place
Pinetown
Durban
P.O. Box 10433, Ashwood 3605

Tel. +27 31 700 34 51


Fax +27 31 700 38 47

Bilbao

SEW-EURODRIVE ESPAA, S.L.


Parque Tecnolgico, Edificio, 302
E-48170 Zamudio (Vizcaya)

Tel. 9 44 31 84 70
Fax 9 44 31 84 71
sew.spain@sew-eurodrive.es

Jnkping

SEW-EURODRIVE AB
Gnejsvgen 6-8
S-55303 Jnkping
Box 3100 S-55003 Jnkping

Tel. (036) 34 42 00
Fax (036) 34 42 80
www.sew-eurodrive.se

Basel

Alfred lmhof A.G.


Jurastrasse 10
CH-4142 Mnchenstein bei Basel

Tel. (061) 4 17 17 17
Fax (061) 4 17 17 00
http://www.imhof-sew.ch
info@imhof-sew.ch

Chon Buri

SEW-EURODRIVE (Thailand) Ltd.


Bangpakong Industrial Park 2
700/456, Moo.7, Tambol Donhuaroh
Muang District
Chon Buri 20000

Tel. 0066-38 21 40 22
Fax 0066-38 21 45 31
sewthailand@sew-eurodrive.co.th

Istanbul

SEW-EURODRIVE
Hareket Sistemleri San. ve Tic. Ltd. Sti
Bagdat Cad. Koruma Cikmazi No. 3
TR-81540 Maltepe ISTANBUL

Tel. (0216) 4 41 91 63 + 4 41 91 64 + 3
83 80 14 + 3 83 80 15
Fax (0216) 3 05 58 67
seweurodrive@superonline.com.tr

Production
Assembly
Sales
Service

Greenville

SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
1295 Old Spartanburg Highway
P.O. Box 518
Lyman, S.C. 29365

Tel. (864) 4 39 75 37
Fax Sales (864) 439-78 30
Fax Manuf. (864) 4 39-99 48
Fax Ass. (864) 4 39-05 66
Telex 805 550

Assembly
Sales
Service

San Francisco

SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
30599 San Antonio St.
Hayward, California 94544-7101

Tel. (510) 4 87-35 60


Fax (510) 4 87-63 81

Philadelphia/PA

SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
Pureland Ind. Complex
200 High Hill Road, P.O. Box 481
Bridgeport, New Jersey 08014

Tel. (856) 4 67-22 77


Fax (856) 8 45-31 79

Dayton

SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
2001 West Main Street
Troy, Ohio 45373

Tel. (9 37) 3 35-00 36


Fax (9 37) 4 40-37 99

Dallas

SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
3950 Platinum Way
Dallas, Texas 75237

Tel. (214) 3 30-48 24


Fax (214) 3 30-47 24

Spain
Assembly
Sales
Service
Sweden
Assembly
Sales
Service
Switzerland
Assembly
Sales
Service
Thailand
Assembly
Sales
Service

Turkey
Assembly
Sales
Service
USA

11

Address list

USA
Additional addresses for service in the USA provided on request!
Venezuela
Assembly
Sales
Service

12

Valencia

SEW-EURODRIVE Venezuela S.A.


Av. Norte Sur No. 3, Galpon 84-319
Zona Industrial Municipal Norte
Valencia

Tel. +58 (241) 8 32 98 04


Fax +58 (241) 8 38 62 75
sewventas@cantr.net
sewfinanzas@cantr.net

BrommaGroupManual

0-1-may02rev.00

BrommaConquip

8 Spare parts and service


Spare parts list by major groups

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

08 01 ENG
rev.

Page 1 of 1
Article No:
Drawing No:
Serial No:
Customer:
Standard:
Item

1012408
1012408
Liebherr
400V AC - 230V AC - 50Hz

Quant Title

GENERAL ASSEMBLY
EH5U

Material / Article No.

sign:
rev:

BGY
a/BGY

Dwg No.

Art. No.

Frame EH5

1002140

1002140

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

2
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
1

Telescopic beam unit


Tower
Tension rod
Tension rod
Frame std. components
Tower std. components
Twistlock assembly
Twistlock assembly
Cable chain assy.
Tower, Cable chain assy.
Hydraulic assy.
Pump unit assy.
Flipper arm assy.
Gearbox assy. telescopic
Gearbox assy. tower
Decoration
Electrical system
LED-panel mount. det.
Identity sign
El.customised

24142
24161
23854
23855
24143
17023
1002945
1002946
37409
39047
17021
34375
24169
39055
44768
17452
1002499
1001444
44522
1002656

24142
24161
23854
23855
24143
17023
1002945
1002946
37409
39047
17021
34375
24169
39055
44768
17452
1002499
1001444
59708
1002656

ISO, STD, LEFT


ISO, STD, RIGHT

date:
2/20/2007
2/21/2007

Remarks
Frame standard 16930, Main beam 23852, Lifting
beam 23951 & 23952
Telescopic beam 38860, Gable end 16989

Floating ISO, 100


Floating ISO, 100

SCS / CANopen parallel interface


729030814
230V AC / SCS / CANopen parallel interface

THIS DRAWING IS COPYRIGHT AND IS THE PROPERTY


OF BROMMA CONQUIP AB. THE DESIGN AND OR
CONSTRUCTIONS CONTAINED THEREIN MAY NOT BE
COPIED OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN
CONSENT OF THE OWNER.

12

SIGN
DESIGNED

13

DATE

GENERAL ASSY

SERIAL No

Illtek 021029

14

SPREADER TYPE

EH5

PLOT DATE

10

SURFACE
TREATMENT

ARTICLE No

SCALE

Spreader EH5
General assy
A Partek Company

TOLERANCE GENERAL
SS-ISO 2768

REVISION

01
DRAWING NUMBER

SP-52000

THIS DRAWING IS COPYRIGHT AND IS THE PROPERTY


OF BROMMA CONQUIP AB. THE DESIGN AND OR
CONSTRUCTIONS CONTAINED THEREIN MAY NOT BE
COPIED OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN
CONSENT OF THE OWNER.

48
3

33

47 4 32
49

1
35
36

50

37
16

20
14
7

26 34 17 10 21

39
43
38
8
39
9

24
15
29
23

11
5

43
44
38
43
41
18

6
38
22 43 44 20
28

12
31
25

40 38 36

38
43
46
39
43 42

19
38
43
39
27

30
45
SIGN
DESIGNED

DATE

GENERAL ASSY

SERIAL No

Illtek 021029

SPREADER TYPE

EH5

PLOT DATE

SURFACE
TREATMENT

ARTICLE No

SCALE

Exploded View
Tower
A Partek Company

TOLERANCE GENERAL
SS-ISO 2768

REVISION

DRAWING NUMBER

SP-52001

EH5 Tower New standard


DRAWING SP-52001
PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

401517

GLIDE PLATE ASSY

Include pos.6,7,14,20

38863

TOWER CHAIN ASSY

Include pos. 5,9,11,12,15,23,24

24161

TOWER

SEE OTHER DRAWING

See SP-52002

51624

LIFTING SHAFT 90x334

Included in Pos 48

54662

LOCKING SHAFT ASSY

Included in Pos 48

71529

TUBE 1 1/2"CHAIN

39026

ROBALON PLATE LOWER

53137

GLIDE PLATE UPPER TOWER EH5

45476

CRANK ASSY EH5

401372

CHAIN ATTACHMENT

56242

CABLE CLAMP D=34

10

700737

CHAIN DUPLEX 1 1/2"

11

71520

CHAIN LOCK DUPLEX 1 1/2"

12

den 10 oktober 2002

POS

REMARKS

Sida 1 av 4

POS

PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

401518

STEERING PIN

16

14

43075

LOCKING PLATE 12X12X40

15

401534

CABLE ATTACHMENT

16

401074

COVER PLATE

17

39171

BRACKET UPPER RIGHT

18

39174

BRACKET LOWER RIGHT

19

75497

SCREW MF6S 8X 35 FZB 10.9

32

20

78218

SCREW M6S 12X120 FZB 8.8

21

75051

SCREW M6S 20X 90 FZB 8.8

22

75713

SCREW MC6S 6X 30 FZB 8.8

23

700736

SCREW M6S 24x160 FZB 8.8

24

75052

NUT M20 LOC-KING FZB

25

75055

NUT M12 LOC-KING FZB DIN 985

26

39173

BRACKET LOWER LEFT

27

75292

WASHER BRB 21X36X3 FZB HB200

28

75268

WASHER NORD-LOCK M 6 FZB

29

39170

BRACKET UPPER LEFT

30

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS

Include pos. 10,17,21,26,34

Sida 2 av 4

POS

PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

74339

WASHER TBRSB 21X52X8 FZB

31

72191

SCHACKLE "RAK GALV"

32

Included in Pos 48

85482

CHAIN HLZ 4.5-2 L=250

33

Included in Pos 48

75291

WASHER BRB 13X24X2.5 FZB HB200

34

54528

ATTACHMENT CABLE WAGON

35

75328

WASHER BRB 8.4X16X1.5 FZB HB2

10

36

75225

SCREW M6S 8X 22 FZB 8.8

37

75090

NUT M 8 LOC-KING FZB

16

38

70006

SCREW M6S 8X 35 FZB 8.8

16

39

401471

ANGEL BAR

40

401547

ANGLE BAR

42

75328

WASHER BRB 8.4X16X1.5 FZB HB2

32

43

70006

SCREW M6S 8X 35 FZB 8.8

44

401546

ANGLE BAR

45

24199

FRAME SCS2

46

700457

SNAP HOOK

47

Included in Pos 48

45596

LIFTING SHAFT ASSY

48

Include Pos. 3,4,32,33,47

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS

Sida 3 av 4

POS

PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

46679

MOUNTING EL.CAB.

49

24263

SPREADER CABINET TOWER

50

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS
See also drawing SP-52013

Sida 4 av 4

THIS DRAWING IS COPYRIGHT AND IS THE PROPERTY


OF BROMMA CONQUIP AB. THE DESIGN AND OR
CONSTRUCTIONS CONTAINED THEREIN MAY NOT BE
COPIED OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN
CONSENT OF THE OWNER.

14

11 35 10 33 34 39 36 43

20

12

19
18
29
45

25
8
24
23
22

40
32

9
13

21
12

26
7
44

13
12
15
5

41
3

31
38
48
47

42
27
17 37 28 30

SIGN
DESIGNED

DATE

Illtek 021002

PLOT DATE

GENERAL ASSY

46 16

SERIAL No

SPREADER TYPE

EH5 ll

SURFACE
TREATMENT

ARTICLE No

SCALE

Exploded View
Tower gear box assy
A Partek Company

TOLERANCE GENERAL
SS-ISO 2768

REVISION

DRAWING NUMBER

SP-52002

EH5 Tower Gearbox Assy


DRAWING SP-52002
PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

POS

58549

GEARBOX R97 ELM.BRAKE 360-404V

54659

MOTOR SHELF EH5 TOWER

52196

CHAIN COVER TOWER EH5

51233

COVERPLATE CHAIN WHEEL EH5

53129

CHAIN WHEEL TOWER EH5 25

36609

CHAIN WHEEL

34379

CHAIN WHEEL TOWER EH5

52150

TRANSMISSION SHAFT DIA 80

44756

SHAFT ASSY EH5

71328

GREASEFITTING NO.208 R1/8"

10

71546

BEARINGHOUSE SNL 518-615

11

71548

SEALING TSNA 518A TOWER

12

48188

DISTANS

13

71547

BEARING BUSH

14

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS
Part no for gearbox is 72157 and for only El motor is 58538

SEAL KIT

Sida 1 av 4

DESCRIPTION

PART NO

QTY

POS

71519

CHAIN 1 1/2" DUPLEX TOWER

15

71520

CHAIN LOCK DUPLEX 1 1/2"

16

70622

SCREW SK6SS 12X 12 14.9

17

71539

BEARING 22218 CCK W33 TOWER

18

71549

DISTANCE

19

74119

COVER BEARINGHOUSE ASNH518-615

20

51517

CHAIN WHEEL TOWER EH5 13

21

44196

LOCKING PLATE 1X20X46

22

75092

SCREW M6S 6X 20 FZB 8.8

23

76847

KEY 22X14X100 SMS2307

24

75052

NUT M20 LOC-KING FZB

25

73965

KEY 22X14X100 SMS 2306

25

79513

KEY 18X11X100 RK

26

75225

SCREW M6S 8X 22 FZB 8.8

27

75286

SPRING PIN 5X30 FRP

28

70474

SCREW M6S 20X 80 FZB 8.8

29

75008

SCREW M6S 20X 70 FZB 8.8

30

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS

Sida 2 av 4

DESCRIPTION

QTY

76848

SCREW M6S 20X 90 FZB 8.8 FULLT

31

75052

NUT M20 LOC-KING FZB

32

SEE REMARKS

33

75051

SCREW M6S 20X 90 FZB 8.8

34

70477

SCREW M6S 16X 80 FZB 8.8

35

75225

SCREW M6S 8X 22 FZB 8.8

36

75285

LOCKING WASHER M20

37

70479

NUT M20 M6M FZB KLASS 8

38

75292

WASHER BRB 21X36X3 FZB HB200

39

74339

WASHER TBRSB 21X52X8 FZB

40

70622

SCREW SK6SS 12X 12 14.9

41

75267

WASHER NORD-LOCK M 8 FZB

42

75267

WASHER NORD-LOCK M 8 FZB

43

44769

WASHER

44

70919

WASHER NORD-LOCK M20

45

71521

CHAIN LOCK1/2 LINK DUPL.1 1/2"

46

75052

NUT M20 LOC-KING FZB

47

PART NO

den 10 oktober 2002

POS

REMARKS

CAP (SEW)

Sida 3 av 4

DESCRIPTION

PART NO
74339

WASHER TBRSB 21X52X8 FZB

den 10 oktober 2002

QTY
4

POS

REMARKS

48

Sida 4 av 4

THIS DRAWING IS COPYRIGHT AND IS THE PROPERTY


OF BROMMA CONQUIP AB. THE DESIGN AND OR
CONSTRUCTIONS CONTAINED THEREIN MAY NOT BE
COPIED OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN
CONSENT OF THE OWNER.

13
14

15

16

1
32
25
8 26
36
37
22
24
18
5
4

21
23
31
10
34
11

20
19
12

33
35
2

29
17
6 28
30
27

SIGN
DESIGNED

DATE

GENERAL ASSY

SERIAL No

Illtek 020903

SPREADER TYPE

EH5

PLOT DATE

SURFACE
TREATMENT

ARTICLE No

SCALE

Exploded View
Frame
A Partek Company

TOLERANCE GENERAL
SS-ISO 2768

REVISION

DRAWING NUMBER

SP-52003

EH5 Frame
DRAWING SP-52003
PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

POS

REMARKS

16997

FRAME

43072

LIFTING LUG ASSY

Include pos.10,11,21,23,31,34,

401278

GLIDE PLATE FRAME

Included in Glide plate assy See drawing SP-52004

401401

FRAME COVER ASSY

Include pos.12,19,20

43036

GLIDE PLATE 80X40X20

401279

20STOP ASSY

Include pos.17,27,28,29,30

SEE REMARKS

See lamp assy SP- 52010

401277

LANDING BUFFER ASSY

Include pos.25,26,32,36,37

SEE REMARKS

See Drawing SP 52006

47805

PLATE

10

75052

NUT M20 LOC-KING FZB

11

38865

COVER

12

SEE REMARKS

15

See Electric drawing part list

48392

CLIP

16

Complete clip with screw,washer and nut

den 10 oktober 2002

Sida 1 av 3

DESCRIPTION

PART NO

QTY

POS

401281

SHIM

17

75497

SCREW MF6S 8X 35 FZB 10.9

18

75092

SCREW M6S 6X 20 FZB 8.8

19

54855

FLAT BAR

20

75051

SCREW M6S 20X 90 FZB 8.8

21

75328

WASHER BRB 8.4X16X1.5 FZB HB2

22

75090

NUT M 8 LOC-KING FZB

24

79830

WASHER SRB 14X28X2 FZB

25

49853

SLEEV

26

75607

SCREW M6S 12X 40 FZB 8.8

27

401280

20BUFFER

28

401282

HOLDER FOR GLIDE PLATE

29

75295

WASHER NORD-LOCK M12 FZB

30

51110

LIFTING LUG WELD

31

75055

NUT M12 LOC-KING FZB DIN 985

32

76332

GREASE FITTING KR1/8 STRAIGHT

33

71328

GREASEFITTING NO.208 R1/8"

33

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS

Sida 2 av 3

DESCRIPTION

QTY

75292

WASHER BRB 21X36X3 FZB HB200

12

34

71328

GREASEFITTING NO.208 R1/8"

35

401276

BUFFER

36

79141

SCREW M6S 12X 35 FZB 8.8

37

PART NO

den 10 oktober 2002

POS

REMARKS

Sida 3 av 3

THIS DRAWING IS COPYRIGHT AND IS THE PROPERTY


OF BROMMA CONQUIP AB. THE DESIGN AND OR
CONSTRUCTIONS CONTAINED THEREIN MAY NOT BE
COPIED OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN
CONSENT OF THE OWNER.

17
19 25
18

16
15

10

13
12
15
14

20
24

2
9

11

3
10

22
21
23

6
5

7
8

4
6

SIGN
DESIGNED

DATE

GENERAL ASSY

SERIAL No

Illtek 021002

SPREADER TYPE

EH5 ll

PLOT DATE

SURFACE
TREATMENT

ARTICLE No

SCALE

Exploded View
Telescopic Beam
A Partek Company

TOLERANCE GENERAL
SS-ISO 2768

REVISION

DRAWING NUMBER

SP-52004

EH5 Telescopic Beam


DRAWING SP-52004
PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

POS

REMARKS

38861

GLIDE PLATE ASSY

Include pos. 4,5,6,7,8 and pos 3 on drawing SP-52003

24142

TELESCOPIC BEAM ASSY

Assy with 2 Beams and 1 Gable end

62595

FLIPPER ARM

Please note! Rubber buffer not included, see item 11

24168

FLIPPER ARM

Please note! Rubber buffer not included, see item 11

44615

GLIDE PLATE LOWER 20X100X200

44614

GLIDE PLATE UPPER 25X100X250

75756

SCREW MF6S 12X 70 FZB 10.9

75055

NUT M12 LOC-KING FZB DIN 985

70538

WASHER BRB 13X24X2 FZB HB200

24167

FLIPPER ARM

SEE REMARKS

10

See Drawing SP-52009

401528

BUFFER ASSY

11

Include pos.12,13,14,15,16

401529

BUFFER

12

Included in pos.11

401530

SHIM PLATE

13

Included in pos.11

den 10 oktober 2002

Please note! Rubber buffer not included, see item 11

Sida 1 av 2

DESCRIPTION

PART NO

QTY

POS

REMARKS

75783

SCREW M6S 12X 50 FZB 8.8

14

Included in pos.11

75291

WASHER BRB 13X24X2.5 FZB HB200

15

Included in pos.11

75055

NUT M12 LOC-KING FZB DIN 985

16

Included in pos.11

51593

ATTACHMENT FLIPPER ARM B=45

17

Included in pos. 19

75330

SCREW MC6S 16X 50 FZB 8.8

18

Included in pos. 19

51593

ATTACHMENT FLIPPER ARM B=45

19

Include Pos.17, 18, 25.

76842

SCREW M6S 20X110 FZB 8.8

20

75292

WASHER BRB 21X36X3 FZB HB200

21

47678

SPACER (M20)

22

75052

NUT M20 LOC-KING FZB

23

75292

WASHER BRB 21X36X3 FZB HB200

24

70918

WASHER NORD-LOCK M16 FZB

25

den 10 oktober 2002

Included in pos. 19

Sida 2 av 2

THIS DRAWING IS COPYRIGHT AND IS THE PROPERTY


OF BROMMA CONQUIP AB. THE DESIGN AND OR
CONSTRUCTIONS CONTAINED THEREIN MAY NOT BE
COPIED OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN
CONSENT OF THE OWNER.

15

2 3 38

53 54

231

55

41 23

47 10 13 12 16 17 59 19 58 40

4
34

37

65

57 49

35

33
56

43
45
11
44

32
7
24
22
39
31
30
46

42

61 18 14 51 14 25 28
20 28 29

62 60

8 9 74 63

27
26

36
71
68
72
73

67

69
SIGN
DESIGNED

Illtek

DATE

020926

70

52
64
69
70

66 65

GENERAL ASSY

SERIAL No

SPREADER TYPE

EH5

SURFACE
TREATMENT

TOLERANCE GENERAL
SS-ISO 2768

PLOT DATE

ARTICLE No

SCALE

Exploded View
Hydraulic Assy End beam
A Partek Company

REVISION

DRAWING NUMBER

SP-52005

EH5 Hydraulic Assy


DRAWING SP-52005
PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

POS

76526

HYDRAULIC OIL ISO VG 32

50

56350

HOSE 821-04/KL 480/P86/P87

74564

COUPLING GE10-SR 3/8"

13

44447

COUPLING RESTRICT.GE10SR 1.2MM

71864

COUPLING SV10-S

71877

COUPLING GE12-SR 1/2"

79801

PRESSURE FILTER (50L) PI3605-

71297

FILTER INSERT

78371

SHOCK RELIF VALVE 140 BAR

76196

HYDRAULIC MOTOR INCL.CHOCKVALV 300CC

56360

HOSE 821-06/KL 580/P86/P86

10

24 June 2003

REMARKS

50L OIL

SEE DRAWING SP-52009 FOR MORE DETAILS

Sida 1 av 6

PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

POS

71872

COUPLING GE20-S 1 1/16"-12 UNF

11

71874

COUPLING GE12-S 9/16"-18 UNF

12

44553

DRAIN PIPE EH5

13

71764

COUPLING 3.5/28

14

78960

AIR BREATHER 3"MY"

15

71290

VALVE RHD12-S NON RETURN

16

73380

COUPLING EDKO 12-S

17

71320

HYDRAULIC PUMP PVQ10

18

72005

ELMOTOR 2.2kW 380/415/440/480

19

58016

HOSE 821-06/KL 460/P86/P86

20

56334

HOSE 821-06/KL 560/P86/P87

22

73096

VALVE DG4V-3-2C-MU-H7-60

23

700735

VALV BLOCK

24

24 June 2003

REMARKS

WHEN YOU ORDER SEAL KIT FOR THIS PUMP PLEASE STATE K4264

WHEN YOU ORDER SEAL KIT PLEASE STATE PART NO K4222 AND SOLENOID 70422

Sida 2 av 6

PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

POS

75195

SCREW MC6S 8X100 12.9 DIN912

25

75090

NUT M 8 LOC-KING FZB

26

75328

WASHER BRB 8.4X16X1.5 FZB HB2

27

71871

COUPLING GE12-SR 3/8"

28

70157

COUPLING VSTI 3/8"-JE

29

56350

HOSE 821-04/KL 480/P86/P87

30

71866

COUPLING GE10-SR 1/4"

31

57419

HOSE 821-04/KL 630/P86/P86

32

56349

HOSE 821-04/KL 580/P86/P87

33

56348

HOSE 821-04/KL1720/P86/P87

34

56348

HOSE 821-04/KL1720/P86/P87

35

71343

SIGHT GLASS AS240 R 3/4"

36

56349

HOSE 821-04/KL 580/P86/P87

37

24 June 2003

REMARKS

Sida 3 av 6

PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

POS

56350

HOSE 821-04/KL 480/P86/P87

38

56349

HOSE 821-04/KL 580/P86/P87

39

57425

HOSE 821-06/KL 770/P86/P86

40

75375

SCREW MC6S 5X 30 12.9 OBEH

16

41

44552

SUCTION PIPE EH5

43

45965

PLUG VSTIR 1/2" KOMPL.

44

71896

COUPLING KOR20-12-S

45

70084

COUPLING MTNIP.ST-04-R FORM A

46

75055

NUT M12 LOC-KING FZB DIN 985

49

79019

PLASTIC RING FOR COUPLI. 71764

51

46799

FLAP GB. EH130/600

52

34224

GASKET HYD.TANK EH5

53

39221

HYDR.TANK LID EH5

54

24 June 2003

REMARKS

Sida 4 av 6

DESCRIPTION

PART NO

QTY

POS

REMARKS

75212

SCREW M6S 6X 25 FZB 8.8

10

55

K3726

O-RING (HYDRV./BLOCK)

56

75294

WASHER BRB 10.5X22X2 FZB HB200

57

SEE REMARKS

58

KEY FOR MOTOR SHAFT ON EL.MOTOR PART NO 72005

SEE REMARKS

59

KEY FOR PUMP PART NO 71320

70040

SCREW SK6SS 6X 10 8.8

60

75290

SCREW M6S 10X 30 FZB 8.8

61

70403

CUP SPRING 23X10.2X1.25 D-2093

62

79281

PLUG IN BOX 8' OFF

63

75293

WASHER BRB 6.4X12X1.5 FZB HB2

14

64

75552

WASHER SRKB 7X25X1.5 FZB

64

401400

FLATBAR

65

401399

FLAP

66

24 June 2003

Sida 5 av 6

PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

POS

44762

FLAT BAR

67

44760

FLAP EH5

68

75669

SCREW M6S 6X 30 FZB 8.8

14

70

75098

NUT M 6 LOC-KING FZB

14

71

75329

WASHER BRB 4.3X 9X0.8 FZB HB2

72

79265

SCREW MC6S 4X 25 FZB 8.8

73

75159

NUT M 4 LOC-KING FZB

74

24 June 2003

REMARKS

Sida 6 av 6

THIS DRAWING IS COPYRIGHT AND IS THE PROPERTY


OF BROMMA CONQUIP AB. THE DESIGN AND OR
CONSTRUCTIONS CONTAINED THEREIN MAY NOT BE
COPIED OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN
CONSENT OF THE OWNER.

18

8 6 5 2 7

26
25
1

7 4 5 7 3 9 10 13 15 16

12
11
23
22
19

14
17

20
24
21
28
27

30
SIGN
DESIGNED

DATE

Illtek 020910

PLOT DATE

GENERAL ASSY

SERIAL No

29
SPREADER TYPE

EH5

SURFACE
TREATMENT

ARTICLE No

SCALE

Exploded View
Telescopic Gearbox Assy
A Partek Company

TOLERANCE GENERAL
SS-ISO 2768

REVISION

DRAWING NUMBER

SP-52006

EH5 Telescopic Gearbox Assy


DRAWING SP-52006
PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

POS

53596

SHAFT

53603

DISTANCE

53604

DISTANCE

53605

DISTANCE

73562

BEARING 22212 CC W33

74243

LOCKING RING SGA 60

73573

RUBBER SEALING V-70A

53595

COVER

53594

COVER

75212

SCREW M6S 6X 25 FZB 8.8

12

10

700730

KEY 18X11X80

11

73564

KEY 18X11X 40

12

51515

CHAIN WHEEL E112-1-11

13

51664

WASHER 6X21X80

14

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS

Sida 1 av 2

DESCRIPTION

PART NO

QTY

POS

75285

LOCKING WASHER M20

15

75286

SPRING PIN 5X30 FRP

16

75289

SCREW M6S 20X 35 FZB 8.8

17

71328

GREASEFITTING NO.208 R1/8"

18

39055

GEARBOX ASSY TELESCOPIC

19

401287

PLATE

20

75008

SCREW M6S 20X 70 FZB 8.8

21

75292

WASHER BRB 21X36X3 FZB HB200

22

75052

NUT M20 LOC-KING FZB

23

79785

SCREW M6S 10X 50 FZB 8.8

24

75294

WASHER BRB 10.5X22X2 FZB HB200

25

75119

NUT M10 LOC-KING FZB

26

62345

EL MOTOR 3 KW BRAKE 230V

27

39059

GEARBOX KA87

79680

COUPLING GEARBOX+ELMOTOR KA87

29

77779

BRAKE ASSY 230V BM4 INCL.HR

30

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS

Include Pos.27-30

28

Sida 2 av 2

Bromma Group Manual

7.3.2.2 Spare parts list for Twistlock Floating ISO


1002945 Left
1002946 Right

May. 06 rev.01

Bromma Conquip

7.3.2.2 Twistlock Floating ISO

Page 1

Bromma Group Manual

Page 2

7.3.2.2 Twistlock Floating ISO

Bromma Conquip

May. 06 rev.01

Bromma Group Manual

SP-POS

SP-POS

1002945

TWISTLOCK ASSY LEFT

DESCRIPTION

1002946

TWISTLOCK ASSY RIGHT

1000431

TWISTLOCK PIN

QTY

REMARKS
Items 28 and 29 exluded

GUIDE BLOCK

53968

SPHERICAL WASHER

57059

TWISTLOCK ARM, ASSY.

1000434

TWISTLOCK KEY

1000432

NUT

(M39x4-6H)

70165

SCREW

M6S 8x75 FZB 8.8

54049

SPACER RING

74147

HYDRAULIC CY LINDER

10

37704

BLOCKADING PIN

FZB

11

70429

SPRING

SF-TF 4.5x22x90 SS 1774-04

12

75055

NUT LOCK-KING

M12 FZB

13

75295

WASHER NORD-LOCK

M12 FZB

14

74044

LOCK PIN

R.R 3.0

15

71328

GREASE FITTING

R 1/8"

16

74970

SWITCH A TTACH. STD.

(SENSOR D=30)

SCREW

M6S 8x50 FZB 8.8

SWITCH PAD h=10

17

75226

18

1001482

TYPE 2 Right

(CA 32/20-100/65)

19

75694

SCREW

M6S 6x55 FZB 8.8

20

700686

SCREW

M6S 6x65 FZB 8.8

21

43654

BLOCKADING PIECE

FZB

22

75090

NUT

LOC-KING M8 FZB
BRB 8.4x16x1.5 FZB

23

75328

WASHER

24

48916

BOLTING PLATE

FZB

25

75268

WASHER NORD-LOCK

M6 FZB

26

79850

COVER PLATE DEP4

FZB

27

1002454

SENSOR PLATE ASSY. RIGHT

FZB

28

43653

TWISTLOCK ARM, ASSY. LEFT

TYPE 1 Included in 1002945 Tw istlock assy left

29

1002453

SENSOR PLATE ASSY. LEFT

included in 1002945 Tw istlock assy left

May. 06 rev.01

NOTE

Items 4 and 27 exluded

Bromma Conquip

7.3.2.2 Twistlock Floating ISO

Page 3

THIS DRAWING IS COPYRIGHT AND IS THE PROPERTY


OF BROMMA CONQUIP AB. THE DESIGN AND OR
CONSTRUCTIONS CONTAINED THEREIN MAY NOT BE
COPIED OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN
CONSENT OF THE OWNER.

6
7
13

9
10
3

4
S*

5
2

8
10

10
11

12

Single Sensor assembly SP10


6
9
10
15

7
13
4

S*

5
2

1
8
10
10
11

12

Dual Sensor assembly SP11


SIGN
DESIGNED

DATE

GENERAL ASSY

SERIAL No

Illtek 020926

SPREADER TYPE

EH5 ll

PLOT DATE

SURFACE
TREATMENT

ARTICLE No

SCALE

Exploded View
Sensor Assy
A Partek Company

TOLERANCE GENERAL
SS-ISO 2768

REVISION

DRAWING NUMBER

SP-52008

Single Sensor Assy Part no 38084 SP-52008


Pos Part no

Description

Qty

Remarks

38084

SENSOR SINGEL ASSY

Include pos.2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13

38082

SINGLE SENSOR ATTACHMENT

Welded parts on frame

400267

PLATE

38087

PROTECTION PLATE

74970

CLAMP 04-430 PP

53951

PAD FOR SWITCH H=22

700647

SCREW M6S 6X 75 FZB 8.8

75268

WASHER NORD-LOCK M 6 FZB

75102

SCREW M6S 8X 30 FZB 8.8

75422

SCREW M6S 8X 25 FZB 8.8

10

75328

WASHER BRB 8.4X16X1.5 FZB HB2

11

75090

NUT M 8 LOC-KING FZB

12

76728

WASHER SRKB 9X28X2 FZB

13

79850

COVER PLATE DEP 4

den 10 oktober 200

Sida 1 av 1

Dual Sensor Assy Part no 38085 SP-52008


Pos Part no

Description

Qty

Remarks

38085

DUAL SENSOR ASSY

Include pos.2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13

38083

DOUBLE SENSOR ATTACHMENT

Welded part on Frame

400267

PLATE

38086

PROTECTION PLATE

74970

CLAMP 04-430 PP

53951

PAD FOR SWITCH H=22

700647

SCREW M6S 6X 75 FZB 8.8

75268

WASHER NORD-LOCK M 6 FZB

75102

SCREW M6S 8X 30 FZB 8.8

75422

SCREW M6S 8X 25 FZB 8.8

10

75328

WASHER BRB 8.4X16X1.5 FZB HB2

11

75090

NUT M 8 LOC-KING FZB

12

76728

WASHER SRKB 9X28X2 FZB

13

79850

COVER PLATE DEP 4

den 10 oktober 200

Sida 1 av 1

THIS DRAWING IS COPYRIGHT AND IS THE PROPERTY


OF BROMMA CONQUIP AB. THE DESIGN AND OR
CONSTRUCTIONS CONTAINED THEREIN MAY NOT BE
COPIED OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN
CONSENT OF THE OWNER.

9
19
16
3
17
1
13
15
12
7
5
6

20
21
10

22
8
2
19
18 11

SIGN
DESIGNED

DATE

GENERAL ASSY

SERIAL No

Illtek 021029

SPREADER TYPE

EH5 ll

PLOT DATE

SURFACE
TREATMENT

ARTICLE No

SCALE

Exploded View
Gearbox
A Partek Company

TOLERANCE GENERAL
SS-ISO 2768

REVISION

DRAWING NUMBER

SP-52009

EH5 Flipper Gearbox Assy Part no 53275


DRAWING SP-52009
PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

POS

53275

GEAR BOX ASSY TYPE 1

51176

GEAR HOUSING FLIPPER SMALL

55503

SHAFT FOR FLIPPER HOUSING SMALL

51177

COVER FOR FLIPPER HOUSING SMALL

54465

GEAR WHEEL 4-50-2541-03

54463

GEAR WHEEL 4-16-2541-03

54590

BUSHING FOR FLIPPERHOUSING

51284

BEARING FOR FLIPPERHOUSING

72010

KEY 20X12X 30 TK

76196

HYDRAULIC MOTOR INCL.CHOCKVALV 300CC

10

75049

SCREW MC6S 12X 40 FZB 8.8

11

70548

SCREW M6S 16X 55 FZB 8.8

12

79683

KEY 32X8X7

13

75295

WASHER NORD-LOCK M12 FZB

15

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS

Include pos.1-8,11-12,15-18 ( Pos.3 Drawn)

Sida 1 av 2

DESCRIPTION

PART NO

QTY

POS

71328

GREASEFITTING NO.208 R1/8"

16

78493

SCREW MC6S 12X150 FZB 8.8

17

75055

NUT M12 LOC-KING FZB DIN 985

18

78371

SHOCK RELIF VALVE 140 BAR

20

76922

VALVE BLOCK CHARLYNN

21

76915

SEAL KIT CHAR-LYN HYD.MOTOR

22

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS

Sida 2 av 2

EH5 Flipper Gearbox Assy Part no 60629


DRAWING SP-52009
PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

POS

60629

GEAR BOX ASSY TYPE 2

51176

GEAR HOUSING FLIPPER SMALL

55503

SHAFT FOR FLIPPER HOUSING SMALL

51177

COVER FOR FLIPPER HOUSING SMALL

54465

GEAR WHEEL 4-50-2541-03

54463

GEAR WHEEL 4-16-2541-03

54590

BUSHING FOR FLIPPERHOUSING

51284

BEARING FOR FLIPPERHOUSING

72010

KEY 20X12X 30 TK

76900

GREASE FITTING R 1/8" 90GR

76196

HYDRAULIC MOTOR INCL.CHOCKVALV 300CC

10

75049

SCREW MC6S 12X 40 FZB 8.8

11

70548

SCREW M6S 16X 55 FZB 8.8

12

79683

KEY 32X8X7

13

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS

Include pos.1-8,11-12,15,17-20 ( Pos.3 Mirrow inverted)

Sida 1 av 2

DESCRIPTION

PART NO

QTY

POS

75295

WASHER NORD-LOCK M12 FZB

15

78493

SCREW MC6S 12X150 FZB 8.8

17

75055

NUT M12 LOC-KING FZB DIN 985

18

76332

GREASE FITTING KR1/8 STRAIGHT

19

78371

SHOCK RELIF VALVE 140 BAR

20

76922

VALVE BLOCK CHARLYNN

21

76915

SEAL KIT CHAR-LYN HYD.MOTOR

22

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS

Sida 2 av 2

EH5 Flipper Gearbox Assy Part no 60628


DRAWING SP-52009
PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

POS

60628

GEAR BOX ASSY TYPE 1

51176

GEAR HOUSING FLIPPER SMALL

55503

SHAFT FOR FLIPPER HOUSING SMALL

51177

COVER FOR FLIPPER HOUSING SMALL

54465

GEAR WHEEL 4-50-2541-03

54463

GEAR WHEEL 4-16-2541-03

54590

BUSHING FOR FLIPPERHOUSING

51284

BEARING FOR FLIPPERHOUSING

72010

KEY 20X12X 30 TK

76900

GREASE FITTING R 1/8" 90GR

76196

HYDRAULIC MOTOR INCL.CHOCKVALV 300CC

10

75049

SCREW MC6S 12X 40 FZB 8.8

11

70548

SCREW M6S 16X 55 FZB 8.8

12

79683

KEY 32X8X7

13

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS

Include pos.1-8,11-12,15,17-20 ( Pos.3 Drawn)

Sida 1 av 2

DESCRIPTION

PART NO

QTY

POS

75295

WASHER NORD-LOCK M12 FZB

15

78493

SCREW MC6S 12X150 FZB 8.8

17

75055

NUT M12 LOC-KING FZB DIN 985

18

76332

GREASE FITTING KR1/8 STRAIGHT

19

78371

SHOCK RELIF VALVE 140 BAR

20

76922

VALVE BLOCK CHARLYNN

21

76915

SEAL KIT CHAR-LYN HYD.MOTOR

22

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS

Sida 2 av 2

EH5 Flipper Gearbox Assy Part no 56230


DRAWING SP-52009
PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

POS

56230

GEAR BOX ASSY TYPE 2

51176

GEAR HOUSING FLIPPER SMALL

55503

SHAFT FOR FLIPPER HOUSING SMALL

51177

COVER FOR FLIPPER HOUSING SMALL

54465

GEAR WHEEL 4-50-2541-03

54463

GEAR WHEEL 4-16-2541-03

54590

BUSHING FOR FLIPPERHOUSING

51284

BEARING FOR FLIPPERHOUSING

72010

KEY 20X12X 30 TK

76196

HYDRAULIC MOTOR INCL.CHOCKVALV 300CC

10

75049

SCREW MC6S 12X 40 FZB 8.8

11

70548

SCREW M6S 16X 55 FZB 8.8

12

79683

KEY 32X8X7

13

75295

WASHER NORD-LOCK M12 FZB

15

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS

Include pos.1-8,11-12,15-18 ( Pos.3 Mirrow inverted)

Sida 1 av 2

DESCRIPTION

PART NO

QTY

POS

71328

GREASEFITTING NO.208 R1/8"

16

78493

SCREW MC6S 12X150 FZB 8.8

17

75055

NUT M12 LOC-KING FZB DIN 985

18

78371

SHOCK RELIF VALVE 140 BAR

20

76922

VALVE BLOCK CHARLYNN

21

76915

SEAL KIT CHAR-LYN HYD.MOTOR

22

den 10 oktober 2002

REMARKS

Sida 2 av 2

THIS DRAWING IS COPYRIGHT AND IS THE PROPERTY


OF BROMMA CONQUIP AB. THE DESIGN AND OR
CONSTRUCTIONS CONTAINED THEREIN MAY NOT BE
COPIED OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN
CONSENT OF THE OWNER.

2
6

35
36
33
34

52
53

47
39
46
42
43
45
44
48
41
7 54
40

14

28
29
27
25 8
30
31
32
26

37
38

13
48
49
50
51

10 11 15 16
4
23 18 22 17 20 21 24 19
12
SIGN
DESIGNED

DATE

GENERAL ASSY

SERIAL No

Illtek 020911

SPREADER TYPE

EH5

PLOT DATE

SURFACE
TREATMENT

ARTICLE No

SCALE

Exploded View
Telescopic Drive
A Partek Company

TOLERANCE GENERAL
SS-ISO 2768

REVISION

DRAWING NUMBER

SP-52012

EH5 Telescopic Drive


DRAWING SP-52012
PART NO

DESCRIPTION

QTY

POS

REMARKS

23855

TENSION ROD

16441

TELESCOPIC DRIVE ATT. ASSY

See Telescopic assy Drawing SP-52006

38073

CHAIN ASSY

Include pos.7,37,38

400242

TENSION ROD PIN ASSY

Include pos. 10,11,15,16

400244

END STOP ASSY

Include pos. 49,50,51,55

23854

TENSION ROD

61698

SHOCK ABSORBER

Includ pos.39,40,41,42,43,44,45,46,47,48,54

37409

CABLE CHAIN ASSY

Include pos.25,26,27,28,29,30,31,32

39047

CABLE CHAIN TOWER ASSY

Include pos.33,34,35,36

46744

SHAFT (TENSION ROD PIN ASSY)

10

Included in pos.4

400241

WASHER

11

Included in pos.4

38862

PEDESTAL BEARING

12

Include pos. 17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24

38084

SENSOR SINGEL ASSY

13

See Drawing SP-52008

38085

DUAL SENSOR ASSY

14

See Drawing SP-52008

den 10 oktober 2002

Sida 1 av 4

DESCRIPTION

PART NO

QTY

POS

REMARKS

75267

WASHER NORD-LOCK M 8 FZB

15

Included in pos.4

75365

SCREW M6S 8X 16 FZB 8.8

16

Included in pos.4

46773

SHAFT

17

Included in pos.12

46765

CHAIN WHEEL

18

Included in pos.12

51659

WASHER

19

Included in pos.12

41794

WASHER

20

Included in pos.12

73562

BEARING 22212 CC W33

21

Included in pos.12

73950

KEY 12X 8X 30 DIN 6885 B TK

22

Included in pos.12

74243

LOCKING RING SGA 60

23

Included in pos.12

71328

GREASEFITTING NO.208 R1/8"

24

Included in pos.12

37408

CABLE CHAIN

25

Included in pos.8

46771

GLIDE BLOCK

26

Included in pos.8

75499

SCREW MC6S 5X 16 FZB 8.8

27

Included in pos.8

75150

NUT M 5 LOC-KING FZB

28

Included in pos.8

75323

WASHER BRB 5.3X10X1 FZB HB200

29

Included in pos.8

79834

SCREW MC6S 5X 20 FZB

30

Included in pos.8

79835

SCREW MC6S 5X 12 FZB

31

Included in pos.8

den 10 oktober 2002

Sida 2 av 4

DESCRIPTION

PART NO

QTY

POS

REMARKS

75445

WASHER NORD-LOCK M 5 FZB

32

Included in pos.8

38996

CABLE CHAIN TOWER

33

Included in pos.9

75497

SCREW MF6S 8X 35 FZB 10.9

34

Included in pos.9

75090

NUT M 8 LOC-KING FZB

35

Included in pos.9

75328

WASHER BRB 8.4X16X1.5 FZB HB2

36

Included in pos.9

71512

CHAIN LOCK SIMPLEX 1 1/2" 177H

37

included in pos.3

47468

CHAIN SIMPLEX 1 1/2"177H 119

38

included in pos.3

53434

LINK SHOCK ABSORBER

39

Included in pos.7

59899

LINK L1=341 L2=381

40

Included in pos.7

59897

TUBE

41

Included in pos.7

53435

NUT SHOCK ABSORBER

42

Included in pos.7

74686

NUT M30 LOC-KING FZB KLASS 8

43

Included in pos.7

75098

NUT M 6 LOC-KING FZB

44

Included in pos.7

75293

WASHER BRB 6.4X12X1.5 FZB HB2

45

Included in pos.7

75694

SCREW M6S 6X 55 FZB 8.8

46

Included in pos.7

71529

TUBE 1 1/2"CHAIN

47

Included in pos.7

71686

CUP SPRING 71X36X4 No18

36

48

Included in pos.7

den 10 oktober 2002

35X2 L=196

Sida 3 av 4

DESCRIPTION

PART NO

QTY

POS

REMARKS

46757

SHIM

49

Include in pos.5

75267

WASHER NORD-LOCK M 8 FZB

50

Include in pos.5

78498

SCREW M6S 8X 40 FZB 8.8

51

Include in pos.5

70142

CLAMP 01-110 PP

52

75099

SCREW M6S 6X 40 FZB 8.8

53

71633

NUT M30 ML6M FZB

54

Included in pos.7

46743

END STOP

55

Include in pos.5

den 10 oktober 2002

Sida 4 av 4

REV
a
b

DESCRIPTION
One item 701016 and
1001909 added
No manufacturing change

ECO-No.

DATE

BY

Value

2008-10-14

PON

Value

2009-02-16

PON

A-A ( 1 : 2 )

10

COPIED OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE OWNER.

THIS DRAWING IS COPYRIGHT AND IS THE PROPERTY OF BROMMA CONQUIP AB. THE DESIGN AN OR CONSTRUCTIONS CONTAINED THEREIN MAY NOT BE

SIGNED BY

DATE

PON 2008-04-07

MATERIAL
ALT.

SHEET

1/1

WEIGHT

11,3 kg SS-ISO 2768-c


FORMAT

CABINET X100 MOBILE SPREADER


C/C 430x150

TOLERANCE GENERAL

A1

STANDARD

REV.

b
DRAWING NUMBER

1018972

F/N

Qty

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1,00
1,00
4,00
4,00
14,00
1,00
1,00
14,00
1,00
1,00

Name
1018972
1018967
1018235
1000657
701437
701016
701018
701019
1001909
1001911
1001912

Rev
b
c
-

Type
Cabinet
Cabinet
Connectors and Terminals
Fastening Components
Fastening Components
Enclosures and Accessories
Enclosures and Accessories
Enclosures and Accessories
Connectors and Terminals
Connectors and Terminals
Connectors and Terminals

Title
CABINET X100 MOBILE SPREADER
CABINET X100
MOUNTING PLATE ASSY
SCREW MC6S M8x16
WASHER NORD-LOCK M8
GLAND MS-M16 4.5-10mm
GLAND MS-M25 9-17mm
GLAND MS-M32 11-21mm
Electrical component
Electrical component
Electrical component

Title2
C/C 430x150
C/C 430x150
JIB SPREADER
A4 KLASS 70
A4
M16x1.5
M25x1.5
M32x1.5
Gland nut M16/ Skindicht
Gland nut M25/ Skindicht
Gland nut M32/ Skindicht

REV

DESCRIPTION
RUBBER COVER ADDED
AND MOUNTING PARTS
matrix update
MOUNTING PARTS FOR
RUBBER COVER CHANGED

a
b
c
1

ECO-No.

DATE

BY

Value

2008-09-30

PON

Value

2008-10-13

PON

Value

2009-02-04

PON

A-A
6
B

B (2:1)

COPIED OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE OWNER.

THIS DRAWING IS COPYRIGHT AND IS THE PROPERTY OF BROMMA CONQUIP AB. THE DESIGN AN OR CONSTRUCTIONS CONTAINED THEREIN MAY NOT BE

SIGNED BY

DATE

PON 2008-04-07

MATERIAL
ALT.

SHEET

1/1

WEIGHT

7,35 kg SS-ISO 2768-c


FORMAT

CABINET X100
C/C 430x150

TOLERANCE GENERAL

A2

STANDARD

REV.

c
DRAWING NUMBER

1018967

F/N

Qty

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

1,00
4,00
1,00
2,00
2,00
2,00
1,00
2,00
2,00

Name
1018967
1018159
76460
1018174
1008258
1020746
1020637
1022661
77851
1000742

Title
CABINET X100
DOOR ASSEMBLY
NUT LOC-KING M8
ELECTRICAL BOX
VALVE
LOCKING DEVICE
LOCKING DEVICE
RUBBER COVER
SCREW M6S 8x25
WASHER A4-RBS 8,4

Title2
C/C 430x150
X100
A4, DIN 985, KLASS 70
WELD ASSEMBLY
Bednorz, 800-VH-NA-NR
Bednorz, 800-18-C-NR
X100
A4, CLASS 70
KLASS 70

Cabinet X100

Terminals for -M,-HL.


Marking 1,2,3......19.

Terminal fuses
Marking 1,2,......7.

Shield plate CAN side / -M,-HL side

Sheild CANopen cable


D

Terminal CANopen High


Marking 1,2,......7

Terminal CANopen Low


Marking 1,2,......7

Terminal 24V GND


Marking 1,2,......7

When stripping the CANopen cable,


sheild should be max. 20mm
due to minimize electrical interference to CANopen

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

EH170
-

SCS CANopen
Cable/ Sensor Layout

CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:

DATE

krpulha
2009-02-09

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X0

2009-02-09

15:13

FILENAME:

SHEET

42
43
F
53

CONT.
TOTAL SH.

REV.

DRAWING NO.

1002493
9

Bromma Group Manual

BGS Accessories
8.15 LED signal lamps
Application

- Low power consumption

Bromma telescopic spreaders can be equipped with LED


signal lamps to inform the crane driver and other personnel if
the sprader has landed, (white or yellow), is unlocked (green)
or has locked (red) on a container. For twinlift spreaders a
fourth lamp is used to indicate twinboxes down (blue). For
mobile harbour crane spreaders the fourth lamp indicates
tower in mid position (yellow).

- No Phantom color effect

Description
The Bromma LED lamp assy consists of an aluminum bottom
plate and 1-4 LED lights. They are available in 24VDC or
110/230VDC versions. The 24VDC models are equipped
with a M12 connector. The 110/230 models come with 10 m
connection cable with an open end. The LED Lamp assy also
includes attachment screws, washers and nuts (M8 FZB).

- Low maintenance
- Excellent durability

Available models
Art. No.

Green, red, yellow

24 VDC

1001399

Green, red, white

24 VDC

1001400

Green, red, yellow, blue

24 VDC

1001401

Green, red, white, blue

24 VDC

1001402

Blue

24 VDC

1001403

Green, red

24 VDC

1001404

Red, green, yellow

24 VDC

1001479

Green, red, white, yellow

24 VDC

1001883

Green, red, yellow

110/230VAC

1001405

Green, red, white

110/230VAC

1001406

Green, red, yellow, blue

110/230VAC

1001407

Green, red, white, blue

110/230VAC

1001408

Blue

110/230VAC

1001409

Green, red

110/230VAC

1001410

Red, green, yellow

110/230VAC

700919

Green, red, white, yellow

110/230VAC

1001884

0-1- June. 06 rev.00

Rec. cable

70396 (M12 open end 10 m)

voltage

10m open end included

LED Colors

Bromma Conquip

Bromma Group Manual

Technical specifications
Model
Voltage range
Power consumption per light aspect
Light intesity per light aspect (clear cupola)

24VDC

110/230VAC

21--30 VDC
3.2 W
40 cd

100-240 VAC 50/60 Hz


2.5 W
30 cd

from -40OC to +55OC


up to 98% at temperature up to +35OC
IEC 60068-2-11
10-50 Hz with acceleration up to 10 g
IP68 (IEC 60529)
Hi tech polycarbonate Makrolon
10 mm aluminum alloy powder coated (RAL9005)

Ambient air temperature


Relative humidity
Salt mist conditions
Mechanical wibration
Ingress protection
Material Cupola
Material Bottm plate

Dimensions
Light
aspects
1
2
3
4

A (mm)

B (mm)

160
305
450
595

130
275
420
565

Spare parts
SP-POS
1
2
3
4
5
6

PART NO.
75102
75328
75090

DESCRIPTION
QTY
Screw M&S 8x30
4
Washer BRB 8,4x16x1,5 8
Nut M8 LOC-KING
4

1001415
1002903
70396

Attachment stright
Attachment tilted 300
Cable 10m

Warnings
CAUTION: LED light units are sources of bright light. Do
not stare directly into the beam from close distances and
observe all the warnings and guidelines in the instruction
manual. Bromma LED indicator panels are classified as
Class 2M LED devices according to the standard
IEC60825-1:1993+A1:1997+A2:2001.
Bromma Conquip

8-2- June. 06 rev .00

REMARKS
FZB 8.8
FZB HB2
FZB
see page 1
2 per LED
2 per LED
for 24VDC

Page 1 of 1
Article No:
Drawing No:
Serial No:
Customer:
Standard:
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29

Quant
4
8
4

1001444
1001444
7004-18
HNN / Antwerpen

Title
SCREW M6S 8x30
WASHER BRB
NUT M8 LOC-KING

LED-PANEL MOUNT. DET.


STS 45

Material / Article No.


FZB 8.8
8,4x16x1,5 FZB HB2
FZB

sign:
rev:

Dwg No.

BNM
-

date
2004-04-19

Art. No. Remarks


75102
75328
75090

How to order spare parts and/or service

All ordering of Bromma spare parts must be done by the Bromma e-commerce
website. To order the requested spare parts some important information must be
available.
The serial no. of the spreader. See Data Sheet chapt. 3or the dataplate mounted on
main frame of the current spreader.
The requested Art no. and the quantity needed. See Spare part list.
Registered User
To be able to log in at the Bromma e-commerce site you must be a registered user.
To become a registered user you have to fill in the Application Form on the Bromma
website. After a few days you will receive an User ID and a password by e-mail.

When you are a regitered user fill in your User ID and password at the fields on the
Bromma e-commerce website (www.bromma.com) to log in. Then follow the
instructions on the screen.

Search Function
If you do not find the parts requested on the e-commerce site or if you have any other
problems finding valid part numbers you can use the search function on the website
or call your local Bromma dealer. The phone number is published on the website
at www.bromma.com

FOR SERVICE AND SPARE PARTS PLEASE CONTACT YOUR LOCAL


DEALER

To avoid damage to property or personal injury when replacing parts, always


use BROMMA CONQUIP original parts.

BROMMA CONQUIP

08 02 ENG
rev.3

BrommaGroupManual

0-1-may02rev.00

BrommaConquip

9 Hydraulic circuit diagrams

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

09 01 ENG
rev.

10 Electrical wiring diagrams

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

10 01 ENG
rev

BROMMA
MALAXGATAN 7
S-164 22 KISTA
SWEDEN
Email: SALES@BROMMA.COM
+46 (0)8 620 09 00
Tel:
B

Customer
Plant designation
Drawing Number
Revision

:
:
:
:

Manufacturer (Company)

: BROMMA

Project name
Serial Number
Type
Responsible for project

: EH5U_SCS CANopen
: : EH5U
:

LIEBHERR
A1
1002499
f

LIEBHERR
C

BROMMA SPREADER EH5U


E

Created on the
The latest revition

:
:

11/19/2009
08/20/2010

By

Number of pages :

: chanka

Manufacturing site

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

45

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

DRAWN BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

aveklle
09/19/2001

SHEET

SCS CANopen
Flyleaf

CHECKED BY:

DATE

EH5U
PLANT (=)

PLOTTED:

UNIT (+)

FILENAME:

08/20/2010

17:10

1
2
F
45

CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499
9

Table of content
Plant des.

Location

A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1

X0
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0

A1
A1

X0
X0

Page
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30

Page description
Flyleaf
Table of contents
Table of contents
Connector designation
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
PLC diagram
I/O card overview
I/O card overview
I/O card overview

Rev

Revision note

Date
06/12/2007
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

SERIAL NO.

EH5U
-

DRAWN BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
11/02/2001

SHEET

SCS CANopen
PLANT (=)

PLOTTED:

UNIT (+)

FILENAME:

08/20/2010

17:10

2
3
45

CONT.

Table of contents

CHECKED BY:

Editor
aveklle
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy

TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499

Table of content
Plant des.
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1

Location
X0
X1
X0
X1
X0
X0
X0
X0

Page
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45

Page description
I/O card overview
Cabinet layout
Cable/ Sensor Layout
Cabinet layout
Cable/ Sensor Layout
Cable/ Sensor Layout
Cable/ Sensor Layout
Spreader layout
Parts list: (79125 - 75618)
Parts list: (73983 - 76576)
CABLE LIST
CABLE LIST
CABLE LIST
CABLE LIST
CABLE LIST

Rev

Revision note

Date
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009
11/20/2009

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

SERIAL NO.

EH5U
-

DRAWN BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
11/03/2004

SHEET

SCS CANopen
PLANT (=)

PLOTTED:

UNIT (+)

FILENAME:

08/20/2010

17:10

3
4
45

CONT.

Table of contents

CHECKED BY:

Editor
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy
sharifsy

TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499

SPREADER CONNECTOR

XP1 SPREADER MALE CONTACT


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37

L
PE

CONTROL VOLTAGE
PROTECTION EARTH
SPREADER PILOT

CONTROL VOLTAGE HEATER


CONTROL VOLTAGE HEATER
SPARE
TWL LOCK
TWL UNLOCK
GREEN FLIPPERS DOWN
BLACK FLIPPERS DOWN
RED FLIPPERS DOWN
WHITE FLIPPER DOWN
ALL FLIPPERS UP
TWL LOCK
TWL UNLOCK
MOVE G.P. TO WHITE
MOVE G.P. TO BLACK
EXPAND TELESCOPE
RETRACT TELESCOPE
SPARE
SPARE
POWER SUPPLY
POWER SUPPLY
POWER SUPPLY
NEUTRAL
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
POWER SUPPLY
POWER SUPPLY
POWER SUPPLY
SPARE
H.I.S
(OPTION)

B
SIG
SIG
CMD
CMD
CMD

XP1 PIN DESCRIPTION


1
5

CMD
CMD
CMD
CMD
CMD
CMD

10
16

11
17

34

13

25

14
20

26
31

35

21
27

22
28

37

RED POINT
L1

MALE INSERT

L2
L3
N

SOCKET= ODU 309 020 000 554 000 BROMMA Nr.73523


INSERT = ODU 309 803 150 037 151 BROMMA Nr.74410

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

SIGN.

SIG
SIG
SIG
SIG
PE

ALL LANDED SIGNAL


TTDC OK
(OPTION)
PROTECTION EARTH

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

33

32
36

NOTE:
Plug is to be filled
with Elastosil RT607A
or similar Compound

15

L1
L2
L3

ITEM

4
8

19

30

12

24
29

3
7

18

23

CMD
CMD

2
6

SERIAL NO.

SCS CANopen
Connector designation

CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

DATE

EH5U
-

sharifsy
05/08/2002

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X0

08/20/2010

17:10

FILENAME:

SHEET

4
5
F
45

CONT.
TOTAL SH.

DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499
9

A1
+X0

-XP1

22

-WXP1

-X2

30

23

31

24

32

37

22

30

23

31

24

32

PE

:L1

:L1

:L2

:L2

:L3

:L3

:PE

:PE

-F1

2A

-QM8

I>

I>
2

-QM1

I>
4

I>

I>
2

1
2

-P1

I>
4

B
-Q1

-K1

/7.01

-K8

-K9

-K2

-K3

/10.04

/10.05

/10.01

/10.02

/6.01 / -Phase L3

/6.01 / -Phase L2

C
/6.01 / -Phase L1

-XP23

-X2

21

A1
+X100

-X2

-WM4

21

:7

:8

:9

:PE

PE

-M4
3.0KW

-WM1

PE

5.5KW

SIGN.

3
2

-BRAKE1

-M1
Gravity point motor

SERIAL NO.

EH5U
-

DRAWN BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
05/14/2002

SHEET

SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram

CHECKED BY:

PE

DATE

M
3 ~

-BRAKE2

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

-M1

:PE

-M4
Telescopic motor

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

:3

M
3 ~
PE

ITEM

:2

A1
+X0
-WXP23

:1

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X1

08/20/2010

17:10

FILENAME:

5
6
F
45

CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499
9

A1
+X0

-XP1

-XP2

PE

-WXP2

BROWN

-WXP1

/5.01 / -Phase L3

PE

BLUE

/5.01 / -Phase L2
/5.01 / -Phase L1

-X2

-K6

/10.03

I>

I>
2

-QM7

I>
4

:103

:102

:104

-KA1

/7.07

-QM6

:101

I>

I>
2

14

12
11

-KA1
/7.07

24

22
21

I>
4

C
L

-XP23

22

20

-EH1

PE

A1
+X0

-WXP23

22

20

PE

:1

:2

:3

:PE

:4

:5

:6

:PE

:PE

PE

PE

A1
+X100

D
-X2

-WM2

-M2
2.2KW

-WM3

M
3 ~

-M3
2.2KW

M
3 ~

PE

PE

-M2
Hydralic pump
left

-M3
Hydralic pump
right

Cabinet heater

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

DRAWN BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
05/14/2002

SHEET

SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram

CHECKED BY:

DATE

EH5U
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X1

08/20/2010

17:10

FILENAME:

6
7
F
45

CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499
9

1
A1
+X0

-XP1
-WXP1

25

25

-X2

:107

:105

:108

:106

-Q1

13

/5.01

14
1

-X2

22

GND

-X2

BN

C
A2
A1

:N
:N

-N.VAC / /13.00

:L

-L.VAC / /12.00

:L

YL/GL

BU

90-255VAC
---24VDC

-K1

21

NOTE:
All 24vdc supply should be ring Connected

10A

-F2

B
.01
-SS1

RD RD

BK BK

+ +

- -

A1

-G1

-KA1
A2

-24VDC SCS / /15.00


-24VDC / /9.00
-0VDC / /10.00

11

-SS1
.01

12

D
7

:2

-X1

:3

-K1

-XP21

.04

24VDC

+ 24VDC
MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

:-

10

:-

:-

14

SERIAL NO.

DRAWN BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

21/6.08

-KA1
Cabinet heater

EH5U
sharifsy
03/22/2002

11/6.08

SHEET

SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram

CHECKED BY:

DATE

22

0 VDC

ITEM

:-

12
24

Spreader
stop

:-

/8.08 / -XP21:10

:-

:-

/8.08 / -XP21:9

:+

/8.08 / -XP21:8

6 /5.01

:+

/8.07 / -XP21:7

:+

/8.07 / -XP21:6

4 /5.01

:+

/8.09 / -XP21:5

:+

/8.09 / -XP21:4

2 /5.01

:+

/8.09 / -XP21:3

:+

/8.08 / -XP21:2

.01

/8.08 / -XP21:1

/14.00 / -Spreader stop

:1

NOTE:
Wire for 24VDC
shall bee 2,5mm
with blue colour.

-X1

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X1

08/20/2010

17:10

FILENAME:

7
8
F
45

CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499
9

ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

1
SIGN.

2
:3
:10
:17
:24

:4
:11
:18
:25

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

:5
:12
:19
:26

DATE

:6
:13
:20

MACHINE TYPE:

SERIAL NO.

DRAWN BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

:27

sharifsy
08/27/2004

:7
:14

PLANT (=)

UNIT (+)

:21

-WXP21
6

EH5U
-

CHECKED BY:

A1
:
X1

7
7

PLOTTED:

8
9

08/20/2010

10

FILENAME:

17:10

2
3

SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram

/7.05 / -XP21:5

A1
+X100

/7.05 / -XP21:4

:23
brown

white

blue

red

brown

white

blue

red

brown

white

blue

red

-WX13
-Can low X13 / /24.09

-Can high X13 / /24.09

-GND X13 / /25.09

-VBB X13 / /25.09

-Can low X10 / /22.09

-Can high X10 / /22.09

-GND X10 / /23.09

-+VBB X10 / /23.09

-Can low X8 / /20.09

-Can high X8 / /20.09

-GND X8 / /21.09

-+VBB X8 / /21.09

-Can low X3 / /18.09

-Can high X3 / /18.09

-GND X3 / /19.09

-+VBB X3 / /19.09

-Can low X2 / /16.09

-Can high X2 / /16.09

/7.05 / -XP21:3

:16

-WX10

/7.04 / -XP21:2

:9
brown

white

blue

-WX8

/7.04 / -XP21:1

:2

/7.06 / -XP21:10

:22

/7.06 / -XP21:9

-WXP22
:15
red

-WX3

/7.06 / -XP21:8

A1
+X0
brown

white

-GND X2 / /17.09

/7.06 / -XP21:7

:8

/7.06 / -XP21:6

:1

Brown

-X1

White

/15.06 / -CAN low X1

/15.06 / -CAN high X1

-WX2
blue

-+VBB X2 / /17.09

red

0
8
9

A1
+X0

B
B

-0VDC / +X1/9.00

:28

D
D

E
E

SHEET

CONT.

DRAWING NO.
TOTAL SH.

1002499
9

8
9
F
45

REV.

:43

PIN NO: 21

PIN NO: 44

:41

:31

:42

:44

:21

+B1-XPX1

COMMON GROUP 2

:3

COMMON GROUP 1

-B1

:2

:11

:1

B
/7.08 / -24VDC

-24VDC / /10.00

-XP23

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

A1
+X0
-WXP23

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

A1
+X100

+X1/8.08 / -0VDC

-X2

:13

:14

:15

:16

:17

:18

:19

:16

-WHL 5-8
-WHL 1-4

-HL1

-HL2

Green

Red

-HL3

White

-HL4
Yellow

-HL5

-HL6

Green

-HL7

White

Red

-HL8

Yellow

-HL1
Unlocked left

-HL2
Locked left

-HL3
Landed left

-HL4
Tower in center left

-HL5
Unlocked right

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

EH5U
-

DRAWN BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
05/14/2002

-HL8
Tower in centre right
SHEET

SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram

CHECKED BY:

DATE

-HL7
Landed right

-HL6
Locked right

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X1

08/20/2010

17:10

FILENAME:

9
10
F
45

CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499
9

PIN NO: 21

PIN NO: 44

:6

12

:7

:16

11

:35

13

:26

10

:8

:4

+B1-XPX1

COMMON GROUP 4

14

:5

COMMON GROUP 3

-B1

15

:25

16

:15

/9.09 / -24VDC

-24VDC / /11.00

A1

A1

-K2

A1

-K3
A2

-K6

A1

A1

A2

A2

-K8

A2

-K9

A2

D
/7.08 / -0VDC

-0VDC / /11.00

2 /5.07

2 /5.08

2 /6.02

2/5.04

2 /5.05

4 /5.07

4 /5.08

4 /6.02

4/5.04

4 /5.05

6 /5.07

6 /5.08

6 /6.02

6/5.04

6 /5.05

K3
Gravity point
to right

K2
Gravity point
to left

K6
Hydralic pump
left/right gable

K8
Retract
telescope

K9
Extend
telescope

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

EH5U
-

DRAWN BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
06/29/2004

Not
connected
SHEET

SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram

CHECKED BY:

DATE

Not
connected

Not
connected
MACHINE TYPE:

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X1

08/20/2010

17:10

FILENAME:

10
11
F
45

CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499
9

:30

20

:40

:20

19

:50

21

:10

18

PIN NO: 50

COMMON GROUP 6

:9

:46

+B1-XPX1

17

PIN NO: 9

COMMON GROUP 5

22

:47

-B1

23

:49

24

:48

/10.09 / -24VDC

-24VDC / /14.00

D
1

-P2
2

/10.09 / -0VDC

-0VDC / /14.00

Not
connected

Not
connected

Not
connected

Not
connected

Container
Counter
MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

Not
connected

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

EH5U
-

DRAWN BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
11/23/2004

Not
connected
SHEET

SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram

CHECKED BY:

DATE

Not
connected

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X1

08/20/2010

17:10

FILENAME:

11
12
F
45

CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499
9

:41

:42

PIN NO: 43

PIN NO: 11

:31

28

:21

27

:43

29

:11

26

+B1-XPX3

25

:24

30

COMMON GROUP 8

COMMON GROUP 7

:35

31

-B1

:44

32

:45

/7.08 / -L.VAC

C
-X2

A1
+X0

-WXP1
-XP1

:109

:110

:111

35

:112

35

:113

:114

:115

:116

20

21

34

36

20

21

34

36

Unlocked
signal

Locked
signal

Spreader landed
signal

G.p. in centre
signal

G.p. to left
signal

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

EH5U
-

DRAWN BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
03/12/2001

TTDS ok
signal (option)
SHEET

SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram

CHECKED BY:

DATE

H.I.S
signal (option)

G.p. to right
signal

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X1

08/20/2010

17:10

FILENAME:

12
13
F
45

CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499
9

A1
+X0

-XP1

19

-WXP1

18

19

13

18

10

13

12

10

11

12

11

-X2

:117

:118

:119

:120

:121

:122

:123

:124

115 VAC INPUT MODULE


BROMMA part no. 1001748
230 VAC INPUT MODULE
BROMMA part no. 1001747

/7.08 / -N.VAC

-N.VAC / /14.00

+B1-XPX3

:1

:5

:4

:3

:2

:15

:6

:16

33

34

35

36

COMMON GROUP 9

Telescope
to 30'
CMD

Telescope
expand / to40
CMD

Flippers
all up
CMD

PIN NO: 15

Telescope
retract / to 20
CMD

:26

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

Flipper
waterside down
CMD

38

Flipper
right down
CMD

SERIAL NO.

DRAWN BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

39

Flipper
left down
CMD

EH5U
-

40

sharifsy
09/26/2002

Flipper
landside down
CMD
SHEET

SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram

CHECKED BY:

DATE

COMMON GROUP 10

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

37

:25

-B1
PIN NO: 1

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X1

08/20/2010

17:10

FILENAME:

13
14
F
45

CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499
9

A1
+X0

-XP1

14

-WXP1

15

14

16

15

17

16

17

115 VAC INPUT MODULE


BROMMA part no. 1001748
230 VAC INPUT MODULE
BROMMA part no. 1001747

-X2

:125

:126

:127

:128

/11.09 / -24VDC

/7.00 / -Spreader stop

13

-SB1

14

GRAV.POINT
AUT. RETURN
OFF
ON

/11.09 / -0VDC

-0VDC / /15.00

D
/13.08 / -N.VAC

+B1-XPX3

:36

:49

:48

:47

:46

:8

:7

:10

:9

:40

:50

:30

:20

42

43

44

COMMON GROUP 11

Twl
lock
CMD

Twl
unlock
CMD

G.p.
move to left
CMD

G.p.
move to right
CMD

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

46

DRAWN BY:

EH5U
-

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
07/07/2004

47

Spreader
stop

48

G.p.
auto return
SHEET

SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram

CHECKED BY:

DATE

Not
connected

Not
connected

45

PIN NO: 20

41

PIN NO: 40

PIN NO: 10

PIN NO: 8

PIN NO: 36

-B1

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X1

08/20/2010

17:10

FILENAME:

14
15
F
45

CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499
9

-X2

:129

-CAN low X1 / /8.01

-CAN high X1 / /8.01

:130

-XP22

-WXP22

white

brown

EEPROM

+B1-XPX2

:42

:43

:44

:45

:10

:9

:19

:29

:39

:49

:30

:40

:50

:20

BLACK

BLUE

GREEN

RED

GN

BN;GN

-KEY1

WH

/7.08 / -24VDC SCS

WH;BN

/14.09 / -0VDC

16

26

36

:48

:6

:16

:26

:36

Main supply
node B1

Node
Address

B-Can

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

EEPROM

EH5U
-

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
07/07/2004

SHEET

SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram

CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:

VCC

SC

SD

GND

Can-GND

Can-open L

SERIAL NO.

DATE

Can-open
MACHINE TYPE:

Can-open H

B-Can L

B-Can H

ID5

ID4

ID3

ID1

ID0

GND

GND

GND

+24V

+24V

-B1

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X1

08/20/2010

17:10

FILENAME:

15
16
F
45

CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499
9

-WS2-S6

-S10

-WS9

3
-

-S9

3
-

-S6

-S2

-WS1-S5

-S5

-WS10

-Can low X2 / +X1/8.01

3
-

-S1

-Can high X2 / +X1/8.01

-R2
2

Node ID: 2
Left gable end

+X2-XP1

+X2-XP3

In 1

-S1
Unlocked
left landside

In 5

-S5
Locked
left landside

+X2-XP5

In 2

-S2
Unlocked
left waterside

In 6

-S6
Locked
left waterside

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

In 7

EH5U
-

DRAWN BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
03/12/2001

+X2-X0

In 4

-S10
Landed
left waterside

In 8

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X0

08/20/2010

17:10

FILENAME:

:1

:2

CAN-open
Interface / Supply

Spare

SHEET

SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram

CHECKED BY:

DATE

Spare
MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

In 3

-S9
Landed
left landside

+X2-XP7

CAN_low

-X2
/17.00

CAN_high

16
17
F
45

CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499
9

Out 3

Out 7

Out 4

Out 8

GND

Left gable end


+X2-XP2

+X2-XP4

+X2-XP6

+X2-XP8

+X2-X0

+VBB

Out 6

Out 2

6
O

Out 5

Out 1

Node ID: 2

/16.00

0
-X2

:3

:5

-WY7-Y8

-WY1-Y2

-WY3-Y4

-WY5-Y6

B 2

-Y8

B 2

-Y1
A

B 2

-Y3

-Y2

B 2

-Y5

-Y4

-Y6
+X1/8.01 / -GND X2

+X1/8.00 / -+VBB X2

-Y7

-Y7
Twistlock
unlock left

-Y8
Twistlock
lock left

-Y1
Flipper 1 up
left landside

-Y2
Flipper 1 down
left landside

-Y3
Flipper 2 up
left waterside

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

-Y4
Flipper 2 down
left waterside

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

EH5U
-

DRAWN BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
06/22/2004

-Y6
Flipper 5 down
left centre

CAN-open
Interface / Supply
SHEET

SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram

CHECKED BY:

DATE

-Y5
Flipper 5 up
left centre

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X0

08/20/2010

17:10

FILENAME:

17
18
F
45

CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499
9

-S7

-WS4-S8

-WS11

-S12

-S11

-S8

-S4

-WS3-S7

-S3

-WS12

-Can low X3 / +X1/8.02

-Can high X3 / +X1/8.02

-R3
2

Node ID: 3

+X3-XP1

Right gable end

+X3-XP3

In 1

-S3
Unlocked
right waterside

In 5

-S7
Locked
right waterside

+X3-XP5

In 2

-S4
Unlocked
right landside

In 6

-S8
Locked
right landside

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

In 7

EH5U
-

DRAWN BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
06/22/2004

+X3-X0

In 4

-S12
Landed
right landside

In 8

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X0

08/20/2010

17:10

FILENAME:

:1

:2

CAN-open
Interface / Supply

Spare

SHEET

SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram

CHECKED BY:

DATE

Spare
MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

In 3

-S11
Landed
right waterside

+X3-XP7

CAN_low

-X3
/19.00

CAN_high

18
19
F
45

CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499
9

Out 3

Out 7

Out 4

Out 8

GND

Right gable end


+X3-XP2

+X3-XP4

+X3-XP6

+X3-XP8

+X3-X0

+VBB

Out 6

Out 2

6
O

Out 5

Out 1

Node ID: 3

/18.00

0
-X3

:3

:5

-WY15-Y16

-WY9-Y10

-WY11-Y12

-WY13-Y14

B 2

-Y16

B 2

-Y9
A

-Y10

B 2

-Y11

B 2

-Y13

-Y12

-Y14
+X1/8.02 / -GND X3

+X1/8.01 / -+VBB X3

-Y15

-Y15
Twistlock
unlock right

-Y16
Twistlock
lock right

-Y9
Flipper 3 up
right waterside

-Y10
Flipper 3 down
right waterside

-Y11
Flipper 4 up
right landside

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

-Y12
Flipper 4 down
right landside

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

EH5U
-

DRAWN BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
06/22/2004

-Y14
Flipper 6 down
right centre

CAN-open
Interface / Supply
SHEET

SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram

CHECKED BY:

DATE

-Y13
Flipper 6 up
right centre

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X0

08/20/2010

17:10

FILENAME:

19
20
F
45

CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499
9

-WS52-S53

-WS13-S16

-WS14-S114

3
-

-S114

-S14

3
-

-S16

-S13

3
-

-S53

-S52

-WS54-S55

-S55

-Can low X8 / +X1/8.05

3
-

-S54

-Can high X8 / +X1/8.05

Node ID: 8

+X8-XP1

Centre landside

+X8-XP3

In 1

-S54
G.P tower
left stop

In 5

-S55
GP tower
right stop

+X8-XP5

In 2

-S52
G.P tower
left centre

In 6

-S53
G.P tower
right centre

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

In 7

EH5U
-

DRAWN BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
06/23/2004

+X8-X0

In 4

-S14
30' telescope
positon

In 8

-S114
30' telescope
positon

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X0

08/20/2010

17:10

FILENAME:

:1

:2

CAN-open
Interface / Supply
SHEET

SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram

CHECKED BY:

DATE

-S16
40' telescope
positon
MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

In 3

-S13
20' telescope
position

+X8-XP7

CAN_low

-X8
/21.00

CAN_high

20
21
F
45

CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499
9

Out 3

Out 7

Out 4

Out 8

GND

Centre landside
+X8-XP2

+X8-XP4

+X8-XP6

+X8-XP8

+X8-X0

+VBB

Out 6

Out 2

6
O

Out 5

Out 1

Node ID: 8

/20.00

0
-X8

:3

:5

+X1/8.05 / -GND X8

+X1/8.04 / -+VBB X8

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

Spare

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

EH5U
-

DRAWN BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
06/23/2004

CAN-open
Interface / Supply

Spare

SHEET

SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram

CHECKED BY:

DATE

Spare

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X0

08/20/2010

17:10

FILENAME:

21
22
F
45

CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499
9

X10 Option
1

3
-

-S84
4

-WS83

-WS84

-Can low X10 / +X1/8.06

-Can high X10 / +X1/8.06

-S83

/23.00

Node ID: A

+X10-XP1

Centre waterside

+X10-XP3

In 1

Spare

Spare

In 5

+X10-XP5

In 2

Spare

Spare

In 6

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

In 7

EH5U
-

DRAWN BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
06/24/2004

+X10-X0

In 4

-S84
High indication
right (option)

In 8

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X0

08/20/2010

17:10

FILENAME:

:1

:2

CAN-open
Interface / Supply

Spare

SHEET

SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram

CHECKED BY:

DATE

Spare
MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

In 3

-S83
High indication
left (option)

+X10-XP7

CAN_low

-X10

CAN_high

22
23
F
45

CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499
9

Out 3

Out 7

Out 4

Out 8

GND

Centre waterside
+X10-XP2

+X10-XP4

+X10-XP6

+X10-XP8

+X10-X0

+VBB

Out 6

Out 2

6
O

Out 5

Out 1

Node ID: A

/22.00

0
-X10

:3

:5

+X1/8.06 / -GND X10

+X1/8.05 / -+VBB X10

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

Spare

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

EH5U
-

DRAWN BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
06/24/2004

CAN-open
Interface / Supply

Spare

SHEET

SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram

CHECKED BY:

DATE

Spare

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X0

08/20/2010

17:10

FILENAME:

23
24
F
45

CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499
9

X13 Option

-S91

-WS92-S93

-S95

-WS94

-WS95-S96

3
-

-S96

3
-

-S94

3
-

-S93

-S92

-WS90-S91

-S90

-Can high X13 / +X1/8.07

-Can low X13 / +X1/8.07

Node ID: 13

+X13-XP1

Middle landside
option

+X13-XP3

+X13-XP5

In 1

-S91
TTDS
sensor

In 5

In 2

-S92
TTDS
sensor

-S93
TTDS
sensor

In 6

In 3

-S94
TTDS
sensor

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

In 7

+X13-X0

DRAWN BY:

EH5U
-

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
10/15/2002

In 4

-S95
TTDS
sensor

In 8

-S96
TTDS
sensor

:1

:2

CAN-open
Interface / Supply
SHEET

SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram

CHECKED BY:

DATE

Spare

MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM

-S90
TTDS
sensor

+X13-XP7

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X0

08/20/2010

17:10

FILENAME:

CAN_low

/25.00

CAN_high

-X13

24
25
F
45

CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499
9

Out 3

Out 7

Out 4

Out 8

GND

+X13-XP4

+X13-XP6

+X13-XP8

+X13-X0

+VBB

Out 6

Out 2

6
O

Out 5

Middle landside
+X13-XP2
option

Out 1

Node ID: 13

/24.00

0
-X13

:3

:5

+X1/8.06 / -VBB X13

+X1/8.07 / -GND X13

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

Spare

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

Spare

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

EH5U
-

DRAWN BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
10/29/2004

CAN-open
Interface / Supply

Spare

SHEET

SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram

CHECKED BY:

DATE

Spare

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X0

08/20/2010

17:10

FILENAME:

25
26
F
45

CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499
9

MOTOR WITH BRAKE AND CURRENT RELAY

SR
B

ws

rt

ws

bl

BGE

ws
W2 U2 V2

rt

2
BS

TS

U1 V1 W1

3
4
bl

L1

L2 L3

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

DRAWN BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
05/09/2003

SHEET

SCS CANopen
Circuit diagram

CHECKED BY:

DATE

EH5U
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X0

08/20/2010

17:10

FILENAME:

26
27
F
45

CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499
9

NODE

I/O

TYPE

PIN NR.

DESCRIPTION

NODE

I/O

-B1

Digital output

-XPX1:31

-HL1 Unlocked left

-B1

25

-B1

Digital output

-XPX1:41

-HL2 Locked left

-B1

-B1

Digital output

-XPX1:43

-HL3 Landed left

-B1

Digital output

-XPX1:42

-B1

Digital output

-B1

-B1

TYPE

PIN NR.

DESCRIPTION

Digital output

-XPX3:21

Locked signal

26

Digital output

-XPX3:31

Unlocked signal

-B1

27

Digital output

-XPX3:41

Spreader landed signal

-HL4 Tower in center left

-B1

28

Digital output

-XPX3:42

G.p. in centre signal

-XPX1:3

-HL5 Unlocked right

-B1

29

Digital output

-XPX3:24

G.p. to leftsignal

Digital output

-XPX1:2

-HL6 Locked right

-B1

30

Digital output

-XPX3:35

G.p. to rightsignal

Digital output

-XPX1:11

-HL7 Landed right

-B1

31

Digital output

-XPX3:44

H.I.S signal (option)

-B1

Digital output

-XPX1:1

Not connected

-B1

32

Digital output

-XPX3:45

TTDS ok signal (option)

-B1

Digital output

-XPX1:26

K2 Gravity point to left

-B1

33

Digital input

-XPX3:5

Telescope retract / to 20 CMD

-B1

10

Digital output

-XPX1:16

K3 Gravity point to right

-B1

34

Digital input

-XPX3:4

Telescope to 30' CMD

-B1

11

Digital output

-XPX1:6

K6 Hydralic pump left/right gable

-B1

35

Digital input

-XPX3:3

Telescope expand / to40 CMD

-B1

12

Digital output

-XPX1:7

K8 Retract telescope

-B1

36

Digital input

-XPX3:2

Flippers all up CMD

-B1

13

Digital output

-XPX1:4

K9 Extend telescope

-B1

37

Digital input

-XPX3:6

Flipper waterside down CMD

-B1

14

Digital output

-XPX1:5

Not connected

-B1

38

Digital input

-XPX3:16

Flipper right down CMD

-B1

15

Digital output

-XPX1:25

Not connected

-B1

39

Digital input

-XPX3:25

Flipper left down CMD

-B1

16

Digital output

-XPX1:15

Not connected

-B1

40

Digital input

-XPX3:26

Flipper landside down CMD

-B1

17

Digital output

-XPX1:10

Not connected

-B1

41

Digital input

-XPX3:49

Twl lock CMD

-B1

18

Digital output

-XPX1:20

Not connected

-B1

42

Digital input

-XPX3:48

Twl unlock CMD

-B1

19

Digital output

-XPX1:30

Not connected

-B1

43

Digital input

-XPX3:47

G.p. move to left CMD

-B1

20

Digital output

-XPX1:40

Not connected

-B1

44

Digital input

-XPX3:46

G.p. move to right CMD

-B1

21

Digital output

-XPX1:46

Container Counter

-B1

45

Digital input

-XPX3:7

Not connected

-B1

22

Digital output

-XPX1:47

Not connected

-B1

46

Digital input

-XPX3:9

Not connected

-B1

23

Digital output

-XPX1:49

Not connected

-B1

47

Digital input

-XPX3:50

Spreader stop

-B1

24

Digital output

-XPX1:48

Not connected

-B1

48

Digital input

-XPX3:20

G.p. auto return

MACHINE TYPE:

I/0 OVERVIEW
CREATED: 11/20/2009 10:50

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

SERIAL NO.

EH5U
-

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
01/04/2005

PLANT (=)

PLOTTED:

UNIT (+)

FILENAME:

08/20/2010

17:10

27
28
45

CONT.

PLC diagram

CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:

SHEET

SCS CANopen

TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499

K2
Gravity point
to left
K3
Gravity point
to right
K6
Hydralic pump
left/right gable
K8
Retract
telescope
K9
Extend
telescope

-HL1
Unlocked left
-HL2
Locked left
-HL3
Landed left
-HL4
Tower in center left
-HL5
Unlocked right

Not
connected

Locked
signal

Not
connected

Unlocked
signal

Not
connected

Spreader landed
signal

Not
connected

G.p. in centre
signal

Container
Counter

G.p. to left
signal

-HL6
Locked right

Not
connected

Not
connected

G.p. to right
signal

-HL7
Landed right

Not
connected

Not
connected

H.I.S
signal (option)

Not
connected

Not
connected

Not
connected

TTDS ok
signal (option)

Twl
lock
CMD
Twl
unlock
CMD
G.p.
move to left
CMD
G.p.
move to right
CMD

Telescope
retract / to 20
CMD
Telescope
to 30'
CMD
Telescope
expand / to40
CMD
Flippers
all up
CMD
Flipper
waterside down
CMD
Flipper
right down
CMD
Flipper
left down
CMD
Flipper
landside down
CMD

Not
connected
Not
connected
Spreader
stop

G.p.
auto return

24VDC / Output red

24VDC / Output red

230VAC / Output
black

115 / 230VAC / Input


yellow

115 / 230VAC / Input


yellow

24VDC / Output red

24VDC / Output red

230VAC / Output
black

115 / 230VAC / Input


yellow

115 / 230VAC / Input


yellow

24VDC / Output red

24VDC / Output red

230VAC / Output
black

115 / 230VAC / Input


yellow

115 / 230VAC / Input


yellow

24VDC / Output red

24VDC / Output red

230VAC / Output
black

115 / 230VAC / Input


yellow

115 / 230VAC / Input


yellow

24VDC / Output red

24VDC / Output red

230VAC / Output
black

115 / 230VAC / Input


yellow

24VDC / Output red

230VAC / Output
black

115 / 230VAC / Input


yellow

24VDC / Output red

230VAC / Output
black

115 / 230VAC / Input


yellow

24VDC / Input white

230VAC / Output
black

115 / 230VAC / Input


yellow

24VDC / Input white

24VDC / Output red

XP1

XP2

XP3

-B1
MACHINE TYPE:

I/0 OVERVIEW
CREATED: 11/20/2009 10:50

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

SERIAL NO.

EH5U
-

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
01/04/2005

PLANT (=)

PLOTTED:

UNIT (+)

FILENAME:

08/20/2010

17:10

28
29
45

CONT.

I/O card overview

CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:

SHEET

SCS CANopen

TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499

CAN-Open I/O

-X2

-X3

Left gable end

Right gable end

INPUTS
Pin

OUTPUTS

Connector 7

Pin

Connector 8

INPUTS
Pin

OUTPUTS
Pin

Connector 7

Connector 8

Spare

-Y6 Flipper 5 down left centre

Spare

-Y14 Flipper 6 down right centre

-S10 Landed left waterside

-Y5 Flipper 5 up left centre

-S12 Landed right landside

-Y13 Flipper 6 up right centre

Connector 5

Connector 5

Connector 6

Spare

-Y4 Flipper 2 down left waterside

-S9 Landed left landside

-Y3 Flipper 2 up left waterside

Connector 3

Connector 6

Spare

-Y12 Flipper 4 down right landside

-S11 Landed right waterside

-Y11 Flipper 4 up right landside

Connector 3

Connector 4

Connector 4

-S6 Locked left waterside

-Y2 Flipper 1 down left landside

-S8 Locked right landside

-Y10 Flipper 3 down right waterside

-S2 Unlocked left waterside

-Y1 Flipper 1 up left landside

-S4 Unlocked right landside

-Y9 Flipper 3 up right waterside

Connector 1

Connector 1

Connector 2

Connector 2

-S5 Locked left landside

-Y8 Twistlock lock left

-S7 Locked right waterside

-Y16 Twistlock lock right

-S1 Unlocked left landside

-Y7 Twistlock unlock left

-S3 Unlocked right waterside

-Y15 Twistlock unlock right

Module ID: 2

Module ID: 3

MACHINE TYPE:

I/0 OVERVIEW
CREATED: 11/20/2009 10:50

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

SERIAL NO.

EH5U
-

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
12/03/2004

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

A1
:
X0

PLOTTED:
FILENAME:

08/20/2010

17:10

29
30
45

CONT.

I/O card overview

CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:

SHEET

SCS CANopen

TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499

CAN-Open I/O

-X8

-X10

Centre landside

Centre waterside

INPUTS
Pin

OUTPUTS

Connector 7

Pin

Connector 8

INPUTS
Pin

OUTPUTS
Pin

Connector 7

Connector 8

-S114 30' telescope positon

Spare

Spare

Spare

-S14 30' telescope positon

Spare

-S84 High indication right (option)

Spare

Connector 5

Connector 5

Connector 6

-S16 40' telescope positon

Spare

-S13 20' telescope position

Spare

Connector 3

Connector 6

Spare

Spare

-S83 High indication left (option)

Spare

Connector 3

Connector 4

Connector 4

-S53 G.P tower right centre

Spare

Spare

Spare

-S52 G.P tower left centre

Spare

Spare

Spare

Connector 1

Connector 1

Connector 2

Connector 2

-S55 GP tower right stop

Spare

Spare

Spare

-S54 G.P tower left stop

Spare

Spare

Spare

Module ID: 8

Module ID: 10

MACHINE TYPE:

I/0 OVERVIEW
CREATED: 11/20/2009 10:50

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

SERIAL NO.

EH5U
-

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
01/04/2005

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

A1
:
X0

PLOTTED:
FILENAME:

08/20/2010

17:10

30
31
45

CONT.

I/O card overview

CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:

SHEET

SCS CANopen

TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499

CAN-Open I/O

-X13
Middle landside option

INPUTS

OUTPUTS
Pin

OUTPUTS
Pin

Pin

Connector 7

Pin

-S96 TTDS sensor

Spare

-S95 TTDS sensor

Spare

Connector 5

Connector 8

INPUTS

Connector 5

Connector 6

Spare

Spare

-S94 TTDS sensor

Spare

Connector 3

Connector 7

Connector 6
2
4

Connector 3

Connector 4

Connector 4

-S93 TTDS sensor

Spare

-S92 TTDS sensor

Spare

Connector 1

Connector 1

Connector 2

Connector 2

-S91 TTDS sensor

Spare

-S90 TTDS sensor

Spare

Module ID: 13

Module ID:

MACHINE TYPE:

I/0 OVERVIEW
CREATED: 11/20/2009 10:50

Connector 8

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

SERIAL NO.

EH5U
-

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
01/04/2005

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

A1
:
X0

PLOTTED:
FILENAME:

08/20/2010

17:10

31
32
45

CONT.

I/O card overview

CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:

SHEET

SCS CANopen

TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499

Internal layout X1 cabinet EH5U

B1

290mm

XP1

XP2

XP3

Rubber boot

Distance between cable


trunk and edge 45mm

30x90x115mm

30x90x640mm

X1

/6.02

/10.03

/6.04

/5.04

/10.04

/5.07

/10.01

/11.05

740mm
-K6

30x90x380mm

G1

-QM6

-QM7

-K8

-K2

-QM8

-QM1

-P2

30x90x490mm

-F1

2A

-EH1

/5.09

/7.02

/7.07

/7.01

10A

Power supply

-F2

/5.09
-KA1

-K1

X2

-P1

E
15mm

60x90x520mm

40mm

733mm
MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

DRAWN BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
11/02/2001

SHEET

SCS CANopen
Cabinet layout

CHECKED BY:

DATE

EH5U
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X1

08/20/2010

17:10

FILENAME:

32
33
F
45

CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499
9

External cable connection X1 cabinet / EH5U

GLANDS

CABLE

PG11

EEPROM

M25

Plug

M25

WM1

PG36

WXP1

XP21

XP22

XP23

6
1

3
4

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

SCS CANopen
Cable/ Sensor Layout

CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

DATE

EH5U
-

sharifsy
05/16/2002

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X0

08/20/2010

17:10

FILENAME:

SHEET

33
34
F
45

CONT.
TOTAL SH.

DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499
9

A
GORETEX VENT PLUG
700984, 700985
Assembly from the outside

GORETEX VENT PLUG


700984, 700985
Assembly from the outside

Q1

SB1

SS1

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

DRAWN BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
09/02/2002

SHEET

SCS CANopen
Cabinet layout

CHECKED BY:

DATE

EH5U
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X1

08/20/2010

17:10

FILENAME:

34
35
F
45

CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499
9

WXP23

WM2

External cable connection X100 cabinet / EH5U

15

10

11

12

16

13

14

GLAND

CABLE

M16

WX3

PLUG

10

M16

WX8

M16

WX10 (OPTION)

11

M16

WXP22

M16

WX13 (OPTION)

12

M16

WM4

M16

PLUG

13

M16

WHL1-4

M16

WM2

14

M16

WHL5-8

M16

WM3

15

M32

WXP23

M16

WX2

16

M25

WXP21

GLAND

CABLE

M16

PLUG

M16

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

SCS CANopen
Cable/ Sensor Layout

CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

DATE

EH5U
-

sharifsy
11/17/2004

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X0

08/20/2010

17:10

FILENAME:

SHEET

35
36
F
45

CONT.
TOTAL SH.

DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499
9

Cabinet X100

Terminals for -M,-HL.


Marking 1,2,3......19.

Terminal fuses
Marking 1,2,......7.

Shield plate

Sheild CANopen cable


D

Terminal CANopen High


Marking 1,2,......7
Terminal CANopen Low
Marking 1,2,......7

Terminal 24V GND


Marking 1,2,......7

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

SCS CANopen
Cable/ Sensor Layout

CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

DATE

EH5U
-

sharifsy
02/05/2009

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X0

08/20/2010

17:10

FILENAME:

SHEET

36
37
F
45

CONT.
TOTAL SH.

DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499
9

External cable connection between X1, X100 cabinet / EH5U

WXP23
Part no. 1001865

CABINET
X1

XP23

XP21

XP22

CABINET
X100

WXP21
Part no. 1001864
WXP22
Part no. 1001863

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

SCS CANopen
Cable/ Sensor Layout

CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

DATE

EH5U
-

sharifsy
06/12/2002

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X0

08/20/2010

17:10

FILENAME:

SHEET

37
38
F
45

CONT.
TOTAL SH.

DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499
9

XP1
A

B1

X1 CABINET

M1

HL1 = GREEN
HL2 = RED
HL3 = WHITE
HL4 = YELLOW

WATERSIDE

Y1-Y2 FLIPPER1
Y3-Y4 FLIPPER2
Y5-Y6 FLIPPER5
Y7-Y8 TWISTLOCK

2
GREEN

HL8 = YELLOW
HL7 = WHITE
HL6 = RED
HL5 = GREEN
C

S14, S114 30' POS.

S2 UNLOCK
S6 LOCK
S10 LANDED

X13
OPTION

S13 20' POS.

3
GREEN

S3 UNLOCK
S7 LOCK
S11 LANDED

X2

6
YELLOW
BLACK

M3

M4

5
WHITE
BLUE

M2

1
RED

X3

S83 H.I.S
OPTION

S1 UNLOCK
S5 LOCK
S9 LANDED

S16 40' POS.

X100 CABINET

S54
TOWER STOP
LEFT

S84 H.I.S
OPTION

X8

S52
TOWER LEFT
CENTRE

LEFT

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

EH5U
-

DRAWN BY:

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
08/20/2002

SHEET

SCS CANopen
Spreader layout

CHECKED BY:

DATE

RIGHT

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

4
RED

LANDSIDE

ITEM

S4 UNLOCK
S8 LOCK
S12 LANDED

S55
TOWER STOP
RIGHT

S53
TOWER RIGHT
CENTRE

Y9-Y10 FLIPPER3
Y11-Y12 FLIPPER4
Y13-Y14 FLIPPER6
Y15-Y16 TWISTLOCK

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X0

08/20/2010

17:10

FILENAME:

38
39
F
45

CONT.
TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499
9

UNIT

ITEM

QTY DIAGRAM REF BROMMA No.

DENOMINATION

MANUFACTURE

SUPPLIER

TYPE / ARTICLE NUMBER / TECHNICAL DATA

X0

-BRAKE1

=A1+X1/8.08

79125

CURRENT RELAY SR15

SEW

SEW

SR15

8267626

BSR 150-500VAC M25

X0

-BRAKE1

=A1+X1/8.08

700026

GLAND ADAPTER

LAPP

MILTRONIC AB

12 67 42

12 67 42

SKINDICHT M32/M25

X0

-BRAKE2

=A1+X1/8.04

700026

GLAND ADAPTER

LAPP

MILTRONIC AB

12 67 42

12 67 42

SKINDICHT M32/M25

X0

-BRAKE2

=A1+X1/8.04

79125

CURRENT RELAY SR15

SEW

SEW

SR15

8267626

BSR 150-500VAC M25

X0

-CABINET_X100

=A1+X1/9.04

1018972

CABINET X100 CANopen

Bromma

1018972

1018972

Mobile Spreader 10 fuse

X0

-HINK_X0

=A1+X1/9.03

1002595

CABLE AND ITEM MARKING

FLEXIMARK

MILTRONIC

X0

-HINK_X0

=A1+X1/9.03

1002018

PROTECTION COVER HTS

ABB

ABB

5DLN296350-A

5DLN296350-A

X0

-HINK_X0

=A1+X1/9.03

1002520

PROTECTION COVER HTS

ABB

ABB

5DLN296350-C

5DLN296350-C

X0

-HINK_X0

=A1+X1/9.03

1002490

X1 cabinet EH5 ASSY

X0

-HINK_X0

=A1+X1/9.03

1002607

CABLE AND ITEM MARKING

FLEXIMARK

MILTRONIC

X0

-R2

=A1+X0/19.09

1002390

RESISTOR 120ohm 0,25W

Elfa

Elfa

60-103-83

60-103-83

X0

-R3

=A1+X0/21.09

1002390

RESISTOR 120ohm 0,25W

Elfa

Elfa

60-103-83

60-103-83

X0

-S1

=A1+X0/19.01

1002367

PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F

IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S2

=A1+X0/19.03

1002367

PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F

IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S3

=A1+X0/21.01

1002367

PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F

IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S4

=A1+X0/21.03

1002367

PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F

IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S5

=A1+X0/19.02

1002367

PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F

IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S6

=A1+X0/19.04

1002367

PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F

IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S7

=A1+X0/21.02

1002367

PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F

IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S8

=A1+X0/21.04

1002367

PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F

IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S9

=A1+X0/19.05

1002367

PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F

IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S10

=A1+X0/19.07

1002367

PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F

IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S11

=A1+X0/21.05

1002367

PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F

IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S12

=A1+X0/21.07

1002367

PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F

IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S13

=A1+X0/23.05

1002367

PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F

IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S14

=A1+X0/23.07

1002367

PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F

IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S16

=A1+X0/23.06

1002367

PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F

IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S52

=A1+X0/23.03

1002367

PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F

IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S53

=A1+X0/23.04

1002367

PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F

IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S54

=A1+X0/23.01

1002367

PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F

IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S55

=A1+X0/23.02

1002367

PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F

IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-S114

=A1+X0/23.08

1002367

PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F

IFM

IFM

II5910

IIA3015BBPKG/US

M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE

X0

-X2

=A1+X0/19.00

1001762

IFM MODULE CAN-OPEN

IFM-Electronic

IFM-Electronic

CR9011

CR9011

X0

-X3

=A1+X0/21.00

1001762

IFM MODULE CAN-OPEN

IFM-Electronic

IFM-Electronic

CR9011

CR9011

8 in / 8 out

X0

-X8

=A1+X0/23.00

79282

GLAND PLUG

MURR

MILTRONIC AB

ZVKM12

40 57 05

ASB BOX PLUGS M12

X0

-X8

=A1+X0/23.00

1001762

IFM MODULE CAN-OPEN

IFM-Electronic

IFM-Electronic

CR9011

CR9011

8 in / 8 out

X0

-XP1

SHRINK HOUSE 85/25

NELCO CONTACT

NELCO CONTACT

MWTM-85/25-1000/172

75618

END BEAM 3-FLIPPER

BROMMA

Part List
CREATED: 11/20/2009 10:50

SIZE1

1002490

Complete with SCS for CAN open


TOWER JIB

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

SIZE4

SERIAL NO.

EH5U
-

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
10/03/2001

SHEET

SCS CANopen
PLANT (=)

PLOTTED:

UNIT (+)

FILENAME:

08/20/2010

17:10

39
40
45

CONT.

Parts list: (79125 - 75618)

CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:

8 in / 8 out

TOTAL SH.

DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499

UNIT

ITEM

QTY DIAGRAM REF BROMMA No.

DENOMINATION

MANUFACTURE

SUPPLIER

TYPE / ARTICLE NUMBER / TECHNICAL DATA

X0

-XP1

73983

CRIMPING HOSE

NELCO

X0

-XP1

78707

SOCKET ODU 309 COVER

ODU

GUNNAR PETTERSON AB

309.097.001.642.000

3,09097E+14

X0

-XP1

74410

INSERT 37P (M) ODU

ODU

GUNNAR PETTERSON AB

309 803 150 037 151

309 803 150 037 151

X0

-XP1

73523

PLUG ODU 309

ODU

GUNNAR PETTERSON AB

309.020.000.554.000

309.020.000.554.000 ODU 309 BAJONETT BRONCE PG42

X0

-XP1

73272

GLAND SR PG42 32-35mm

LAPP

MILTRONIC AB

SKINDICHT-SR 42/35

12 02 35

X0

-XP2

76576

SOCKET HNA TYPE 215

KARL DOSE

KARL DOSE GmbH

INSATS 162 MED HYLSA LNG

3121501

MACHINE TYPE:

Part List
CREATED: 11/20/2009 10:50

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

SERIAL NO.

EH5U
-

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
02/05/2009

ODU 309 37 POL MALE

SHEET

SCS CANopen
PLANT (=)

PLOTTED:

UNIT (+)

FILENAME:

08/20/2010

17:10

40
41
45

CONT.

Parts list: (73983 - 76576)

CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:

COVER FOR BAJONETT SOCKET

TOTAL SH.

DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499

FROM

PIN No.

CABLE

CORE

TO

TERMINAL No.

TYPE

ART. NR.

QTY SHEET

X0

-HL1

-WHL 1-4

X100

-X1 :14

LED LAMPS

24VDC, GN, RD, WH,YE

1001883

=A1+X1/11.07

X0

-HL1

-WHL 1-4

X100

-X2 :13

LED LAMPS

24VDC, GN, RD, WH,YE

1001883

=A1+X1/12.01

X0

-HL2

-WHL 1-4

X100

-X2 :14

LED LAMPS

24VDC, GN, RD, WH,YE

1001883

=A1+X1/12.02
=A1+X1/12.03

X0

-HL3

-WHL 1-4

X100

-X2 :15

LED LAMPS

24VDC, GN, RD, WH,YE

1001883

X0

-HL4

-WHL 1-4

X100

-X2 :16

LED LAMPS

24VDC, GN, RD, WH,YE

1001883

=A1+X1/12.04

X0

-HL5

-WHL 5-8

X100

-X1 :14

LED LAMPS

24VDC, GN, RD, WH,YE

1001883

=A1+X1/11.07
=A1+X1/12.05

X0

-HL5

-WHL 5-8

X100

-X2 :17

LED LAMPS

24VDC, GN, RD, WH,YE

1001883

X0

-HL6

-WHL 5-8

X100

-X2 :18

LED LAMPS

24VDC, GN, RD, WH,YE

1001883

=A1+X1/12.06

X0

-HL7

-WHL 5-8

X100

-X2 :19

LED LAMPS

24VDC, GN, RD, WH,YE

1001883

=A1+X1/12.07

X0

-HL8

-WHL 5-8

X100

-X2 :16

LED LAMPS

24VDC, GN, RD, WH,YE

1001883

=A1+X1/12.08
=A1+X1/8.07

X0

-M1

-WM1

X1

-X2 :1

CABLE

4x2,5mm PUR

70996

X0

-M1

-WM1

X1

-X2 :2

CABLE

4x2,5mm PUR

70996

=A1+X1/8.07

X0

-M1

-WM1

X1

-X2 :3

CABLE

4x2,5mm PUR

70996

=A1+X1/8.07

-X2 :PE

=A1+X1/8.07

X0

-M1

PE

-WM1

PE

X1

CABLE

4x2,5mm PUR

70996

X0

-M2

-WM2

X100

-X2 :1

CABLE

4x1,5mm PUR

78173

12

=A1+X1/9.02

X0

-M2

-WM2

X100

-X2 :2

CABLE

4x1,5mm PUR

78173

12

=A1+X1/9.02

X0

-M2

-WM2

X100

-X2 :3

CABLE

4x1,5mm PUR

78173

12

=A1+X1/9.02

X0

-M2

PE

-WM2

PE

X100

-X2 :PE

CABLE

4x1,5mm PUR

78173

12

=A1+X1/9.02

X0

-M3

-WM3

X100

-X2 :4

CABLE

4x1,5mm PUR

78173

11

=A1+X1/9.04

X0

-M3

-WM3

X100

-X2 :5

CABLE

4x1,5mm PUR

78173

11

=A1+X1/9.04
=A1+X1/9.04

X0

-M3

-WM3

X100

-X2 :6

CABLE

4x1,5mm PUR

78173

11

X0

-M3

PE

-WM3

PE

X100

-X2 :PE

CABLE

4x1,5mm PUR

78173

11

=A1+X1/9.04

X0

-M4

-WM4

X100

-X2 :7

CABLE

4x1,5mm PUR

78173

=A1+X1/8.04

X0

-M4

-WM4

X100

-X2 :8

CABLE

4x1,5mm PUR

78173

=A1+X1/8.04

X0

-M4

-WM4

X100

-X2 :9

CABLE

4x1,5mm PUR

78173

=A1+X1/8.04

X0

-M4

PE

-WM4

PE

X100

-X2 :PE

CABLE

4x1,5mm PUR

78173

=A1+X1/8.04

X2

-XP5

-WS9

X0

-S9 4

CABLE CONNECTOR 2,5M

M12 2xANGLE

79294

=A1+X0/19.05
=A1+X0/19.07

X2

-XP7

-WS10

X0

-S10 4

CABLE CONNECTOR 1,5M

M12 2xANGLE

79292

X3

-XP5

-WS11

X0

-S11 4

CABLE CONNECTOR 2,5M

M12 2xANGLE

79294

=A1+X0/21.05

X3

-XP7

-WS12

X0

-S12 4

CABLE CONNECTOR 1,5M

M12 2xANGLE

79292

=A1+X0/21.07
=A1+X0/25.05

X10

-XP5

-WS83

X0

-S83 4

X10

-XP7

-WS84

X0

-S84 4

=A1+X0/25.07

X13

-XP5

-WS94

X0

-S94 4

=A1+X0/27.05

MACHINE TYPE:

Cable List
CREATED: 11/20/2009 10:50

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

SERIAL NO.

EH5U
-

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
01/24/2002

PLANT (=)

PLOTTED:

UNIT (+)

FILENAME:

08/20/2010

17:10

41
42
45

CONT.

CABLE LIST

CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:

SHEET

SCS CANopen

TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499

FROM

PIN No.

CABLE

CORE

TO

TERMINAL No.

TYPE

ART. NR.

QTY SHEET

X0

-S1

-WS1-S5

X2

-XP1 4

CABLE CONNECTOR 2,5M

M12 Twin cable Prox.

700960

=A1+X0/19.01

X0

-S5

-WS1-S5

X2

-XP1 2

CABLE CONNECTOR 2,5M

M12 Twin cable Prox.

700960

=A1+X0/19.02

X0

-S2

-WS2-S6

X2

-XP3 4

CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m

M12 Twin cable Prox.

79903

=A1+X0/19.03
=A1+X0/19.04

X0

-S6

-WS2-S6

X2

-XP3 2

CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m

M12 Twin cable Prox.

79903

X0

-S3

-WS3-S7

X3

-XP1 4

CABLE CONNECTOR 2,5M

M12 Twin cable Prox.

700960

=A1+X0/21.01

X0

-S7

-WS3-S7

X3

-XP1 2

CABLE CONNECTOR 2,5M

M12 Twin cable Prox.

700960

=A1+X0/21.02
=A1+X0/21.03

X0

-S4

-WS4-S8

X3

-XP3 4

CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m

M12 Twin cable Prox.

79903

X0

-S8

-WS4-S8

X3

-XP3 2

CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m

M12 Twin cable Prox.

79903

=A1+X0/21.04

X0

-S13

-WS13-S16

X8

-XP5 4

CABLE CONNECTOR 3,5M

M12 Twin cable prox.

1002386

=A1+X0/23.05

X0

-S16

-WS13-S16

X8

-XP5 2

CABLE CONNECTOR 3,5M

M12 Twin cable prox.

1002386

=A1+X0/23.06
=A1+X0/23.07

X0

-S14

-WS14-S114

X8

-XP7 4

CABLE CONNECTOR 1,0M

M12 Twin cable Prox.

700959

X0

-S114

-WS14-S114

X8

-XP7 2

CABLE CONNECTOR 1,0M

M12 Twin cable Prox.

700959

=A1+X0/23.08

X0

-S52

-WS52-S53

X8

-XP3 4

CABLE CONNECTOR 2,5M

M12 Twin cable Prox.

700960

=A1+X0/23.03
=A1+X0/23.04

X0

-S53

-WS52-S53

X8

-XP3 2

CABLE CONNECTOR 2,5M

M12 Twin cable Prox.

700960

X0

-S54

-WS54-S55

X8

-XP1 4

CABLE CONNECTOR 3,5M

M12 Twin cable prox.

1002386

=A1+X0/23.01

X0

-S55

-WS54-S55

X8

-XP1 2

CABLE CONNECTOR 3,5M

M12 Twin cable prox.

1002386

=A1+X0/23.02

X0

-S91

-WS90-S91

X13

-XP1 2

=A1+X0/27.02

X0

-S90

-WS90-S91

X13

-XP1 4

=A1+X0/27.01

X0

-S93

-WS92-S93

X13

-XP3 2

=A1+X0/27.04

X0

-S92

-WS92-S93

X13

-XP3 4

=A1+X0/27.03

X0

-S96

-WS95-S96

X13

-XP7 2

=A1+X0/27.08

X0

-S95

-WS95-S96

X13

-XP7 4

X2

-X0

:1

-WX2

white

X100

-X1 :15

=A1+X0/27.07
CABLE

Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0

1001860

12

=A1+X1/11.01
=A1+X1/11.01

X2

-X0

:2

-WX2

brown

X100

-X1 :22

CABLE

Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0

1001860

12

X2

-X0

:5

-WX2

red

X100

-X1 :1

CABLE

Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0

1001860

12

=A1+X1/11.00

X2

-X0

:3

-WX2

blue

X100

-X1 :8

CABLE

Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0

1001860

12

=A1+X1/11.01

X3

-X0

:1

-WX3

white

X100

-X1 :16

CABLE

Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0

1001860

11

=A1+X1/11.02
=A1+X1/11.02

X3

-X0

:2

-WX3

brown

X100

-X1 :23

CABLE

Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0

1001860

11

X3

-X0

:5

-WX3

red

X100

-X1 :2

CABLE

Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0

1001860

11

=A1+X1/11.01

X3

-X0

:3

-WX3

blue

X100

-X1 :9

CABLE

Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0

1001860

11

=A1+X1/11.02
=A1+X1/11.05

X8

-X0

:1

-WX8

white

X100

-X1 :19

CABLE

Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0

1001860

X8

-X0

:2

-WX8

brown

X100

-X1 :26

CABLE

Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0

1001860

=A1+X1/11.05

X8

-X0

:5

-WX8

red

X100

-X1 :5

CABLE

Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0

1001860

=A1+X1/11.04

MACHINE TYPE:

Cable List
CREATED: 11/20/2009 10:50

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

SERIAL NO.

EH5U
-

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
05/16/2002

PLANT (=)

PLOTTED:

UNIT (+)

FILENAME:

08/20/2010

17:10

42
43
45

CONT.

CABLE LIST

CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:

SHEET

SCS CANopen

TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499

FROM

PIN No.

CABLE

CORE

TO

TERMINAL No.

TYPE

ART. NR.

QTY SHEET

X8

-X0

:3

-WX8

blue

X100

-X1 :12

CABLE

Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0

1001860

=A1+X1/11.05

X10

-X0

:1

-WX10

white

X100

-X1 :20

CABLE

Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0

1001860

=A1+X1/11.06

X10

-X0

:2

-WX10

brown

X100

-X1 :27

CABLE

Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0

1001860

=A1+X1/11.06
=A1+X1/11.05

X10

-X0

:5

-WX10

red

X100

-X1 :6

CABLE

Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0

1001860

X10

-X0

:3

-WX10

blue

X100

-X1 :13

CABLE

Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0

1001860

=A1+X1/11.06

X13

-X0

:1

-WX13

white

X100

-X1 :21

CABLE

Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0

1001860

=A1+X1/11.07
=A1+X1/11.07

X13

-X0

:2

-WX13

brown

X100

-X1 :28

CABLE

Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0

1001860

X13

-X0

:5

-WX13

red

X100

-X1 :7

CABLE

Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0

1001860

=A1+X1/11.06

X13

-X0

:3

-WX13

blue

X100

-X1 :14

CABLE

Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0

1001860

=A1+X1/11.07

X0

-XP1

-WXP1

X1

-X2 :108

CABLE

37x2,5mm NEOFLEX

701222

=A1+X1/10.02
=A1+X1/8.02

X0

-XP1

-WXP1

X1

-X2 :PE

CABLE

37x2,5mm NEOFLEX

701222

X0

-XP1

-WXP1

X1

-X2 :106

CABLE

37x2,5mm NEOFLEX

701222

=A1+X1/10.02

X0

-XP1

-WXP1

X1

-X2 :101

CABLE

37x2,5mm NEOFLEX

701222

=A1+X1/9.08
=A1+X1/9.08

X0

-XP1

-WXP1

X1

-X2 :102

CABLE

37x2,5mm NEOFLEX

701222

X0

-XP1

-WXP1

X1

-X2 :109

CABLE

37x2,5mm NEOFLEX

701222

=A1+X1/15.01

X0

-XP1

-WXP1

X1

-X2 :110

CABLE

37x2,5mm NEOFLEX

701222

=A1+X1/15.02

X0

-XP1

-WXP1

X1

-X2 :121

CABLE

37x2,5mm NEOFLEX

701222

=A1+X1/16.05

X0

-XP1

10

-WXP1

10

X1

-X2 :122

CABLE

37x2,5mm NEOFLEX

701222

=A1+X1/16.06

X0

-XP1

11

-WXP1

11

X1

-X2 :124

CABLE

37x2,5mm NEOFLEX

701222

=A1+X1/16.08

X0

-XP1

12

-WXP1

12

X1

-X2 :123

CABLE

37x2,5mm NEOFLEX

701222

=A1+X1/16.07
=A1+X1/16.04

X0

-XP1

13

-WXP1

13

X1

-X2 :120

CABLE

37x2,5mm NEOFLEX

701222

X0

-XP1

14

-WXP1

14

X1

-X2 :125

CABLE

37x2,5mm NEOFLEX

701222

=A1+X1/17.01

X0

-XP1

15

-WXP1

15

X1

-X2 :126

CABLE

37x2,5mm NEOFLEX

701222

=A1+X1/17.02
=A1+X1/17.03

X0

-XP1

16

-WXP1

16

X1

-X2 :127

CABLE

37x2,5mm NEOFLEX

701222

X0

-XP1

17

-WXP1

17

X1

-X2 :128

CABLE

37x2,5mm NEOFLEX

701222

=A1+X1/17.04

X0

-XP1

18

-WXP1

18

X1

-X2 :119

CABLE

37x2,5mm NEOFLEX

701222

=A1+X1/16.03

X0

-XP1

19

-WXP1

19

X1

-X2 :117

CABLE

37x2,5mm NEOFLEX

701222

=A1+X1/16.01
=A1+X1/15.05

X0

-XP1

20

-WXP1

20

X1

-X2 :113

CABLE

37x2,5mm NEOFLEX

701222

X0

-XP1

21

-WXP1

21

X1

-X2 :114

CABLE

37x2,5mm NEOFLEX

701222

=A1+X1/15.06

X0

-XP1

22

-WXP1

22

X1

-X2 :L1

CABLE

37x2,5mm NEOFLEX

701222

=A1+X1/8.00
=A1+X1/8.01

X0

-XP1

23

-WXP1

23

X1

-X2 :L2

CABLE

37x2,5mm NEOFLEX

701222

X0

-XP1

24

-WXP1

24

X1

-X2 :L3

CABLE

37x2,5mm NEOFLEX

701222

=A1+X1/8.01

X0

-XP1

25

-WXP1

25

X1

-X2 :107

CABLE

37x2,5mm NEOFLEX

701222

=A1+X1/10.01

MACHINE TYPE:

Cable List
CREATED: 11/20/2009 10:50

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

SERIAL NO.

EH5U
-

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
09/14/2004

PLANT (=)

PLOTTED:

UNIT (+)

FILENAME:

08/20/2010

17:10

43
44
45

CONT.

CABLE LIST

CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:

SHEET

SCS CANopen

TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499

FROM

PIN No.

CABLE

CORE

TO

TERMINAL No.

TYPE

ART. NR.

QTY SHEET

X0

-XP1

30

-WXP1

30

X1

-X2 :L1

CABLE

37x2,5mm NEOFLEX

701222

=A1+X1/8.01

X0

-XP1

31

-WXP1

31

X1

-X2 :L2

CABLE

37x2,5mm NEOFLEX

701222

=A1+X1/8.01

X0

-XP1

32

-WXP1

32

X1

-X2 :L3

CABLE

37x2,5mm NEOFLEX

701222

=A1+X1/8.01
=A1+X1/15.07

X0

-XP1

34

-WXP1

34

X1

-X2 :115

CABLE

37x2,5mm NEOFLEX

701222

X0

-XP1

35

-WXP1

35

X1

-X2 :111

CABLE

37x2,5mm NEOFLEX

701222

=A1+X1/15.03

X0

-XP1

36

-WXP1

36

X1

-X2 :116

CABLE

37x2,5mm NEOFLEX

701222

=A1+X1/15.08
=A1+X1/8.02

X0

-XP1

37

-WXP1

PE

X1

-X2 :PE

CABLE

37x2,5mm NEOFLEX

701222

X0

-XP2

-WXP2

BROWN

X1

-X2 :103

CABLE

3x1,5mm PUR

76126

=A1+X1/9.08

X0

-XP2

-WXP2

BLUE

X1

-X2 :104

CABLE

3x1,5mm PUR

76126

=A1+X1/9.08

X0

-XP2

PE

-WXP2

PE

X1

-E1

CABLE

3x1,5mm PUR

76126

=A1+X1/9.09
=A1+X1/11.06

X1

-XP21

-WXP21

X100

-X1 :7

CABLE 10POL CONTACT-OPEN END

12x2,5mm PUR

1001864

X1

-XP21

-WXP21

X100

-X1 :7

CABLE 10POL CONTACT-OPEN END

12x2,5mm PUR

1001864

=A1+X1/11.06

X1

-XP21

-WXP21

X100

-X1 :7

CABLE 10POL CONTACT-OPEN END

12x2,5mm PUR

1001864

=A1+X1/11.06
=A1+X1/11.06

X1

-XP21

-WXP21

X100

-X1 :7

CABLE 10POL CONTACT-OPEN END

12x2,5mm PUR

1001864

X1

-XP21

-WXP21

X100

-X1 :7

CABLE 10POL CONTACT-OPEN END

12x2,5mm PUR

1001864

=A1+X1/11.06

X1

-XP21

-WXP21

X100

-X1 :14

CABLE 10POL CONTACT-OPEN END

12x2,5mm PUR

1001864

=A1+X1/11.07

X1

-XP21

-WXP21

X100

-X1 :14

CABLE 10POL CONTACT-OPEN END

12x2,5mm PUR

1001864

=A1+X1/11.07

X1

-XP21

-WXP21

X100

-X1 :14

CABLE 10POL CONTACT-OPEN END

12x2,5mm PUR

1001864

=A1+X1/11.07

X1

-XP21

-WXP21

X100

-X1 :14

CABLE 10POL CONTACT-OPEN END

12x2,5mm PUR

1001864

=A1+X1/11.07

X1

-XP21

10

-WXP21

10

X100

-X1 :14

CABLE 10POL CONTACT-OPEN END

12x2,5mm PUR

1001864

=A1+X1/11.07
=A1+X1/11.01

X1

-XP22

-WXP22

White

X100

-X1 :15

CABLE 7POL CONTACT-OPEN END

3X2X0,25+3X1,0 + gn/yn

1001863

X1

-XP22

-WXP22

Brown

X100

-X1 :22

CABLE 7POL CONTACT-OPEN END

3X2X0,25+3X1,0 + gn/yn

1001863

=A1+X1/11.01

X1

-XP23

-WXP23

X100

-X2 :1

CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END

25x1,5mm PUR

1001865

=A1+X1/9.02
=A1+X1/9.02

X1

-XP23

-WXP23

X100

-X2 :2

CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END

25x1,5mm PUR

1001865

X1

-XP23

-WXP23

X100

-X2 :3

CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END

25x1,5mm PUR

1001865

=A1+X1/9.02

X1

-XP23

-WXP23

X100

-X2 :4

CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END

25x1,5mm PUR

1001865

=A1+X1/9.04

X1

-XP23

-WXP23

X100

-X2 :5

CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END

25x1,5mm PUR

1001865

=A1+X1/9.04
=A1+X1/9.04

X1

-XP23

-WXP23

X100

-X2 :6

CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END

25x1,5mm PUR

1001865

X1

-XP23

-WXP23

X100

-X2 :7

CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END

25x1,5mm PUR

1001865

=A1+X1/8.04

X1

-XP23

-WXP23

X100

-X2 :8

CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END

25x1,5mm PUR

1001865

=A1+X1/8.04
=A1+X1/8.04

X1

-XP23

-WXP23

X100

-X2 :9

CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END

25x1,5mm PUR

1001865

X1

-XP23

13

-WXP23

13

X100

-X2 :13

CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END

25x1,5mm PUR

1001865

=A1+X1/12.01

X1

-XP23

14

-WXP23

14

X100

-X2 :14

CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END

25x1,5mm PUR

1001865

=A1+X1/12.02

MACHINE TYPE:

Cable List
CREATED: 11/20/2009 10:50

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

SERIAL NO.

EH5U
-

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
09/14/2004

PLANT (=)

PLOTTED:

UNIT (+)

FILENAME:

08/20/2010

17:10

44
45
45

CONT.

CABLE LIST

CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:

SHEET

SCS CANopen

TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

REV.

1002499

FROM

PIN No.

CABLE

CORE

TO

TERMINAL No.

TYPE

ART. NR.

QTY SHEET

X1

-XP23

15

-WXP23

15

X100

-X2 :15

CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END

25x1,5mm PUR

1001865

=A1+X1/12.03

X1

-XP23

16

-WXP23

16

X100

-X2 :16

CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END

25x1,5mm PUR

1001865

=A1+X1/12.04

X1

-XP23

17

-WXP23

17

X100

-X2 :17

CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END

25x1,5mm PUR

1001865

=A1+X1/12.05
=A1+X1/12.06

X1

-XP23

18

-WXP23

18

X100

-X2 :18

CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END

25x1,5mm PUR

1001865

X1

-XP23

19

-WXP23

19

X100

-X2 :19

CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END

25x1,5mm PUR

1001865

=A1+X1/12.07

X1

-XP23

20

-WXP23

20

X100

-X2 :PE

CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END

25x1,5mm PUR

1001865

=A1+X1/9.04
=A1+X1/8.04

X1

-XP23

21

-WXP23

21

X100

-X2 :PE

CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END

25x1,5mm PUR

1001865

X1

-XP23

22

-WXP23

22

X100

-X2 :PE

CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END

25x1,5mm PUR

1001865

=A1+X1/9.02

X1

-XP23

PE

-WXP23

PE

X100

-X2 :PE

CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END

25x1,5mm PUR

1001865

=A1+X1/9.05

X0

-Y2

-WY1-Y2

X2

700970

=A1+X0/20.04
=A1+X0/20.03

-XP4 2

CABLE CONNECTOR 0,6M

M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC

X0

-Y1

-WY1-Y2

X2

-XP4 4

CABLE CONNECTOR 0,6M

M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC

700970

X0

-Y4

-WY3-Y4

X2

-XP6 2

CABLE CONNECTOR 0,6M

M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC

700970

=A1+X0/20.06

X0

-Y3

-WY3-Y4

X2

-XP6 4

CABLE CONNECTOR 0,6M

M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC

700970

=A1+X0/20.05
=A1+X0/20.08

X0

-Y6

-WY5-Y6

X2

-XP8 2

CABLE CONNECTOR 0,6M

M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC

700970

X0

-Y5

-WY5-Y6

X2

-XP8 4

CABLE CONNECTOR 0,6M

M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC

700970

=A1+X0/20.07

X0

-Y8

-WY7-Y8

X2

-XP2 2

CABLE CONNECTOR 0,6M

M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC

700970

=A1+X0/20.02

X0

-Y7

-WY7-Y8

X2

-XP2 4

CABLE CONNECTOR 0,6M

M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC

700970

=A1+X0/20.01

X0

-Y10

-WY9-Y10

X3

-XP4 2

CABLE CONNECTOR 0,6M

M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC

700970

=A1+X0/22.04

X0

-Y9

-WY9-Y10

X3

-XP4 4

CABLE CONNECTOR 0,6M

M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC

700970

=A1+X0/22.03

X0

-Y12

-WY11-Y12

X3

-XP6 2

CABLE CONNECTOR 0,6M

M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC

700970

=A1+X0/22.06
=A1+X0/22.05

X0

-Y11

-WY11-Y12

X3

-XP6 4

CABLE CONNECTOR 0,6M

M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC

700970

X0

-Y14

-WY13-Y14

X3

-XP8 2

CABLE CONNECTOR 0,6M

M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC

700970

=A1+X0/22.08

X0

-Y13

-WY13-Y14

X3

-XP8 4

CABLE CONNECTOR 0,6M

M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC

700970

=A1+X0/22.07

CABLE CONNECTOR 0,6M

M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC

700970

=A1+X0/22.02

CABLE CONNECTOR 0,6M

M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC

700970

=A1+X0/22.01

38905

=A1+X1/18.03

38905

=A1+X1/18.04
=A1+X1/18.04

X0

-Y16

-WY15-Y16

X3

-XP2 2

X0

-Y15

-WY15-Y16

X3

-XP2 4

B1

-XPX2

:10

-KEY1

WH

B1

-XPX2 :9

IDENTIFICATION KEY FOR SCS

B1

-XPX2

:9

-KEY1

BN

B1

-XPX2 :39

IDENTIFICATION KEY FOR SCS

B1

-XPX2

:39

-KEY1

GN

B1

-XPX2 :49

IDENTIFICATION KEY FOR SCS

38905

B1

-XPX2

:50

-WXP22

white

X1

-XP22 2

CABLE

Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0

1001860

=A1+X1/18.06

B1

-XPX2

:20

-WXP22

brown

X1

-XP22 3

CABLE

Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0

1001860

=A1+X1/18.06

1001860

=A1+X1/18.06

X0

-E2

-WXP22

Sheild

X1

-WXP22

CABLE

Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0

MACHINE TYPE:

Cable List
CREATED: 11/20/2009 10:50

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

SERIAL NO.

EH5U
-

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:

sharifsy
09/14/2004

PLANT (=)

PLOTTED:

UNIT (+)

FILENAME:

08/20/2010

17:10

45

CONT.

CABLE LIST

CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:

SHEET

SCS CANopen

TOTAL SH.
DRAWING NO.

45
REV.

1002499

Page 1 of 1

Article No:
PDF No:
Serial No:
SW
Customer:
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

1002656
.
.
.
.

Quant Title
13 Input module

Customised no.
230VAC SCS
with CANopen

Specification

sign:
rev:

BLN
a

Dwg/PDF No.

Art. No.
1001747

date
7/2/2004

Remarks

BROMMA CONQUIP
MALAXGATAN 7
S-164 22 KISTA
SWEDEN
E-mail : SALES@BROMMA.COM
+46 (0)8 620 09 00
Tel :

CABINET X1

Customer
Plant designation
Drawing Number
Revision

:
: A1
: 1002490
: j

Manufacturer (Company)

: BROMMA CONQUIP

Project name
Serial Number
Types
Responsible for project

: 1002490 CANopen
: : EH5U
:

Sub. drawings

Created on the
The latest revision

:
:

By : krpulha

2009-03-02

Manufacturing site

Number of pages :

:
MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

24

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

Electrical cabinet X1 CANopen


Flyleaf

CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:

DATE

EH5U
-

aveklle
2007-06-04

PLANT (=)

PLOTTED:

UNIT (+)

FILENAME:

2009-03-02

11:11

SHEET

1
2
F
24

CONT.
TOTAL SH.

REV.

DRAWING NO.

1002490
9

Table of content
Plant des.

A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1

Location

X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1

Page

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Page description
Flyleaf
Table of contents
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Cabinet layout
Cabinet layout
Cabinet layout
Cabinet layout
Cabinet layout
Cabinet layout
Cabinet layout
Sign Plate
PLC diagram
I/O card overview
Parts list: (38906 - 1019811)
Parts list: (1019819 - 79371)

Rev

Revision note

Date
2007-06-04
2009-03-02
2005-06-11
2007-06-05
2008-09-03
2009-02-27
2009-02-27
2009-02-27
2009-03-02
2009-03-02
2009-03-02
2005-01-19
2009-02-27
2006-07-03
2007-06-04
2008-12-30
2009-02-27
2009-02-27
2005-01-04
2005-01-04
2009-03-02
2009-03-02
2009-02-27
2009-02-27

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

SERIAL NO.

EH5U
-

Electrical cabinet X1 CANopen


Table of contents

CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:

krpulha
2009-03-02

Editor
aveklle
krpulha
BLN
aveklle
filipiv
krpulha
krpulha
krpulha
krpulha
krpulha
krpulha
LAT
krpulha
bln
aveklle
filipiv
krpulha
krpulha
LAT
LAT
krpulha
krpulha
krpulha
krpulha

PLANT (=)

PLOTTED:

UNIT (+)

FILENAME:

2009-03-02

11:11

SHEET

2
3
24

CONT.
TOTAL SH.

REV.

DRAWING NO.

1002490

NOTE:
Wire for 380-400VAC
shall bee 2,5mm
with black colour.

-X2

:L1

:L1

:L2

:L2

:L3

:L3

:PE

:PE

-F1

2A

-QM8

-K1

/5.01

-Q1

I>

I>

-QM1

I>

-K8

-K9

/7.04

/7.05

I>

I>

-P1

I>

-K2

-K3

/7.01

/7.02

-XP23

PE

20

21

22

-X2

:1

:2

:3

/4.00 / -Phase L3

/4.00 / -Phase L2

/4.00 / -Phase L1

3 Phase

-M4
Telescopic motor

.
MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

EH5U
-

DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:

BLN
2005-06-11

Time
counter

Electrical cabinet X1 CANopen


Circuit diagram

CHECKED BY:

DATE

-M1
Gravity point motor

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X1

2009-03-02

11:11

FILENAME:

SHEET

3
4
F
24

CONT.
TOTAL SH.

REV.

DRAWING NO.

1002490
9

NOTE:
Wire for 380-400VAC
shall bee 2,5mm
with black colour.

-X2

:101

:103

14

12

:102

:104

24

22

/3.01 / -Phase L3
/3.01 / -Phase L2
/3.01 / -Phase L1

-KA1
/5.07

-K6

/7.03

-KA1
/5.07

11

21

C
1

-EH1

-QM6

I>

-XP23

I>

-QM7

I>

I>

I>

I>

-M2
Hydralic pump
left

-EH1
Cabinet heater
.

-M3
Hydralic pump
right
MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

Electrical cabinet X1 CANopen


Circuit diagram

CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:

DATE

EH5U
-

aveklle
2007-06-05

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X1

2009-03-02

11:11

FILENAME:

SHEET

4
5
F
24

CONT.
TOTAL SH.

REV.

DRAWING NO.

1002490
9

NOTE:
All 24vdc supply should be ring Connected
-X2

:107

:105

:108

-Q1

13

/3.01

14

B
-F2
10A

.01
-SS1

:106

-X2

21
22

PE

-X2

:N
:N

-N.VAC / /10.00

:L

-L.VAC / /9.00

:L

C
BN

YL/GL

BU

90-255VAC
---24VDC

A2

-K1
A1

RD RD

BK BK

+ +

- -

A1

-G1

-KA1
A2

-24VDC SCS / /12.00


-24VDC / /6.00

-0VDC / /7.00

11

-SS1
.01

NOTE:
Wire for 24VDC
shall bee 2,5mm
with blue colour.

-X1
7

:2

/11.00 / -Spreader stop

:1

.01

-X1

:3

-K1

-XP21
1

2/3.01

4/3.01

6/3.01

:+

:+

:+

:+

:+

:+

:-

:-

:-

10

:-

:-

14

22

11/4.07

21/4.07

.04

Spreader
stop

24VDC

+ 24VDC
MACHINE TYPE:

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

EH5U
-

DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:

filipiv
2008-09-03

Electrical cabinet X1 CANopen


Circuit diagram

CHECKED BY:

DATE

-KA1
Cabinet heater

0 VDC

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

:-

:-

12
24

ITEM

:+

12

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X1

2009-03-02

11:11

FILENAME:

SHEET

5
6
F
24

CONT.
TOTAL SH.

REV.

DRAWING NO.

1002490
9

:43

:42

PIN NO: 21

PIN NO: 44

:41

:31

:21

:44

+B1-XP2

:3

COMMON GROUP 2

COMMON GROUP 1

-B1

:11

:2

:1

/5.08 / -24VDC

-24VDC / /7.00

-XP23

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

HL1
Unlocked left

HL2
Locked left

HL3
Landed left

HL4,8
Tower in centre left/right

HL5
Unlocked right

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

EH5U
-

DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:

krpulha
2009-02-27

Not
connected

Electrical cabinet X1 CANopen


Circuit diagram

CHECKED BY:

DATE

HL7
Landed right

HL6
Locked right

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X1

2009-03-02

11:11

FILENAME:

SHEET

6
7
F
24

CONT.
TOTAL SH.

REV.

DRAWING NO.

1002490
9

:7

PIN NO: 21

PIN NO: 44

:6

12

:16

11

:35

13

:26

:8

10

:4

+B1-XP2

COMMON GROUP 4

14

COMMON GROUP 3

-B1

15

:25

:5

16

:15

/6.09 / -24VDC

-24VDC / /8.00

A1

A1

-K2

A1

-K3

-K6

A2

A2

A1

A1

A2

A2

-K8

-K9

A2

D
/5.08 / -0VDC

-0VDC / /8.00

2 /3.07

2 /3.08

2 /4.01

2 /3.04

2 /3.05

4 /3.07

4 /3.08

4 /4.01

4 /3.04

4 /3.05

6 /3.07

6 /3.08

6 /4.01

6 /3.04

6 /3.05

K3
Gravity point
to right

K2
Gravity point
to left

K6
Hydralic pump
left/right gable

K8
Retract
telescope

K9
Extend
telescope

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

EH5U
-

DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:

krpulha
2009-02-27

Not
connected

Electrical cabinet X1 CANopen


Circuit diagram

CHECKED BY:

DATE

Not
connected

Not
connected
MACHINE TYPE:

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X1

2009-03-02

11:11

FILENAME:

SHEET

7
8
F
24

CONT.
TOTAL SH.

REV.

DRAWING NO.

1002490
9

:40

PIN NO: 50

PIN NO: 9

:30

20

:20

19

:50

21

18

:10

:9

:46

+B1-XP2

17

COMMON GROUP 2
6

COMMON GROUP 5

22

:47

-B1

23

:49

24

:48

B
/7.09 / -24VDC

-24VDC / /11.00

D
1

-P2
2

/7.09 / -0VDC

-0VDC / /11.00

Not
connected

Not
connected

Not
connected

Not
connected

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

Not
connected

Container
Counter

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

EH5U
-

DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:

krpulha
2009-02-27

Not
connected

Electrical cabinet X1 CANopen


Circuit diagram

CHECKED BY:

DATE

Not
connected

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X1

2009-03-02

11:11

FILENAME:

SHEET

8
9
F
24

CONT.
TOTAL SH.

REV.

DRAWING NO.

1002490
9

:41

:42

PIN NO: 43

PIN NO: 11

:31

28

:21

27

:43

29

:11

26

+B1-XP3

25

:24

COMMON GROUP 8

COMMON GROUP 7

30

:35

-B1

31

:44

32

:45

/5.08 / -L.VAC

-X2

:109

:110

:111

:112

:114

:113

:115

:116

Unlocked
signal

Locked
signal

Spreader landed
signal

G.p. in centre
signal

G.p. at left
signal

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

EH5U
-

DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:

krpulha
2009-03-02

TTDS ok
signal (option)

Electrical cabinet X1 CANopen


Circuit diagram

CHECKED BY:

DATE

H.I.S
signal (option)

G.p. at right
signal

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X1

2009-03-02

11:11

FILENAME:

SHEET

9
10
F
24

CONT.
TOTAL SH.

REV.

DRAWING NO.

1002490
9

115 VAC INPUT MODULE


BROMMA part no. 1001748
230 VAC INPUT MODULE
BROMMA part no. 1001747

-X2

:117

:118

:119

:120

:121

:122

:123

:124

/5.08 / -N.VAC

-N.VAC / /11.00

+B1-XP3

:5

:4

:3

:15

:2

:16

:6

33

34

35

36

COMMON GROUP 9

Telescope
to 30'
CMD

Telescope
expand to 40'
CMD

Flippers
all up
CMD

PIN NO: 15

Telescope
retract to 20'
CMD

:26

Flipper
waterside down
CMD

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:

39

Flipper
left down
CMD

EH5U
-

40

krpulha
2009-03-02

Flipper
landside down
CMD

Electrical cabinet X1 CANopen


Circuit diagram

CHECKED BY:

DATE

38

Flipper
right down
CMD
MACHINE TYPE:

COMMON GROUP 10

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

37

:25

-B1
PIN NO: 1

:1

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X1

2009-03-02

11:11

FILENAME:

SHEET

10
11
F
24

CONT.
TOTAL SH.

REV.

DRAWING NO.

1002490
9

115 VAC INPUT MODULE


BROMMA part no. 1001748
230 VAC INPUT MODULE
BROMMA part no. 1001747

-X2

:125

:127

:126

:128

/8.09 / -24VDC

/5.00 / -Spreader stop

13

-SB1

14

GRAV.POINT
AUT. RETURN
OFF
ON

D
/8.09 / -0VDC

-0VDC / /12.00

/10.08 / -N.VAC

+B1-XP3

:36

:49

:48

:47

:46

:8

:40

:9

:50

:30

:20

42

43

44

COMMON GROUP 11

Twl
lock
CMD

Twl
unlock
CMD

G.p.
move to left
CMD

G.p.
move to right
CMD

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

46

DRAWN BY:

EH5U
-

DRAWING DATE:

krpulha
2009-03-02

47

Spreader
stop

48

G.p.
auto return

Electrical cabinet X1 CANopen


Circuit diagram

CHECKED BY:

DATE

Not
connected

Not
connected

ITEM

45

PIN NO: 20

41

PIN NO: 40

PIN NO: 10

PIN NO: 36

PIN NO: 8

-B1

:10

:7

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X1

2009-03-02

11:11

FILENAME:

SHEET

11
12
F
24

CONT.
TOTAL SH.

REV.

DRAWING NO.

1002490
9

-X2

:129

:130

C
-XP22

-WXP22

white

brown

EEPROM

-E2
/11.09 / -0VDC

+B1-XPX2

:42

:43

:44

:45

:10

:19

:9

:29

:39

:49

:30

:40

:20

GREEN

RED

16

26

36

:48

:16

:6

:26

:36

Main supply
node B1

Node
Address

B-Can

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:

LAT
2005-01-19

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

VCC

SC

SD

GND

EH5U
-

CHECKED BY:

DATE

Can-GND

Can-open L

Can-open
MACHINE TYPE:

ITEM

Can-open H

B-Can L

B-Can H

ID5

ID4

ID3

ID1

ID0

GND

GND

GND

+24V

+24V

-B1

:50

BLUE

GN

BN;GN

-KEY1

WH

/5.08 / -24VDC SCS

BLACK

D
WH;BN

EEPROM

Electrical cabinet X1 CANopen


Circuit diagram

SHEET

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X1

2009-03-02

11:11

FILENAME:

12
13
F
24

CONT.
TOTAL SH.

REV.

DRAWING NO.

1002490
9

Internal layout X1 cabinet EH5U

B1

290mm

XP1

XP2

XP3

Rubber boot

Distance between cable


trunk and edge 45mm

30x90x115mm

30x90x640mm

X1

/4.01

/7.03

/4.03

/3.04

/7.04

/3.07

/7.01

/8.05

740mm
-K6

30x90x380mm

G1

-QM6

-QM7

-K8

-K2

-QM8

-QM1

-P2

30x90x490mm

-F1

2A

-EH1

/3.09

/5.02

/5.07

/5.01

10A

Power supply

-F2

/3.09
-KA1

-K1

X2

-P1
E

E
15mm

60x90x520mm

40mm

733mm
MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

Electrical cabinet X1 CANopen


Cabinet layout

CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:

DATE

EH5U
-

krpulha
2009-02-27

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X1

2009-03-02

11:11

FILENAME:

SHEET

13
14
F
24

CONT.
TOTAL SH.

REV.

DRAWING NO.

1002490
9

101-130
Even number on top

105-106

1-3

2-3

L1-L3

Blue

X1

X2

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

Electrical cabinet X1 CANopen


Cabinet layout

CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:

DATE

EH5U
-

bln
2006-07-03

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X1

2009-03-02

11:11

FILENAME:

SHEET

14
15
F
24

CONT.
TOTAL SH.

REV.

DRAWING NO.

1002490
9

External layout X1 cabinet (glands,plugs) EH5

EEPROM-gland assembly
from the inside and out

XP21
(Female)

XP22
(Female)

XP23
(Female)

B
Contact No.1
Contact No.1

Guide Pin

Guide Pin

M25 Plug

M25 Gland PG36 Gland


E

Use Locktite 243 when assamble the chassi plug in to the cabinet

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

Electrical cabinet X1 CANopen


Cabinet layout

CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:

DATE

EH5U
-

aveklle
2007-06-04

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X1

2009-03-02

11:11

FILENAME:

SHEET

15
16
F
24

CONT.
TOTAL SH.

REV.

DRAWING NO.

1002490
9

PE-rail 12/3

Assembly the earth braid


between this two pin bults

200 mm

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

Electrical cabinet X1 CANopen


Cabinet layout

CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:

DATE

EH5U
-

filipiv
2008-12-30

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X1

2009-03-02

11:11

FILENAME:

SHEET

16
17
F
24

CONT.
TOTAL SH.

REV.

DRAWING NO.

1002490
9

B
Bromma art. no 1002455

CE-label

BROMMA CONQUIP AB
P.O Box 1133
SE- 164 22 KISTA
SW EDEN

Control Cabinet
Circuit
diagram no.

10XXXXX

Rated voltage

Hz

400-460

25

50/60

IP
55

Spreader no.

Year of manufacturing
89/336/EEC
73/23/EEC
Art.No. 1002455

Bromma art. no 78127

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

Electrical cabinet X1 CANopen


Cabinet layout

CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:

DATE

EH5U
-

krpulha
2009-02-27

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X1

2009-03-02

11:11

FILENAME:

SHEET

17
18
F
24

CONT.
TOTAL SH.

REV.

DRAWING NO.

1002490
9

CE-label
B

BROMMA CONQUIP AB
P.O Box 1133
SE- 164 22 KISTA
SWEDEN

Control Cabinet
Circuit
diagram no.

Rated voltage
400-460

1002490

Hz

25

50/60

IP
55

Spreader no.

Year of manufacturing
89/336/EEC
73/23/EEC
Art.No. 1002455
E

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

Electrical cabinet X1 CANopen


Cabinet layout

CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:

DATE

EH5U
-

krpulha
2009-02-27

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X1

2009-03-02

11:11

FILENAME:

SHEET

18
19
F
24

CONT.
TOTAL SH.

REV.

DRAWING NO.

1002490
9

A
GORETEX VENT PLUG
700984, 700985
Assembly from the outside

GORETEX VENT PLUG


700984, 700985
Assembly from the outside

Q1

SB1

SS1

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

Electrical cabinet X1 CANopen


Cabinet layout

CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:

DATE

EH5U
-

LAT
2005-01-04

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X1

2009-03-02

11:11

FILENAME:

SHEET

19
20
F
24

CONT.
TOTAL SH.

REV.

DRAWING NO.

1002490
9

A
SPREADER
STOP

AUT.RETURN
OFF
ON

TEXT

TEXT

TEXT

TEXT

TEXT

TEXT

TEXT

TEXT

TEXT

TEXT

TEXT

TEXT

TEXT

TEXT

MACHINE TYPE:

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

ITEM

SUBJECT OF CHANGE

SIGN.

SERIAL NO.

Electrical cabinet X1 CANopen


Sign Plate

CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:

DATE

EH5U
-

LAT
2005-01-04

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

PLOTTED:

A1
:
X1

2009-03-02

11:11

FILENAME:

SHEET

20
21
F
24

CONT.
TOTAL SH.

REV.

DRAWING NO.

1002490
9

NODE

I/O

TYPE

PIN NR.

-B1

Digital output

-XP2:31

HL1 Unlocked left

-B1

25

Digital output

-XP3:21

Locked signal

-B1

Digital output

-XP2:41

HL2 Locked left

-B1

26

Digital output

-XP3:31

Unlocked signal

-B1

Digital output

-XP2:43

HL3 Landed left

-B1

27

Digital output

-XP3:41

Spreader landed signal

-B1

Digital output

-XP2:42

HL4,8 Tower in centre left/right

-B1

28

Digital output

-XP3:42

G.p. in centre signal

-B1

Digital output

-XP2 :3

HL5 Unlocked right

-B1

29

Digital output

-XP3:24

G.p. at left signal

-B1

Digital output

-XP2 :2

HL6 Locked right

-B1

30

Digital output

-XP3:35

G.p. at right signal

-B1

Digital output

-XP2:11

HL7 Landed right

-B1

31

Digital output

-XP3:44

H.I.S signal (option)

-B1

Digital output

-XP2 :1

Not connected

-B1

32

Digital output

-XP3:45

TTDS ok signal (option)

-B1

Digital output

-XP2:26

K2 Gravity point to left

-B1

33

Digital input

-XP3 :5

Telescoperetract to 20' CMD

-B1

10

Digital output

-XP2:16

K3 Gravity point to right

-B1

34

Digital input

-XP3 :4

Telescope to 30' CMD

-B1

11

Digital output

-XP2 :6

K6 Hydralic pump left/right gable

-B1

35

Digital input

-XP3 :3

Telescope expand to 40' CMD

-B1

12

Digital output

-XP2 :7

K8 Retract telescope

-B1

36

Digital input

-XP3 :2

Flippers all up CMD

-B1

13

Digital output

-XP2 :4

K9 Extend telescope

-B1

37

Digital input

-XP3 :6

Flipper waterside down CMD

-B1

14

Digital output

-XP2 :5

Not connected

-B1

38

Digital input

-XP3:16

Flipper right down CMD

-B1

15

Digital output

-XP2:25

Not connected

-B1

39

Digital input

-XP3:25

Flipper left down CMD

-B1

16

Digital output

-XP2:15

Not connected

-B1

40

Digital input

-XP3:26

Flipper landside down CMD

-B1

17

Digital output

-XP2:10

Not connected

-B1

41

Digital input

-XP3:49

Twl lock CMD

-B1

18

Digital output

-XP2:20

Not connected

-B1

42

Digital input

-XP3:48

Twl unlock CMD

-B1

19

Digital output

-XP2:30

Not connected

-B1

43

Digital input

-XP3:47

G.p. move to left CMD

-B1

20

Digital output

-XP2:40

Not connected

-B1

44

Digital input

-XP3:46

G.p. move to right CMD

-B1

21

Digital output

-XP2:46

Container Counter

-B1

45

Digital input

-XP3 :7

Not connected

-B1

22

Digital output

-XP2:47

Not connected

-B1

46

Digital input

-XP3 :9

Not connected

-B1

23

Digital output

-XP2:49

Not connected

-B1

47

Digital input

-XP3:50

Spreader stop

-B1

24

Digital output

-XP2:48

Not connected

-B1

48

Digital input

-XP3:20

G.p. auto return

DESCRIPTION

NODE

I/O

TYPE

MACHINE TYPE:

I/0 OVERVIEW
CREATED: 2009-03-02 11:06

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

SERIAL NO.

PIN NR.

DESCRIPTION

EH5U
-

Electrical cabinet X1 CANopen


PLC diagram

CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:

krpulha
2009-03-02

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

A1
:
X1

PLOTTED:
FILENAME:

2009-03-02

11:11

SHEET

21
22
24

CONT.
TOTAL SH.

REV.

DRAWING NO.

1002490

K2
Gravity point
to left
K3
Gravity point
to right
K6
Hydralic pump
left/right gable
K8
Retract
telescope
K9
Extend
telescope

HL1
Unlocked left
HL2
Locked left
HL3
Landed left
HL4,8
Tower in centre left/right
HL5
Unlocked right

Not
connected

Locked
signal

Not
connected

Unlocked
signal

Not
connected

Spreader landed
signal

Not
connected

G.p. in centre
signal

Container
Counter

G.p. at left
signal

HL6
Locked right

Not
connected

Not
connected

G.p. at right
signal

HL7
Landed right

Not
connected

Not
connected

H.I.S
signal (option)

Not
connected

Not
connected

Not
connected

TTDS ok
signal (option)

Twl
lock
CMD
Twl
unlock
CMD
G.p.
move to left
CMD
G.p.
move to right
CMD

Telescope
retract to 20'
CMD
Telescope
to 30'
CMD
Telescope
expand to 40'
CMD
Flippers
all up
CMD
Flipper
waterside down
CMD
Flipper
right down
CMD
Flipper
left down
CMD
Flipper
landside down
CMD

115 VAC INPUT MODULE


BROMMA part no. 1001748

Not
connected

230 VAC INPUT MODULE


BROMMA part no. 1001747

Not
connected
Spreader
stop

G.p.
auto return

24VDC / Output red

24VDC / Output red

115 / 230VAC /
Output black

115 / 230VAC / Input


yellow

115 / 230VAC / Input


yellow

24VDC / Output red

24VDC / Output red

115 / 230VAC /
Output black

115 / 230VAC / Input


yellow

115 / 230VAC / Input


yellow

24VDC / Output red

24VDC / Output red

115 / 230VAC /
Output black

115 / 230VAC / Input


yellow

115 / 230VAC / Input


yellow

24VDC / Output red

24VDC / Output red

115 / 230VAC /
Output black

115 / 230VAC / Input


yellow

115 / 230VAC / Input


yellow

24VDC / Output red

24VDC / Output red

115 / 230VAC /
Output black

115 / 230VAC / Input


yellow

24VDC / Output red

115 / 230VAC /
Output black

115 / 230VAC / Input


yellow

24VDC / Output red

115 / 230VAC /
Output black

115 / 230VAC / Input


yellow

24VDC / Input white

115 / 230VAC /
Output black

115 / 230VAC / Input


yellow

24VDC / Input white

24VDC / Output red

XP1

XP2

XP3

-B1
MACHINE TYPE:

I/0 OVERVIEW
CREATED: 2009-03-02 11:07

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

SERIAL NO.

EH5U
-

Electrical cabinet X1 CANopen


I/O card overview

CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:

krpulha
2009-03-02

PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)

A1
:
X1

PLOTTED:
FILENAME:

2009-03-02

11:11

SHEET

22
23
24

CONT.
TOTAL SH.

REV.

DRAWING NO.

1002490

UNIT

ITEM

QTY DIAGRAM REF BROMMA No.

DENOMINATION

MANUFACTURE

SUPPLIER

TYPE / ARTICLE NUMBER / TECHNICAL DATA

X1

-1

=A1+X1/12.07

38906

EEPROM

CC-SYSTEM

CC-SYSTEM

X1

-B1

=A1+X1/9.00

700086

SCS PLUG K2

AD-CONTACT

AD-CONTAKT AB

DRC 26-50-S08

DRC 26-50-S08

X1

-B1

=A1+X1/9.00

700087

SCS PLUG K3

AD-CONTACT

AD-CONTAKT AB

DRC 26-50-S09

DRC 26-50-S09

X1

-B1

=A1+X1/9.00

38905

IDENTIFICATION KEY FOR SCS

CC-SYSTEM

CC-SYSTEM

SEE DRAWING 38905

X1

-B1

=A1+X1/9.00

1002003

SCS CONNECTOR COVER

BMAL

BMAL

1002003

X1

-B1

80

=A1+X1/9.00

700079

SCS SOCKET PIN

AD-CONTACT

AD-CONTAKT AB

0462-201-2031 AU

0462-201-2031 AU

X1

-B1

=A1+X1/9.00

700085

SCS PLUG K1

AD-CONTACT

AD-CONTAKT AB

DRC 26-50-S07

DRC 26-50-S07

X1

-B1

=A1+X1/9.00

78601

INPUT MODULE DC

OPTO22

ELECTRONA-SIEVERT AB

G4IDC5

G4 IDC 5

X1

-B1

=A1+X1/9.00

37524

SCS PLC

Bromma

CC-System
BROMMA

LENGTH 850MM

Rubber boot for deutsch connectors

24 VDC

X1

-B1

=A1+X1/9.00

700498

SCS I/O MARKING

BROMMA

X1

-B1

=A1+X1/9.00

39952

Attachment for SCS in cabinet

NPP/ Bromma

X1

-B1

=A1+X1/9.00

700020

SCS SOFTWARE LICENS

ENEA

X1

-B1

=A1+X1/9.00

1001750

OUTPUT MODULE 0-240VAC

DELCON/AXIOM

OEM-AUTOMATIC

G4/SLO5TR

G4/SLO5TR

X1

-B1

80

=A1+X1/9.00

700080

SCS DUMMY PIN

AD-CONTACT

AD-CONTAKT AB

0413-204-2005

0413-204-2005

X1

-B1

13

=A1+X1/9.00

78603

OUTPUT MODULE DC

OPTO22

ELECTRONA-SIEVERT AB

G40DC5

G4 ODC 5

X1

-EH1

=A1+X1/4.07

1001690

HEATER CABINET

STEGO

OEM AUTOMATIC

HG140

14001.0-01

30W 110-250V AC/DC

X1

-F1

=A1+X1/3.09

1001828

MCB 1-POL 2A

SIEMENS

SIEMENS

5SY6 102-7

C-CHARACTER

X1

-F2

=A1+X1/5.02

1001829

MCB 2-POL 10A

SIEMENS

SIEMENS

5SY6 210-7

C-CHARACTER

X1

-G1

=A1+X1/5.02

1001859

POWER SUPPLY 90-255VAC/ 24VDC

PrimePower

OEM-Automatic

0036515

0036515

X1

-K1

=A1+X1/5.01

1001826

CONTACTOR

SIEMENS

SIEMENS

3RT13 25-1BB40

3RT13 25-1BB40

X1

-K2

=A1+X1/7.01

1001827

PHASEREVERSER

SIEMENS

SIEMENS

3RA13 25-8XB30-1BB4

3RA13 25-8XB30-1BB4

24VDC 7,5kW 17A

X1

-K6

=A1+X1/7.03

1000763

CONTACTOR

SIEMENS

SIEMENS

3RT1025-1BB40

32 667 91

24VDC 7.5KW 17A

X1

-K8

=A1+X1/7.04

1001827

PHASEREVERSER

SIEMENS

SIEMENS

3RA13 25-8XB30-1BB4

3RA13 25-8XB30-1BB4

24VDC 7,5kW 17A

X1

-KA1

=A1+X1/5.07

78980

RELAY SOCKET 2-SWITCHING

RELECO

OEM-AUTOMATIC AB

40 165 54

S7M
C7 A20 D24D

700498

See document

39952

39952

EH5-170-U

ENEA OSE SYSTEMS AB


Sek:0-240VAC 3A

24VDC 4A

30A / 0-400HZ
24VDC 22kW 4-pol SIZE 0

X1

-KA1

=A1+X1/5.07

78986

AUXILIARY CONTACTOR

RELECO

OEM

C7 A20 D24D

X1

-KEY1

=A1+X1/12.03

38905

IDENTIFICATION KEY FOR SCS

CC-SYSTEM

CC-SYSTEM

SEE DRAWING 38905

X1

-P1

=A1+X1/3.09

70873

TIMECOUNTER 380 VAC

BAUSER

METRIC AB

632A.2 380VAC

24-0015-78

X1

-P2

=A1+X1/8.05

76140

PULSECOUNTER 190.07 24V DC

BAUSER

METRIC AB

632 A.2 24VDC

24-2032-25DC

X1

-Q1

=A1+X1/3.01

700869

LOCK HANDLE GREY 66X66mm

BACO

OEM

0174601

0174601

X1

-Q1

=A1+X1/3.01

700870

SEALING IP65

BACO

OEM

0172267

0172267

X1

-Q1

=A1+X1/3.01

700871

AUXILIARY BLOCK

BACO

OEM-AUTOMATIC AB

0172179

172179

X1

-Q1

=A1+X1/3.01

700868

MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER

BACO

OEM

0172200

0172200

X1

-QM1

=A1+X1/3.07

78993

THERMAL-MAGNETIC CIRCUIT BREAK

SIEMENS

SIEMENS

3RV10 21 - 4BA10

3RV1021-4BA10

7.5KW 14-20A

X1

-QM6

=A1+X1/4.01

79042

THERMAL-MAGNETIC CIRCUIT BREAK

SIEMENS

SIEMENS

3RV10 11-1GA10

3RV1011-1GA10

2.2kW 4.5-6.3 A

X1

-QM7

=A1+X1/4.03

79042

THERMAL-MAGNETIC CIRCUIT BREAK

SIEMENS

SIEMENS

3RV10 11-1GA10

3RV1011-1GA10

2.2kW 4.5-6.3 A

X1

-QM8

=A1+X1/3.04

79043

THERMAL-MAGNETIC CIRCUIT BREAK

SIEMENS

SIEMENS

3RV10 11-1HA10

3RV1011-1HA10

X1

-SB1

=A1+X1/11.08

1019811

AUXILIARY BLOCK

BACO

OEM-AUTOMATIC AB

230 E10

230E 10

MACHINE TYPE:

Part List
CREATED: 2009-03-02 11:07

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

SERIAL NO.

EH5U
-

DRAWING DATE:

krpulha
2009-03-02

NO+NC 400V 10A SIGNALCONTACT

50A

3,0kW 5,5-8A
switch body with 1NO block

Electrical cabinet X1 CANopen


Parts list: (38906 - 1019811)

CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:

24VDC 2-SWITCHING

PLANT (=)

PLOTTED:

UNIT (+)

FILENAME:

2009-03-02

11:11

SHEET

23
24
24

CONT.
TOTAL SH.

REV.

DRAWING NO.

1002490

UNIT

ITEM

QTY DIAGRAM REF BROMMA No.

DENOMINATION

MANUFACTURE

SUPPLIER

TYPE / ARTICLE NUMBER / TECHNICAL DATA

X1

-SB1

=A1+X1/11.08

1019819

WHITE SIGNPLATE (+GRAVERING)

BACO

OEM-IDEALGRAVYR AB

LIB5

GRAVERING ENL BILAGA (Suitable with LWG3 - 1019818)

X1

-SB1

=A1+X1/11.08

1019832

SWITCH HEAD

BACO

OEM

L21KA03

L21KA03

X1

-SB1

=A1+X1/11.08

1019818

FRAME

BACO

OEM

LWG3

X1

-SS1

=A1+X1/5.01

1019809

AUXILIARY BLOCK

BACO

OEM-AUTOMATIC AB

333E 02

X1

-SS1

=A1+X1/5.01

1019818

FRAME

BACO

OEM

LWG3

X1

-SS1

=A1+X1/5.01

1019810

PUSH BUTTON BLACK

BACO

OEM-AUTOMATIC AB

L22 EC03

X1

-SS1

=A1+X1/5.01

1019819

WHITE SIGNPLATE (+GRAVERING)

BACO

OEM-IDEALGRAVYR AB

LIB5

GRAVERING ENL BILAGA (Suitable with LWG3 - 1019818)

X1

-XP21

700858

INSERT FEMALE 10POLE

HTS

TYCO ELECTRONICS

HE.10.BU.C

2-1103637-3

X1

-XP21

700863

GUIDE PIN

HTS

TYCO ELECTRONICS

F-Sti-M3

1-1106102-1

X1

-XP21

700854

SURFACE MOUNTED HOUSING

HTS

TYCO ELECTRONICS

HIP-K.10/24.AG

2-1102647-5

SCREW LOCK

X1

-XP21

10

700862

CRIMP CONTACT FEMALE

HTS

TYCO ELECTRONICS

4-1105101-1

2,5mm2 AWG14

X1

-XP21

1002018

PROTCTION COVER

ABB

ABB

5DLN296350-A

X1

-XP22

1001921

SURFACE MOUNTED HOUSING

HTS

TYCO ELECTRONICS

HIP.3/4.AG

X1

-XP22

1001926

CRIMP CONTACT FEMALE

HTS

TYCO ELECTRONICS

X1

-XP22

1001923

INSERT FEMALE 7+POLE

HTS

TYCO ELECTRONICS

X1

-XP22

1002520

PROTECTION COVER HTS

ABB

X1

-XP23

700854

SURFACE MOUNTED HOUSING

X1

-XP23

700863

X1

-XP23

1002018

X1

-XP23

700856

INSERT FEMALE 42POLE

1001927

switch boddy with 2NC block


(Suitable with LIB5 - 1019819)

L22 EC03

FOR SPREADER STOP 29mm

CRIMP

5DLN296350-A

HTS SIZE4

1-1102603-5

SCREW LOCK
0,14-0,37mm

HN.D.7.Bu.C

2-1103103-3

CRIMP

ABB

5DLN296350-C

5DLN296350-C

HTS

TYCO ELECTRONICS

HIP-K.10/24.AG

2-1102647-5

GUIDE PIN

HTS

TYCO ELECTRONICS

F-Sti-M3

1-1106102-1

PROTCTION COVER

ABB

ABB

5DLN296350-A

5DLN296350-A

HTS

TYCO ELECTRONICS

HN.2D.42.BU.C

2-1103206-3

X1

-XP23

24

CRIMP CONTACT FEMALE

HTS

TYCO ELECTRONICS

:1

=A1+X1/5.02

79367

FUSE ATTACHMENT

WAGO

HELLERMANN TYTON AB

X1

:1

=A1+X1/5.02

79371

FUSE 30A

LITTELFUSE

ELFA AB

This drawing is copyright, and is


the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design an or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.

SIZE1
SCREW LOCK

HTS SIZE4

CRIMP
1,5mm

4-1105051-1
282-696

282-696

Blade fuse terminal

33-051-82

MACHINE TYPE:

CREATED: 2009-03-02 11:07

(Suitable with LIB5 - 1019819)


333E 02

1-1105051-1

X1

Part List

Only operating head 2 pos, 45

SERIAL NO.

EH5U
-

Electrical cabinet X1 CANopen


Parts list: (1019819 - 79371)

CHECKED BY:
DRAWN BY:
DRAWING DATE:

krpulha
2009-03-02

Blade fuse 30A

PLANT (=)

PLOTTED:

UNIT (+)

FILENAME:

2009-03-02

11:11

SHEET

24

CONT.
TOTAL SH.

24
REV.

DRAWING NO.

1002490

GETTING STARTED
WITH

SCS

REV 3

Index
Node Hardware ............................................................................................................... 4
DIGITAL I/O ................................................................................................................................................ 4

General............................................................................................................................ 4
The X2 connector............................................................................................................ 5
Node ID....................................................................................................................... 5
Main Supply................................................................................................................ 6
CAN ............................................................................................................................ 6
The X1 and X3 connectors (I/O-connectors).................................................................. 7
I/O Groups .................................................................................................................. 7
Common junction........................................................................................................ 8
Internal jumper bars .................................................................................................... 8
Connecting a switch.................................................................................................... 9
Connecting a valve...................................................................................................... 9
I/O Modules .............................................................................................................. 10
APPLICATION .......................................................................................................................................... 10

ABE (Application Builder Environment) ................................................................................... 10


System view .............................................................................................................. 10
Pin configuration....................................................................................................... 11
Component view ....................................................................................................... 11
Load view.................................................................................................................. 14
ANYBUS ..................................................................................................................................................... 15

General.......................................................................................................................... 15
Connecting the B1 node............................................................................................ 15
Connecting the A1 node............................................................................................ 16
The Anybus card (in this case for Profibus) ............................................................. 16
APPLICATION WITH A ANYBUS INTERFACE ................................................................................ 18

ABE............................................................................................................................... 18
ANYBUS GATEWAY................................................................................................................................ 20

General.......................................................................................................................... 20
BCAN - Status LEDs ................................................................................................ 21
Power connector........................................................................................................ 21
BCAN connector....................................................................................................... 21
Node address key switches ....................................................................................... 21
Serial port connector ................................................................................................. 21
APS .............................................................................................................................................................. 22

Absolute encoder on the telescope................................................................................ 22


General...................................................................................................................... 22
The RS485 component.............................................................................................. 22
From bits to millimetres (scale) ................................................................................ 23

REV 3

Teach......................................................................................................................... 23
EXTERNAL EE-PROM ............................................................................................................................ 24

General...................................................................................................................... 24
Hardware................................................................................................................... 24
Software .................................................................................................................... 25
Activate the EE-prom ............................................................................................... 26

REV 3

Node Hardware
Below is a picture of a SCS2 node.

X2- I/O, bus


& supply
Connector

X1- I/O
Connector

X3- I/O
Connector

I/O LED
1-48

Field
bus

RS232
(X5)

Digital I/O
General
Here follows an example of how to build up a Can bus system with two nodes one with
one input and the other with one output.
Switch
Input
Slave (A1)

SCS2

CAN network (BCAN)

B1 Master
Output

Valve

REV 3

Display &
Power
LEDS

The X2 connector
The three connectors X1,X2&X3 have different connection keys to avoid the possibility
of connecting them in the wrong place. It is important to choose the correct one.This is
easy to check, on the connecting side of the connector just below the mounting screw
there is a number 7, 8 or 9.
connection
key

The X2
should be
marked 8
Front view of X2 connector

Node ID
All nodes in a system must have a unique identity. This is read from the Id pins
9,19,29,39,49 on the X2 connector, where pins being connected to the ground pin (10)
correspond to zeroes and pins left unconnected are correspond to ones. A master
node (B1) has pins 10,9,19,29,49 connected together. (Commonly used as a spreader
Node)
A slave node on the crane A1 has pins 10,19,29,39,49 connected together.
Start with making ID jumpers.

And connect to the X2 connectors, one as B1 and one as A1.

REV 3

Main Supply
24Volt AC or DC powers the node internally. The signals are doubled in the connector
due to the current limit of single pins. DC voltage can be applied in either direction. The
potential is measured between the A section and the B section.
Name
Pin number in
connector
24INA
X2/42
Potential 1
24INA
X2/43
24INB
X2/45
Potential 2
24INB
X2/44

CAN
The CAN net connection is placed in the X2 connector.
All nodes in the system have to be connected equal (bus topology) to CAN High and
CAN Low to be able to establish communication.
Name
Pin number in
connector
CAN High
X2/30
CAN Low
X2/40
Here is a schematic with the X2 connectors of two nodes, one A1 and one B1 with node id,
CAN bus and power supply connected.
ID SUPPLY CAN BUS

+
-

24V Supply
Low

CAN Bus High


ID
9 10 19 29

30 40 42 43 44 45 49

10 19 29

B1 X2

30 39 40 42 43 44

45 49

A1 X2
Pin no.

CAN-bus

24V SUPPLY
6

REV 3

The X1 and X3 connectors (I/O-connectors)


Just like the X2 connector the X1 and X3 connectors are keyed to avoid connecting them
in the wrong place. The X1 can be identified by the number 7 on the front of the
connector, and the X3 connector by the number 9.
connection
key

Front view of X1 connector

Front view of X3 connector

I/O Groups
There are 48 digital I/O on a node. Each I/O can be configured as either an input or an
output via the software. The I/O 1 to 44 are joined in groups of 4 resulting in 11 groups.
I/O 45 to 48 are single I/Os. Each group has a Common junction. This makes it
possible to have different voltages in each group.
Name

Description

X1 pin
number

I/O-9
I/O-10
I/O-11
I/O-12
Common/Supply 3

General purpose input or output


General purpose input or output
General purpose input or output
General purpose input or output
Common junction for I/O-9 to I/O-12
Description

26
16
6
7
8

Name

I/O-48
General purpose input or output
Common/Supply 15 Common junction for I/O-48

X3 pin
number

30
20

REV 3

Common junction
This point is to be connected to live or neutral depending on if the group is used for
inputs or outputs, Inputs need neutral and outputs need live as showed below. Inputs can
be viewed upon as relay coils and outputs as switching contacts.

G roup used as Input

G roup used as O utput

L/24V D C

N / 0V D C

SC S
9

26

10

16

11

12

26

SC S
10
SC S 11

16

12

I/O M oduls

In the picture is one I/O group used as inputs on the left, and on the right the same group
is used as outputs.

Internal jumper bars


To make linking of common supplies easier the X1 and the X3 connector also has groups
of pins linked together to be used basically as jumper bars with the same potential. The
following pins are linked together internally for the purpose of feeding switches/valves
with common potential.
Pin number

Link
configuration

Pin number

12
13
14
22
23
32
33
34

17
18
19
27
28
29
37
39
38

(Only in X1) 45

(Only in X1) 36

(Only in X1)

24

Link
configuration

REV 3

Connecting a switch
Here is one example of how to use the internal jumpers while connecting the switch into A1.
One of the jumper groups is fed with live and supplies the switch, the other jumper group is
connected to neutral and supplies the I/O group.
L/24V Supply
N /0V Supply

Internal jumper groups

Switch
Cablage
6

8 12 13 1 4

16 17 18 19

22 23 24 26

27

X1 Connector

11 12
10

One Input group

SCS Internal

Connecting a valve
Here is one example of how to use the internal jumpers while connecting the valve into B1.
One of the jumper groups is connected to Neutral and supplies the valves secondary side, the
other jumper group is connected to live and supplies the I/O group.
L/24V Supply
N /0V Supply

Internal jumper groups

Valve
Cablage
6

11 12

8 12 13 1 4

16 17 18 19

10

22 23 24 26

One output group

27

X1 Connector

SCS Internal

REV 3

I/O Modules
To be able to adapt the I/Os to the system voltage each I/O channel have a solid-state
interface relay (OPTO 22). This makes it possible to choose input or output and a voltage
range of 12-230 VAC/DC. Each module has a led indicating active state. On the output
modules there is a 3 Amp fuse. These modules are located inside the SCS cover. The
cover has a lens for each channel, so the I/O status can be seen from the outside.

LED
FUSE

Application
ABE (Application Builder Environment)
System view
When ABE is started a new application is automatically started, and the default view is
the system view. The system view enables the user to select a node configuration in the
software, the application compares the hardware with the software configurations and
these have to be equal to work. You may also set system properties in this view. Some
properties will be updated automatically when a project is saved.

In the system view we have to activate


the A1 node in the soft ware. The B1 is
the master and is active per default.

Menu tabs

System properties

10

REV 3

Pin configuration
Next menu tab is pin configuration, all present nodes are visible as tabs in this view. (1)
Make sure tab A1 is activated in the view. Give Port id# 9 the following name switch.
(2) Comment field is optional. (3)

Activate tab B1 in the view (1) and do the same for Port id# 9 with following name
VALVE. (2)

Note: The red color of the fields indicates that the ports are not yet connected or that any
of the letters are unaccepted. Space between words is not accepted instead use _.
A red field makes it impossible to compile the application.

Component view
Next menu tab is the component view
The component view is where components are deployed and connected. A palette
displaying all components is available in the view.
The palette can be made visible
by pressing components if it is
not already visible.

Available
component
pallet

11

REV 3

Select the OD timer (On Delay timer) component from the available component pallet
(1). Its located in the Digital tab (2).

1
Place the component on Page 1 in the view with the left mouse button. Then press the
right button to get the arrow back.

Right click the mouse on


the left red dot and work
your way to the input
SWITCH and left click.

Do the same thing on the right red dot and choose the output in this case VALVE

12

REV 3

Put the arrow on the component and right click, and select properties.

Put the delay time to two seconds (in mille seconds). The instance name is an internal
component address and should not be changed. When ready press OK.
Instance name

Delay time

If the application needs to be


saved before it is ready choose
Save. The file will be stored as
a spi file.

When the application is ready


choose Compile. The file will
then be saved as a loadable file
spr and is of curse editable.

13

REV 3

Load view
The last view is the Load view. From this view it is possible to download and up load
applications to and from a connected SCS system. Press the Download button and a
dialogue box will appear, choose the desired spr file and press the Open button.

Download

Choose file
and press
open

Then ABE verifies the action in the progress bar.


First ABE sends the file to the connected node. The progress is displayed in the
connected node bar as percent.
Current transfer
completed (%)
Then the system distributes the file over the CAN-bus to the rest of the nodes (if
necessary).
When the download is ready
this dialogue box appears.
Current transfer
completed (%)
Total transfer
completed (%)

14

REV 3

Anybus
General
Here follows an example of how to build up the same system as before with two nodes,
but the B1 node has one output and one input and on the A1 node is the input replaced
with an Anybus
interface
Outside net

Slave (A1)
with anybus

SCS2

CAN network (BCAN)


B1 Master
Input

Output

Switch

Valve

Connecting the B1 node


Connect the B1 node as in the Digital I/O chapter, and add a switch to Port id# 1 as in the
picture below
G roup used as O utput

G roup used as Input


L /24V D C
N / 0V D C

SC S
1

44

31

41

43

42

26

SC S
10
SC S 11

16

12

I/O M oduls

15

REV 3

Connecting the A1 node


Connect power supply, can bus and an ID jumper as A1 in the X2 connector.
An Anybus card is also to be mounted and connected inside the hood where the digital
I/Os are located.

The Anybus card (in this case for Profibus)


This card is used for translation
between different field buses and
a standardized format read by the
SCS system.

There is a D-sub connector on the card for connecting to outside net (1), and a selector
for termination resistance (2) and two selectors used for setting hard ware identification
of the unit in the outside net (3).
1

Item 3.

HW address

*10

*1

4
3
The four LEDs are used for showing the state of the communication from the
Anybus-card and the outside net.
1:not used
2:(green) on-line on the Fieldbus
3:(red) off-line on the Fieldbus
4:(red) indicate faults on the Fieldbus side as follows:
Flashing 1hz-Error in configuration: IN and/or OUT length set during initialization
of the module is not equal to the length set during configuration of the network.
Flashing 2hz-Error in user parameter data: the length/contents of the user parameter
data set during initialization of the module is not equal to the length/contents set
during configuration of the network.
Flashing 4hz-Error in initialisation of the Profibus communication ASIC.

16

REV 3

The Anybus card


is to be mounted
inside the hood on
the right upper
corner of the node

Connect an Anybus jumper


to the D-sub connector on
the Anybus card.
And connect to the outside
connector on the connection
rail beside the card.
On the connection rail the
wires from the D-sub should
be connected in the
following order from the
right 8 3 5 (for Profibus)
Fieldbus connector used for
connecting to the outside
interface.

17

REV 3

Application with a Anybus interface


ABE
Open the application used in the digital chapter. Get in to the pin configuration view
and remove the switch from A1, add a new switch to B1 in Port id# 1
Then get in to the component view and set the cursor on the OD timers input connector
(on the left) and press Disconnect, the connection point turns red if a connection is
acquired for the component to function.

Get an Input bit(1) from the available component


menu under the Anybus tab (2) and place it out in front
of the OD timer and also take an or gate from gates 1
and a split from digital.

Connect the switch to the split, the input bit and the split to the or and the or to
the OD timer. Yore connection should now be as below.

Choose an Output bit and connect it to the split

Note: A red dot on any of the components


makes it impossible to compile the application.

18

REV 3

Right click on in/output bits and choose properties. In the properties menu it is possible to
configure following.
Note is a free text field. Use this field for notes about the Anybus port.
Bit number is the bit number of the chosen byte in Anybus interface. (0-7)
Byte number is the start byte in the Anybus interface. (0-63)
Node is where the any bus card is located (in this case A1)

Note: The size of the data areas is decided of the highest byte in the application, in both
directions separately. The two sizes have to be equal on both sides of the Anybus card
(outside master/any bus) to be able to establish contact. If the outside areas is bigger than
in the application is it possible to put an empty byte to make the areas match.

19

REV 3

Anybus gateway
General
Compared to a conventional SCS node the Anybus gateway does not have any digital or
analogue I/Os, no internal battery backing up the event log (locally
The anybus gateway is used in cases where a physical I/O is not needed; one example is
when the SCS system is connected as a slave unit (via a anybus card in the crane node)
on the crane PLC.

Status LEDs
Power connector

Anybus card
(in this case
Profibus)

BCAN connector
Node address key
switches
Serial port
connector

20

REV 3

BCAN - Status LEDs


There are three green LEDs for Power, BCAN and Anybus indicating operating status
and one red LED indicating error status.
Power LED is lit when power is applied and system starts to execute.
BCAN LED is lit when the BCAN communication interface is operating normally and
flashing when the communication interface is not working as intended.
Anybus LED is flashing when the Anybus interface is not configured and lit when
configured and operating normally. (Between the node and the anybus card)
Error LED is unlit when system is running normally and lit when an error has occurred.

Power connector
The power connector is a Phoenix Contact 2pin header (MC1,5/2-G-3,81).
24Volt DC powers the node internally.

NAME

DESCRIPTION

PIN NUMBER

VCC
GND

10 to 28 V DC 1
Ground
2

NAME

DESCRIPTION

PIN NUMBER

CAN H
CAN L

CAN high
CAN low

1
2

BCAN connector
The BCAN connector is a Phoenix Contact 3pin header (MC1,5/3-G-3,81). All nodes in
the system have to be connected equal (bus
topology) to CAN High and CAN Low to be
able to establish communication.

Node address key switches


There are five switches selecting node address. The node
identity is defined by using the same bit pattern as the
conventional nodes.
For example to configure a gateway node as an A1 (crane)
node: set DIPswitch 1 to ON and DIP switch 2-5 to OFF.
Or to configure a gateway node as an A2 (crane) node: set
DIPswitch 2 to ON and DIP switch 1,3,4 and 5 to OFF.

A1

A2

Serial port connector


The serial port connector is used when connecting the SCS2 Anybus Gateway to a
computer serial port. (Corresponds to X5 on the conventional SCS nodes)
Use a 9-pol D-sub extension lead to connect.

21

REV 3

APS
Absolute encoder on the telescope
General
The absolute encoder should be connected to the RS485 port. (Channel A at X2/38 and
channel B at X2/37) In the ABE component pallet under the analogue tab, the RS485
port component is located. It is also possible to rescale the information from the sensor to
be able to work or monitor the actual measurements (in for instance mm), the tool for this
is the scale component. The scale component is also located under the analogue
tab.
Teach is used
for storing
positions

Add the RS485 port component


from the analogue tab
The scale component
makes it possible to
translate the sensor
value to the
mechanical distance

The RS485 component


This component is used to access the RS485 interface. The component is made to handle
some different types of protocol in this case slin.
The parameters:
Node: each node has one RS485 input. To direct the
component in the software to the correct hardware input,
choose node corresponding to what node the sensor is
wired to.
Protocol: it is possible to choose
between some different standardised
protocols to suit the sensor used.
When using the SSI protocol some more information is needed. (See sensor/manufacture
for data)
Code type: determines how the sensor value (bit pattern) shall be read when converting
to a decimal value (made internally in the component). Gray or Binary.
Input resolution: how many steps (bits) per revolution.
Max revolutions: how many revolutions that are supported by the sensor.

22

REV 3

From bits to millimetres (scale)


Retract the spreader to the mechanical end stop, measure the distance between the single
twistlocks, note the value down, read the sensor value with the ABE online and make a
note of this. Expand the spreader to the mechanical end stop and repeat the same
procedure.
Note: It is very important that the sensor doesnt wraparound (when counting up, after
the highest value it starts at zero again), the retracted value should be low and the
expanded value should be larger.
Right click on the scale component and choose properties
And fill in the noted values as following.
The measured max
value in millimeters
The measured min
value in millimeters
The up loaded max value
from the ABE online
The up loaded min value
from the ABE online
Then verify the scale, put the spreader in some different positions measure and compare
with the scaled value.

Teach
To be able to store positions the APS component is equipped with a storing function
called TEACH. By giving the teach command and expand or retract command it is
possible to move the spreader in a lesser speed (defied by the parameter PWM value for
teach in APS properties) to the required length, for position 20ft, hold the teach
command and give the go to position 20ft command. The value is now stored in the
spreader memory (NV RAM). Repeat this procedure on all the required positions.
The connection point for teach
The connection points for position
direct commands
The connection points for expand/
retract commands

Note: If the scale is made correctly it is possible to verify the spreader length by
activating the teach command, when the teach function is active the sensor value input on
the APS is displayed on the B1 display. Beware of if a "position direct command" is
given at the same time that position is destroyed.

23

REV 3

External EE-prom
General
In the external EE-prom it is possible to store information as spreader ID, twistlock
counters, running time etc. this makes it possible to replace the node(s) in the system
without loosing this information.

Hardware
The EE-prom is to be connected in to the node as following.
Name
Pin number in
Cable
connector
10V supply
X2/36
Red
Serial data
X2/16
Blue
Serial clock
X2/26
Green
Signal ground
X2/6
Black
The EE-prom is located in a gland. The gland should be mounted solid near by the SCS
node within the cable range.

24

REV 3

Software
A spreader properties component needs to be added in the application, that make the
system try to find the EE-prom at boot.
The spreader properties component (1) is located in the misc tab (2) in the
available component menu.

4
3

The spreader properties contains twistlock counters and a time counter etc. To make
the counters work some info is needed, connect the available signals corresponding to the
connection points on the left of the component (3).
The information is possible to send out as analogue words true the bus to the outside net
(if present), the connection points for these values is located on the right of the
component (4).

25

REV 3

Activate the EE-prom


The EE-prom is activated after the Serial number value is set.
The BMS have to be connected to the node that the EE-prom is connected to.
Left click on the Serial number key in the BMS spreader info tab.
In the current key dialogue box down in the left corner there should now be seen serial
number.
Put the spreader serial number in the value bar and press the set button to store and
activate the EE-prom. It now displays the different values.

The Spreader info tag

The get all button

The information from the EE-prom is possible to upload with the BMS from the
spreader info tag. Connect the BMS to the system and press the get all button.

26

REV 3

User Manual

Version 1.0

Revision

Issued by

Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems


Andy Lewis, Bromma Conquip
Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems
GO, AL
Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems

2000-05-26
2000-08-09
2000-10-10
2000-10-10
2001-01-22

PB2
PB3
PB4

Hans Svanfeldt, CC Systems


Hans Svanfeldt, CC Systems
Hans Svanfeldt, CC Systems

2002-06-04
2003-06-10
2004-10-08

PA1
PA2
PA3
A
PB1

Date

Measures

First draft.
Corrections
More corrections
Version 1.0
PID component, Online monitoring (manual and tutorial), *.apd
changed to *.spr, Figure numbering corrected, Allowed character set.
Revision after system release 1.04
Revision after system release 1.05
Revision after system release 1.07

Printed: 05-2-23 13.40

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

2(92)

Table of contents
1

INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................5

INSTALLING ABE...........................................................................................................5

2.1

HW requirements .................................................................................................................................................... 5

2.2

Installation ............................................................................................................................................................... 5

2.3

Disclaimer................................................................................................................................................................. 5

USER INTERFACE .........................................................................................................6

3.1

Main window............................................................................................................................................................ 6

3.2

Error control............................................................................................................................................................ 6

3.3

Multiple language support ...................................................................................................................................... 6

3.4
General functions..................................................................................................................................................... 6
3.4.1
File..................................................................................................................................................................... 6
3.4.2
Edit .................................................................................................................................................................... 7
3.4.3
Settings .............................................................................................................................................................. 7
3.4.4
Tools .................................................................................................................................................................. 7
3.4.5
Help ................................................................................................................................................................... 8

4
4.1

SYSTEM VIEW ................................................................................................................9


General ..................................................................................................................................................................... 9

4.2
Functionality ............................................................................................................................................................ 9
4.2.1
Author................................................................................................................................................................ 9
4.2.2
Last date saved .................................................................................................................................................. 9
4.2.3
Creation date.................................................................................................................................................... 10
4.2.4
Version number ............................................................................................................................................... 10
4.2.5
Revision number.............................................................................................................................................. 10
4.2.6
Spreader type ................................................................................................................................................... 10
4.2.7
Drawing number .............................................................................................................................................. 10
4.2.8
Customer.......................................................................................................................................................... 10
4.2.9
Comments........................................................................................................................................................ 10

5
5.1

PIN CONFIGURATION VIEW........................................................................................11


General ................................................................................................................................................................... 11

5.2
Functionality .......................................................................................................................................................... 11
5.2.1
Address key ..................................................................................................................................................... 11
5.2.2
Exists port........................................................................................................................................................ 11
5.2.3
Anybus I/O ...................................................................................................................................................... 12
5.2.4
CANopen I/O................................................................................................................................................... 12

2(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

6
6.1

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

3(92)

COMPONENT VIEW .....................................................................................................13


General ................................................................................................................................................................... 13

6.2
Page functionality .................................................................................................................................................. 14
6.2.1
Adding pages ................................................................................................................................................... 14
6.3
Component functionality ...................................................................................................................................... 14
6.3.1
Adding a component........................................................................................................................................ 14
6.3.2
Moving a component ....................................................................................................................................... 15
6.3.3
Selecting multiple components........................................................................................................................ 15
6.3.4
Cutting / coping / pasting components ............................................................................................................ 15
6.3.5
Delete a component ......................................................................................................................................... 15
6.3.6
Connecting / disconnecting components ......................................................................................................... 15
6.3.7
Online monitoring............................................................................................................................................ 15

LOAD VIEW...................................................................................................................16

7.1

General ................................................................................................................................................................... 16

7.2

Functionality .......................................................................................................................................................... 16

COMPONENTS .............................................................................................................17

8.1
Controllers.............................................................................................................................................................. 17
8.1.1
TLC4 Twistlock Controller 4 ....................................................................................................................... 17
8.1.2
TLC8 Twistlock Controller 8 ....................................................................................................................... 20
8.1.3
FAC Flipper Arm Controller ........................................................................................................................ 24
8.1.4
DPS Discrete Positioning System................................................................................................................. 26
8.1.5
Tower Head block ........................................................................................................................................ 29
8.1.6
APS Automatic Positioning System ............................................................................................................. 32
8.1.7
MPS Memory position system...................................................................................................................... 36
8.1.8
Twin Telescope................................................................................................................................................ 40
8.1.9
TwinUpDown .................................................................................................................................................. 42
8.1.10 PID................................................................................................................................................................... 46
8.1.11 AutoTuner........................................................................................................................................................ 50
8.2
AnyBus ................................................................................................................................................................... 53
8.2.1
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 53
8.2.2
Anybus System ................................................................................................................................................ 54
8.2.3
Output Word .................................................................................................................................................... 55
8.2.4
Output Byte ..................................................................................................................................................... 55
8.2.5
Output Bit ........................................................................................................................................................ 56
8.2.6
Input Word....................................................................................................................................................... 56
8.2.7
Input Byte ........................................................................................................................................................ 57
8.2.8
Input Bit........................................................................................................................................................... 57
8.3
CANopen ................................................................................................................................................................ 58
8.3.1
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 58
8.3.2
PDO Read Bit .................................................................................................................................................. 58
8.3.3
PDO Read........................................................................................................................................................ 58
8.3.4
PDO Write Bit ................................................................................................................................................. 59
8.3.5
PDO Write ....................................................................................................................................................... 59
8.3.6
SDO Write ....................................................................................................................................................... 59
8.4

Guards .................................................................................................................................................................... 61

3(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

8.4.1
8.4.2
8.4.3
8.4.4

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

4(92)

Spreader stop ................................................................................................................................................... 61


TTDS -Twin Twenty Detection System .......................................................................................................... 61
Analogue guard ............................................................................................................................................... 62
Digital guard .................................................................................................................................................... 63

8.5
Gates ....................................................................................................................................................................... 64
8.5.1
AND ................................................................................................................................................................ 64
8.5.2
NAND.............................................................................................................................................................. 65
8.5.3
NOR................................................................................................................................................................. 65
8.5.4
OR ................................................................................................................................................................... 66
8.5.5
NOT................................................................................................................................................................. 67
8.5.6
XOR................................................................................................................................................................. 67
8.5.7
SR Latch .......................................................................................................................................................... 68
8.5.8
RS Latch .......................................................................................................................................................... 68
8.5.9
Logical gate ..................................................................................................................................................... 69
8.6
Digital ..................................................................................................................................................................... 69
8.6.1
OD Timer On Delay Timer........................................................................................................................... 69
8.6.2
UpDn Counter Up Down Counter ................................................................................................................ 70
8.6.3
OSC - Oscillator .............................................................................................................................................. 70
8.6.4
Split ................................................................................................................................................................. 71
8.6.5
Pulse ................................................................................................................................................................ 71
8.7
Miscellaneous ......................................................................................................................................................... 72
8.7.1
Constant........................................................................................................................................................... 72
8.7.2
Dead end.......................................................................................................................................................... 73
8.7.3
Spreader properties .......................................................................................................................................... 73
8.7.4
Memory ........................................................................................................................................................... 75
8.7.5
Digital buffer ................................................................................................................................................... 76
8.7.6
Analogue buffer............................................................................................................................................... 76
8.8
Analogue................................................................................................................................................................. 78
8.8.1
RS485 port....................................................................................................................................................... 78
8.8.2
IN0 > IN1 ........................................................................................................................................................ 78
8.8.3
IN0 * IN1......................................................................................................................................................... 79
8.8.4
IN0 / IN1.......................................................................................................................................................... 79
8.8.5
IN0 IN1......................................................................................................................................................... 79
8.8.6
IN0 + IN1 ........................................................................................................................................................ 80
8.8.7
Scale ................................................................................................................................................................ 80
8.8.8
AnalogueLatch ................................................................................................................................................ 81
8.8.9
Filter ................................................................................................................................................................ 81
8.8.10 AuxAnalogue................................................................................................................................................... 82

9
10

TUTORIAL.....................................................................................................................83
CANOPEN TUTORIAL ...............................................................................................90

4(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

5(92)

1 Introduction
ABE Application Builder Environment has been developed to create and manage spreader programs specifically for the
Bromma Conquip SCS2 system used on Spreaders. This tool gives the programmer/user the possibility of configuring and
programming the logic of the SCS2 via a graphical interface.
In principal ABE generates a binary file describing the interconnection between the graphical objects the user has tied
together. This file, when downloaded onto the target system, connects the precompiled objects within the target system
together according to the functionality described by the user. Hence all logical objects, components, reside within the
target system and the program file generated by ABE determines their interconnection.
The objects, from no on referred to as components, within ABE contain a varying amount of logic ranging from basic
Boolean instruction sets to Spreader specific blocks of functionality which can be altered in behaviour via parameter
settings. The components containing specified Spreader functions are developed to ensure that years of Spreader
experience is re-used and also contain the interlocking for generating fault and event messages to the onboard NVRAM
(log).
This programming tool is intended for use by staff with adequate knowledge of both the system and the functionality of
the Spreader/Crane in which it shall be used only. Any alterations or new programs causing failure in functionality due to
logical faults in the program are the responsibility of the person/company carrying out this work.

2 Installing ABE
2.1

HW requirements

The minimum requirements to run this application on your PC are:


an Intel compatible PC running Windows 95 / 98 / NT 4.0 / 2000.
at least one serial communication port available (COM1 or COM2).
at least 2Mb of free disk space.

2.2

2.3

Installation
Close any other applications running under windows.
Insert the CD into your station.
Run the file Setup.exe.
Follow the instructions on the screen.

Disclaimer

Copyright Bromma Conquip AB. All rights reserved.


Products and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or trade names of their respective owners.
Bromma Conquip AB operates on a policy of continuous improvement. Therefore we reserve the right to make changes
and improvements to any of the products described in this manual without prior notice.
Bromma Conquip AB is not responsible for any loss of data, income or any consequential damage howsoever caused.

5(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

6(92)

3 User interface
ABE-application is divided into four main functions.
This chapter describes the four main functions of the program.
Remark:
Allowed characters when giving names to Item identifiers, Comments, Components and Tags are:
[a, b, c..., z], [A, B, C..., Z], [0, 1, 2,..., 9] and _ (underscore). No other characters must be used.

3.1

Main window

The main window of the application consists of one large frame. The four tabs at the bottom of this window represent the
four main functions of the program. The toolbar at the top of the window is used for common operations.
The application supports tool tips.
The application is designed to work on a laptop computer with a display size of 800 * 600 pixels or more.

3.2

Error control

Error control of the program file is performed after every operation. The errors found are marked red. The error control
can be turned off/on from the Settings menu.

3.3

Multiple language support

The default language is English. Additional languages can be requested from Bromma Conquip AB.

3.4

General functions

The toolbar functions are File, Edit, Settings, Tools and Help. Each function is described below.

3.4.1

File

Two types of files are available.


Type *.spr is a compiled file ready to download onto the SCS2.
Type *.spi is an intermediate file. Use Save or Save As... if you are not able to generate downloadable program file but
want to continue your work later on. The file extension will then be *.spi.

3.4.1.1 New
Creates a new program file for editing.

3.4.1.2 Open
Opens a program file for editing/viewing.

3.4.1.3 Save As...


Prompts the user to supply a new filename to which the project will be saved. The file extension will be *.spi.

3.4.1.4 Save
Saves the current project. The file extension will be *.spi.

3.4.1.5 Compile
Generates and prompts you to save a downloadable program file used in the SCS2. The file extension will be *.spr.

3.4.1.6 Print
Prints the Component view.

3.4.1.7 Exit
Exits the application.

6(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

3.4.2

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

7(92)

Edit

3.4.2.1 Cut
Selected components will be cut and saved to the clipboard.

3.4.2.2 Copy
Selected components will be copied to the clipboard.

3.4.2.3 Paste
Content of clipboard will be pasted into selected page in the Component view. If connections match existing ports theses
will also be pasted into the page.

3.4.2.4 Find
Finds a text string in component comments, component identifiers or an actual component.

3.4.3

Settings

3.4.3.1 Error Control


Turns the error control on/off.

3.4.3.2 Show hints


Turns the tool tips on/off.

3.4.3.3 Show component connection info


Turns information at component connection points on/off.

3.4.4

Tools

3.4.4.1 Export Pin configuration view


Exports a list of current Pin configuration as an html page for viewing in a web browser.

3.4.4.2 Export Component documentation


Exports a list of available components an their properties as a html page for viewing in a web browser.

3.4.4.3 Export parameters


Exports the selected components parameters to a file.

3.4.4.4 Import parameters


Imports parameters from a file to current project.

3.4.4.5 Show Ladder, Show function blocks


Shows the current project in Ladder format. Note that one cannot add, delete or online monitor components when ladder
look activated.

7(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

3.4.5

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

8(92)

Help

3.4.5.1 About
Short information about ABE such as version, current number of components etc.

8(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

9(92)

4 System view
4.1

General

The system view provides a way of enabling and disabling (connecting/disconnecting) nodes and setting system
properties such as version number, author, comments and date of modification. The nodes are named A1-A4 for the nodes
intended to be fitted to the crane and B1-B8 for the nodes intended to be fitted to the Spreader. Each node name
corresponds to a unique address key setting.
The system view allows the user to set up the node configuration by checking the desired nodes. A fixed set of
checkboxes are available that represent the used nodes in the system. The enabled nodes then have to be present in that
system. An exception is if the EXISTS function is used. This function can then replace a node on the bus with an input
on the master node.
The B1-node is selected by default, since every system has to contain exactly one Master node, B1. Four crane nodes and
seven spreader nodes are available for selection.
Checkboxes for enabling Twistlock redundancy as well as Spreader stop have to be checked here as well if these
functions are used.

Figure 4:1 System view

4.2

Functionality

The system view enables the user to select a node configuration. By filling in the checkboxes you determine the lay-out
(topology) of the system. You also determine on which nodes (B1 & B2) you are to have the twistlock redundancy and
Spreader stop enabled. Each node configuration gives the respective node a unique ID represented by the address key.
You may also set system properties in this view. Some properties will be updated automatically when a project is saved.
The properties are:

4.2.1

Author

This is the author of the spreader program. Contains text of max 80 characters.

4.2.2

Last date saved

Displays the date when the current project was last saved. Displayed in the format 1999-06-28 14:45.

9(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

4.2.3

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

10(92)

Creation date

Displays the date of the current projects creation. The creation date is only changed upon creating a new project.
Displayed in the format 1999-06-28 14:45.

4.2.4

Version number

A user selectable version number. Maximum version number is 99.99.

4.2.5

Revision number

The revision number is incremented each time the specific project is compiled.

4.2.6

Spreader type

A text field representing the type of spreader that the current program is intended for. Contains text of max 80 characters.

4.2.7

Drawing number

A number corresponding to the electrical drawing belonging to the current project. Contains text of max 80 characters.

4.2.8

Customer

This property is to contain the name of the customer who will use the Spreader program. Contains text of max 80
characters.

4.2.9

Comments

This is a text field intended for general comments regarding the Spreader program. Contains text of max 80 characters.

10(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

11(92)

5 Pin configuration view


5.1

General

The pin configuration view is presented as a tabular view of the system, where each tab represents a node. An I/O list
corresponding tags will be available for all enabled nodes in the system. The top tabs indicate which node is displayed.
A tag is composed of its Item identifier and its Comment. The used I/O not yet connected is marked red.
The Port id# field contains a port id, the numerical ID of the I/O number of the SCS2. The Connection field is either IN,
OUT or NC (Not connected) and if its a digital, analogue, PWM or Encoder signals. These fields cannot be edited.
Remark:
Allowed characters when giving names to Item identifiers, Comments, Components and Tags are:
[a, b, c..., z], [A, B, C..., Z], [0, 1, 2,..., 9] and _ (underscore). No other characters must be used.

Figure 5:1 Pin configuration view

5.2

Functionality

This view allows you to change the tag for all port numbers on all nodes in the system. Within this view you give each
individual I/O its nick name, Item Identifier, to make the program more comprehensible, you also assign any comments
to the I/O. The connection type (IN/OUT) will be updated automatically as the Spreader program is altered in the
component view; i.e. the direction of the I/O point is decided when the I/O is connected. Note that ABE will only permit
I/O configuration that is supported by the current SCS2 HW, hence the digital I/O direction can only differ outside of
groups of four apart from the last four I/O points in the list (45-48) which can configured individually.

5.2.1

Address key

The address key field illustrates how the address key should be linked for the viewed node. This pattern corresponds to
the required connection on the X2 connector on the SCS2 HW.

5.2.2

Exists port

The exists port is used in case versatility on the number of used nodes is required. By letting an Input replace a node
within a system one can then have for instance three nodes active in one case and two node plus the selected input active
in another case, and still run the system without having to re-configure it. This can be useful when different models of
Spreaders are to be used within the same system.

11(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

5.2.3

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

12(92)

Anybus I/O

With this button you can view all Anybus inputs and outputs in current spreader program.

5.2.4

CANopen I/O

With this button the CANopen configuration form appears, from this view you can create the CANopen functionality.
You can add up to 15 CANopen slaves and add inputs and outputs on each slave (Digital and Analogue).
Advanced configuration of a CANopen slave can be done by using SDO:s (Service Data Object).
For more information about CANopen see general available sources.

Figure 5:2:4 CANopen configuration view

12(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

13(92)

6 Component view
6.1

General

The component view is where components are deployed and connected. A palette displaying all components is available
in the view. To add a component, select the component from the Palette and place it on your work space with the mouse.
Remark:
Allowed characters when giving names to Item identifiers, Comments, Components and Tags are:
[a, b, c..., z], [A, B, C..., Z], [0, 1, 2,..., 9] and _ (underscore). No other characters must be used.

Figure 6:1 Component view

Figure 6:2 Palette

Components may be dragged within a page to change the layout. Each page can be resized vertically.

13(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

Research & Development

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

14(92)

The following table describes some reoccurring terminology in this manual.


Name
Output tag

Symbol

Description
An Output tag is an intermediate variable used for making
the program more readable and efficient.
Note. Changing the name of an Output tag must be followed
by a change of the corresponding Input tag(s)
An Input tag is used to connect to an existing Output tag.
Note. Changing the name(s) on Input tag(s) must be
followed by a change of the corresponding Output tag.
A component contains logic. The components range from
simple Boolean (AND, OR etc) to those with full
functionality specifically for Spreaders (APS etc.). Some of
the components contain parameters. By double clicking (or
right clicking and selecting properties) the component, its
properties/parameters are displayed and can be edited. A
component also carries component connection points (round
circles).
A red coloured connection indicates that it has to be
connected before a compilation can be performed. Once the
connection point is connected it turns white. This means that
it is connected correctly. If a connection point is white
although it is not connected it is optional to connect it or not.

Input tag

Component

Component connection

Output port

A connection to a physical output. The displayed name is the


Item identifier found in the Pin configuration view. Multiple
connections are not possible for an Output port.
A connection to a physical input. The displayed name is the
Item identifier found in the Pin configuration view.
A multiple connection to same Input port is indicated with
two vertical lines on the connection. This is made to remind
the user that the Input port has been connected at least once
before.
Information about the generic name of the component
connection is shown above each connection point when
turned on. The function can be turned on/off from the
Settings menu.

Input port
Multiple connections

Component connection
information

6.2

Page functionality

One page contains one set of interconnected components with no feedback in the connections. Reuse of signals may be
accomplished by adding variable tags, and referring to those tags wherever necessary.
The component view provides the following functionality:

6.2.1

Adding pages

By clicking on the last page or by placing a component on the last page will add a new page below it.

6.3

Component functionality

In each page, components may be manipulated. Operations on components are:

6.3.1

Adding a component

This operation adds the component currently selected in the palette to a page. Simply click the desired component and
then click the location you wish to place this component on the current page youre working on.

14(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

6.3.2

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

15(92)

Moving a component

Moving a component is a matter of dragging it around using the mouse.

6.3.3

Selecting multiple components

Multiple selection of components is possible using key modifiers (shift / ctrl).

6.3.4

Cutting / coping / pasting components

The copied and cut components will be placed on the clipboard, allowing components to be pasted on pages in the same
application or in other ABE applications.

6.3.5

Delete a component

By selecting a component and pressing delete it is removed from the page.

6.3.6

Connecting / disconnecting components

Drawing a line from one connection point to another makes connections between components.
One can also connect a component by right clicking a connection point and selecting a connection from the available lists
displayed (I/O, Components instances, Tags).
Clicking with the right mouse button over a connected connection point will give you the option to disconnect.

6.3.7

Online monitoring

Online monitoring is performed under Component view.


The same spreader program must be present in both ABE and SCS2. If you are not sure about this, you can always
download your current spreader program to the SCS2 or upload the spreader program from the SCS2.
Select COM1 or COM2 under selection depending on what serial port is connected to the SCS2.
Start online monitoring by pressing the Start online monitoring button.
Automatic update will be performed at an interval specified by Update interval, if Auto is checked
The online monitoring starts by telling the SCS2 to add all visible components and their connections. This takes more or
less time depending on the number of present components and connections in visible Page(s). A progress bar appears
above the buttons, when adding the components, to show you current status.
Stop online monitoring by pressing the Stop online monitoring button (same button as Start online monitoring button).

15(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

16(92)

7 Load view
7.1

General

The load view provides functionality to download and upload Spreader programs. The connection to the system is
selected in the connection box; the possible choices are, Com1 and Com2. Current status of the transfer is displayed in the
three progress bars.

Figure 7:1 Load view

7.2

Functionality

When the download button is pressed the user is prompted to point out the file to download to the system. It has to be a
compiled downloadable program file (*.spr-file). The current status of a download process from the PC to the system is
shown in the top progress bar. The distribution transfer between nodes is shown in the two progress bars at the bottom of
the page. The upload button allows the user to retrieve a program file from a connected system and save it to a file.

16(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

17(92)

8 Components
Terminology:
In this section the follow terms are used:
False = 0 = logical low level
True = 1 = logical high level
Parameter Instance name:
Every component used in a project will be given a unique instance name, which can be seen by clicking the right mouse
button on a component and selecting properties. This unique instance name is seen in the field next to the title Instance
name. The instance name is used to be able to trace every component instance throughout the project. The name can be
altered, but no two instances of a component can have the same name, since this is the ID used by the system to determine
the interconnection between components.
State transition diagrams:
The state transition diagrams describe the behaviour of the components in general. Terminology in the diagrams is not the
same as in the port listings found in corresponding subsections. The text found in the diagrams is more explicit than the
complete listing.
Example: In the state transition diagram for TLC4 the following text tag can be found: not All unlocked
This text tag is equal to NOT (Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2 AND Unlocked 3 AND Unlocked 4).
The latter expression is rather big and makes the diagram difficult to understand.
Descriptions (when relevant) like the one above will be made for those sections that contain State transition diagrams.

8.1
8.1.1

Controllers
TLC4 Twistlock Controller 4

The Twistlock Controller 4 (TLC4) is used to control four Twistlocks at the same time. This component incorporates the
functionality and interlocks for a standard Twistlock operation with four Twistlocks. The component prevents the
Twistlock from changing state unless the landed pins have been active for the specified time, it also prevents pre-selection
of unlock and always keeps the outputs from the component active. Apart from the pure functionality of this component it
also sends event and warning messages to the log function of the system.

8.1.1.1 State transition diagram


Not All unlocked = NOT (Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2 AND Unlocked 3 AND Unlocked 4)
All unlocked = Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2 AND Unlocked 3 AND Unlocked 4
Unlock after landed = when an unlock command is given after landed on all corners (and delay has elapsed if any)
Lock after landed = when a lock command is given after landed on all corners (and delay has elapsed if any)
States:
DISABLED:
When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached.
All outputs are set false.
STARTUP:
This state is reached every time the system is starting up or when DISABLED state is left.
A decision is made if lock or unlock sequence should be initiated (i.e. a transition to those states).
LOCK_ALL:
Lock all Twistlocks.
UNLOCK_ALL:
Unlock all Twistlocks.
IDLE:
When a lock or unlock command has resulted in a complete sequence this state is reached. Lock/unlock outputs are not
changed from previous state.

17(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Project No

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

Version:

2005-02-23 13:40

Page:

PB4

18(92)

For all s tates :


Trans ition is m ade to DISABLED s tate if
SpreaderStop = 1or Enable = 0
LOCK_ALL
[ Lock after landed OR
(landed override AND
Lock) ]

[ All locked ]

[ not All unlocked ]

STARTUP

[ Lock after landed OR


(landed override AND
Lock) ]

[ Unlock after landed OR


(landed override AND
Unlock) ]

IDLE

[ SpreaderStop = 0, Enable = 1 ]

[ All unlocked ]
[ All unlocked ]

DISABLED

[ Unlock after landed


OR (landed override
AND Unlock) ]
UNLOCK_ALL

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: TLC4

8.1.1.2 Input ports


Input
Landed override

Type
Digital

Description
Overrides landed signals. Makes it
possible to unlock/lock if not all
sensors are active. This port must be
connected if enabled in hardware
configuration.

Enable

Digital

Enables component. If set to false


component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).

Unlock command

Digital

Unlock command to unlock all


Twistlocks.

Lock command

Digital

Lock command to lock all


Twistlocks.

18(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

19(92)

Unlocked 1,...,Unlocked 4

Digital

Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status


on unlocked sensor 1 to 4.

Locked 1,..., Locked 4

Digital

Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status


on locked sensor 1 to 4.

Landed 1,..., Landed 4

Digital

Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status


on landed sensor 1 to 4

Output
Unlock

Type
Digital

Description
Unlock signal to all Twistlocks.

Lock

Digital

Lock signal to all Twistlocks.

Locked signal

Digital

All Twistlocks are locked.

Unlocked signal

Digital

All Twistlocks are unlocked.

Landed signal

Digital

All Twistlocks are landed.

Parameter
Delay

Unit
Milliseconds
[ms]

Description
Time after all landed sensors are true
and lock or unlock command will be
able to execute.

Timeout Twistlocks

Milliseconds
[ms]

Time until a warning message will be


prompted if not all sensors are made
follow an output from the
component. (e.g. Locked 1,...,
Locked 4 shall become true within
this time when a lock output has
gone high.)

Timeout landed

Milliseconds
[ms]

Time from the first landed input has


gone active until the system should
expect all the landed inputs active
and vice versa, the time from which
the first landed signal goes low until
all landed signals should have gone
low

Enable logging

Digital

If set to true (checked) the logging of


messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.

8.1.1.3 Output ports

8.1.1.4 Parameters

8.1.1.5 Message logging


This component generates the following messages stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log
can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging.

19(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

2005-02-23 13:40

Code
60

Message
TLC_NO_SENSOR

61

TLC_MULTIPEL_SENSOR

62

TLC_LOCKED_SENSOR_MISSING

63

TLC_LOCKED_SENSOR_LOST

64

TLC_UNLOCKED_SENSOR_MISSING

65

TLC_UNLOCKED_SENSOR_LOST

66

TLC_LANDED_SENSOR_MISSING

67

TLC_LANDED_SENSOR_STUCK

118

TLC_LANDED_OVERRIDE_ACTIVAT
ED
TLC_LANDED_OVERRIDE_DEACTIV
ATED
TLC_LOCK_COMMAND
TLC_UNLOCK_COMMAND
TLC_LOCKED
TLC_UNLOCKED
TLC_LANDED
TLC_UNLANDED

119
175
176
177
178
244
245

8.1.2

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

20(92)

Description
No twist-lock sensor inputs active during
system start.
One twist-lock indicating both locked and
unlocked.
Timeout while locking. Locked signal has
not been received after output to valve.
Locked sensor lost during operation.
Sensor lost without command/output when
Twistlocks are all locked.
Timeout while unlocking. Unlocked signal
has not been received after output to valve.
Unlocked sensor lost during operation.
Sensor lost without command/output when
Twistlocks are all unlocked.
All landed sensors not received after first
landed and timeout.
Landed sensor not released when the other
sensors not active and a timer has timed
out
When override input is set to true and
previous state is false.
When override input is set to false and
previous state is true.
Twist-lock lock command received
Twist-lock unlock command received
All Twistlocks have been locked
All Twistlocks have been unlocked
The spreader has been landed.
The Spreader has been totally lifted (not
landed)

TLC8 Twistlock Controller 8

The Twistlock Controller 8 (TLC8) is used to control eight Twistlocks at the same time. This component incorporates the
functionality and interlocks for a Twistlock operation with eight Twistlocks. The component prevents the Twistlock from
changing state unless the landed pins have been active for the specified time, it also prevents pre-selection of unlock and
always keeps the outputs from the component active. Apart from the pure functionality of this component it also sends
event and warning messages to the log function of the system.

8.1.2.1 State transition diagram


Twin is down (two containers):
not All unlocked = NOT (Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2,..., AND Unlocked 8)
All unlocked = Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2,..., AND Unlocked 8
Twin is up (single container):
not All unlocked = NOT (Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2,...,AND Unlocked 4)
All unlocked = Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2,..., AND Unlocked 4
Unlock after landed = when an unlock command is given after landed on all corners (and delay has elapsed if any)
Lock after landed = when a lock command is given after landed on all corners (and delay has elapsed if any)
States:
DISABLED:
When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached.

20(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

Research & Development

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

21(92)

All outputs are set false.


STARTUP:
This state is reached every time the system is starting up or when DISABLED state is left.
A decision is made if lock or unlock sequence should be initiated (i.e. a transition to those states).
LOCK_ALL:
Lock single and twin Twistlocks.
LOCK_SINGLE:
Lock single Twistlocks.
UNLOCK_ALL:
Unlock single and twin Twistlocks.
UNLOCK_SINGLE:
Unlock single Twistlocks.
IDLE:
When a lock or unlock command has resulted in a complete sequence this state is reached. Lock/unlock outputs are not
changed from previous state.

For all states:


T ransition is m ade to DISABLED state if
SpreaderStop = 1or Enable = 0

LOCK_ALL

LOCK_SINGLE

[ T wi n i s down ]
[ T wi n i s up ]

[ All locked ]
[ All locked ]

[ Unlock after landed OR


(landed override AND
Unlock) ]
ST ART UP

[ Lock after landed OR


(landed override AND
Lock) ]

[ Lock after landed OR


(landed override AND
Lock) ]

IDLE

[ Unlock after landed


OR (landed override
AND Unl ock) ]

enable = 1

[ All unlocked ]

[ All unlocked ]

DISABLED
[ T wi n is down ]

T win is up

UNLOCK_SINGLE

UNLOCK_ALL

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: TLC8

21(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

22(92)

8.1.2.2 Input ports


Input
Landed override

Type
Digital

Description
Overrides landed signals. Makes it
possible to unlock/lock if not all
sensors are active. This port must be
connected if enabled in hardware
configuration.

Enable

Digital

Enables component. If set to false


component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).

Unlock command

Digital

Unlock command to unlock all


Twistlocks.

Lock command

Digital

Lock command to lock all


Twistlocks.

Twin unlocked 1

Twin unlocked 4

Digital

Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status


on unlocked sensor

Single unlocked 1

Digital

Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status


on unlocked sensor

Twin locked 1

Twin locked 4

Digital

Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status


on locked sensor

Single locked 1

Digital

Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status


on locked sensor

Twin landed 1

Twin landed 4

Digital

Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status


on landed sensor

Single landed 1

Single landed 4

Digital

Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status


on landed sensor

Twin is up

Digital

Input signal telling that Twinboxes


are up. Single Twistlocks are enabled
only.

TTDS Fault

Digital

Input signal telling that there is a


TTDS fault. Disables lock
operations.

Type

Description

Single unlocked 4

Single locked 4

8.1.2.3 Output ports


Output

22(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

Research & Development

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

23(92)

Unlock single

Digital

Unlock signal to single Twistlocks.

Unlock twin

Digital

Unlock signal to twin Twistlocks.

Lock single

Digital

Lock signal to single Twistlocks.

Lock twin

Digital

Lock signal to twin Twistlocks.

Locked signal

Digital

All Twistlocks are locked.

Unlocked signal

Digital

All Twistlocks are unlocked.

Landed signal

Digital

All Twistlocks are landed.

Parameter
Delay

Unit
Milliseconds
[ms]

Description
Time after all landed sensors are true
and lock or unlock command will be
able to execute.

Timeout Twistlocks

Milliseconds
[ms]

Time until a warning message will be


prompted if not all sensors are made
follow an output from the
component. (e.g. Locked single 1,...,
Locked single 4 shall become true
within this time when a lock output
has gone high.)

Timeout landed

Milliseconds
[ms]

Time from the first landed input has


gone active until the system should
expect all the landed inputs active
and vice versa, the time from which
the first landed signal goes low until
all landed signals should have gone
low

Enable logging

Digital

If set to true (checked) the logging of


messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.

8.1.2.4 Parameters

8.1.2.5 Message logging


This component generates the following messages stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log
can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging.
Code
60

Message
TLC_NO_SENSOR

61

TLC_MULTIPEL_SENSOR

62

TLC_LOCKED_SENSOR_MISSING

63

TLC_LOCKED_SENSOR_LOST

23(92)

Description
No twist-lock sensor inputs active during
system start.
One twist-lock indicating both locked and
unlocked.
Timeout while locking. Locked signal has
not been received after output to valve.
Locked sensor lost during operation.
Sensor lost without command/output when
Twistlocks are all locked.

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:

2005-02-23 13:40

64

TLC_UNLOCKED_SENSOR_MISSING

65

TLC_UNLOCKED_SENSOR_LOST

66

TLC_LANDED_SENSOR_MISSING

67

TLC_LANDED_SENSOR_STUCK

118

TLC_LANDED_OVERRIDE_ACTIVAT
ED
TLC_LANDED_OVERRIDE_DEACTIV
ATED
TLC_LOCK_COMMAND
TLC_UNLOCK_COMMAND
TLC_LOCKED
TLC_UNLOCKED
TLC_LANDED
TLC_UNLANDED

119
175
176
177
178
244
245

8.1.3

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

Research & Development

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

24(92)

Timeout while unlocking. Unlocked signal


has not been received after output to valve.
Unlocked sensor lost during operation.
Sensor lost without command/output when
Twistlocks are all unlocked.
All landed sensors not received after first
landed and timeout.
Landed sensor not released when the other
sensors not active and a timer has timed
out
When override input is set to true and
previous state is false.
When override input is set to false and
previous state is true.
Twist-lock lock command received
Twist-lock unlock command received
All Twistlocks have been locked
All Twistlocks have been unlocked
The spreader has been landed.
The Spreader has been totally lifted (not
landed)

FAC Flipper Arm Controller

The FAC component is used for grouping and controlling a number of Flippers determined by a parameter of the
component. The function sets either the up or down output at all times depending on the parameter settings. The inputs to
the component generate event messages to the onboard log if enabled.

8.1.3.1 State transition diagram


States:
DISABLED:
When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached.
All outputs are set false.
STARTUP:
This state is reached every time the system is starting up or when DISABLED state is left.
A decision is made if lock or unlock sequence should be initiated (i.e. a transition to those states).
IDLE:
This state is reached emedeately after UP or DOWN states have been reached.
UP:
All Flippers are sent up.
DOWN:
All Flippers are sent down.

24(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

For all s tates :


Trans ition is m ade to DISABLED s tate if
SpreaderStop = 1or Enable = 0

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

25(92)

UP

[ UpCom m and ]

START_UP

IDLE

[ DownCom m and ]

DISABLED

DOWN

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: FAC

8.1.3.2 Input ports


Input
Up command

Type
Digital

Description
Command to send all Flippers up.

Down command

Digital

Command to send all Flippers down.

Enable

Digital

Enables component. If set to false


component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).

Output
Flipper up 1,..., Flipper up n

Type
Digital

Description
Up signal to Flipper 1 to n. The
number of Flippers (n) is derived
from the parameter Number of
Flippers.

Flipper down 1,..., Flipper down n

Digital

Down signal to Flipper 1 to n. The


number of Flippers (n) is derived
from the parameter Number of
Flippers.

Unit
Number

Description
The number of Flippers to be
controlled.

8.1.3.3 Output ports

8.1.3.4 Parameters
Parameter
Number of Flippers

25(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

Research & Development

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

26(92)

Operation mode

Option

Impulse (only impulse required for


the command to execute) or Constant
(constant command required).

Enable logging

Option

If set to true (checked) the logging of


messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.

8.1.3.5 Message logging


This component generates the following messages stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log
can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging.

Code
246
247

8.1.4

Message
FAC_UP_COMMAND
FAC_DOWN_COMMAND

Description
Flipper up command received
Flipper down command received

DPS Discrete Positioning System

The DPS is used for controlling the chain telescope of a Spreader with proximity switch or screw limit switch box
indicating the stops. The component can be used both with telescopic system using direct commands for each position as
well as systems using expand/retract commands to increment/decrement between the positions. The number of positions
are chosen via a component parameter. Parts of its behaviour such as if it requires impulse commands or constant
commands etc are selected by parameters. The intermediate positions are designed to have two sensors per stop but will
perform correctly with one sensor per intermediate position provided it is connected (in the software) to both the inputs of
that position on the component. The outputs of the component are interlocked to unlocked and landed. The feedback from
the component is a signal indicating what position has bee reached as well as a signal indicating that any valid stop has
been reached. The component generates a number of events and warnings if positions arent reached within a parameter
adjusted time etc.
The DPS component is equipped with an fast I/O concept, this means that the component sampels the input sensors at a
higher frequency and sets the actuators according to the internal logic. This will improve the overall performance of the
component. To utilise this feature please note that the position sensors and actuators must be physically connected to the
same node and that no logic is to be placed on the components outputs (Expand, Retract).
If sensors and actuators not connected to the same node the fast I/O concept will be disabled.

8.1.4.1 State transition diagram


States:
DISABLED:
When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached.
All outputs are set false.
STARTUP:
Unconditional transition is made to IDLE state.
IDLE:
Waiting for command input.
EXPAND:
Expanding to next stop. Next stop is either next closest stop or a stop decided according to which Return to position X
command is given. A transition is made to IDLE state when next stop is reached.
RETRACT:

26(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

Research & Development

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

27(92)

Retracting to next stop. Next stop is either next closest stop or a stop decided according to which Return to position X
command is given. A transition is made to IDLE state when next stop is reached.
CONSTANT REPEAT:
When stopped at a position a new constant command is required to go to another position. Depressed keys or similar must
be released before a new command will be excepted.
Example:
1. Expand command is given.
2. Next stop is reached.
3. The telescope stops.
4. Expand command is released.
5. New expand command is given.
6. The telescope continues.
DELAY:
A delay is made for a time defined by Stop delay time (parameter). This delay is only performed if Delay is set in
Operation mode (parameter) else ignored.
currentCommand = is always EXPAND or RETRACT. The command inputs Retract / Expand command or Return to
position X. These command inputs are internally converted to EXPAND or RETRACT depending on current position
and desired position.
For all s tates :
Trans ition is m ade to DISABLED s tate if
SpreaderStop = 1or Enable = 0

[ desiredStop = currentStop,
Operation m ode = Delay ]

[ desiredStop = current
Stop, Operation m ode =
Cons tant repeat ]

EXPAND

[ currentCom m and = EXPAND ]

DELAY

[ Delay perform ed ]

IDLE

[ com m andInput =
NO_CMD ]

CONSTANT REPEAT

[ currentCom m and = RETRACT ]


[ desiredStop = currentStop,
Operation m ode = Cons tant repeat ]
RETRACT
[ desiredStop = currentStop,
Operation m ode = Delay ]
START_UP

DISABLED
[ SpreaderStop = 0,
Enable = 1 ]

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: DPS

8.1.4.2 Input ports

27(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

28(92)

Input
Expand command

Type
Digital

Description
Input command to expand telescope
to next stop.

Retract command

Digital

Input command to retract telescope


to next stop.

Return to position 0

Return to position n

Digital

Input command to expand telescope


to predefined stop. The number of
predefined stops is set by the
parameter Number of stops.

Sensor 0
...
Sensor n

Digital

Sensor input.
Example with 4 stops:
Stop number 1 has Stop sensor 1,
Stop number 2 has Stop sensor 2 + 3,
Stop number 3 has Stop sensor 4 + 5,
Stop number 4 has Stop sensor 6.
Etc..

Any landed

Digital

Sensor input from landed sensors.


Prevents telescoping when landed.

All unlocked

Digital

Sensor input from unlocked sensors.


Permits telescoping when unlocked.

Enable

Digital

Enables component. If set to false


component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).

Slave

Digital

Enables slave mode. Telescope will


run at full speed, only Retract and
Expand commands are enabled and
no stops are enabled

Output
Expand

Type
Digital

Description
Output to expand telescope.

Retract

Digital

Output to retract telescope.

In position 0,..., Reached stop n

Digital

Output signal indicating that the


specific valid stop has been reached.

In position

Digital

Output signal indicating that a valid


stop has been reached.

Unit

Description

8.1.4.3 Output ports

8.1.4.4 Parameters
Parameter

28(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

Research & Development

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

29(92)

Timeout

Milliseconds
[ms]

Time permitted from when an output


is turned on until a valid position
should be reached. If this time is
exceeded the motion will be stopped
and a warning generated.

Operation mode

Option

Impulse, Delay and Constant repeat.

Delay at each stop

Milliseconds
[ms]

Time the telescope is delayed


(stopped) at each stop.

Number of stops

Number

The number of stops in use.

Enable logging

Option

If set to true (checked) the storing of


messages will be turned on otherwise
no generated messages will be stored.

8.1.4.5 Message logging


This component generates the following messages stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log
can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging.

8.1.5

Code
68

Message
DPS_TIMEOUT

69

DPS_SENSOR_MISSING

70

DPS_SENSOR_LOST

71

DPS_MULTIPEL_SENSOR

179
180
181

DPS_EXPAND_COMMAND
DPS_RETRACT_COMMAND
DPS_GOPOS_COMMAND

182

DPS_STOP_REACHED

Description
No valid stop reached within timeout
time.
The expected sensor has not been
reached within specified sequence.
Position sensor has been lost without
any command given
More than one position sensor active
simultaneously.
Expand command received
Retract command received
A command to go to a certain
position received
A valid position has been reached

Tower Head block

The Tower component is used to adjust the point of gravity.

8.1.5.1 State transition diagram


States:
DISABLED:
When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached.
All outputs are set false.
STARTUP:
Unconditional transition is made to IDLE state.
IDLE:
Waiting for command input.
FEED_LEFT:

29(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Project No

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

Version:

2005-02-23 13:40

PB4

Page:

30(92)

Feeds the Tower to the left.


FEED_RIGHT:
Feeds the Tower to the right.
CENTER:
Centres the tower. The Tower is centred when both At left sensor and At right sensor is true.
DELAY:
A delay is performed for a time defined by Direction change time (parameter).

For all s tates :


Trans ition is m ade to DISABLED s tate if
SpreaderStop = 1or Enable = 0
FEED_LEFT

FEED_RIGHT

[ Feed right ]

[ Feed left ]

START_UP

[ SpreaderStop = 0, Enable = 1 ]

IDLE

[ Center ]

[ Delay perform ed ]

DISABLED
CENTER

DELAY

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: Tower

8.1.5.2 Input ports


Input
Enable

Type
Digital

Description
Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).

Enable right

Digital

Enables feeding in right direction.


Default value if not connected is true
(i.e. no effect).

Enable left

Digital

Enables feeding in left direction.


Default value if not connected is true
(i.e. no effect).

Right end sensor

Digital

Position sensor input.

At right sensor

Digital

Position sensor input.

30(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

31(92)

At left sensor

Digital

Position sensor input.

Left end sensor

Digital

Position sensor input.

Right command

Digital

Input command to feed head block


right.

Left command

Digital

Input command to feed head block


left.

Centre command

Digital

Input command to feed head to the


centre position.

Output
In centre

Type
Digital

Description
Output signal telling Head block is in
centre position.

At right side

Digital

Output signal telling Head block is to


the right.

At left side

Digital

Output signal telling Head block is to


the left.

Feed right

Digital

Output signal to feed Head block


right.

Feed left

Digital

Output signal to feed Head block left.

Parameter
Operation mode

Unit
Option

Description
Constant or Impulse. Impulse is only
valid for the Centre command

Delay

Milliseconds
[ms]

Time before a change of direction


will take effect.

Timeout

Milliseconds
[ms]

Time permitted from when an output


is turned on until a valid position
should be reached. If this time is
exceeded the motion will be stopped.

Use end stops

Option

If set true (checked) Right end sensor


and Left end sensor does not need to
be connected.

Enable logging

Option

If set to true (checked) the logging of


messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.

8.1.5.3 Output ports

8.1.5.4 Parameters

8.1.5.5 Message logging


This component generates the following messages stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log
can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging.

31(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Code
325
326
327
328
329
330
369

8.1.6

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Message
TOWER_CENTER_COMMAND
TOWER_LEFT_COMMAND
TOWER_RIGHT_COMMAND
TOWER_REACHED_CENTER_POS
TOWER_REACHED_LEFT_POS
TOWER_REACHED_RIGHT_POS
TOWER_TIMEOUT

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

32(92)

Description
Centre command is given.
Feed left command is given.
Feed right command is given.
Tower has reached centre position.
Tower has reached left position.
Tower has reached right position.
Tower has not reached the desired
position within the time limit.

APS Automatic Positioning System

The APS component is used for positioning the chain telescope using an absolute encoder input to read the position of the
chain. Due to the feedback from the sensor, self-correcting is possible if the Spreader is knocked out of position. It is
possible to use both proportional controls (PWM) as well as on/off control with this component. The component can be
used both with telescopic system using direct commands for each position as well as systems using expand/retract
commands to increment/decrement between the positions. The number of positions is chosen via a component parameter
as well as are certain parts of its behaviour such as if it requires impulse commands or constant commands etc. The
absolute value (count) for each position is done via teach in functionality.

8.1.6.1 State transition diagram


States:
DISABLED:
When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached.
All outputs are set false.
STARTUP:
Unconditional transition is made to IDLE state.
IDLE:
Waiting for command input.
Expand command or Go position command (depending on current position) makes a transition to EXPAND state.
Retract command or Go position command (depending on current position) makes a transition to RETRACT state.
EXPAND:
Expands telescope.
PWM expand output is set to maximum (High speed) if not in Low speed window or in Stop window.
PWM expand output is set to minimum (Low speed) if in Low speed window.
PWM expand output is set to zero if in Stop window.
Digital expand output is set to false if in Stop window else true.
RETRACT:
Retracts telescope.
PWM retract output is set to maximum (High speed) if not in Low speed window or in Stop window.
PWM retract output is set to minimum (Low speed) if in Low speed window.
PWM retract output is set to zero if in Stop window.
Digital retract output is set to false if in Stop window else true.
DELAY:
Performs a delay (Stop delay time) at each stop if Delay is selected in Operation mode (parameter)
Expand and retract outputs are set to false in this state.

32(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

Research & Development

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

33(92)

CONSTANT_REPEAT:
A new Expand or Retract command must be given to leave this state if Constant repeat is selected in Operation mode
(parameter).
Expand and retract outputs are set to false in this state.

For all s tates :


Trans ition is m ade to DISABLED s tate if
SpreaderStop = 1or Enable = 0

[ Operation m ode = Delay ]

EXPAND

DELAY

[ desiredPos ition >


currentPos ition ]
[ Operation m ode =
Im puls e, des iredPosition
= currentPos ition ]

[ Operation m ode = Delay,


des iredPos ition = currentPos ition ]

[ Delay perform ed ]
STARTUP

IDLE

[ no button is pres s ed ]
[ SpreaderStop = 0, Enable = 1 ]
[ Operation m ode = Im puls e,
des iredPos ition = current
Pos ition ]

[ Operation m ode = Cons tant repeat,


des iredPos ition = currentPos ition ]

[ desiredPos ition <


currentPos ition ]

DISABLED

[ Operation m ode =
Cons tant repeat ]

RETRACT

CONSTANT REPEAT

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: APS

8.1.6.2 Teaching telescope positions


This component has to be taught the absolute value (encoder count) of each position. This is done by having the Teach
input go high and at the same time giving the command of the current position to be taught. The current value of the
encoder is then saved onboard the Spreader. All positions, that have been enabled via the parameter Number of stops,
have to be taught a value.

8.1.6.3 Input ports


Input

Type

33(92)

Description

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

34(92)

Enable

Digital

Enables component. If set to false


component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).

Teach

Digital

Command to teach in new positions.


When this signal is true any Go
position command will store a new
position for corresponding stop.

Slave mode

Digital

Enables slave mode. Telescope will


run at full speed, only Retract and
Expand commands are enabled and
no stops are enabled.

Hooks are up

Digital

Input signal indicating that all hooks


are in up position. Only used for twin
telescopic Spreaders. I.e. if nothing is
connected here telescoping is
permitted, can also be used as a
general permit.

Any landed

Digital

Input result from landed sensors.

Go position 0

Go position n

Digital

Command to feed to defined


positions 0,...,n.

Retract command

Digital

Command to retract telescope.

Expand command

Digital

Command to expand telescope.

Current position

Analogue

Scaled input signal of the current


position.

Output
Stop position0

Stop position n

Type
Analogue

Description
Output signal indicating the stored
positions for the corresponding stop.

In position

Digital

Output signal indicating that a valid


stop has been reached.

In position 0

In position n

Digital

Output signal indicating that the


specific valid stop has been reached.

PWM retract

PWM

PWM output to control the telescope.

8.1.6.4 Output ports

Range 0-1000
PWM expand

PWM

PWM output to control the telescope.

Range 0-1000
Digital retract

Digital

34(92)

Digital output to control the


telescope.

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

35(92)

Digital expand

Digital

Digital output to control the


telescope.

Digital high speed

Digital

Digital output for high speed


telescoping in two-speed system.

Parameter
Delay at each stop

Unit
Milliseconds
[ms]

Description
Delay time at each stop if Expand or
Retract command is given and Delay
is enabled under Operation mode.

Timeout

Milliseconds
[ms]

Time until from when an output is


turned on until a valid position
should be reached. If this time is
exceeded the motion will be stopped
and a warning generated.

Number of stops

Number

The number of stops enabled.

Auto correction

Option

If enabled the APS will feed back the


telescope to its original position if it
of some reason has got out of
position.

Operation mode

Option

Impulse: sequence completes until a


new command is given

8.1.6.5 Parameters

Delay: delay at each stop


Constant repeat: when a stop is
reached a new expand or retract
command must be given.
Stop window

Millimetre
[mm]

Distance from defined stop to be


considered as a stop.

Signal window

Millimetre
[mm]

Window around the desired position


in which a signal indicating that the
correct position has been reached is
given.

Impact range

Millimetre
[mm]

Hysterisis for impact detection.

Impact off delay timer

Milliseconds

Delay after impact detected to run.

[ms]
Length of travel

Millimetre
[mm]

Time of telescope

Milliseconds
[ms]

Ramp Gain

Number

Distance between minimum and


maximum positions.
Time between minimum and
maximum positions.
Ramp gain.

[value *1000]

35(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

Research & Development

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

36(92)

Ramp offset

Millimetre
[mm]

Ramp offset for stop speed

Time to reach max speed

Milliseconds

The time it shall take to reach max


speed.

[ms]
Proportional Gain

Number

Proportional part of the PI regulator

[value *1000]
Integral Gain

Number

Integral part of the PI regulator

[value *1000]
PWM value for teach

Number

PWM output when teach enabled.

Reverse Min PWM output

Number

Minimum value on PWM that causes


a reversed movement.

Reverse Max PWM output

Number

Maximum value on PWM that causes


a reversed movement

Forward Min PWM output

Number

Minimum value on PWM that causes


a forward movement.

Forward Max PWM output

Number

Maximum value on PWM that causes


a forward movement.

Enable logging

Option

If set to true (checked) the logging of


messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.

8.1.6.6 Message logging


The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following message stored in the
fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check
box Enable logging.
Code
183

Message
APS_TIMEOUT

184
185
186
187
272
396
397
398

APS_EXPAND_COMMAND
APS_RETRACT_COMMAND
APS_GOPOS_COMMAND
APS_STOP_REACHED
APS_TEACH_COMMAND
APS_IMPACT_ON
APS_AUTOCORR_ON
APS_IN_VALUE_OUT_OF_T
EACH_RANGE
APS_IMPACT_OUT_OF_SIG_
WIN

399

8.1.7

Description
The telescope hasn't reached its' position within time
limit.
Expand command received
Retract command received
Command to go to a specific position received
The desired position reached
Teach in command received
Impact is detected
Spreader is auto correcting
The position value is not within the teached range.
Spreader is bumped out of signal window.

MPS Memory position system

The MPS component stores either a predefined value or a value set during run time and can then position the twin
telescope to this/these positions on given commands. The MPS uses an absolute input value and can either be used to
return the twin telescope to a number of predefined positions (taught in and stored in the NVRAM). The driver also has

36(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

37(92)

the possibility of storing the current position in a volatile memory of the SCS2 and then returning to this position via a
command until the power is cycled or a new position is stored.

8.1.7.1 State transition diagram


States:
DISABLED:
When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached.
All outputs are set false.
STARTUP:
Unconditional transition is made to IDLE state.
IDLE:
Waiting for command input.
Expand command, Returned to logged position command (depending on current position) and Go to predefined position
(depending on current position) makes a transition to EXPAND state.
Retract command, Returned to logged position command (depending on current position) and Go to predefined position
(depending on current position) makes a transition to RETRACT state.
EXPAND:
Expands the Twin boxes until position is within range Stop window from desired stop.
RETRACT:
Retracts the Twin boxes until position is within range Stop window from desired stop.

For all s tates :


Trans ition is m ade to DISABLED s tate if
SpreaderStop = 1or Enable = 0

RETRACT

[ desiredPos ition < currentPos ition ]

[ desiredPos ition = currentPos ition ]

STARTUP

IDLE

[ desiredPos ition = currentPos ition ]


[ SpreaderStop = 0, Enable = 1 ]
[ desiredPos ition > currentPos ition ]
DISABLED
EXPAND

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: MPS

37(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

38(92)

8.1.7.2 Input ports


Input
Enable

Type
Digital

Description
Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).

Current position

Analogue

Scaled input signal reading the


current position.

Return to predefined position 0


...
Return to predefined position n

Digital

Command to feed Twin boxes to


predefined position 0,...,n

Returned to stored position 0


...
Returned to stored position n

Digital

Command to feed Twin boxes to


logged position 0,...,n

Store new position 0


...
Store new position n

Digital

Command to log new positions.


When this signal is true the current
position will be stored in the RAM of
the SCS2.

Teach

Digital

Command to teach in new positions.


When this signal is true any Go to
pre-defined position command will
store a new position for
corresponding stop.

Output
Current reference position

Type
Analogue

Description
Signal indicating the currently
desired position.

Predefined position 0

Predefined position n

Analogue

Signal indicating the positions for the


corresponding predefined stop.

Predefined position 0

Predefined position n

Analogue

Signal indicating the positions for the


corresponding predefined stop.

Logged position 0

Logged position n

Analogue

Output signal indicating the positions


for the corresponding logged stop.

In position

Digital

Output signal indicating that any


position has been reached & logged
or predefined).

Expand

Digital

Output signal to expand Twin boxes.

Retract

Digital

Output signal to retract Twin boxes.

8.1.7.3 Output ports

38(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

Research & Development

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

39(92)

8.1.7.4 Parameters
Parameter
Stop window

Unit
Millimetre
[mm]

Description
Offset from stop to be considered as
a stop.

Operation mode

Option

Impulse: sequence completes until a


new command is given
Constant: when a stop is reached a
new expand or retract command must
be given.

Predefined positions

Number

The number of stops that will be


stored in none volatile memory. (I.e.
positions will be available after
shutting down system.)

Storable positions

Number

The number of stops that will be


stored in volatile memory. (I.e.
positions will be lost when shutting
down system.)

Timeout

Milliseconds
[ms]

Time from when an output is turned


on until a valid position should be
reached. If this time is exceeded the
motion will be stopped and a warning
generated.

Enable logging

Option

If set to true (checked) the logging of


messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.

8.1.7.5 Message logging


The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following message stored in the
fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check
box Enable logging.
Code
281
282

Message
MPS_TEACH_PREDEF_POS
MPS_GO_PREDEF_POS

280

MPS_TEACH_LOGGED_POS

284

MPS_GO_LOGGED_POS

285

MPS_TIMEOUT

39(92)

Description
Teach command received.
Command to go to a pre-defined position has
been received.
A command to store a new value for a log
position has been received.
A command to return to a log position has been
received.
The twin-legs haven't reached their requested
position within time limit.

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

8.1.8

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

40(92)

Twin Telescope

The Twin Telescope component transfers the commands to expand and retract the twin telescope to the necessary outputs.
The component, although it doesnt hold much functionality, is useful for the event log.

8.1.8.1 State transition diagram


States:
DISABLED:
When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached.
All outputs are set false.
STARTUP:
Unconditional transition is made to IDLE state.
IDLE:
Waiting for command input.
Expand command makes a transition to EXPAND state if In 45ft sensor is false.
Retract command makes a transition to RETRACT state if one not In zero left sensor is true and if not In zero right
sensor is false.
EXPAND:
Expands the Twin boxes as long as Expand command is given and In 45ft is false.
RETRACT:
Retracts the Twin boxes as long as Retract command is given and both In zero left and In zero right sensors are false.

For all s tates :


Trans ition is m ade to DISABLED s tate if
SpreaderStop = 1or Enable = 0
EXPAND

[ Expand, !in45Pos ]
[ !Expand OR in45Pos ]

STARTUP

IDLE

[ !Retract OR (inZeroPos Left, in


ZeroPos Right) ]

[ !SpreaderStop, Enable ]
[ Retract, !inZeroPos Left,
!inZeroPos Right ]
DISABLED

RETRACT

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: Twin Telescope

40(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

Research & Development

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

41(92)

8.1.8.2 Input ports


Input
Enable

Type
Digital

Description
Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).

In 45ft

Digital

Sensor input signal.

In zero right

Digital

Sensor input signal.

In zero left

Digital

Sensor input signal.

Retract command

Digital

Command input to retract the twin


boxes.

Expand command

Digital

Command input to expand the twin


boxes.

Output
Retract

Type
Digital

Description
Output signal to retract twin boxes.

Expand

Digital

Output signal to expand twin boxes.

Parameter
Timeout

Unit
Milliseconds
[ms]

Description
Time until from when an output is
turned on until a valid position
should be reached. If this time is
exceeded the motion will be stopped
and a warning generated.

Enable logging

Option

If set to true (checked) the logging of


messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.

8.1.8.3 Output ports

8.1.8.4 Parameters

8.1.8.5 Message logging


The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following message stored in the
fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check
box Enable logging.
Code
273
274
275
276

Message
TWINTELE_EXPAND_COMMAND
TWINTELE_RETRACT_COMMAND
TWINTELE_REACHED_ZERO_LEFT
TWINTELE_REACHED_ZERO_RIGHT

41(92)

Description
Expand command received
Retract command received
Left console reached zero gap position
Right console reached zero gap position

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:

8.1.9

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

Research & Development

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

42(92)

277

TWINTELE_EXPANDING

Twinlegs expand in motion

278
279

TWINTELE_RETRACTING
TWINTELE_TIMEOUT

Twinlegs retract in motion


Hasn't reached an end stop when in motion
within time limit

TwinUpDown

The TwinUpDown component is designed to be used on the twin telescopic Spreaders. The component performs the twin
up and twin down sequences automatically upon the commands twin up and twin down. The sequence for twin down
consists of the twin units separating until the Left attach & right attach permits have been made. Thereafter the hooks
situated on the tension rod are lowered and finally the twin boxes are lowered. The sequence for twin up consists of the
hooks on the tension rod being raised followed by the twin boxes being raised. The twin consoles are now retracted until
the zero position switches are made, the retract output is active for a short off-delay after that to ensure that both units are
fully retracted. When a complete up sequence has been performed a pulse is given on the output Twin up ready pulse ,
which in turn can be used for instance to run the Spreader back to the correct single 40ft position.

42(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

Research & Development

Project No
Version:

2005-02-23 13:40

PB4

Page:

43(92)

8.1.9.1 State transition diagram


TWIN_DOWN

TWIN_UP
1 : [ !allTwinUp || !hookLeft
Disconnected || !hookRight
Disconnected ]

[ twinDownReques tM ]

2 : [ !allTwinUp || !(hook
LeftDis connected &&
hookRightDis connected) ]

RAISE_BOXES

CONNECT

[ allTwinUp ]

[ !allTwinUp ]

[ hookLeftConnected && hook


RightConnected ]

1 : [ !allTwinUp ||
!hookLeftDis connected
|| !hookRight
Disconnected ]

RAISE_HOOKS

[ hookLeftDis connected &&


hookRightDis connected ]
2 : [ !(twinInZeroPos Left
&& twinInZeroPosRight) ]

BOXES_DOWN

INCH_IN

2 : [ las tTwinUpStateM != OFF


_DELAY_INCH && twinInZero
Pos Left && twinInZeroPos
Right && energis eInchInM ]

[ anyTwinUp ]

[ !anyTwinUp ]

3:
HOLD_DOWN

HOLD_UP
1 : [ !(twinInZeroPos Left && twinIn
ZeroPos Right) || delayM.is Tim eout() ]

H*

OFF_DELAY_INCH

Trans ition to IDLE s tate if


twinDownCom m and

H*

Trans ition to IDLE s tate if


twinUpCom m and

[ twinUpCom m and ]

[ twinDownCom m and ]

1 : [ twinDownReques tM) || (twin


DownCom m and && hookLeft
Connected && hookRightConnected ]

IDLE
2 : [ anyTwinUp && !(hook
LeftConnected && hook
RightConnected) ]

1 : [ !anyTwinUp && hook


LeftConnected && hook
RightConnected ]

2 : [ twinUpReques tM ]

3:
STARTUP

For all s tates :


Trans ition is m ade to DISABLED s tate if
SpreaderStop = 1or Enable = 0

[ SpreaderStop = 0, Enable = 1 ]

DISABLED

Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: TwinUpDown

43(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

44(92)

8.1.9.2 Input ports


Input
Enable

Type
Digital

Description
Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).

Twin box up 1

Twin box up 4

Digital

Sensor input indicating that Twin


boxes are up.

Hook connected right

Digital

Hook connected left

Digital

Sensor input indicating that right


hook is down.
Sensor input indicating that left hook
is down.

Right attach permit

Digital

Sensor input indicating that position


has been reached to attach twin boxes
on right side.

Left attach permit

Digital

Sensor input indicating that position


has been reached to attach twin boxes
on left side.

Hook disconnected right

Digital

Sensor input indicating that hook is


up on right side.

Hook disconnected left

Digital

Sensor input indicating that hook is


up on left side.

Twin in zero right

Digital

Sensor input indicating that Twin


boxes has reached zero position on
right side.

Twin in zero left

Digital

Sensor input indicating that Twin


boxes has reached zero position on
left side.

Chain in 40ft

Digital

Sensor input indicating that chain is


in 40ft position.

Permit twin down

Digital

Permits down motion if set to true.

Permit twin up

Digital

Permits up motion if set to true.

Twin down command

Digital

Command to send Twin boxes down.

Twin up command

Digital

Command to send Twin boxes up.

Output
Twin up ready pulse

Type
Digital

Description
Signal telling that up sequence is
completed.

Twin down

Digital

Signal to lower Twin boxes.

Twin up

Digital

Signal to raise Twin boxes.

8.1.9.3 Output port

44(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

Research & Development

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

45(92)

Disconnect twin unit left

Digital

Signal to disconnect left hook.

Disconnect twin unit right

Digital

Signal to disconnect right hook.

Connect twin unit left

Digital

Signal to connect left hook.

Connect twin unit right

Digital

Signal to connect right hook.

Inch to zero gap

Digital

Signal to inch in Twin boxes.

Inch to connect left

Digital

Signal to inch out left Twin box.

Inch to connect right

Digital

Signal to inch out right Twin box.

Parameter
Timeout Twin down

Unit
Milliseconds
[ms]

Description
Time until a warning message will be
prompted if sequence doesnt
complete.

Timeout hook

Milliseconds
[ms]

Time until a warning message will be


prompted if sequence doesnt
complete.

Timeout Twin inching

Milliseconds
[ms]

Time until a warning message will be


prompted if sequence doesnt
complete.

Enable logging

Option

If set to true (checked) the logging of


messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.

8.1.9.4 Parameters

8.1.9.5 Message logging


The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following message stored in the
fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check
box Enable logging.
Code
255

Message
TWIN_BOXES_UP_TIMEOUT

256

TWIN_HOOK_LEFT_UP_TIMEOUT

257

TWIN_HOOK_RIGHT_UP_TIMEOUT

258

TWIN_ATTACHLEFT_TIMEOUT

259

TWIN_ATTACHRIGHT_TIMEOUT

260

TWIN_HOOK_LEFT_DN_TIMEOUT

261

TWIN_HOOK_RIGHT_DN_TIMEOUT

45(92)

Description
Twin boxes have failed to get to their
upper position within time limit.
Left hook has failed to reach its' upper
position within time limit.
Right hook has failed to reach its' upper
position within time limit.
Twin boxes left timed out when
expanding to their attach position. Failed
to reach switch within time limit.
Twin-boxes right timed out when
expanding to their attach position. Failed
to reach switch within time limit.
Left hook has failed to reach its' lower
position (connect) within time limit.
Right hook has failed to reach its' lower
position (connect) within time limit.

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

Research & Development

Project No
Version:

2005-02-23 13:40

262

TWIN_BOXES_DOWN_TIMEOUT

263

TWIN_TWIN_SENSOR_LOST

264

TWIN_BOXES_UP_SENSOR_LOST

265

TWIN_HOOK_DN_LEFT_SENSOR_LOST

266

TWIN_HOOK_DN_RIGHT_SENSOR_LOST

267
268
286
287
288

TWIN_HOOK_UP_LEFT_SENSOR_LOST
TWIN_HOOK_UP_RIGHT_SENSOR_LOST
TWIN_UP_COMMAND
TWIN_DOWN_COMMAND
TWIN_BOXES_ARE_UP

289

TWIN_BOXES_ARE_DOWN

PB4

Page:

46(92)

Twin-boxes have failed to get to their


lower position within time limit.
Twin up sensor lost unexpectedly. (not
due to output).
Twin up sensor received when twinboxes are down.
Left hook down sensor lost
unexpectedly.
Right hook down sensor lost
unexpectedly.
Left hook up sensor lost unexpectedly.
Right hook up sensor lost unexpectedly.
Twin up command has been received.
Twin down command has been received.
Twin boxes have reached their upper
position.
Twin boxes have reached their lower
position.

8.1.10 PID
8.1.10.1 Overview
The PID components are used to control fast processes, e.g. positioning, syncronisation and control of hydraulic cylinders
with special requirements.
Each PID component controls a single cylinder, but usually they ared used in pair and then 2 PID components are needed.
The PID component have the following features:
Position control
Velocity control
Syncronisation of two cylinders
Acceleration limitation
These features are described in the following sections 8.1.10.2-8.1.10.5.
The implementation and hands-on configuration are described in section 8.1.10.6.

8.1.10.2 Position control


The PID component can use either position mode or velocity mode depending on which way to coontrol it. In position
mode you give a reference position in millimeters. Then the cylinder moves to that position as fast as possible with
configured constraints. The constraints are defined by the Acceleration limit (see 8.1.10.5).
The position mode can be activated in run time.

8.1.10.3 Velocity control


In velocity mode you give a reference velocity in percent (range 100 to 100) of the maximum speed. The cylinder then
moves in correct direction and at reference speed. When giving a new reference speed the cylinder reaches that speed as
fast as possible with configured constraints. The constraints are defined by the Acceleration limit (see 8.1.10.5).
The velocity mode can be activated in run time.
When you control the cylinder movement with a joystick velocity mode is the best way to do it.

8.1.10.4 Syncronisation of two cylinders


Some systems want to syncronise two cylinders so that they move in parallel. A syncronisation regulator is available in
the PID to handle this.

46(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

47(92)

There are two different kind of syncronisation modes:


Parallel sync
Non-parallel sync
Parallel sync is used when the cylinders must be parallel all the time. In run time you can set the difference in position
between the two cylinders. Usually this is set to zero. Parallel sync is valid for both positions mode and velocity mode.
Non-parallel sync is used when the cylinders shall move syncronised, but not in parallel. In position mode this means
that when you can move the two cylinders from separate source positions to two other separate destination positions
during the same amount of time. This means that they can move in the same direction or in different directions.
In velocity mode you can move the cylinders syncronised at a certain speed without loosing their difference in position.
You can either move them in the same direction or in different directions.

8.1.10.5 Acceleration limitation


Some systems cannot handle too high acceleration in the cylinder movements. Therefore an acceleration limiter is
installed and can be used. The limiter works for both acceleration and retardation.
The limiter is always active, independent of position/velocity mode or syncronisation mode.

8.1.10.6 Implementation
Each node are equipped with two PID components that can be used.
Each PID can control a single cylinder. All parameters for each cylinder are located in the corresponding PID. To identify
the two PIDs each component has a parameter called Regulator index which has to be set to 0 and 1 respectively.
When using sync mode both PID components cooperate and the sync parameters are taken from PID0.
For more detailed information about the implementation, it is reffered to a special document describing the PID
component and AutoTuner component.

8.1.10.7 Input Ports


Input
Enable

Type
Digital

Description
Enables regulator if set true.

Regulator mode

Digital

Sets the operational mode,


POSITION (Low level, 0) or
VELOCITY (High level, 1).

Sync parallel mode

Digital

Synchronise

Digital

Reference value

Analogue

Reference value. This signal is scaled


within the component and must not
be pre-scaled or scaled to desired
value.

(Port not visible in ABE)


Input
Sensor value

Type
Analogue

Description
Depending on regulator index the
sensor signal will be read from either
analogue input 0 or analogue input 1.
This signal is scaled within the
component and must not be prescaled.

8.1.10.8 Output Ports

47(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

48(92)

Output
Retract output (PWM)

Type
Analogue

Description
The actual value sent to the PWM
when retracting.
Remark: This output is not really
needed cause the regulator will work
anyway. This output is used to
connect to other components for
reference only.

Expand output (PWM)

Analogue

The actual value sent to the PWM


when expanding.
Remark: This output is not really
needed cause the regulator will work
anyway. This output is used to
connect to other components for
reference only.

Retracting

Digital

This signal indicates that the


regulator is retracting.

Expanding

Digital

This signal indicates that the


regulator is expanding.

(Ports not visible in ABE)


Output
PWM 0

Type
Analogue

Description
Used for forward output (PID 0 which
is the same as Regulator index 0).

PWM 1

Analogue

Used for reverse output (PID 0 which


is the same as Regulator index 0).

PWM 2

Analogue

Used for forward output (PID 1 which


is the same as Regulator index 1).

PWM 3

Analogue

Used for reverse output (PID 1 which


is the same as Regulator index 1).

Unit
Percent

Description
The percentage weight of the
previously filtered signal.

8.1.10.9 Parameters
Parameter
Filter weight

[%]
Aim window

Millimetres
[mm]

The distance from the reference


position where to aim for the nonlinear regulator. It is only used in
Position mode.

Rate limiter gain

Number

This should be the frequency [Hz],


i.e. 1/sample interval.

Fraction of square root

Percent

Fraction of the non-linear regulator


signal to use. Should be between 6090.

[%]

48(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

Switch window

2005-02-23 13:40

Millimetres
[mm]

Time to reach input

Milliseconds
[ms]

Sync max integrator

Percent
[%]

Sync Integral (I)

Number
[value * 1000]

Sync Proportional (P)

Number
[value * 1000]

Sample interval

Milliseconds

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

49(92)

Distance from reference position


where to switch from the non linear
regulator to the PI regulator. This
parameter must be higher than the
Aim window parameter. It is only
used in Position mode.
Time to reach full effect of reference
velocity. It is only used in Velocity
mode.
Maximum integrator percent in sync
mode. It is only used in Sync mode.
Integral part in sync regulator. It is
only used in Sync mode.
Proportional part in sync regulator. It
is only used in Sync mode.
Sampling interval.

[ms]
Velocity window

Percent
[%]

Position window

Millimetres
[mm]

Device length

Millimetres
[mm]

When regulating velocity and if the


Reference value is inside Velocity
window it is interpreted as zero.
When regulating position the
cylinder will stop when it reaches
reference position +/- Position
window.
Length of cylinder that is to be
controlled.

Insignal max

Number

Maximum insignal from analogue


input.

Insignal min

Number

Minimum insignal from analogue


input.

R Half PWM time

Milliseconds
[ms]

Time for transportation between


Device length and 0 at R Half PWM.

R Max PWM time

Milliseconds
[ms]

Time for transportation between


Device length and 0 at R Max PWM.

R Min PWM

Number

Minimum PWM output that causes


movement of piston. (Lower
threshold limit).

R Half PWM

Number

PWM output between R Min PWM


and R Max PWM.
Approx. (R Min PWM + R Max
PWM) / 2

R Max PWM

Number

49(92)

Minimum PWM output at max


speed. (Upper threshold limit).

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

50(92)

F Half PWM time

Milliseconds
[ms]

Time for transportation between 0


and Device length at F Half PWM.

F Max PWM time

Milliseconds
[ms]

Time for transportation between 0


and Device length at F Max PWM.

F Min PWM

Number

Minimum PWM output that causes


movement of piston. (Lower
threshold limit).

F Half PWM

Number

PWM output between F Min PWM


and F Max PWM.
Approx. (F Min PWM + F Max
PWM) / 2

F Max PWM

Number

Minimum PWM output at max


speed. (Upper threshold limit).

Pos. Integral (I)

Number

Integral part of PI regulator. Only


used in Position mode.

[value * 1000]
Pos. Proportional (P)

Number
[value * 1000]

Acceleration limit

Milliseconds
[ms]

Regulator index

Number

Proportional part of PI regulator.


Only used in Position mode.
Minimum time for valve to open full
and to close full.
Index 0 corresponds to PWM0,
PWM1 and analogue input 0.
Index 1 corresponds to PWM2,
PWM3 and analogue input 1.

Node

Option

Location of regulator. Choose


between B1 B8 and A1 A4.

Store mode

Option

Select which parameters to use:


ALL PARAMS: use all parameters
from NVRAM stored by AutoTuner
REGULATOR PARAMS: use only
the regulator parameters from
NVRAM stored by AutoTuner
LINEAR PARAMS: use only linear
parameters from NVRAM stored by
AutoTuner
ABE ONLY: use parameters only
from Spreader program file

8.1.11 AutoTuner
This component is intended as a help when setting up the PID component. It will automatically move the cylinder(s) and
measuring its characteristics when component is enabled. If one intentions are to synchronize two cylinders with PID
components, its possible to adapt the two cylinders with the use of this component. This is done by enabling the check
box Prepare for sync parameter.

50(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

51(92)

The AutoTuner will store its measured parameters in the onboard NVRAM. These parameters can then be uploaded and
monitored/transferred to the matching PID component. It is important that the Record name is identical to the PID that is
supposed to use the auto tuned parameters.
For more detailed information about the implementation, it is reffered to a special document describing the PID
component and AutoTuner component.

8.1.11.1 Input ports


Input
Enable

Type
Digital

Description
Enables component if set true. When
the enable input goes from 0 to 1 the
auto tune procedure is restarted.

Slave

Analogue

Sensor input signal for the slave


cylinder. Only needed if prepare for
sync is checked.

Main

Analogue

Sensor input signal for the cylinder to


auto tune.

Output
Finished

Type
Digital

Description
Output for telling when tuning is
complete.

Slave Retract

Analogue

Output for retracting slave cylinder.


Only needed if prepare for sync is
checked. This shall be connected to
the PWM output for the slave
cylinder.

Slave Expand

Analogue

Output for expanding slave cylinder.


Only needed if prepare for sync is
checked. This shall be connected to
the PWM output for the slave
cylinder.

Main Retract

Analogue

Output for retracting main cylinder.


This shall be connected to the PWM
output for the cylinder to auto tune.

Main Expand

Analogue

Output for expanding main cylinder.


This shall be connected to the PWM
output for the cylinder to auto tune.

Unit

Description

8.1.11.2 Output ports

8.1.11.3 Parameters
Parameter

51(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

Position window

2005-02-23 13:40

Millimeter
[mm]

Velocity window

Percents
[%]

Sync Proportional [P]

Number
[value * 1000]

Sync Integral [I]

Number
[value * 1000]

Sync max integrator

Percents
[%]

Time to reach input

Milliseconds
[ms]

Fraction of square root

Percents
[%]

Filter weight

Percents
[%]

Natural frequency

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

52(92)

When regulating position the


cylinder will stop when it reaches
reference position +/- Position
window.
When regulating velocity and if the
Reference value is inside Velocity
window it is interpreted as zero.
Proportional part in sync regulator. It
is only used in Sync mode.
Integral part in sync regulator. It is
only used in Sync mode.
Maximum integrator percent in sync
mode. It is only used in Sync mode.
Time to reach full effect of reference
velocity. It is only used in Velocity
mode.
Fraction of the non-linear regulator
signal to use. Should be between 6090.
The percentage weight of the
previously filtered signal.

Number
[value * 1000]

Moderation factor

Number
[value * 1000]

Regulator index

Number

Index 0 corresponds to PWM0,


PWM1 and analogue input 0.
Index 1 corresponds to PWM2,
PWM3 and analogue input 1.

Sample interval

Milliseconds

Sampling interval.

[ms]
Acceleration limit

Milliseconds
[ms]

Device length

Millimetre
[mm]

Timeout

Milliseconds
[ms]

Record name

Text

52(92)

Minimum time for valve to open full


and to close full.
Length of cylinder that is to be
controlled.
Timeout for a full cylinder stroke.
This parameter must be greater than
the tiem it takes for the cylinder to
perform a full stroke.
The instance name of the matching
PID component.

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

Research & Development

2005-02-23 13:40

Prepare for sync

Option

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

53(92)

This shall be enabled when using


syncronisation between two
cylinders. Adapts the faster cylinder
to the slower one.

8.1.11.4 Message logging


The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following message stored in the
fault and event log onboard the SCS2.
Code
385

8.2
8.2.1

Message
AUTOTUNER_STORED_IN_NVRAM

Description
The component has stored its
parameters in NVRAM.

AnyBus
Introduction

Apart from the parallel I/O of the nodes, each node can be equipped with an AnyBus card used for external buses. This
card is fitted into the node on the connector at the right side of the board when the cover is off. By using the Anybus the
crane can utilise the SCS2 as an integrated slave on the PLC network or an Anybus card can be used as a Master bus for
an internal I/O bus on the Spreader. The principal behind the Anybus is that the interface card translates a number of
different bus protocols to a standardised format on the address and data bus of the node. To change between different
buses one can then simply change the type of interface card. For details regarding configuration of a specific bus, please
view the user manual for that specific card and the electrical documentation for your specific project.
The size of the data exchange area between the SCS2 and the Anybus card is configurable up to 64 bytes in and 64 bytes
out. The configuration is done via HMS standard files. This interface must be configured in the same way for both the
Master and the SCS2 slave for the bus to work correctly. For each project a document has to be sent to the customer
describing the used parts of the interface. When referring to in/out we view it from the SCS2 side, hence input for the
SCS2 is an output from the master in the crane.

8.2.1.1 Mapping of I/O


OUT
Byte 0-63
Project
specific
outputs

IN
Byte 0-63
Project
specific
inputs

Output Segment
In the output segment it is possible to use a number of bytes for diagnostic information in the form codes. The diagnostics
are handled by the Anybus System component. The code sent will be equivalent with the code displayed in the onboard
display, hence there will be three levels of this code INFO, WARNING, ERROR. Apart from the code and the byte for

53(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

54(92)

indicating the type of code a counter will be incremented each time a code is sent. The counter is a 16bit value and
therefore will begin from 0 if the counter overflows. The value of this counter will be sent each time that a new diagnostic
message is transmitted. The start position of the diagnostic areas is configurable.

8.2.1.2 Spreader diagnostic area.


The byte numbers below should be added to the offset defined in the Anybus System component.
Byte 0
=> Type of error (info, warning, error)
Byte 1
=> Node ID (the number of the node from which the message originates)
Byte 2-3 (WORD)
=> Diagnostic code
Byte 4-5 (WORD)
=> Sub Code for diagnostics
Byte 6-7 (WORD)
=> Sequential counter value (message number)

8.2.1.3 System diagnostic area.


This part is named the assert diagnostics and is basically only used to find discrepancies in the SCS2 system. The
objective of it is mainly for Bromma Conquip ABs R&D to identify unforeseen weaknesses in the system. If the
customer wishes to implement/decode this it can help Bromma Conquip AB improve its equipment further, however the
customer might find little or no use in this information on their own behalf. The assert part is configured in the following
way.
The byte numbers below should be added to the offset defined in the Anybus System component.
Byte 0
=> Node ID
Byte 1-2 (WORD)
=> Row Number (of source code)
Byte 3-8 (3 x WORD)
=> Filename (1:st 6 char.)
Byte 9-10 (WORD)
=> Sequential counter
The remaining bytes for output will be assigned the interface with the crane and will vary on each project. The
assignments here are discrete outputs from the Spreader and current values (pressure etc.) from devices on the Spreader.
These assignments are documented in the electrical documentation of the project.
Input Segment
The entire range of the input area is configurable per project. The assignments here are discrete inputs to the Spreader and
set point values for the Spreader. These assignments shall be documented in the electrical documentation of the project.

8.2.2

Anybus System

The Anybus system component has the ability to handle downloading of new spreader program (*.spr).
Note: To be able to download a spreader program via Anybus a specific PC software is needed.

8.2.2.1 Input ports


Input
Download start

Type
Digital

Description
If set true, component expects
download data on Anybus.

Parameter
Node

Unit
Node id

Description
The node identity of the node where
the Anybus interface is located.

Log active

Option

Indicates if the log should be


exported to the Anybus interface or
not.

8.2.2.2 Parameters

54(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

8.2.3

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

55(92)

Log address

0-63

The Anybus output address in the


access area where the log should be
exported.

Assert active

Option

Indicates if the assert log should be


exported to the Anybus interface or
not.

Assert address

0-63

The Anybus output address in the


access area where the assert log
should be exported.

Type
Analogue

Description
Input from analogue input port.

Parameter
Note

Unit
Text

Description
Free text field. Use this field for
notes about the Anybus port.

Word number

Number

Word in Anybus interface to which


the value from IN is to be
transferred to.

Node

Node id

The node identity of the node where


the Anybus interface is located.

Type
Analogue

Description
Input from analogue input port.

Unit
Text

Description
Free text field. Use this field for
notes about the Anybus port.

Output Word

8.2.3.1 Input ports


Input
IN

8.2.3.2 Parameters

8.2.4

Output Byte

8.2.4.1 Input ports


Input
IN

8.2.4.2 Parameters
Parameter
Note

55(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

8.2.5

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

56(92)

Byte number

Number

Byte in Anybus interface to which


the value from IN is to be
transferred to.

Node

Node id

The node identity of the node where


the Anybus interface is located.

Type
Digital

Description
Input from digital input port.

Parameter
Note

Unit
Text

Description
Free text field. Use this field for
notes about the Anybus port.

Byte number

Number

Start byte in Anybus interface.

Bit number

Number

Bit number of the chosen byte in


Anybus interface.

Node

Node id

The node identity of the node where


the Anybus interface is located.

Type
Analogue

Description
The word number from the Anybus
interface that is to be transferred to
the OUT value.

Parameter
Note

Unit
Text

Description
Free text field. Use this field for
notes about the Anybus port.

Word number

Analogue

The word within the Anybus


interface from which

Output Bit

8.2.5.1 Input ports


Input
IN

8.2.5.2 Parameters

8.2.6

Input Word

8.2.6.1 Output ports


Output
OUT

8.2.6.2 Parameters

56(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Node

8.2.7

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

57(92)

Node id

The node identity of the node where


the Anybus interface is located.

Type
Analogue

Description
The byte number from the Anybus
interface that is to be transferred to
the OUT value.

Parameter
Note

Unit
Text

Description
Free text field. Use this field for
notes about the Anybus port.

Byte number

Number

Start byte in Anybus interface.

Node

Node id

The node identity of the node where


the Anybus interface is located.

Type
Digital

Description
Digital value from Anybus interface.

Parameter
Note

Unit
Text

Description
Free text field. Use this field for
notes about the Anybus port.

Byte number

Number

Start byte in Anybus interface.

Bit number

Number

Bit number in Anybus interface.

Node

Node id

The node identity of the node where


the Anybus interface is located.

Input Byte

8.2.7.1 Output ports


Output
OUT

8.2.7.2 Parameters

8.2.8

Input Bit

8.2.8.1 Output ports


Output
OUT

8.2.8.2 Parameters

57(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

8.3
8.3.1

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

58(92)

CANopen
Introduction

CANopen is a field bus protocol based on CAN and provides a flexible and powerful open industrial communication
solution.
Apart from the parallel I/O of the nodes the SCS2 master node can control up to 15 CANopen slaves. The SCS2 master
node acts as a CANopen master, this includes network management, SDO services and PDO handling.
The SCS2 master node processes the CANopen slave data i.e reads inputs and controls outputs.
All configuration of the CANopen functionality is made in the CANopen IO configuration view described in section
5.2.4. Note that the components described in the following section is not visible in the component palette.
The following components is used to create CANopen IO and SDO objects.

8.3.2

PDO Read Bit

8.3.2.1 Output ports


Output
OUT

Type
Digital

Description
Digital value from CANopen slave

Parameter
Slave node ID

Unit
Number

Description
Node id of CANopen slave

PDO number

Number

PDO number

Byte Number

Number

Byte in PDO

Bit number

Number

Bit in byte

Type
Analogue

Description
Analogue value from CANopen slave

Parameter
Slave node ID

Unit
Number

Description
Node id of CANopen slave

PDO number

Number

PDO number

Start Byte in PDO

Number

Start Byte in PDO

Start Bit number

Number

Start bit in Byte

8.3.2.2 Parameters

8.3.3

PDO Read

8.3.3.1 Output ports


Output
OUT

8.3.3.2 Parameters

58(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Data Length

8.3.4

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

59(92)

Number

Length of data

Type
Digital

Description
Digital value written to CANopen
slave

Parameter
Slave node ID

Unit
Number

Description
Node id of CANopen slave

PDO number

Number

PDO number

Byte in PDO

Number

Byte in PDO

Bit number

Number

Bit in Byte

Type
Analogue

Description
Analogue value written to CANopen
slave

Parameter
Slave node ID

Unit
Number

Description
Node id of CANopen slave

PDO number

Number

PDO number

Start Byte in PDO

Number

Start Byte in PDO

Start Bit number

Number

Start Bit in Byte

Data Length

Number

Length of data

Unit
Number

Description
Node id of CANopen slave

PDO Write Bit

8.3.4.1 Input ports


Input
Input

8.3.4.2 Parameters

8.3.5

PDO Write

8.3.5.1 Input ports


Input
Input

8.3.5.2 Parameters

8.3.6

SDO Write

8.3.6.1 Parameters
Parameter
Slave node ID

59(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

60(92)

OD index

Number

Index in OD (dec)

OD sub index

Number

Sub index in OD

Value

Number

Value written to OD

Size of data

Option

Unsigned 8: The size of data(value)


is 1 byte
Unsigned 16: The size of data(value)
is 2 byte
Unsigned 32: The size of data(value)
is 4 byte

Sequence number

Number

60(92)

Specifies in which order all SDO


objects will be sent

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

8.4
8.4.1

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

61(92)

Guards
Spreader stop

The Spreader stop component stops all output functions from Spreader specific components, controllers, and causes them
to go back to a boot state upon the release of the Spreader stop. It also generates a message to the log

8.4.1.1 Input ports


Input
IN

Type
Digital

Description
Command to stop spreader.
true = spreader stops
false = spreader stop resumed

8.4.1.2 Parameters
Parameter
Enable logging

Unit
Option

Description
If set to true (checked) the logging of
messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.

8.4.1.3 Message logging


The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following message stored in the
fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check
box Enable logging
Code
97

8.4.2

Message
SPREADER_STOP

Description
Spreader stop has been activated/deactivated.
0 = deactivated, 1 = activated.

TTDS -Twin Twenty Detection System

The TTDS component implements the functionality of the twin twenty detection system, which is used to prevent lifting
two twenty foot containers in a forty foot single lift position. The function should only be active to prevent wrongful
lifting and not to actively control any other device. The logic is based on the Bromma seven sensor system and the output
can be used to interlock the Twistlocks, but should also always when possible be sent to the crane. Since the logic is
designed to be fail-safe, any type of fault of sensor or a misreading by the sensor will trigger the output and therefore an
override has been implemented. For details regarding the TTDS system functionality see separate manual. The TTDS
component generates log messages every time an override has been used.

8.4.2.1 Input ports


Input
Override

Type
Digital

Description
Overrides TTDS result.
true = output (Twin) is always false
false = normal output

61(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

Research & Development

Sensor 1
...
Sensor 7

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

Digital

Input from TTDS sensors.

Type
Digital

Description
true = two containers detected

62(92)

8.4.2.2 Output ports


Output
OUT

false = one or none detected

8.4.2.3 Message logging


The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following messages stored in the
fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check
box Enable logging.
Code
290
291

8.4.3

Message
TTDS_OVERRIDE_ACTIVATED
TTDS_OVERRIDE_DEACTIVATED

Description
Override request received.
Override request ended.

Analogue guard

The Analogue guard is intended for use of monitoring a specific analogue value. A window around the min/max values
can be defined. This component generates a log message classified as a warning, which is user defined. There are 10 (0-9)
unique message tags to choose from and they generate the messages 146 155 within the log system. Apart from sending
a message to the log, an output can trigger any other event if the input value exceeds the ranges specified in the
parameters of the component.

8.4.3.1 Input ports


Input
IN

Type
Analogue

Description
Analogue value from other
component or analogue input port.

Type
Digital

Description
Signal indicating that Analogue input
has gone outside lower or upper limit
longer than the specified time Delay.

Unit

Description

8.4.3.2 Output ports


Output
OUT

8.4.3.3 Parameters
Parameter

62(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

63(92)

Note

Text

Descriptive string indicating the


function of the component. (Only
registered within ABE as memory
note)

Delay

Milliseconds
[ms]

Time until warning message is


prompted if Analogue input has gone
out of boundaries.

Lower limit

Number

Lower limit of allowable input range.

Upper limit

Number

Upper limit of allowable input range.

Warning code

Option

Warning code that will identify the


component. (Same code can be used
for different components.)

Enable logging

Option

If set to true (checked) the logging of


messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.

8.4.3.4 Message logging


The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following messages stored in the
fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check
box Enable logging.
Code
146

155

8.4.4

Message
USERDEFINED_0
...
USERDEFINED_9

Description
User chooses what message to use. The messages
generated in the log are identified as 146-155 when read
out of the log.

Digital guard

The Digital guard triggers a user-defined message to be stored in the log.

8.4.4.1 Input ports


Input
IN

Type
Digital

Description
Digital value from other component
or digital input port.

Parameter
Note

Unit
Text

Description
Descriptive string indicating the
function of the component. (Only
registered within ABE as memory
note)

Input NO/NC

Option

Normally open or normally closed


behaviour on input.

8.4.4.2 Parameters

63(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

Research & Development

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

64(92)

Delay

Milliseconds
[ms]

Time until warning message is


prompted if digital value is true or
false (depending on input NO / NC
setting).

Warning code

Option

Warning code that will identify the


component. (Same code can be used
for different components.)

Enable logging

Option

If set to true (checked) the logging of


messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.

8.4.4.3 Message logging


The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following messages stored in the
fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check
box Enable logging.
Code
146

155

8.5

Message
USERDEFINED_0
...
USERDEFINED_9

Description
User chooses what message to use. The messages generated
in the log are identified as 146-155 when read out of the log.

Gates

This section contains the simple Boolean instruction set.

8.5.1

AND

This function block performs the function of the logical AND with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings.
Basic function
IN 0
IN n
OUT
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1

8.5.1.1 Input ports


Input
IN0
...
IN n

Type
Digital

Description
Digital value from other component
or digital input port.

Type
Digital

Description
Digital output result from AND
operation.

8.5.1.2 Output ports


Output
OUT

64(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

65(92)

8.5.1.3 Parameters
Parameter
Number of inputs

8.5.2

Unit
Number

Description
Number of inputs on component.

NAND

This function block performs the function of the logical NAND with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings.
Basic function
IN 0
IN n
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1

OUT
1
1
1
0

8.5.2.1 Input ports


Input
IN 0
...
IN n

Type
Digital

Description
Digital values from other component
or digital input port.

Type
Digital

Description
Digital output result from NAND
operation.

Unit
Number

Description
Number of inputs on component.

8.5.2.2 Output ports


Output
OUT

8.5.2.3 Parameters
Parameter
Number of inputs

8.5.3

NOR

This function block performs the function of the logical NOR with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings.
Basic function
IN 0
IN n
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1

OUT
1
0
0
0

65(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

66(92)

8.5.3.1 Input ports


Input
IN 0
...
IN n

Type
Digital

Description
Digital values from other component
or digital input port.

Type
Digital

Description
Digital output result from NOR
operation.

Unit
Number

Description
Number of inputs on component.

8.5.3.2 Output ports


Output
OUT

8.5.3.3 Parameters
Parameter
Number of inputs

8.5.4

OR

This function block performs the function of the logical OR with the number of inputs specified in the parameter settings.
Basic function
IN 0
IN n
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1

OUT
0
1
1
1

8.5.4.1 Input ports


Input
IN 0
...
IN n

Type
Digital

Description
Digital values from other component
or digital input port.

Type
Digital

Description
Digital output result from OR
operation.

8.5.4.2 Output ports


Output
OUT

66(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

67(92)

8.5.4.3 Parameters
Parameter
Number of inputs

8.5.5

Unit
Number

Description
Number of inputs on component.

NOT

This function block performs the function of the logical NOT with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings.
Basic function
IN
OUT
0
1
1
0

8.5.5.1 Input ports


Input
IN

Type
Digital

Description
Digital value from other component
or digital input port.

Type
Digital

Description
Digital output result from NOT
operation.

8.5.5.2 Output ports


Output
OUT

8.5.6

XOR

This function block performs the function of the logical XOR (exclusive or) with the number of inputs specified in the
parameter settings.
Basic function
IN 0
IN n
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1

OUT
0
1
1
0

8.5.6.1 Input ports


Input
IN 0

Type
Digital

Description
Digital value from other component
or digital input port.

IN 1

Digital

Digital value from other component


or digital input port.

67(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

68(92)

8.5.6.2 Output ports


Output
OUT

8.5.7

Type
Digital

Description
Digital output result from XOR
operation.

SR Latch

This function block performs the function of the logical SR latch with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings. The output will go high at a high signal on the Set input and will go low again at a high signal on the Reset input.
If both inputs are on simultaneously this latch will reset (output goes low).

8.5.7.1 Input ports


Input
Set

Type
Digital

Description
Digital value from other component
or digital input port.

Reset

Digital

Digital value from other component


or digital input port.

Type
Digital

Description
Digital output result from SR latch.

8.5.7.2 Output ports


Output
OUT

8.5.8

RS Latch

This function block performs the function of the logical RS latch with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings. The output will go high at a high signal on the Set input and will go low again at a high signal on the Reset input.
If both inputs are on simultaneously this latch will set (output goes high).

8.5.8.1 Input ports


Input
Set

Type
Digital

Description
Digital value from other component
or digital input port.

Reset

Digital

Digital value from other component


or digital input port.

Type
Digital

Description
Digital output result from RS latch.

8.5.8.2 Output ports


Output
Result

68(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

8.5.9

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

69(92)

Logical gate

The Logical gate component is used if one wishes to perform logical operations (bit wise) on two analogue values.
Each analogue input is represented as a 32 bit value.

8.5.9.1 Input ports


Input
Enable

Type
Digital

Description
Enables component. If set to false
component will set Result to zero.
Default value if not connected is true
(i.e. enabled all time).

IN 1

Analogue

Input value 1.

IN 2

Analogue

Input value 2.

Type
Analogue

Description
Result of logical operation.

Unit
Option

Description
Determents type of logical operation
preformed on IN 1 and IN 2. The
operations available are AND, OR
and XOR.

8.5.9.2 Output ports


Output
Result

8.5.9.3 Parameters
Parameter
Operation mode

8.6
8.6.1

Digital
OD Timer On Delay Timer

The On Delay Timer is used to delay a signal from input to output.

8.6.1.1 Input ports


Input
IN

Type
Digital

Description
Digital value from other component
or digital input port. Starts the timer
on positive flank.

Type

Description

8.6.1.2 Output ports


Output

69(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

OUT

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

70(92)

Digital

Digital output that goes high if the


input is high and the specified time
has elapsed.

Unit
Milliseconds
[ms]

Description
Time that the in put signal is to be
delayed before the output goes high

8.6.1.3 Parameters
Parameter
Delay

8.6.2

UpDn Counter Up Down Counter

The Up Down Counter increments each time the UP input transits from low to high and decrements each time the DOWN
input transits from low to high. The RESET input takes the counter value to zero.
The range of the counter is from 0 to 231-1 (=2147483647).

8.6.2.1 Input ports


Input
Up

Type
Digital

Description
Increments the counter value

Down

Digital

Decrements the counter value

Reset

Digital

Sets the counter value to zero

Output
OUT

Type
Digital

Description
OUT = 1 (high) when the counter
value is equal to or above the
specified value in the parameter
listing

Counter value

Analogue

The current value of the counter

Unit
Digital

Description
The counter value when the digital
output goes high. The output is on
when the counter value is equal to or
above this value.

8.6.2.2 Output ports

8.6.2.3 Parameters
Parameter
Trigger count

8.6.3

OSC - Oscillator

The oscillator purely switches the output on and off with specified duty cycle adjusted in the parameters.

8.6.3.1 Input ports

70(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

Input
Enable

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

71(92)

Type
Digital

Description
Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).

Type
Digital

Description
Clock pulse output.

Unit
Milliseconds
[ms]

Description
Cycle time for Clock output.

8.6.3.2 Output ports


Output
OUT

8.6.3.3 Parameters
Parameter
Cycle time

8.6.4

Split

The split component is used to generate two or more signals available for connection from one signal line. I.e. it can in
many cases replace the use of intermediate variables, since the signal value of the input and the outputs are always the
same.

8.6.4.1 Input ports


Input
IN

Type
Digital

Description
Digital value from other component
or digital input port.

Type
Digital

Description
Outputs have same status as the IN
input port

Unit
Number

Description
Number of outputs on component.

8.6.4.2 Output ports


Output
OUT 0

OUT n

8.6.4.3 Parameters
Parameter
Number of outputs

8.6.5

Pulse

The Pulse component is used to generate a pulse. The duration of the pulse is set by a parameter. The pulse can be trigged
on either positive or negative flank. The pulse is restarted if an new active flank is detected during the pulse.
An output indicating time left until pulse is unlit is also available.

71(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

72(92)

8.6.5.1 Input ports


Input
Enable

Type
Digital

Description
Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).

Input

Digital

Trigger for starting pulse.

Output
Time remaining

Type
Analogue

Description
Time remaining (ms) until pulse is
unlit.

Output

Digital

Pulse output.

Parameter
Active flank

Unit
Option

Description
Determines active flank of trigger,
POS or NEG.

Length of pulse

Milliseconds
[ms]

Duration of pulse.

8.6.5.2 Output ports

8.6.5.3 Parameters

8.7
8.7.1

Miscellaneous
Constant

The Constant component is used to store a Boolean or Analogue value as a constant variable to use within the logic. Note
that any other value than zero is considered as a logical one when using this component for digital purposes.

8.7.1.1 Output ports


Output
Digital

Type
Digital

Description
Constant value > 0 : Digital output
= true
Constant value = 0 : Digital output
= false

Analogue

Analogue

Analogue output = Constant value

Unit

Description

8.7.1.2 Parameters
Parameter

72(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Value

8.7.2

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Number

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

73(92)

Value to put on output ports.

Dead end

The Dead End component is used when one has to make a system where one or more of the mandatory outputs cannot be
used for some reason. By connecting the Mandatory output from another component to the Dead end component that
signal is terminated. This can be useful when controller components are to be used purely for log purposes and one
doesnt want the logic to control the outputs.

8.7.2.1 Output ports

8.7.3

Output
Digital IN

Type
Digital

Description
Terminates a digital connection.

Analogue IN

Analogue

Terminates an analogue connection.

Input
Twin boxes are down

Type
Digital

Description
Input port telling that twin boxes are
down.

Landed

Digital

Input port telling that spreader has


landed.

Locked

Digital

Input port telling that all Twist locks


are locked.

Unlocked

Digital

Input port telling that all Twist locks


is unlocked.

Pump 1 on

Digital

Used for activating the clock for


drive time 1. When this input is
active the clock for drive time 1
counts.

Pump 2 on

Digital

Used for activating the clock for


drive time 2. When this input is
active the clock for drive time 2
counts.

Pump 3 on

Digital

Used for activating the clock for


drive time 3. When this input is
active the clock for drive time 3
counts.

Type

Description

Spreader properties

8.7.3.1 Input ports

8.7.3.2 Output ports


Output

73(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

74(92)

Number of lock operations on twin

Analogue

Number of lock operations


performed on twin Twist locks.
Saved in external EEPROM.

Number of lock operations on single

Analogue

Number of lock operations


performed on single Twist locks.
Saved in external EEPROM.

Number of containers

Analogue

Number of containers handled. When


twin is down this number is
incremented by two. Saved in
external EEPROM.

Spreader serial number

Analogue

Spreader unique number. User


defined. Read from external
EEPROM.

Drawing number

Analogue

Spreader unique number. User


defined. Read from parameter
Drawing number.

Counter clock pulse

Digital

Clock pulse that toggles from false to


true when container is handled.
When a new sequence is ended
output goes back to false.

Drive time 1 HI Word

Analogue

Accumulated drive time since


delivery. The time is only measured
when pump 1 is active. The time is
divided into two words (2x16bits)
where this output is the high word.
Saved in external EEPROM.

Drive time 1 LO Word

Analogue

Accumulated drive time since


delivery. The time is only measured
when pump 1 is active. The time is
divided into two words (2x16bits)
where this output is the low word.
Saved in external EEPROM.

Drive time 2 HI Word

Analogue

Accumulated drive time since


delivery. The time is only measured
when pump 2 is active. The time is
divided into two words (2x16bits)
where this output is the high word.
Saved in external EEPROM.

Drive time 2 LO Word

Analogue

Accumulated drive time since


delivery. The time is only measured
when pump 2 is active. The time is
divided into two words (2x16bits)
where this output is the low word.
Saved in external EEPROM.

74(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

Research & Development

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

75(92)

Drive time 3 HI Word

Analogue

Accumulated drive time since


delivery. The time is only measured
when pump 3 is active. The time is
divided into two words (2x16bits)
where this output is the high word.
Saved in external EEPROM.

Drive time 3 LO Word

Analogue

Accumulated drive time since


delivery. The time is only measured
when pump 3 is active. The time is
divided into two words (2x16bits)
where this output is the low word.
Saved in external EEPROM.

Parameter
Enable logging

Unit
Option

Description
If set to true (checked) the logging of
messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.

Drawing number

Number

User defined number. Number is


used to present the drawing number
of the spreader.

8.7.3.3 Parameters

8.7.3.4 Message logging


The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following messages stored in the
fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check
box Enable logging.
Code
318
319
320
321
322
323

8.7.4

Message
SPREADER_PROPERTIES_READ_E
EPROM
SPREADER_PROPERTIES_READ_D
S
SPREADER_PROPERTIES_DIFF
SPREADER_PROPERTIES_SET_EEP
ROM_OK
SPREADER_PROPERTIES_SET_EEP
ROM_FAIL
SPREADER_PROPERTIES_NEW_N
ODE_TO_EEPROM

Description
Last saved properties are read from
EEPROM.
System has read properties from NVRAM.
Spreader properties read from EEPROM
and NVRAM differ.
System succeeded to write properties to
EEPROM.
System failed to write properties to
EEPROM.
System detected that a new node is
connected since last shut down.

Memory

The Memory component is used when one wishes to write or read an analogue value from or to the NVRAM.

8.7.4.1 Input ports


Input

Type

75(92)

Description

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

76(92)

Enable

Digital

Enables component. If set to false


component will set the Analogue
OUT to zero. Default value if not
connected is true (i.e. no effect).

Write

Digital

If set true, component reads


Analogue IN and writes to NVRAM.

Read

Digital

If set true, component reads from


NVRAM and writes to Analogue
OUT.

Analogue IN

Analogue

Analoge value that is to be stored.

Type
Analogue

Description
Value stored in NVRAM.

8.7.4.2 Output ports


Output
Analogue OUT

8.7.5

Digital buffer

The Digital buffer component buffers digital values for a selected amount of execution cycles.

8.7.5.1 Input ports


Input
Enable

Type
Digital

Description
Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).

Digital IN

Digital

Digital value that is to be buffered.

Type
Digital

Description
Buffered values. The input value is
shown on OUT 0 the next cycle. The
same value is shown on OUT 1 the
next cycle and so on.

Unit
Number

Description
Number of cycles to remember.

8.7.5.2 Output ports


Output
OUT 0
..
OUT n

8.7.5.3 Parameters
Parameter
Number of samples to hold

8.7.6

Analogue buffer

The Analogue buffer component buffers analogue values for a selected amount of execution cycles.

76(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

77(92)

8.7.6.1 Input ports


Input
Enable

Type
Digital

Description
Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
zero. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).

Analogue IN

Analogue

Analogue value that is to be buffered.

Type
Analogue

Description
Buffered values. The input value is
shown on OUT 0 the next cycle. The
same value is shown on OUT 1 the
next cycle and so on.

Unit
Number

Description
Number of cycles to remember.

8.7.6.2 Output ports


Output
OUT 0
..
OUT n

8.7.6.3 Parameters
Parameter
Number of samples to hold

77(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

8.8

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

78(92)

Analogue

The Analogue components are used to work with analogue values.

8.8.1

RS485 port

This component is used to access the RS485 interface. Depending on what protocol is chosen from the parameter view
the component can be used for a variety of purposes.

8.8.1.1 Output ports


Output
OUT

Type
Analogue

Description
Analogue value of output from
sensor

Parameter
Protocol

Unit
Option

Description
Type of protocol used (i.e. vendor
specific protocol). Only SLIN is
implemented SSI is implemeted.

Node

Option

Node the RS485 sensor is connected


to.

Code Type

Option

Applys only if SSI protocol is


selected

Input resolution

Number

Applys only if SSI protocol is


selected. Specifies the resolution of
the component.

Input
IN 0

Type
Analogue

Description
Input

IN 1

Analogue

Input

Type
Digital

Description
IN 0 > IN 1 gives OUT = 1
IN 0 <= IN 1 gives OUT = 0

8.8.1.2 Parameters

8.8.2

IN0 > IN1

8.8.2.1 Input ports

8.8.2.2 Output ports


Output
OUT

78(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

8.8.3

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

79(92)

IN0 * IN1

8.8.3.1 Input ports


Input
IN 0

Type
Analogue

Description
Input

IN 1

Analogue

Input

Type
Analogue

Description
OUT = IN 0 * IN 1

Input
IN 0

Type
Analogue

Description
Nominator input

IN 1

Analogue

Denominator input

Type
Analogue

Description
OUT = IN 0 / IN 1

Input
IN 0

Type
Analogue

Description
Input

IN 1

Analogue

Input

Type
Analogue

Description
OUT = IN 0 IN 1

8.8.3.2 Output ports


Output
OUT

8.8.4

IN0 / IN1

Note. Always avoid division by zero.

8.8.4.1 Input ports

8.8.4.2 Output ports


Output
OUT

8.8.5

IN0 IN1

8.8.5.1 Input ports

8.8.5.2 Output ports


Output
OUT

79(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

8.8.6

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

80(92)

IN0 + IN1

8.8.6.1 Input ports


Input
IN 0
...
IN n

Type
Analogue

Description
Inputs to be added together

Type
Analogue

Description
OUT = IN 0 + IN 1+, ,+ IN n

Unit
Number

Description
Number of input ports on component.

8.8.6.2 Output ports


Output
OUT

8.8.6.3 Parameters
Parameter
Input counter

8.8.7

Scale

The Scale components scales a analogue value according to the formula,


OUT = ((scaledMax scaledMin)/(INMax-INMin))*(IN - INMin) + scaledMin,
which performs a linear scaling with an offset according to OUT = k*IN + m.

8.8.7.1 Input ports


Input
IN

Type
Analogue

Description
Analogue value from other
component or analogue input port.

Type
Analogue

Description
Scaled analogue value with
constraints from parameter listing.

Parameter
Max value after scale

Unit
Number

Description
Largest scaled value.

Min value after scale

Number

Smallest scaled value.

8.8.7.2 Output ports


Output
OUT

8.8.7.3 Parameters

80(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

8.8.8

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

Max value of input

Number

The maximum value of input.

Min value of input

Number

The minimum value of input.

81(92)

AnalogueLatch

The Analogue latch is a component that stores a value internally when triggered by a digital input. The value stored in an
internal variable can be read at the output of the component. As long as the digital trigger input is active the input value is
directly transferred to the output value and as soon as the digital input goes low the output value remains constant at the
current value until a new digital command is given.

8.8.8.1 Input ports


Input
Enable

Type
Digital

Description
Enables component. If set to false
component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).

IN

Digital

Input that trigger the component to


read the value IN Value.

IN Value

Analogue

Input value that is read and stored in


the component

Type
Analogue

Description
The stored value of the component

8.8.8.2 Output ports


Output
OUT

8.8.9

Filter

The Filter component is used to filter analogue signals from noise.

8.8.9.1 Input ports


Input
Analogue IN

Type
Analogue

Description
Unfiltered signal.

Type
Analogue

Description
Filtered signal.

8.8.9.2 Output ports


Output
Analogue OUT

81(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

82(92)

8.8.9.3 Parameters
Parameter
Filter type

Unit
Option

Description
Determines type of filter. Only
MOVING AVR is implemented.

Filter weight

Number [%]

Determents how many percents of


previous filtered signal that is to be
used.

Output
Port 5

Type
Analogue

Description
Analogue value

Port 4

Analogue

Analogue value

Unit
Option

Description
Specifies the node.

8.8.10 AuxAnalogue
This component implements two more analogue inputs.

8.8.10.1 Output ports

8.8.10.2 Parameters
Parameter
Node

82(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

83(92)

9 Tutorial
This tutorial will guide you through the process of designing a Spreader program using ABE.
Steps covered in this tutorial.
Creating a new project
System view
Pin configuration
Component view
Load view
Step 1: Creating a new project
Start ABE from your Start menu if it isnt already started. If you just started ABE you already have a project created for
you, If not create a new one by clicking the button showed in the picture below.

Figure 9:1 Create project


Step 2: System view
Activate the node B2 by checking corresponding Active checkbox. Node B1 is always present in the system.

Figure 9:2 Activating nodes

Fill in the Value fields in the parameter listing. Note that some of the fields are not editable.

Figure 9:3 Setting system parameters

83(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

84(92)

Step 3: Pin configuration


All present nodes are visible as tabs in this view. Make sure tab B1 is activated in the view. Give Port id# 1 and 2 the
following names. Comment field is optional.

Figure 9:4 Setting item identifiers on node B1


Make sure tab B2 is activated in the view and do the same for Port id# 1 to 4.
Note: The red colour of the fields indicates that the ports are not yet connected.

Figure 9:5 Setting item identifiers on node B2


Step 4: Component view
Select the FAC component from the available component pallet.

Figure 9:6 Choosing component


If available components pallet is not visible. Activate it by clicking at the Components button shown in picture below.

84(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

85(92)

Figure 9:7 Bringing up Available components

Place the component on Page 1 in the view.

Figure 9:8 Default look of FAC component


Note: Connections with red colour indicate that they are not yet connected. Connections with white colour indicate that
they are optional to connect.

Double click on the component to open Properties for the FAC component. Change the property Number of Flippers to 2.

Figure 9:9 Changing properties for FAC component

85(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

86(92)

The new appearance for the component should look like this:

Figure 9:10 Look of FAC component after changing number of flippers

By placing the pointer over the component or one of its connections a hint (tool tip) will appear. The hint tells you about
the properties for the component or its connection.

Figure 9:11 Look of component hint

Click with your right mouse button over a connection on the component. A pop up menu will appear. Move the cursor as
shown in the picture below and click on your left mouse button over Flipper_Down.

Figure 9:12 Making component connections

86(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

87(92)

Your component should now look like this:

Figure 9:13 Appearance of a connection


Continue with the remaining connections until you have all connections connected.
If you want to disconnect a connection you click over the connection with your right mouse button and choose disconnect
when it appears.
When your system is complete there should not be any red coloured connections in the Component view or Item
identifiers in the Pin configuration view.
Your Component view should look like Figure 12 when all your connections are made.

Figure 9:14 Appearance of a connection

Now you are ready to generate downloadable Spreader program file. Select Compile from the File menu.
If the following message box appears your system is not configured properly. Look for red coloured connections or item
identifiers. If port is configured to be used but isnt you must delete it.
Save the output file (when compiling the spreader program) with the name tutorial.spr.

Figure 9:15 The Spreader program contains errors

When you have generated your downloadable program file it can be found at the location where it was saved. You must
not edit this file.

87(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

88(92)

Step 5: Load view


Downloading spreader programs
1. Select COM1 or COM2 under selection depending on what serial port is connected to the SCS2.
In the picture below COM1 is selected.

Figure 9:16 Select Connection


2.
3.
4.

Press the Download button.


Point out the spreader program that you want to download. (Spreader programs have extension *.spr).
Observe the status bars. If connected node is the master node no distribution between nodes will appear. If not the
master node is the point of connection the spreader program will first be downloaded to the local node (connected
node) and than distributed to the master node.

Uploading spreader programs


1.

Select COM1 or COM2 under selection depending on what serial port is connected to the SCS2.

In the picture below COM1 is selected.

Figure 9:17 Select Connection


2. Press the Upload button.
The two following dialogues will appear in sequence.
Answer Yes to the first dialog if you are working on anything that you want to save else No.

Figure 9:18 Save current spreader program


Answer Yes to the second dialog to open the uploaded spreader program in the editor. (If you press No, you have to
manually open the uploaded spreader program.)

Figure 9:19 Open spreader program in ABE


3. Observe the status bar ABE --> Connected node.
When 100% is reached the uploaded spreader program will appear in the editor.

88(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

89(92)

Step 6: Online monitoring


Online monitoring is performed under Component view.
1.

Make sure you have the same spreader program in ABE and SCS2. If you are not sure about this, you can always
download your current spreader program or upload the spreader program from the SCS2 (see Step 5).

2.

Select COM1 or COM2 under selection depending on what serial port is connected to the SCS2.

In the picture below COM1 is selected.

Figure 9:20 Select Connection


3.

Make sure Auto is not checked.

Figure 9:21 Deselect Auto option


If Auto is checked, automatic update will be performed at an interval specified by Update interval.
4.

Start online monitoring

Figure 9:22 Start online monitoring


The online monitoring starts by telling the SCS2 to add all visible components and their connections. This takes more or
less time depending on the number of present components and connections in visible Page(s). A progress bar appears
above the buttons, when adding the components, to show you current status.
Once the online monitoring is started, the design window is locked for editing. If you want to monitor another part of
your design (not visible at the moment); you have to stop the online monitoring and then scroll to that part and start the
monitoring again.

5.

Update online values by pressing the Update button.

Figure 9:23 Updated online values

89(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

6.

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

90(92)

Stop online monitoring by pressing button as shown below.

Figure 9:24 Stop online monitoring

10 CANopen tutorial
This tutorial will guide you through the process of configuring a Spreader program containing CANopen functionality.
The tutorial covers the following steps:
Add a CANopen slave
Add an input
Connecting input to Spreader logic
Step 1: Add a CANopen slave
In the Component view activate the CANopen configuration view by clicking CANopen IO button.
In this view click the Add slave button.

Figure 1. Add slave button


When this button is clicked the following view appears.
Here you can configure:
Type of slave (predefined connection set or not).
The name of the slave
Slave options (CRITICAL or NON CRITICAL).
Adress of slave 1-126
Click OK button when done

Figure 2. Slave properties

90(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

91(92)

Step 2: Add a CANopen input


Make sure that the I/O leaf in the tree view is selected as in the picture below.
Click on the Add input button.

Figure 2. Add input


The following view appears.

Figure 3. Input properties


In this view the properties of this input is set.
Name of the input (in this example IN_1)
PDO number
Byte number
Bit number
Data length
Click OK button when done
The CANopen I/O configuration view now looks like the picture below.

Figure 4. CANopen I/O cunfiguration view after input is added

91(92)

2000

Document:

Project:

ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

Gunnar Ohlsson

2005-02-23 13:40

Project No
Version:

PB4

Page:

92(92)

Step 3: Connecting CANopen input to Spreader logic


When no more configuration is to be done click the OK button to return to the Pin configuration view
Add a component to page and right click on the input to bring up the pop up window
Select the CANopen menu and the slave on where the input is configured and click on your left mouse button.

Figure 5. Making component connections


Your component should now look like this:

92(92)

2000

User Manual
BMS - Light
Version 1.0

Revision

Issued by

Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems AB


Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems AB
Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems AB

2000-08-22
2000-10-13
2000-10-23

PA4

Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems AB

2001-01-10

PA5
A
B
C

Hans Svanfeldt, CC Systems AB


Ken Lindfors, CC Systems AB
Hans Svamfeldt, CC Systems AB
Hans Svamfeldt, CC Systems AB

2001-10-29
2002-06-12
2003-06-11
2004-08-10

PA1
PA2
PA3

Date

Printed: 04-8-12 9.15

Measures

First draft.
Added modem functions.
Changes in GUI. Cancel buttons added. Height changed
on cells in string grids.
Changes in GUI. Cancel button moved. Some Anybus
functions added.
New pages added. CAN tester, Boot loader.
Minor changes after release of System 1.04.
Minor changes after release of System 1.05.
Minor changes after release of System 1.07.

Document:

Project:

Project No

BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:
Research & Development

hans

Date:

Version:

2004-08-12 9:15 AM C

Page:

2(20)

Table of contents
1
2

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................... 3
Installing BMS Light .................................................................................................................................................. 3
2.1
HW requirements................................................................................................................................................... 3
2.2
Installation ............................................................................................................................................................. 3
2.3
Disclaimer.............................................................................................................................................................. 3
3 User interface................................................................................................................................................................. 4
3.1
Menu (top toolbar) options: ................................................................................................................................... 4
3.2
Status bars in main window................................................................................................................................... 5
4 Download view.............................................................................................................................................................. 6
5 Get log view .................................................................................................................................................................. 7
5.1
Filtering constraints ............................................................................................................................................... 8
6 I/O status view............................................................................................................................................................... 9
7 Misc. view ................................................................................................................................................................... 10
Anybus view........................................................................................................................................................................ 11
8 Spreader info view....................................................................................................................................................... 12
9 CANopen IO view ....................................................................................................................................................... 13
10
Upload view............................................................................................................................................................. 14
11
Advanced................................................................................................................................................................. 15
11.1 CAN Tester.......................................................................................................................................................... 15
11.2 Boot Loader ......................................................................................................................................................... 17
11.3 Asserts ................................................................................................................................................................. 18
11.4 POM Loader ........................................................................................................................................................ 19
11.5 Bluetooth ............................................................................................................................................................. 19
11.6 CANopen services ............................................................................................................................................... 20

2(20)

2000

Document:

Project:

Project No

BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:
Research & Development

hans

Date:

Version:

2004-08-12 9:15 AM C

Page:

3(20)

Introduction
The BMS is a software tool used for monitoring and handling the Bromma system SCS2. This manual assumes the user
has good knowledge of the SCS2 system as well as Windows environments.

Installing BMS Light


HW requirements

An Intel compatible PC running Windows 95 / 98 / NT 4.0 / 2000.


At least one serial communication port available (COM1 or COM2).
At least 1Mb of free disk space.

Installation

Close any other applications running under Windows.


Insert the first disc into your disc station (if installing from disc)
Run the file BMSSetup.exe from the BMS folder on your provided disk.
Follow the instructions on the screen.

Disclaimer
Copyright Bromma Conquip AB. All rights reserved.
Products and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or trade names of their respective owners.
Bromma Conquip AB operates on a policy of continuous improvement. Therefore we reserve the right to make changes
and improvements to any of the products described in this manual without prior notice.
Bromma Conquip AB is not responsible for any loss of data, income or any consequential damage howsoever caused.

3(20)

2000

Document:

Project:

Project No

BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:
Research & Development

hans

Date:

Version:

2004-08-12 9:15 AM C

Page:

4(20)

User interface
Menu (top toolbar) options:
File:
Exit --- Terminates the application.
View:
Activates selected tab [Download, Get log, I/O status, Misc., Anybus, Spreader info, Upload]
Tools:
Connect serial cable: activates selected communication port [COM1, COM2].
Connect modem: activates modem connected to selected communication port [COM1, COM2].
The dialog below is used for making the connection. Once a connection has been made the dialog window disappears.
The BMS commands are working via the modem if the modem has connected successfully.

Modem connection
Connect to node: connects BMS to selected node [B1, B2,..., B8, A1, A2, A3, A4]. This connection is made over RS232
link through the CAN bus. Normally select Local node.
Advanced options: Intended for Bromma R&D personnel.
Help:
About: shows the version of the BMS.

4(20)

2000

Document:

Project:

Project No

BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:
Research & Development

hans

Date:

Version:

Page:

2004-08-12 9:15 AM C

5(20)

Status bars in main window


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Status of last performed operation. Intended for Bromma personnel.


Status of current operation.
Serial cable connection (COM1 or COM2).
Destination node (normally Local node) of all operations.
Status of serial cable connection.

2
3
1

Main window

5(20)

2000

Document:

Project:

Project No

BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:

hans

Research & Development

Date:

Version:

2004-08-12 9:15 AM C

Page:

6(20)

Download view
This tab is used to download the entire system program to the system. Note. It takes a considerable amount of time to
update the system program and therefore make sure that the system can be down for this amount of time.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Transfer status from BMS to the connected node [4]. PC downloading to the connected node.
Transfer status from connected node [4] to node [5]. Distribution of the program via the bus lines to the other nodes
on the bus.
Total transfer status. Status of complete system to be downloaded.
Connected node (to PC).
Receiving node when distributing between nodes.
Select file to download. Press here to select the file to be downloaded. When file is selected download process starts.
Cancels current transfer to connected node. The operation just cancels the feedback of transfer status if distribution
between nodes has started (i.e. the operation will not effect the transfer in this case).

3
6
4

Download view

6(20)

2000

Document:

Project:

Project No

BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:

hans

Research & Development

Date:

Version:

Page:

2004-08-12 9:15 AM C

7(20)

Get log view


This used to retrieve the onboard error and event log.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Gets next set of logged messages (max 128 messages each time its pressed)
Get all messages in log.
If checked, auto mode is on. Auto mode triggers the Next button [1] at an interval of X seconds defined by [4].
Interval for reading via auto mode in seconds.
Enable filtering. The filtered table is shown if checked. Filtering can be used to only view certain parts of the log.
Opens the Filtering constraint dialog. Select the type of filtering here.
Clears the log table on the PC. The log in the SCS2 remains unaffected.
Saves the entire log table in a comma separated text file. Can be opened in for instance in Wordpad, Excel etc.
Cancels current operation.
Load button. Loads and displays a saved log file.

6
4

9
7

10

Get log view

7(20)

2000

Document:

Project:

Project No

BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:
Research & Development

hans

Date:

Version:

2004-08-12 9:15 AM C

Page:

8(20)

Filtering constraints
Select the type of filtering for the log view in this view.
Checked Categories, Nodes, Sub codes and Codes will appear in the filtered table.
Ex: APS_TEACH_COMMAND (of category Info) is checked but not Info under Category. The message will therefor not
appear in the filtered table.
1.
2.
3.

Message categories
Nodes that have reported messages.
Message codes for entire table

Filtering constraints

8(20)

2000

Document:

Project:

Project No

BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:

hans

Research & Development

Date:

Version:

2004-08-12 9:15 AM C

Page:

9(20)

I/O status view


This view is used to read (and force) the I/O status of the SCS2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Select node to view.


Enables override for I/O-port if checked. To force a value first check this box, then change the value and finally press
Write [4]
Current value/current overridden value of I/O.
Write current override values to system. Only the viewed node is written to. A write for each node is required if
values are to be forced on more than one node.
Read values from SCS2. All nodes are read at once (Selected node [1] is shown).
Enable automatic update of values. Triggers read operation [5] with interval determined by the value of: [6].
Update interval for Auto read [6].
Cancels current operation.

Note. To restore a port to its default value if overridden:


Uncheck the corresponding I/O [2] and press Write [4]. (If a read operation is followed instead the unchecked port will be
checked by the SCS2.) All forced values are reset if the system is re-started.

4
5

I/O status view

9(20)

2000

Document:

Project:

Project No

BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:
Research & Development

hans

Date:

Version:

Page:

2004-08-12 9:15 AM C

10(20)

Misc. view
This view is used to get and set general information of the SCS2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

9.

Updates the Date and Time fields from the PC when pressed.
Set the time and date on SCS2 according to Date and Time fields.
Get current date and time from the SCS2. Displayed in Date and Time fields.
Get address key information from the node [5].
Destination of question.
Serial cable connection.
Cancels current operation.
Get version information. Software version and protocol version for Boot and System program. The Boot program
version is Boot SW version and the System program version is System SW version. Dont care about the COM
versions.
Reboots the system.

Ex. Serial cable [6] is connected via COM1 to B1 and Destination [5] is set to Local node (or B1, which would be the
same). B1 is configured to have E-stop and Redundancy block activated. This will give us the answer:
Key: 5
E-Stop: YES
Redundancy: YES
Module name: B1

8
2
3

7
6

10(20)

2000

Document:

Project:

Project No

BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:

hans

Research & Development

Date:

Version:

2004-08-12 9:15 AM C

Page:

11(20)

Anybus view
The Anybus view shows the status of the I/O transferred over the fieldbus interface of the Anybus card.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Input data to SCS2 via Anybus interface. The index field shows which byte is being viewed and the value field the
value of that byte in binary format.
Output data from SCS2 via Anybus interface. The index field shows which byte is being viewed and the value field
the value of that byte in binary format.
Reads all Input data [1] and Output data [2] from Anybus interface.
Cancels current operation.
Set DeviceNet master in Run mode. This operation can only be done when using a DeviceNet master.
Set DeviceNet master in Idle mode. This operation can only be done when using a DeviceNet master.
Select node where to Read [3] data from.

1
6

7
3

Anybus view

11(20)

2000

Document:

Project:

Project No

BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:
Research & Development

hans

Date:

Version:

2004-08-12 9:15 AM C

Page:

12(20)

Spreader info view


This view is used to administrate the external EEPROM that is mounted on some spreaders.
Key = generic name of memory area of EEPROM.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Shows the selected key in the Spreader info field [6]. This field can not be edited.
Shows the current value of corresponding Key [1].
Sets the Value [2] for selected Key [1].
Deletes the value for selected Key [1]. The Key [1] can not be deleted, just the value.
Updates the entire Spreader info [6] view on the PC.
Table of all Keys stored in external EEPROM.
Cancels current operation.

1
2
5

7
4
3

Spreader info view

12(20)

2000

Document:

Project:

Project No

BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:

hans

Research & Development

Date:

Version:

Page:

2004-08-12 9:15 AM C

13(20)

CANopen IO view
The CANopen view shows the status of the I/O transferred over the CANopen interface.
From this view its also possible to select individual or groups of I/O and override it/them.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Retrieves the CANopen I/Oconfiguration from the system


Updates the I/O status
Updates system with overridden I/O
Dropdown box for selection of which node to show I/O from
Enables override for I/O-port if checked. To force a value first check this box, then change the value and finally
press SetIO [3]
6. Current value/current overridden value of I/O
7. I/O port identifier
8. Cancels current operation
9. Enable automatic update of values. Triggers read operation [2] with interval determined by the value of: [10]
10. Update interval for Auto [9]

Note. To restore a port to its default value if overridden:


Uncheck the corresponding I/O [5] and press SetIO [3]. All forced values are reset if the system is re-started.

4
1
2
3
7

6
10

CANopen IO view

13(20)

2000

Document:

Project:

Project No

BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:
Research & Development

hans

Date:

Version:

2004-08-12 9:15 AM C

Page:

14(20)

Upload view
This view is for Bromma R&D personnel only. It is used to upload memory blocks from the SCS2.

Upload view

14(20)

2000

Document:

Project:

Project No

BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:
Research & Development

hans

Date:

Version:

2004-08-12 9:15 AM C

Page:

15(20)

Advanced
These six sub views are mainly intended for Brommas R&D personnel only.

CAN Tester
This view holds the functionally of the CAN Tester. To be able to use the CAN Tester the master node has to be keyed as
Test. See the SCS2 manual for information.
The main functionality is as follows:
Every node connected to the CAN network is tested.
Each connected node is tested for a pre-selected time at each selected bit rate.
When a node is tested the next node is tested at the same bit-rate and during the pre-selected time.
The test results are sent back to the CAN Tester and are displayed in the list.

1. Selects the bit-rates that are to be tested.


2. Sets the duration time of each test.
3. Shows the additional information that are used when saving the results.
4. Saves the results as a *.csv or a *.txt file.
5. Starts the test.
6. Sows status of the CAN test.
7. Closes dialog.
8. Result field showing which node that is tested.
9. Result field showing what bit-rate the test used.
10. Result field showing the minimum of retransmissions during test.
11. Result field showing the average of retransmissions during test.
12. Result field showing the maximum of retransmissions during test.
13. Result field showing the total number of messages sent during test.
14. Result field showing the total numbers of retransmissions during test.
15. Result field showing the total numbers of bus offs occurred during test.
16. Result field showing the total numbers of messages not answered during test.

15(20)

2000

Document:

Project:

Project No

BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:
Research & Development

Date:

hans

Version:

Page:

2004-08-12 9:15 AM C

16(20)

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

3
4
7
5

CAN Tester view

16(20)

2000

Document:

Project:

Project No

BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:
Research & Development

hans

Date:

Version:

Page:

2004-08-12 9:15 AM C

17(20)

Boot Loader
The Boot Loader view is used to download new boot program to connected node.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Selects the file that is to be downloaded (*.s19).


Downloads the selected file.
Progress bar showing percentage completed.
Cancels the download.
Closes dialog.

3
1

Boot Loader view

17(20)

2000

Document:

Project:

Project No

BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:
Research & Development

hans

Date:

Version:

2004-08-12 9:15 AM C

Page:

18(20)

Asserts
The asserts view holds the functionality of reading asserts from the SCS2 . It is used for detecting unexpected system
events.

Asserts view

18(20)

2000

Document:

Project:

Project No

BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:
Research & Development

hans

Date:

Version:

2004-08-12 9:15 AM C

Page:

19(20)

POM Loader
The POM Loader view is used for downloading new power monitoring programs to the SCS2 .

POM Loader view

Bluetooth
From this dialog its possible to configure and manage Bluetooth settings.
Note that the configuration possibilities only works with Bromma Conquips own Serial port adapter.

Bluetooth configurator view

19(20)

2000

Document:

Project:

Project No

BMS_med_PDF. doc
Prepared by:
Research & Development

hans

Date:

Version:

2004-08-12 9:15 AM C

Page:

20(20)

CANopen services
From this view its possible to perform read and write actions to CANopen slave nodes OD (Object Dictionary).
The read and write actions uses the SDO (Service Data Objects) concept of CANopen. For a more detailed description of
CANopen and its functionality its referred to more specific documentation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Page containing the read functionality


Page containing the write functionality
Selection of CANopen node to read/write from/to. The SCS2 master node has address 127.
Index in OD. (Dec.)
Sub index in OD (Dec.)
Read value/ value that is to be written
Reads/writes value
Cancels current command
Closes the dialog
Status of current command
1
2

3
4
5
6

7
9

10
CANopen services view

20(20)

2000

Spreader Control System


2:nd generation

SCS

Rev 1.0

2004-12-08

Document:

Project:

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

2(55)

OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................................................................................3
REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................................................3
DICTIONARY AND ABBREVIATIONS ..........................................................................................................................3
DOCUMENT LAYOUT ................................................................................................................................................3

GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................................4
THE NODES ..............................................................................................................................................................5

SOFTWARE ................................................................................................................................................................6
3.1
3.2
3.3

Date:

Andy Lewis

INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................................................4
2.1
2.2

Prepared by:

GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................................................3
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4

Project No

SCS2

Manual

BOOT PROGRAM .......................................................................................................................................................6


SYSTEM PROGRAM ...................................................................................................................................................6
SPREADER PROGRAM ...............................................................................................................................................6

HARDWARE OVERVIEW........................................................................................................................................7
4.1 I/O LEDS ................................................................................................................................................................7
4.2 DISPLAY ...................................................................................................................................................................7
4.2.1
Event categories.............................................................................................................................................8
4.2.2
Message format..............................................................................................................................................8
4.2.3
Priority of displayed messages ......................................................................................................................9
4.3 GROUND CONNECTION .............................................................................................................................................9
4.4 THE X1 AND X3 CONNECTORS .................................................................................................................................9
4.4.1
X1 I/O connector..........................................................................................................................................10
4.4.2
X3 I/O connector..........................................................................................................................................11
4.5 THE X2 CONNECTOR ..............................................................................................................................................13
4.5.1
Main Supply .................................................................................................................................................13
4.5.2
CAN .............................................................................................................................................................13
4.5.3
Address Key .................................................................................................................................................14
4.5.4
Analogue Inputs ...........................................................................................................................................15
4.5.5
PWM Outputs...............................................................................................................................................15
4.5.6
External Spreader Memory..........................................................................................................................15
4.5.7
RS 485 and SSI.............................................................................................................................................16
4.5.8
Additional Jumper Group ............................................................................................................................16
4.6 THE X4 CONNECTOR .............................................................................................................................................17
4.6.1
AnyBus .........................................................................................................................................................18
4.6.2
Two auxiliary Analogue Inputs ....................................................................................................................18
4.7 THE X5 CONNECTOR .............................................................................................................................................19
4.7.1
RS-232..........................................................................................................................................................19
4.8 THE REDUNDANCY FUNCTION ...............................................................................................................................19
4.9 FIELD BUS CONNECTIONS.......................................................................................................................................20
4.9.1
Mapping of I/O ............................................................................................................................................20
4.10
SPREADER STOP ................................................................................................................................................21
4.11
FAULT FINDING TABLE ......................................................................................................................................22

SOFTWARE TOOLS................................................................................................................................................23
5.1
5.2
5.3

OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................................................................23
ABE.......................................................................................................................................................................23
BMS ......................................................................................................................................................................23

MISCELLANEOUS ..................................................................................................................................................24

Manual
File: SCS_1

2
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

6.1
6.2
7

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

3(55)

DATA SHEET ...........................................................................................................................................................24


DIMENSIONS...........................................................................................................................................................25

APPENDIX A (ERROR MESSAGES) ....................................................................................................................26

General
1.1

Overview

This document serves as a user manual and shall be used by the surveillance and maintenance operators of the Bromma
SCS2. Software as well as hardware routines and descriptions are covered in this document.

1.2

References

Location where to find the latest revision of this document: http://www.bromma.com/backyard/

1.3

Dictionary and abbreviations

ABE
BMS
Boot program
CAN
PWM
Spreader Program
SCS2
System Program
SSI

1.4

Application Builder Environment. A tool for building control logic. See separate manual for details.
Bromma Monitoring System. A tool for monitoring the SCS2. See separate manual for details.
The part of the software in the SCS2 that is executed at power up. This part is responsible for the
loading of the program verifying that the system is set up correctly.
Controller Area Network. A two wire serial bus used for high speed, high reliability communication.
Pulse Width Modulator.
The control logic that controls the functionality of the SCS2.
Spreader Control System generation 2. The control system described in this user manual. The system
will be referred to as SCS2 in this document.
The program that serves as a base for the execution and control of the spreader program.
Synchronous Serial Interface sensor interface

Document layout

Chapter 3, System overview, gives a brief description of the SCS2.


Chapter 4, Software, describes how the different software parts correlates.
Chapter 5, Hardware overview, describes the hardware in the SCS2.
Chapter 6, External interfaces, describes all the external interfaces in the SCS2.
Chapter 7, Software tools, describes the supporting tools to the SCS2.
Appendix A, Error messages, shows all error messages and their meaning.

Manual
File: SCS_1

3
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

4(55)

Introduction

The core of the Bromma Smart Spreader is the Spreader Communications System (SCS2). In 1991 when Bromma decided
to develop a new and highly advanced communications system a close look at the available bus systems revealed a
number of shortcomings, such as temperature range, EMC (Electro Magnetic Compatibility) protection and mechanical
roughness.
Bromma therefore decided to design a bus system that met the demands made on an electronic system for a tough
Spreader application. We decided to develop a modular programmable controller, with a heavy-duty field bus interface
that complies with European and international standards for control equipment in this area. The SCS2 solution is a single
control product that can be used as I/O, as a PLC, and as distributed control for up to 528 I/O points. SCS2 nodes are
simple to install. You can connect up to 11 devices using just a single pair of wires. With its modular and scaleable
architecture, intuitive features and unparalleled ease of use, it will help save crane builders and end users time and money.
SCS2 includes the following features:
A bus system able to handle 528 I/O ports (programmable input or output).
Up to four analogue inputs with 12 bit resolution.
Four PWM outputs for proportional solenoids.
One general purpose RS485 channel OR SSI channel.
Communication with the help of a standard spreader cable no screening, no twisted pair.
A system that withstands the repeated shocks and vibrations suffered by spreaders.
A system able to operate in tropical heat and arctic cold.
Choice of different field bus interfaces (ProfiBus, Interbus-S, Device Net.)
Optional duty cycle input

2.1

General

As a universal I/O, SCS2 gives you the freedom to connect to a wide variety of host controllers, including PLC's, DCS
and PC-based control systems by way of DeviceNet, Profibus-DP. SCS2 can be networked as a slave to Profibus-DP or
you can choose a DeviceNet master module for easy third-party integration. Designed by Bromma engineers for reliable
performance in the particularly challenging environment of container handling the system corporate four basic elements:
Crane Node1

A device directly interfacing with the cranes control systems, computer and
monitoring screens, providing an optional serial bus interface for
programming or diagnostic communications, as well as an interface to the
spreader node.

Crane-Spreader Communications Link

A two-wire conventional cable CAN communications between the crane


control system and the spreader.

Spreader Node

A device that interfaces directly with the spreaders sensors, supports discrete
signals, and acts as the Master node.

Sensors and Switches

Conventional sensors, switches, and actuators on the spreader.

The system is divided into several hardware units called nodes. The nodes are located on the spreader and in the crane.
The nodes are connected to each other via a CAN network, see figure 1. The number of nodes required is based on the
1

For details regarding separate dedicated crane fieldbus gateway, see separate manual

Manual
File: SCS_1

4
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

5(55)

number of I/O needed. The nodes are all equals, both in software as well as in hardware. This reduces spare parts and
enables easy-to-change procedures.
The only difference is their identity, id. Depending on their location the nodes have different ids. They are numbered
from 0 to 11 where:
0 is the master called B1
1-7 are slave nodes located on the spreader called B2-B8
8-11 are slave nodes located in the crane called A1-A4.

Crane
I/O

...

Slave A1

Slave A4

CAN network (BCAN)

B1 Master

I/O

B2 Slave

...

SCS

B8 Slave

Spreader
Figure 1. The figure shows SCS2 connected to the spreader and the crane via I/O. The nodes are also connected internally
via a CAN network.

2.2

The Nodes

The SCS2 is built up of several nodes co-operating in the system. Each node has a specific role, either slave or master.
There must be only one master node in the system and the rest are slaves.
The master node makes all the calculations and decisions. The slave nodes act as remote I/O to the master, but can also
have distributed functions such as regulators.

Manual
File: SCS_1

5
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

6(55)

Software

The SCS2 software consists of three types of programs; Boot Program, System Program and Spreader Program.

3.1

Boot Program

When the power is applied to the Boot Program starts to run. It will take approximately 5 seconds to boot up the system.
During system Program updates it will take longer.
The Boot program is responsible for
Initialising hardware
Checking that all the system Programs match.
Checking that the emergency stop and redundancy settings are correct
Performing a program downloads.

3.2

System program

After the Boot program is finished, the System program will run, until the system is switched off. The System program is
responsible for
Executing the Spreader program (only on Master node)
Supporting any connected PC via the com-port
Monitoring the supply voltage and some internal voltages
Handling in the event log
Reading and writing I/O

3.3

Spreader Program

The Spreader Program is the program logic that controls the spreader. This program is created in ABE, see chapter 5.2 for
a brief description.

Manual
File: SCS_1

6
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

7(55)

Hardware Overview

Below is a picture of a SCS2 node. The different parts are explained in the following chapter.

X1- I/O
Connector

4.1

X2- I/O, bus


& supply
Connector

X3- I/O
Connector

I/O LED
1-48

Bus/AI
(X4)

RS232
(X5)

Display &
Power
LEDS

I/O LEDs

The I/O LEDs indicate the current status of the corresponding I/O module. The LED is powered from the secondary (5V)
of the module.

4.2

Display

The display shows three pages of information where each page has a maximum of 8 characters. Each page is shown for 1
second. The pages show the following:
Node ID and System program version. Format: <Node ID><Version>.
Elapsed time running since power on. Format: DDD HHMM where DDD is the number of days, HH the number of hours
and MM the number of minutes.
Message page. The message page shows numeric information only, which has to be translated into comprehensive plain
text manually. The meaning of this page is explained in the rest of this section.
There are also four red LEDs in the bottom of the display window indicating the supply voltage level. Four different
levels are indicated and the ideal voltage is when all LEDs are lit.
LED1 11V, FAIL
LED2 14V, WARNING 2
LED3 17V, WARNING
LED4 21V, OK
It is not recommended to run the system below the OK level though it still seems to work fine. Attached devices may
malfunction at lower voltages thus making the system unreliable. The green LED is the power on indicator.
Manual
File: SCS_1

7
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

8(55)

4.2.1
Event categories
There are three categories of information displayed on the event page: information, warning and error.
Type
Error

Prefix
E

Example
E102

Note
Any error message would shut down the system. All outputs are
turned off and the program is halted. Error messages will begin with
an E.

Warning

W60

Warning shows information about the system status that is of high


importance. The system keeps on running. Warning messages will
begin with a W.

Information

I59

Information shows progress in the system. Examples of information


that could qualify to be displayed as information:
Program load status (how many percent are completed), version
verification info, BMS connected, etc. Informational messages will
begin with an I.

Information
4.2.2
Message format
The display can show 8 characters. These are used in the following format:
LTTTSSSS
L = Level type
TTT = Message type
SSSS = Sub type
Example:
E102 => Error in initialising the hardware
W61 1 => Warning indicating that a twistlock is indicating locked and unlocked. The sub code indicates that it is corner 1.
I59 => Information that the system has started.

Level type
The level type can be one of the following: I = Information, W = Warning, E = Error
Message type
The message type represents the cause of the message. Examples of message types are System started, Wrong system
version and I/O error.
All these types are described in appendix A.
Sub type
The sub type is used to specify more detailed information about the message type. The sub types have different meanings
for all message types. For example does sub type 14 together with message type 47 mean I/O error on digital port 14
instead of just I/O error.
These sub types are described in appendix A.

Manual
File: SCS_1

8
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

9(55)

4.2.3
Priority of displayed messages
Only the latest event is displayed at a time. When the display shows a warning and an event occurs which would show
information, the warning has higher priority and is thereby left on the display. The same relationship goes for errorinformation and error-warning.
Priority in descending order:
Error
Warning
Information
Note that warnings are cleared from the display after at least 10 messages of informational type have passed and the
warning message is older than 15 minutes. Error messages are cleared by resetting the system.

4.3

Ground connection

The node chassis must be properly connected to protective earth. A grounding bolt is placed on the right hand side of the
node for this purpose.

4.4

The X1 and X3 connectors

There are 48 digital ports on a node. Each port can be configured as either input or output via software. The ports 1 to 44
are joined in groups of 4 resulting in 11 groups. Each group has a Common junction. See the connector part for more
detailed information. Ports 45 to 48 are single I/O.

Manual
File: SCS_1

9
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

4.4.1

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

10(55)

X1 I/O connector

Front view of X1 connector


Description
Name
I/O-1
General purpose input or output / Unlocked_0
I/O-2
General purpose input or output / Unlocked_1
I/O-3
General purpose input or output / Unlocked_2
I/O-4
General purpose input or output / Unlocked_3
Common/Supply 1 Common junction for I/O-1 to I/O-4

X1 pin number
31
41
43
42
44

I/O-5
I/O-6
I/O-7
I/O-8
Common/Supply 2

General purpose input or output / Locked_0


General purpose input or output / Locked_1
General purpose input or output / Locked_2
General purpose input or output / Locked_3
Common junction for I/O-5 to I/O-8

3
2
11
1
21

I/O-9
I/O-10
I/O-11
I/O-12
Common/Supply 3

General purpose input or output


General purpose input or output
General purpose input or output
General purpose input or output
Common junction for I/O-9 to I/O-12

26
16
6
7
8

I/O-13
I/O-14
I/O-15
I/O-16
Common/Supply 4

General purpose input or output


General purpose input or output
General purpose input or output
General purpose input or output
Common junction for I/O-13 to I/O-16

4
5
25
15
35

I/O-17
I/O-18
I/O-19
I/O-20
Common/Supply 5

General purpose input or output / Landed_left_0


General purpose input or output / Landed_left_1
General purpose input or output / Landed_right_0
General purpose input or output / Landed_right_1
Common junction for I/O-17 to I/O-20

10
20
30
40
9

I/O-212
I/O-22
I/O-23
I/O-24
Common/Supply 6

General purpose input or output / Lock_left


General purpose input or output / Lock_right
General purpose input or output / Unlock_left
General purpose input or output / Unlock_right
Common junction for I/O-21 to I/O-24

46
47
49
48
50

Redundancy remark.
I/O signals 21 24 are affected by the redundancy safety functionality. See chapter 4.8
Manual
File: SCS_1

10
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

11(55)

To make linking of common supplies easier the X1 connector also has groups if pins linked together to be used basically
as jumper bars with the same potential. The following pins are linked together internally for the purpose of feeding
switches/valves with common potential.
X1 - Pin number
12
13
14
22
23
24
32
33
34
45
4.4.2

Link configuration X1 - Pin number


17
18
19
27
28
29
37
39
38
36

Link configuration

X3 I/O connector

Front view of X3 connector


Name
I/O-25
I/O-26
I/O-27
I/O-28
Common/Supply 7

Description
General purpose input or output
General purpose input or output
General purpose input or output
General purpose input or output
Common junction for I/O-25 to I/O-28

X3 pin number
21
31
41
42
11

I/O-29
I/O-30
I/O-31
I/O-32
Common/Supply 8

General purpose input or output


General purpose input or output
General purpose input or output
General purpose input or output
Common junction for I/O-29 to I/O-32

24
35
44
45
43

I/O-33
I/O-34
I/O-35
I/O-36
Common/Supply 9

General purpose input or output


General purpose input or output
General purpose input or output
General purpose input or output
Common junction for I/O-33 to I/O-36

5
4
3
2
1

I/O-37
I/O-38
I/O-39
I/O-40

General purpose input or output


General purpose input or output
General purpose input or output
General purpose input or output

6
16
25
26

Manual
File: SCS_1

11
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

Name
Description
Common/Supply 10 Common junction for I/O-37 to I/O-40

X3 pin number
15

I/O-41
I/O-42
I/O-43
I/O-44
Common/Supply 11

49
48
47
46
36

General purpose input or output


General purpose input or output
General purpose input or output
General purpose input or output
Common junction for I/O-41 to I/O-44

I/O-45
General purpose input or output
Common/Supply 12 Common junction for I/O-45

7
8

I/O-46
General purpose input or output
Common/Supply 13 Common junction for I/O-46

9
10

I/O-47
General purpose input or output
Common/Supply 14 Common junction for I/O-47

50
40

I/O-48
General purpose input or output
Common/Supply 15 Common junction for I/O-48

30
20

12(55)

To make linking of common supplies easier the X3 connector also has groups if pins linked together to be used basically
as jumper bars with the same potential. The following pins are linked together internally for the purpose of feeding
switches/valves with common potential.
X3 - Pin number
12
13
14
22
23
32
33
34

Manual
File: SCS_1

Link configuration X3 - Pin number


17
18
19
27
28
29
37
38
39

12
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

Link configuration

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

4.5

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

13(55)

The X2 connector

The X2 connector has a jumper group to be used for supply voltage to the different analogue sensors.

Front view of X2 connector

4.5.1
Main Supply
24Volt AC or DC power supply for the node. The signals are doubled in the connector due to the current limit of single
pins. DC voltage can be applied either way.
Name
24INA
24INA
24INB
24INB

Pin number in connector


X2/42
X2/43
X2/45
X2/44

4.5.2
CAN
The two CAN nets are placed in the X2 connector. The first net use Bromma CAN (BCAN) voltage levels and the second
net use standard CAN voltage levels. The standard CAN net has to be terminated with external resistors.
Name
CAN High 1
CAN Low 1
CAN High 2 / Reserved3
CAN Low 2 / Reserved3
CAN GND 2/ Reserved3

Pin number in connector


X2/30
X2/40
X2/50
X2/20
X2/48

CAN channel is std CAN for CAN-Open installations

Manual
File: SCS_1

13
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

14(55)

4.5.3
Address Key
All nodes must have a unique identity. This is read from the Id pins ID0 ID4 where pins being connected to the ground
pin corresponds to zeroes and pins left unconnected are considered ones.
Name
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
ID0
Ground

Pin number in connector


X2/49
X2/39
X2/29
X2/19
X2/9
X2/10

Configuration
Since all nodes are the same in reference to the software as well as hardware you have to configure them to carry different
roles. Setting the address key configures the role of the node. The address key has two other functions as well, enabling
Spreader stop and enabling redundancy block. These functions are described in chapters 4.10 and 4.8.
The address key setting is described in the following table:
Key input

Node
name

00000
00001
00010
00011
00100
00101
00110
00111
01000
01001
01010
01011
01100
01101
01110
01111
10000
10001
10010
1001111110
11111

Test
A1
A2
A3
A4
B1
B1
B1
B1
B2
B2
B2
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
Not
Used
Test

Spreader
stop

No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No

Redundancy block and Pins to be linked together in


override of landing
X2 connector
pins
10,9,19,29,39,49
No
10,19,29,39,49
No
10,9,29,39,49
No
10,29,39,49
No
10,9,19,39,49
Yes
10,19,39,49
No
10,9,39,49
Yes
10,39,49
No
10,9,19,29,49
Yes
10,19,29,49
No
10,9,29,49
Yes
10,29,49
No
10,9,19,49
No
10,19,49
No
10,9,49
No
10,49
No
10,9,19,29,39
No
10,19,29,39
No
10,9,29,39

Node number identifier


when viewing Display and
Log
8
9
10
11
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

None

Example
Here are three examples of how to set the address key:
A node with id B1 without redundancy block or emergency stop has the address key 01000.
A node with id B2 with both redundancy block and emergency stop has the address key 01001.
A node with id A2 (cannot have redundancy block or emergency stop enabled) has the address key 00010.
Manual
File: SCS_1

14
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

15(55)

4.5.4
Analogue Inputs
There are two analogue inputs on each node via the X2 connector (the other two are via the X4 connector). Each signal
has its own 10V-reference voltage output, ground reference and sensor signal that should be connected to the sensor
device.
Name
Analogue in 1
10Vref 1
Signal ground 1

Pin number in connector


X2/18
X2/28
X2/8

Analogue in 2
10Vref 2
Signal ground 2

X2/17
X2/27
X2/7

4.5.5
PWM Outputs
There are four PWM outputs for driving external loads, for example proportional hydraulic valves. Each output has two
connections, one in and one out. The load should be connected between these, since it is a current loop.
Name
PWM out 1
PWM in 1

Pin number in connector


X2/3
X2/4

PWM out 2
PWM in 2

X2/2
X2/1

PWM out 3
PWM in 3

X2/21
X2/11

PWM out 4
PWM in 4

X2/31
X2/41

4.5.6
External Spreader Memory
An external EEPROM memory can be mounted on the spreader for spreader id and/or user defined purpose. The memory
is connected as below.
Name
10V supply
Serial data
Serial clock
Signal ground

Manual
File: SCS_1

Pin number in connector


X2/36
X2/16
X2/26
X2/6

Cable
Red
Blue
Green
Black

15
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

16(55)

4.5.7
RS 485 and SSI
The RS 485 connection can be used for external sensors or user defined purpose. The SSI connection can be used with
external sensors with up to 25 bits data length. The hardware and the pins in connector X2 are shared between RS 485
and SSI. Therefore it is only possible to use one of these connections at a time.
When used as a RS 485 the following pins are used:
Name
Pin number in connector
Channel A
X2/38
Channel B
X2/37
When used as SSI the following pins are used:
Name
Pin number in connector
Clock+
X2/38
ClockX2/37
Data+
X2/15
DataX2/25
4.5.8
Additional Jumper Group
To make linking of common supplies easier the X2 connector also has groups if pins linked together to be used basically
as jumper bars with the same potential. The following pins are linked together internally for the purpose of feeding
switches/valves with common potential.
X2 - Pin number
22
23
32
33
34

Manual
File: SCS_1

Link configuration

16
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

4.6

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

17(55)

The X4 Connector

The X4 connector can be configured for field bus operation or one of three alternative functions. The alternatives are a RS
232 serial port, two additional analogue inputs or a duty cycle input. The function is selected by connecting different pin
headers to connector CN103. To find these pin headers the SCS2 node must be opened. The figure below shows the
relative placement of the pin headers. In each pin header the pins are number 1 to 5 or 1 to 10. In the figure a pin with a
circle to the left is number one in that header.
Field bus operation is selected by connecting the field bus connector on the Anybus card with pin header CN103. The RS
232 serial port is selected by connecting CN100 and CN103. The two additional analogue inputs are selected by
connecting CN105 and CN103. Finally the duty cycle input is selected by connecting CN104 with CN103.

Front view of connectors inside node.

Manual
File: SCS_1

17
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

18(55)

4.6.1
AnyBus
The AnyBus connector is used to interface any of the fieldbus types used apart from BCAN.
Name
A-Line
B-Line
GND-BUS

Pin number in connector


X4/2
X4/1
X4/3

4.6.2
Two auxiliary Analogue Inputs
These two analogue inputs use the same ground and 10 V reference voltages as the two analogue inputs in connector X2.
The input range is either 0 to 10 V or 0 to 20 mA. The 0 to 20 mA range is selected for channel 1 by jumpering pin
number 1 and 2 in CN106 and for channel 2 by jumering pin number 4 and 5 in CN106. If no jumpers are added on
CN106 the voltage range, 0 to 10 V range is selected as default. In the 0 to 20 mA range a 500 Ohm resistor is used
internally and therefore the current being measured must be capable of driving 20 mA at 10 V to utilise the full 0 to 20
mA range.
Name
GND
GND
Analogue Input 1
Analogue Reference 10 V
Analogue Input 2

Manual
File: SCS_1

Pin number in connector


X5/1
X5/2
X5/5
X5/3
X5/4

18
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

4.7

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

19(55)

The X5 Connector

4.7.1
RS-232
The RS-232 connector, called BMS port, is located to the right of the node and is used only for this purpose.
Name
TxD
RxD
RTS
CTS
GND

Pin number in connector


X5/1
X5/2
X5/5
X5/3
X5/4

4.8

The Redundancy Function

For safety reasons the hardware is designed to override the operator commands in some occasions. This is to prevent the
operator from making wrong commands by accident when the spreader is not landed, prohibiting dangerous results.

A
E
The commands either from a remote node on the network or the local node itself.
The CPU and the system software as well as the application specific software (Spreader program).
The redundancy block of hardware static logic. The block has two functions, to make sure the twistlocks are energised
correctly at boot and to prevent the software from changing between lock and unlock when not landed during operation.
At boot the redundancy block checks the sensor status and determines if the twistlock valves are to be energised and in
what direction. After a correct landing and a transition between lock/unlock the redundancy block goes passive only
preventing the software to change between lock and unlock unless the Spreader is properly landed. In this state the
redundancy can be viewed as two relay contacts, where only one contact is closed at a time permitting the twistlock
outputs. The only way of overriding the logic of the redundancy block is to energise a specific I/O (landed override) on
that particular node.
The outputs to the lock/unlock valves
The sensor signals from landed, locked and unlocked.
To enable the redundancy the address key on B1 or B2 is used, this then automatically means you have to use input 48 as
Landed override to be able to override the hardware logic. The landed override signal sets the spreader in landed mode
and thereby temporarily disables the redundancy block.

Manual
File: SCS_1

19
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

4.9

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

20(55)

Field bus Connections.

Apart from the parallel I/O of the nodes, each node can be equipped with an AnyBus card used for external buses. This
card is fitted into the node on the connector at the right side of the board when the cover is off. By using the AnyBus the
crane can utilise the SCS2 as an integrated slave on the PLC network or an AnyBus card can be used as a Master bus for
an internal I/O bus on the Spreader. The principal behind the AnyBus is that the interface card translates a number of
different bus protocols to a standardised format on the address and data bus of the node. To change between different
buses one can then simply change the type of interface card. For details regarding configuration of a specific bus, please
view the user manual for that specific card and the electrical documentation for your specific project.
The size of the data exchange area between the SCS2 and the Anybus card is configurable up to 64 bytes in and 64 bytes
out. The configuration is done via HMS standard files. This interface must be configured in the same way for both the
Master and the SCS 2 slave for the bus to work correctly. For each project a document has to be sent to the customer
describing the used parts of the interface. When referring to in/out we view it from the SCS2 side, hence input for the
SCS2 is an output from the master in the crane.

4.9.1

Mapping of I/O

OUT
Byte 0-63
Project
specific
outputs

IN
Byte 0-63
Project
specific
inputs

Output Segment
In the output segment it possible to use a number of bytes for diagnostic information in the form codes. The code sent
will be equivalent with the code displayed in the onboard display; hence there will be three levels of this code INFO,
WARNING, ERROR. Apart from the code and the byte for indicating the type of code a counter will be incremented
each time a code is sent. The counter is a 16bit value and therefore will begin from 0 if the counter overflows. The value
of this counter will be sent each time that a new diagnostic message is transmitted.

Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2-3 (WORD)
Byte 4-5 (WORD)
Byte 6-7 (WORD)

Manual
File: SCS_1

4.9.1.1 Spreader diagnostic area.


=> Type of error (info, warning, error)
=> Node ID (the number of the node from which the message originates)
=> Diagnostic code
=> Sub Code for diagnostics
=> Sequential counter value (message number)

20
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

21(55)

4.9.1.2 System diagnostic area.


This part is named the assert diagnostics and is basically only used to find discrepancies in the SCS2 system. The
objective of it is mainly for Bromma Conquip ABs R&D to identify unforeseen weaknesses in the system. If the
customer wishes to implement/decode this it can help Bromma Conquip AB improve its equipment further, however the
customer might find little or no use in this information on their own behalf. The assert part is configured in the following
way.
Byte 8
=> Node ID
Byte 9-10
=> Row Number (of source code)
Byte 11-16
=> Filename (1:st 6 char.)
Byte 17-18
=> sequential counter
The remaining bytes for output will be assigned the interface with the crane and will vary on each project. The
assignments here are discrete outputs from the Spreader and current values (pressure etc.) from devices on the Spreader.
These assignments shall be are documented in the electrical documentation of the project.
Input Segment
The entire range of the input area is configurable per project. The assignments here are discrete inputs to the Spreader and
set point values for the Spreader. These assignments shall be documented in the electrical documentation of the project.

4.10 Spreader Stop


A Spreader stop function can be used in the system.
This is performed by enabling Spreader stop using the address key on B1 or B2 and connecting the signal from the
spreader stop button to digital port 47 on the corresponding node (B1 or B2).
The spreader stop configuration must correspond to the spreader stop setting in the spreader program. This means that if
and only if the spreader stop on a node is enabled, digital port 47 must be connected to the Spreader Stop component in
the spreader program.

Manual
File: SCS_1

21
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

22(55)

4.11 Fault Finding table


Symptom
What to do

Comment

Power Supply
Node wont start. No text appears in
the display after power-on.

Measure the main supply. The voltage


should exceed 17V AC or DC.

The green and all red LEDs in the


display should be lit.

Probe TxD and RxD lines with


oscilloscope while trying to
communicate.

Data lines should show square waves


between 10V to +10V relative to
GND pin.

RS-232
BMS system can not communicate
with the node.

CAN
The node can not communicate with
the other nodes.

Digital Ports
Input signal fault

Output signal fault

Node ID
The node stops at start-up with Node
Id displayed.

Analogue Inports
Analogue input signal appears to be
faulty.

PWM Outports
PWM output appears to be faulty.

Manual
File: SCS_1

Probe bus lines with oscilloscope.


CAN high should show square waves
pointing downwards and CAN low
should be showing square waves
pointing upwards.

Check if LED indicator on I/O module


responds to sensor signal.
Check the Common connection for
correct supply.
Check if LED indicator on I/O module
responds to command.
Check the load for proper connection
and grounding.
Check for broken fuse on the I/O
module.
Check the Common connection for
correct supply.

The LED should be lit when current


flows through the module.

Measure the voltage of all ID pins. 5V


represent ones and 0V represents
zeroes. The measures should indicate
the expected id.

This can indicate that the node has


wrong id strapped telling the node to
participate in the system with wrong
role.

Check the reference voltage relative to


the GND.
Check if the node chassis is properly
grounded to the spreader.

There should be exactly 10V


difference between them.
This is very important in an AC driven
system.

The LED should be lit when the circuit


is closed.
The load should be connected between
the modules out pin and ground.

The supply voltage depends on the


type of load. 220V,110V,24V or other.

Check the load for errors.


Try another load.

22
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

23(55)

Software tools
5.1

Overview

There are some related tools to the SCS2, which support it in different ways. A brief description of these tools is given
below.

5.2

ABE

ABE (Application Builder Environment) is a tool for developing and configuring the spreader program, which controls
the logic of the spreader. ABE generates a load file. For more detailed see the separate manual.

5.3

BMS

BMS ultra light (Bromma Monitoring System ultra light) is a tool for monitoring events and reading status of I/O in the
SCS2. BMS can also be used to download new programs to the SCS2. For more detailed see the separate manual.

Manual
File: SCS_1

23
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

24(55)

Miscellaneous
6.1

Data sheet

Parameter

Note

Min

Max

Unit

Operating voltage
Current consumption
Power monitoring

Pin X2 42-44
Depending on number and type of I/O modules
Level and quality measurement of voltage.
Indicated via LEDs. (faults stored in log)
Operating temperature
Internal temperature monitoring
IP67
In accordance with 89/336/EEC:

17
300

40
800

V AC/DC
mA

-40

+85

0
0

2,5
10

A
V

12

300
230

kHz
V AC/DC

Temperature

EMC conformity

Controller
Memory

Time
PWM current output
Analogue inputs
SSI
I/O 48 programmable

Scan time
Serial interfaces

Diagnostics

FB programming

Manual
File: SCS_1

EN 50081-2: 1993
EN 50082-2: 1995
EN 61000- 4- 6: 1996
EN 61000-4-8:1993
ENV 50204: 1995
EN 61000- 4- 4: 1995
EN 61000- 4- 2: 1995

32bit controller running at 16MHz quartz


Program 1.4Mb
Log/NVRAM 128kb
External EEPROM 256byte
1*realtime clock
4*Current controlled. Short circuit protected.
12 bit resolution voltage/current
10V reference voltage output
serial
Voltage depending on type of module used.
Galvanic isolation. LED indication.
SC/OL protected 3A.
System scan time
Node scan time
BCAN Bromma CAN based bus
RS485 Asynchronous for sensors etc.
RS232 For PC communication
Field bus slave to those field buses supplied by
HMS.
System diagnostics
Spreader functionality diagnostics
8 character display for messages & information
Power level via LEDs
Event and error log
Basic binary functions (AND, OR etc.)
Basic Analogue functions (compare, add etc.)
Basic controller functions(PWM, regulators etc.)
Spreader controller functions

24
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

50
5

ms
ms

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

6.2

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

25(55)

Dimensions

Figure 1 All dimensions in mm

Manual
File: SCS_1

25
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

26(55)

Appendix A (Error messages)

The error messages, which are generated by the system, can be viewed in the display as well as in the log (using the
BMS). It is the same information in both interfaces and is explained in this appendix in the table below.
Nu level
m.l
cod
e
0
1
2

Description of code

Description of sub code Consequence

WARNING Failed reading temperature


spare 0

Hints

.
.

spare 1

spare 2

spare 3

Two different PCs' trying to


download to the system

Id of one of the node


connected to the PC

spare 4

spare 5

spare 6

10

spare 7

11

spare 8

12 ERROR

Program memory failure, HW


fault

System is brought into failsafe mode.

13 ERROR

No response from slave when


initialising system

System is brought into


failsafe mode.

14 ERROR

Boot sequence failed

System is brought into


failsafe mode.

15

spare 9

16

spare 10

17

spare 11

18

spare 12

19

spare 13

20 ERROR

Downloading error, connection .


broken

21

spare 14

22 ERROR

Memory collides when


downloading program

23

spare 15

ERROR

Manual
File: SCS_1

26
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

System is brought into


failsafe mode.

Ensure that only


one PC is
downloading

Ensure that all


slave are
powered up &
correctly
addressed
Restart system

System is brought into


failsafe mode.

reload program

System is brought into


failsafe mode.

recompile and
download
program again

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

27(55)

24

spare 16

25

spare 17

26

spare 18

27

spare 19

28 WARNING No data in program/system


memory
29
spare 20

30 WARNING Checksum of memory corrupt

31 ERROR

HW fault on memory

32

spare 21

33

spare 22

34 ERROR

System init. Display. This error The error codes during the system boot phase that have caused the
code accumalates and displays system to go into failsafe mode
the errors ocurred during the
system boot, since no reporting
is done until the system has
started.

35 ERROR

System failed in reading


.
spreader program from memory

System is brought into


failsafe mode.

reload and
restart

36 ERROR

No spreader program residing in .


memory

System is brought into


failsafe mode.

download
program

37 ERROR

System failed to run spreader


program

System is brought into


failsafe mode.

reload proram

38 ERROR

Spreader program object


instances failed

System is brought into


failsafe mode.

39 ERROR

Spreader program object


instances failed

System is brought into


failsafe mode.

40 ERROR

Spreader program object


instances failed

System is brought into


failsafe mode.

41 ERROR

Spreader program object


instances failed

System is brought into


failsafe mode.

42 ERROR

Spreader program object


instances failed

System is brought into


failsafe mode.

Check spreader
program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
Check spreader
program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
Check spreader
program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
Check spreader.
If problems
persist contact
Bromma
Check spreader
program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma

Manual
File: SCS_1

System cannot start

Contact Bromma

System is brought into


failsafe mode.

Contact Bromma
if problem
persists

27
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

43 ERROR

Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Spreader program object


instances failed

44 WARNING I/O message lost


45 ERROR
Memory failure

.
.

46
47

spare 23
spare 24

.
.

48

spare 25

49

spare 26

50 ERROR

Failed to configure I/O on node The node ID which has


generated the error
The node ID which has
Duplicate answers on I/O
generated the error
configuration from the same
node when initialising system

51 ERROR

Project No

SCS2

Manual

Version:

Page:

11

28(55)

System is brought into


failsafe mode.

Check spreader
program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma

System is brought into


failsafe mode.

Restart system.
If problems
persist contact
Bromma

System is brought into


failsafe mode.
System is brought into
failsafe mode.

restart
restart

52 ERROR

System initialising error when


configuring nodes I/O

The node ID which has System is brought into


generated the error
failsafe mode.

restart

53 ERROR

Duplicate answers on I/O


configuration from the same
node when initialising system

The node ID which has System is brought into


generated the error
failsafe mode.

restart

54

spare 27

55 ERROR

Duplicate answers on I/O


configuration from the same
node when initialising system

The node ID which has System is brought into


generated the error
failsafe mode.

restart

56 ERROR

No answer when master


.
requesting configuration
information during intitialisation

System is brought into


failsafe mode.

57 ERROR

No answer when master


.
requesting configuration
information during intitialisation

System is brought into


failsafe mode.

58 ERROR

No answer when master


.
requesting configuration
information during intitialisation

System is brought into


failsafe mode.

59 INFO

System started

60 WARNING TWL - No twistlock sensor


.
inputs active during system start

Manual
File: SCS_1

check
connections
between nodes.
Restart
check
connections
between nodes.
Restart
check
connections
between nodes.
Restart

28
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

Message stored in log and check wiring,


displayed on Spreader
sensors and
connectors or
mechanical
reasons

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

29(55)

61 WARNING TWL - One twistlock indicating ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for
both locked and unlocked
which generated the
displayed on Spreader
damaged sensors
warning
and sensor
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
62 WARNING TWL - timeout locking. Locked ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check sensor,
signal has not been received
which generated the
displayed on Spreader
valves and/or
after output to valve
warning
wiring or
mechanical
reasons
ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for
63 WARNING TWL - Locked sensor lost
which generated the
during operation. Sensor lost
displayed on Spreader
damaged sensors
without command/output when warning
and sensor
twistlocks are all locked
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check sensor,
64 WARNING TWL - timeout unlocking.
which generated the
Unlocked signal has not been
displayed on Spreader
valves and/or
warning
received after output to valve
wiring or
mechanical
reasons
ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for
65 WARNING TWL - Unocked sensor lost
which generated the
during operation. Sensor lost
displayed on Spreader
damaged sensors
without command/output when warning
and sensor
twistlocks are all unlocked
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for
66 WARNING TWL - all landed sensors not
which generated the
received after first landed and
displayed on Spreader
damaged sensors
warning
timeout.
and sensor
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
67 WARNING TWL - landed sensor not
ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for
released when the other sensors which generated the
displayed on Spreader
damaged sensors
not active and a timer has timed warning
and sensor
out
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
68 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type. No .
Stops the telescope and check for
valid sensor found within
displays/stores message damaged sensors
and sensor
timeout limit after output has
been activated
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
69 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type.
ID no. of the sensor
Stops the telescope and check for
Wrong sensor in telescoping
missing which
displays/stores message damaged sensors
sequence reached
and sensor
generated the warning
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
Manual
File: SCS_1

29
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

70 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type. The ID no. of the lost


position sensor is lost without an sensor
output.

Version:

Page:

11

30(55)

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

71 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type. Two ID no.s. of the sensors Message stored in log and check for
different position sensors
displayed on Spreader
damaged sensors
indicating simultaneously
and sensor
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
72 ERROR
Duplicate answers from one
The node ID which has System is brought into
restart (check
node during boot verification
generated the error
failsafe mode.
address keying)
73 ERROR

Wrong boot version in a node

The node ID which has System is brought into


generated the error
failsafe mode.

contact Bromma

74 ERROR

No answer when master


requesting boot version.

The node ID which has System is brought into


generated the error
failsafe mode.

restart

75
76
77
78

spare 28
spare 29
spare 30
spare 31

79

spare 32

80 ERROR

Wrong node answered request


from master to check if pc was
connected
No answer after master request
to check PC port (RS232)

The node ID which has System is brought into


generated the error
failsafe mode.

restart

The node ID which has System is brought into


generated the error
failsafe mode.

restart, check
connections

82 ERROR

Unable to download program

System is brought into


failsafe mode.

retry

83 ERROR

Unable to download program


(checksum failure)

System is brought into


failsafe mode.

Check spreader
program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma

84 WARNING Onboard realtime clock time


couldn't be read

85 WARNING Onboard realtime clock time


couldn't be set

81 ERROR

86 INFO

87 INFO

88 INFO

Manual
File: SCS_1

minimum system CPU cycle


time in ms
time. Periodically reported every
half hour. The counter is reset
after reporting.
maximum system CPU cycle
time in ms
time. Periodically reported every
half hour. The counter is reset
after reporting.
average system CPU cycle time. time in ms
Periodically reported every half
hour. The counter is reset after
30
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

31(55)

reporting.

89

spare 33

90 INFO

The number of the


counter

91
92

The number of control loops


exceeding 100ms for th last half
hour. The counter is reset after
reporting
spare 34
spare 35

93

spare 36

94 ERROR

No operative system in Node

95 ERROR

Duplicate answer on
The node ID which has System is brought into
determining Spreader stop set up generated the error
failsafe mode.

check adress key

96 ERROR

No answer on Master request for .


"Spreader stop" configuration

System is brought into


failsafe mode.

check adress key

97 INFO

Spreader stop has been


activated/deactivated

0= activated
1=deactivated

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

98

spare 37

99

spare 38

100 ERROR

Spreader program fault

System is brought into


failsafe mode.

System shutdown

contact Bromma

System is brought into


failsafe mode.

check
battery/restart/co
ntact Bromma

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

.
.
Systems fails to start

contact Bromma

recompile and
reload spreader
program
The first message type Message stored in log and displayed on
in the buffer
Spreader

101 WARNING CAN message buffer is full

102 ERROR

System failed to initialise HW

103

spare 39

104

spare 40

105 ERROR

Onboard NV RAM failed


memory test

106

spare 41

107 WARNING 10V reference voltage too low

Actual voltage *10

Message stored in log and check supplies


displayed on Spreader

108 WARNING 12V internal supply too low

Actual voltage *10

Message stored in log and check supplies


displayed on Spreader

Manual
File: SCS_1

31
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

109 ERROR

Battery voltage too low

110 ERROR

The System failed to lock th I/O .


on a node during system init.

111

spare 42

112

spare 43

113
114 INFO

spare 44
System is shutting down

.
.

115 INFO

116

System shutdown has been


completed
spare 45

117

spare 46

118 INFO

120

Landed override has been


activated
Landed override has been
deactivated
spare 47

121

spare 48

122

spare 49

123

spare 50

124

spare 51

125

spare 52

126

spare 53

127

spare 54

128

spare 55

129 ERROR

Spreader program fault or load


file has been korrupted

130 ERROR

131 ERROR

119 INFO

Manual
File: SCS_1

Project No

SCS2

Manual

Actual voltage *10

Version:

Page:

11

32(55)

Message stored in log and check battery


displayed on Spreader
System is brought into
failsafe mode.

restart

System is brought into


failsafe mode.

Spreader program fault or load


file has been korrupted

System is brought into


failsafe mode.

Spreader program fault or load


file has been korrupted

System is brought into


failsafe mode.

check and
recompile
spreader
program.
Reload. /contact
Bromma
check and
recompile
spreader
program.
Reload. /contact
Bromma
check and
recompile
spreader
program.
Reload. /contact
Bromma

.
.

32
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

132

spare 56

133

spare 57

134

spare 58

135

spare 59

136 ERROR

Spreader program fault or load


file has been korrupted

137

spare 60

138

spare 61

139

spare 62

Version:

Page:

11

System is brought into


failsafe mode.

33(55)

check and
recompile
spreader
program.
Reload. /contact
Bromma

140 WARNING Unknown CAN message


received

The ID type of the


message

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

141 INFO

CAN messages missed.


Cyclically reported.

The count of the


missed messages

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

142 ERROR

Two nodes within the system


have the same ID/adress

The ID which is
duplicate

System is brought into


failsafe mode.

143 WARNING 10V reference voltage is too


high

Voltage * 10

check and
correct the
adress key
Message stored in log and check supplies
displayed on Spreader

144 WARNING 12V internal voltage is too high Voltage * 10

Message stored in log and check supplies


displayed on Spreader

145 WARNING Battery voltage is too high

Message stored in log and check supplies


displayed on Spreader

Voltage * 10

146 WARNING User defined Warning. The


.
user/programmer defines what
this fault should indicate within
the application program.

Message stored in log and Check specific


displayed on Spreader
project.

147 WARNING User defined Warning. The


.
user/programmer defines what
this fault should indicate within
the application program.

Message stored in log and Check specific


displayed on Spreader
project.

Manual
File: SCS_1

33
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

34(55)

.
148 WARNING User defined Warning. The
user/programmer defines what
this fault should indicate within
the application program.

Message stored in log and Check specific


displayed on Spreader
project.

149 WARNING User defined Warning. The


.
user/programmer defines what
this fault should indicate within
the application program.

Message stored in log and Check specific


displayed on Spreader
project.

150 WARNING User defined Warning. The


.
user/programmer defines what
this fault should indicate within
the application program.

Message stored in log and Check specific


displayed on Spreader
project.

151 WARNING User defined Warning. The


.
user/programmer defines what
this fault should indicate within
the application program.

Message stored in log and Check specific


displayed on Spreader
project.

.
152 WARNING User defined Warning. The
user/programmer defines what
this fault should indicate within
the application program.

Message stored in log and Check specific


displayed on Spreader
project.

.
153 WARNING User defined Warning. The
user/programmer defines what
this fault should indicate within
the application program.

Message stored in log and Check specific


displayed on Spreader
project.

.
154 WARNING User defined Warning. The
user/programmer defines what
this fault should indicate within
the spreader program.

Message stored in log and Check specific


displayed on Spreader
project.

155 WARNING User defined Warning. The


.
user/programmer defines what
this fault should indicate within
the spreader program.

Message stored in log and Check specific


displayed on Spreader
project.

156

spare 63

157

spare 64

158

spare 65

159

spare 66

160

spare 67

161 WARNING CAN error

Manual
File: SCS_1

34
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

35(55)

162 WARNING RS232 error

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

163 WARNING Power monitor P1 = sensor


supply voltage. Warning 1 =
Voltage < 21V

Message stored in log and check supplies


displayed on Spreader

164 ERROR

check supplies
System is taken down
into idle mode. Ie if the
system voltage comes up
again it wakes otherwise
is prepared to shut down

Message stored in log and check supplies


displayed on Spreader

.
Power monitor P2 = internal
logic supply voltage. ERROR =
Voltage below permissive
voltage of system.

check supplies
System is taken down
into idle mode. Ie if the
system voltage comes up
again it wakes otherwise
is prepared to shut down

167 WARNING Power monitor P3 = PWM


supply voltage. Warning 1 =
Voltage < 21V

Message stored in log and check supplies


displayed on Spreader

168 ERROR

check supplies
System is taken down
into idle mode. Ie if the
system voltage comes up
again it wakes otherwise
is prepared to shut down

Power monitor P1 = sensor


supply voltage. ERROR =
Voltage below permissive
voltage of system.

165 WARNING Power monitor P2 = internal


supply voltage. Warning 1 =
Voltage < 21V
166 ERROR

Power monitor P3 = PWM


supply voltage. ERROR =
Voltage below permissive
voltage of system.

169 WARNING System failed to read/write to a ID of port:


Message stored in log and check supplies
displayed on Spreader
I/O port
Digital=0+port_no,
Analogue=100+port_n
o, PWM=200+port_no,
encoder=300+port_no.
170

spare 68

171

spare 69

172

spare 70

173

spare 71

Manual
File: SCS_1

35
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

36(55)

174 ERROR

No answer when on general


information request between
nodes.

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

175 INFO

TWL - twistlock lock command .


received

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

176 INFO

TWL - twistlock unlock


command received

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

177 INFO

TWL - twistlock has been


locked

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

178 INFO

TWL - twistlock has been


unlocked

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

179 INFO

TELESCOPE - prox. type.


Expand command received

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

180 INFO

TELESCOPE - prox. type.


Retract command received

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

181 INFO

TELESCOPE - prox. type.


Command to go to a speceific
position has been received

The ID of the position


requested

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

182 INFO

TELESCOPE - prox. type. The


desired position has been
reached

The ID of the position


requested

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

183 WARNING TELESCOPE - automatic type. 0 = Desired position


The telescope hasn't reached its' not reached within time
position within time limit
limit.
1 = telescope has not
moved more than 1 cm
during 3 seconds.

The telescopic motion is


stopped until a new
command is given.
Message stored in log and
displayed on Spreader

184 INFO

TELESCOPE - automatic type. .


expand command received

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

185 INFO

TELESCOPE - automatic type. .


Retract command received

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

Manual
File: SCS_1

36
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

check sensor,
pressure,mechan
ics. If necessary
calibrate system.

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

37(55)

186 INFO

TELESCOPE - automatic type. The ID of the position


Command to go to a specific
requested
position received

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

187 INFO

TELESCOPE - automatic type. The ID of the position


The desired position reached
requested

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

188 INFO

The year has been set

current value (year)

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

189 INFO

The month has been set

current value (month)

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

190 INFO

The day/date has been set

current value (date)

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

191 INFO

The time of day (hour) has been current value (hour)


set

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

192 WARNING Nocontact with the master for


10s

The ID of the node


which doesn't have
contact

Message stored in log and check


displayed on Spreader
connections

193 ERROR

Message reported during boot.


Unknown role
Information request (system
boot functionality)

restart (check
address keying)
Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader

195 INFO

Download request active


(system boot functionality)

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

196 INFO

Information request received


(system boot functionality)

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

197 INFO

set time request received


(system boot functionality)

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

198 INFO

Boot version request received.


(system boot functionality)

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

199

spare 72

194 INFO

Manual
File: SCS_1

37
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

38(55)

200 INFO

Download flag request received. .


(system boot functionality)

201

spare 73

202

spare 74

203

spare 75

204

spare 76

205 INFO

Check flash memory request


received. (system boot
functionality)

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

206 INFO

Restart node request received.


(system boot functionality)

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

207 INFO

System start init. (system boot


functionality)

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

208 INFO

System look for downloadflag.


(system boot functionality)

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

209 INFO

Send datablock request. (system .


boot functionality)

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

210 INFO

Received datablock. (system


boot functionality)

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

211 INFO

Download in progress

percentage of
downloaded data

progress shown on Spreader display

212 INFO

copy serial information to flash .


memory

213

spare 77

214

spare 78

215 ERROR

No answer when waiting for


present nodes response

System is brought into failsafe mode.

216 INFO

Inforamtion on present nodes


has been received

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

217 ERROR

Download timeout

System is brought into


failsafe mode.

218

spare 79

Manual
File: SCS_1

38
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

reload

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

219 ERROR

220 ERROR
221 ERROR

222 ERROR

223 ERROR

224 ERROR

225 ERROR

226 ERROR

227

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

39(55)

No answers or inconsistent
answers from system members
during boot
The size of received data is to
large. Boot message

System is brought into failsafe mode.

System is brought into failsafe mode.

No answers or inconsistent
answers from system members
during boot
No answers or inconsistent
answers from system members
during boot
No answers or inconsistent
answers from system members
during boot
No answers or inconsistent
answers from system members
during boot
No answers or inconsistent
answers from system members
during boot
No answers or inconsistent
answers from system members
during boot
spare 80

System is brought into failsafe mode.

System is brought into failsafe mode.

System is brought into failsafe mode.

System is brought into failsafe mode.

System is brought into failsafe mode.

System is brought into failsafe mode.

.
No answers or inconsistent
answers from system members
during boot
Spreader error and event log has .
been cleared

System is brought into failsafe mode.

230 ERROR

Failed to set up spreader


program correctly

destination of error

System is brought into


failsafe mode.

231 ERROR

Spreader program download


error

232 ERROR

Spreader program download


error

233 INFO

Power monitor P1 = sensor


supply voltage. OK

234 INFO

Power monitor P2 = internal


supply voltage. OK

228 ERROR

229 INFO

Manual
File: SCS_1

39
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader
Check spreader
program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
System is brought into
Check spreader
failsafe mode.
program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
System is brought into
Check spreader
failsafe mode.
program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader
Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

40(55)

235 INFO

Power monitor P3 = PWM


supply voltage. OK

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

236 INFO

Reboot (restart) request sent


.
from master to slaves. Happens
when slaves are powered on
before master at system start
System has been taken down to .
idle mode. Ie waiting to wake
up.

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

237 INFO

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

238

Spare 81

239 INFO

System failed to cancel


shutdown process

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

240 INFO

No answer when attempting to


cancel shutdown process

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

241 INFO

System received timeout when


attempting to cancel shutdown
process

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

242 INFO

System shutdown aborted

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

243

spare 82

244 INFO

TWL - The spreader has been


landed

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

245 INFO

TWL - The Spreader has been


totally lifted (not landed)

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

246 INFO

FLIPPER - flipper up command .


received

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

247 INFO

FLIPPER - flipper down


command received

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

AI can start to flicker. Message stored in


log and displayed on Spreader

248 WARNING Power monitor P1 = sensor


supply voltage. Warning 2 =
Voltage < 17V

Manual
File: SCS_1

40
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

41(55)

249 WARNING Power monitor P2 = internal


supply voltage. Warning 2 =
Voltage <17V

AI can start to flicker. Message stored in


log and displayed on Spreader

250 WARNING Power monitor P3 = PWM


supply voltage. Warning 2 =
Voltage < 17V

AI can start to flicker. Message stored in


log and displayed on Spreader

251 ERROR

System failed to initialise fielbus .


interface

System is brought into failsafe mode.

252 ERROR

Duplicate answers when setting .


up fieldbus interface

System is brought into failsafe mode.

253 ERROR

No answer when configuring


fieldbus interface

System is brought into failsafe mode.

254 WARNING System failed in locking


fieldbus interface

255 WARNING TWIN195 - twinboxes have


failed to get to their upper
position within time limit

ID of the twin box


failing

Message stored in log and check


displayed on Spreader
solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors

256 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook has failed .


to reach its' upper position
within time limit

Message stored in log and check


displayed on Spreader
solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors

257 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook has failed .


to reach its' upper position
within time limit

Message stored in log and check


displayed on Spreader
solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors

258 WARNING TWIN195 - twin boxes left


timed out when expanding to
their attach position. Failed to
reach switch within time limit

check
Twin down sequence
stopped. Have to return solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors
Spreaer to twin up
position. Message stored
in log and displayed on
Spreader

259 WARNING TWIN195 - twin boxes right


timed out when expanding to
their attach position. Failed to
reach switch within time limit

Twin down sequence


check
stopped. Have to return solenoids/mecha
Spreaer to twin up
nics/sensors
position. Message stored
in log and displayed on
Spreader

260 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook has failed .


to reach its' lower position
(connect) within time limit

Message stored in log and check


displayed on Spreader
solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors

Manual
File: SCS_1

41
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

42(55)

261 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook has failed .


to reach its' lower position
(connect) within time limit

Message stored in log and check


displayed on Spreader
solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors

262 WARNING TWIN195 - twinboxes have


failed to get to their lower
position within time limit

ID of the twin box


failing

Message stored in log and check


displayed on Spreader
solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors

263 WARNING TWIN195 - twin up sensor lost


unexpectedly. (not due to
output)

ID of the twin box


failing

Message stored in log and check


displayed on Spreader
solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors

264 WARNING TWIN195 - twin up sensor


received when twinboxes are
down

ID of the twin box


failing

Message stored in log and check


displayed on Spreader
solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors

265 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook down


sensor lost unexpectedly.

Message stored in log and check


displayed on Spreader
solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors

266 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook down


sensor lost unexpectedly.

Message stored in log and check


displayed on Spreader
solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors

267 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook up sensor .


lost unexpectedly.

Message stored in log and check


displayed on Spreader
solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors

268 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook up sensor .


lost unexpectedly.

Message stored in log and check


displayed on Spreader
solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors

269 ERROR

System failed to init. RS485

Node ID

System is brought into


failsafe mode.

restart / contact
Bromma

270 ERROR

Duplicate answers in system


when setting up RS485

Node ID

System is brought into


failsafe mode.

restart / contact
Bromma

271 ERROR

System timed out when trying to .


configure RS485

System is brought into


failsafe mode.

restart / contact
Bromma

272 INFO

TELESCOPE - automatic type. .


Teach in command received

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

273 INFO

TWINTELESCOPE - expand
command received

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

274 INFO

TWINTELESCOPE - retract
command received

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

Manual
File: SCS_1

42
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

43(55)

275 INFO

TWINTELESCOPE - left
console reached zero gap
position

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

276 INFO

TWINTELESCOPE - right
console reached zero gap
position

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

277 INFO

TWINTELESCOPE - twinlegs
expand in motion

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

278 INFO

TWINTELESCOPE - twinlegs
retract in motion

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

279 WARNING TWINTELESCOPE - hasn't


reached an endstop when in
motion within time limit

motion is stopped.
check
Message stored in log and pressure/mechan
ics(lubrication)/s
displayed on Spreader
ensor/valves

280

spare 83

281 INFO

TWINMPS - teaching a predefined position

The ID of the position


teached

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

282 INFO

TWINMPS - command to go to The ID of the position


a pre-defined position has been requested
received

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

283 INFO

TWINMPS - A command to
store a new value for a log
position has been received

284 INFO

TWINMPS - A command to
The ID of the position
return to a log position has been requested
received

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader
Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader

285 WARNING TWINMPS - the twinlegs


haven't reached their requested
position within time limit.

Motion is stopped.
check
Message stored in log and pressure/mechan
displayed on Spreader
ics(lubrication)/s
ensor/valves

286 INFO

TWIN195 - twin up command


has been received

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

287 INFO

TWIN195 - twin down


command has been received

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

Manual
File: SCS_1

43
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

44(55)

288 INFO

TWIN195 - twin boxes have


reached their upper position

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

289 INFO

TWIN195 - twin boxes have


reached their lower position

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

290 INFO

TTDS - override request


received

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

291 INFO

TTDS - override request ended

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

292 WARNING Buffer full transferring serial


port info over CAN bus

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

293 WARNING No answer when transferring


serial port info over Can bus

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

294 ERROR

Failed to communicate with


RS485

System is brought
into failsafe mode.

295

spare 84

296

spare 85

297

spare 86

298 ERROR

Failed reading spreader


program.

299

spare 87

300

spare 88

System is brought into


failsafe mode.

Check spreader
program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma

301 WARNING RS485 not functioning as


intended

Depending on type of
sensor/device

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

302 WARNING AnyBus not functioning as


intended

Depending on type of
sensor/device

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

303 WARNING Error in locking AnyBus setup

Node ID

304 WARNING Timeout when trying to lock


AnyBus setup
305 WARNING Wrong node answered when locking AnyBus setup
306 INFO
Manual
File: SCS_1

Spreader properties

Number of containers
44
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

Message stored in log and


2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

loaded/unloaded
307 WARNING AnyBus external bus failure

Version:

Page:

11

45(55)

displayed on Spreader
Message stored in log and
displayed on Spreader
Message stored in log and
displayed on Spreader
Message stored in log and
displayed on Spreader

308 WARNING AnyBus Status ok


309 WARNING AnyBus external bus ok
310 WARNING Wrong node answered when EEPROM setup
311 ERROR

Timeout when expecting answer from node on EEPROM

312 WARNING Spreader properties


313 WARNING Spreader properties
314 WARNING Spreader properties
315 WARNING Spreader properties
316 WARNING Spreader properties
317 WARNING Spreader properties
318 WARNING Read EEPROM failure
319 WARNING Read NVRAM failure
320 WARNING EEPROM checksum failure
321 INFO

Spreader properties EEPROM


set ok
322 WARNING EEPROM set failure
323 INFO

Spreader properties EEPROM attached to new node

324 INFO

RS485 status ok

325 INFO

Gravity point to centre


command
Gravity point to left side
command
Gravity point to right side
command
Gravity point has reached the
centre position

326 INFO
327 INFO
328 INFO
329 INFO
330 INFO

Gravity point has reached the


left end stop
Gravity point has reached the
right endstop

.
.
.

331 WARNING RS485 absolute sensor wrap


.
around warning. Sensor too near
the value where it wraps around
and begins from zero again.

Manual
File: SCS_1

45
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

46(55)

.
332 WARNING RS485 absolute sensor has
wrapped around. The value has
gone from maximum to
minimum in one CPU cycle.
333 INFO
Added value to NVRAM
.
successfully
334 WARNING Spreader stop configuration
node that reported the problem
mismatch
335 WARNING Missed message on bus
regarding digital I/O

node from which an answer is expected

336 WARNING Missed message on bus


regarding analogue I/O

node from which an answer is expected

337 WARNING Missed message on bus


regarding encoder data

node from which an answer is expected

338 WARNING Missed message on bus


regarding AnyBus message

node from which an answer is expected

339 WARNING Missed message on bus


regarding RS485 data

node from which an answer is expected

340 WARNING No contact with the node for 3s. node from which an answer is expected
specified by the Sub code
341 ERROR

Error when trying to dowload


program
Node is missing on the bus
during system start.

343 ERROR

Inclination sensor initialisation


error

node that failed to initialise the sensor

344 ERROR

Timeout when trying to


node that failed to initialise the sensor
intitialise the inclination sensor

342 ERROR

node that is missing

345 WARNING Missed message on bus


regarding inclination sensor

node from which an answer is expected

346 INFO

347 INFO

Node bus communication ok.


BCAN ok
BCAN bus status warning.

348 WARNING BCAN bus communication off. .


349 ERROR

AnyBus Spreader/systems
diagnostic area failed to set up.

350 ERROR

Timeout when trying to set up


AnyBus Spreader/system
diagnostic area
AnyBus Assert diagnostic area
failed to set up

351 ERROR
352 ERROR

Manual
File: SCS_1

node from which an answer is expected

node from which an answer is expected

Timeout when trying to set up


AnyBus Assert diagnostic area.

46
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

353 INFO

Present nodes shown in sub code bitwise OR for all included nodes. 12bit Value

354 INFO

AnyBus slave card plugged in

357 INFO

AnyBus Input data area size

size of data area (bytes)

358 INFO

AnyBus output data area size

size of data area (bytes)

359 ERROR

Hardware initialisation failed


(system prog.)

psu_mon.=1, temp_sens.=2, realtime_clock=3

360 ERROR

NVRAM full. No space left for .


Storage
NVRAM checksum Error
.

47(55)

node ID holding the


card
355 INFO
AnyBus Master card plugged in node ID holding the
card
356 WARNING AnyBus card missing
node ID of the node missing the card

361 ERROR
362 ERROR

365 ERROR

OS code. Operating system fatal


error
OS subcode.Operating system
fatal error
OS extra.Operating system fatal
error
Local regulator (PID) failed.

366 ERROR

Local regulator (PID) timeout

367 ERROR

Error in interpreting the spreader .


program. Parameter mismatch
between system and ABE file.

363 ERROR
364 ERROR

code from OS

call Bromma

code from OS

call Bromma

code from OS

call Bromma

node ID that failed to


initialise the regulator
.

restart

368 ERROR

Error in recognising a
.
component downloaded with the
spreader program
.
369 WARNING Gravity point haven't reached
the requested position within
time limit.
370 WARNING Missed message on bus
node from which an answer is expected
regarding regulator data.
371 ERROR

Error in locking regulator setup .

372 INFO

The Spreader info has been set. The index of the field
which is set.

373 INFO

The Spreader info has been set. The value of the field
which is set. The
logged value is in the
range 0-9999. This
range limit has nothing

Manual
File: SCS_1

47
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

retstart
Check versions
of system and
ABE.
Check versions
of system and
ABE.

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

48(55)

to with the actual value


set in the Spreader info.
374 INFO

The time of day (minute) has


been set

Current value (minute) Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

375 INFO

Received a change bitrate


request. Boot message.

Requested bitrate

376 WARNING TWIN195-Multiple sensor


values from left hook

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

377 WARNING TWIN195-Multiple sensor


values from right hook

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

378 WARNING Codeloading via anybus failed.


(start sequence)

node ID that failed to


handle start sequence.

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

379 WARNING Codeloading via anybus failed.


(download sequence)

node ID that failed to


download.

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

380 WARNING Codeloading via anybus failed.


(finish sequence)

node ID that failed to Message stored in log and displayed on


handle finish sequence. Spreader

381 WARNING Disabeling outputs failed.

node ID that failed to


disable outputs.

382 WARNING No answer when attempting to


disable outputs.
383 WARNING Enabeling outputs faild.

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader
node ID that failed to
enabeling outputs.

384 WARNING No answer when attempting to


enabeling outputs.
385 INFO

Manual
File: SCS_1

AutoTuner stored in NVRAM

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader
Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader

Regulator index.

48
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

The ID of the position


teached

Version:

Page:

11

49(55)

386 INFO

Tandem - Teaching a predefined position

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

387 INFO

Tandem - A command to store a


new value for a log position has
been received

388 INFO

Tandem - command to go to a
pre-defined position has been
received

The ID of the position


requested

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

389 INFO

Tandem - A command to return The ID of the position


to a log position has been
requested
received

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

390 WARNING Tandem - Cylinder position has The ID of the cylinder Message stored in log and displayed on
changed more than allowed.
Spreader
391 INFO

Tandem Both landside and


waterside spreaders enabled

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

392 INFO

Tandem Landside spreader


enabled

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

393 INFO

Tandem Waterside spreader


enabled

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

394 INFO

TandemPush A push
command received

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

395 INFO

TandemPush Inner position


reached.

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

396 INFO

TELESCOPE Impact detected

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

397 INFO

TELESCOPE Telescope is
autocorrecting

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

398 WARNING TELESCOPE Sensor value is


out of range

Manual
File: SCS_1

49
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

50(55)

399 INFO

TELESCOPE Bumped out of


signal window

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

400 INFO

TWL TTDS active

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

401 WARNING TWL Lock attempt with


TTDS active

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

402 INFO

Digital I/O configured on an


AnybusGateway

Node id on where I/O


configured

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

403 INFO

Analogue I/O configured on an


AnybusGateway

Node id on where I/O


configured

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

404 INFO

PWM configured on an
AnybusGateway

Node id on where I/O


configured

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

405 INFO

ASC Antisway sytem active

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

406 INFO

ASC Antisway sytem ready

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

407 INFO

ASC Antisway sytem failed

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreaderi

408

spare 88

409 ERROR

OS extra 2.Operating system


fatal error

code from OS

call Bromma

410 INFO

Current hardware version

HW type

Type of hardware version.


5 = SCS2 revision
4 = SCS2
6 = Anybus gateway
The PID component found a strange
parameter saved in NVRAM. The PID
component uses the ABE parameters
instead.

411 WARNING Strange parameter saved in


NVRAM. (AutoTuner)

Manual
File: SCS_1

Parameter No.

50
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

412 WARNING Auto Tuner Finished but failed Parameter No.


to calculate some parameters

Version:

Page:

11

51(55)

Some parameters could not be calculated.


Check sensors etc.

413 ERROR

CANopen Failed to initialize


the software.

414 ERROR

CANopen Failed to configure


PDO

415 ERROR

CANopen - Error in locking


CANopen setup

416 INFO

CANopen Node removed from Node number


heartbeat list

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

417 INFO

CANopen New node added to Node number


heart beat list

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

418 INFO

CANopen Boot message


received from node

Node number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

419 INFO

CANopen Node stopped

Node number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

420 INFO

CANopen Node in operational Node number


state

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

421 INFO

CANopen Node in
preoperational state

Node number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

422 WARNING CANopen Heartbeat failed on Node number


node

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

423 ERROR

CANopen To many slaves in


use

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. Check spreader program.

424 ERROR

CANopen Failed to configure


SDO

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. Check spreader program.

Manual
File: SCS_1

Check spreader program

51
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

52(55)

425 WARNING CANopen Failed to send SDO Node number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. Check spreader program.

426 WARNING CANopen Bus off occured

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader.

427 ERROR

CANopen Failed to change the


bitrate on CAN interface

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader.

428

Spare 89

429

Spare 90

430

Spare 91

431 WARNING CANopen Emergency object


additional byte 1

Contents of byte

432 WARNING CANopen Emergency object


additional byte 2

Contents of byte

433 WARNING CANopen Emergency object


additional byte 3

Contents of byte

434 WARNING CANopen Emergency object


additional byte 4

Contents of byte

435 WARNING CANopen Emergency object


additional byte 5

Contents of byte

436 INFO

Node number

CANopen Slave OK

437 WARNING CANopen Generic error

Manual
File: SCS_1

Node number

52
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401] and
slave user manual
Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401] and
slave user manual
Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401] and
slave user manual
Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401] and
slave user manual
Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401] and
slave user manual
Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401] and
slave user manual
Message stored in log and displayed on
Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401] and
slave user manual

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

53(55)

438 WARNING CANopen Current

Node number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

439 WARNING CANopen Current, device


input side

Node number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

440 WARNING CANopen Current, inside


device

Node number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

441 WARNING CANopen Current, device


output side

Node number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

442 WARNING CANopen - Voltage

Node number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

443 WARNING CANopen Mains voltage

Node number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

444 WARNING CANopen - Voltage inside

Node number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

445 WARNING CANopen Voltage output

Node number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

446 WARNING CANopen - Temperature

Node number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

447 WARNING CANopen Temperature


ambient

Node number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

448 WARNING CANopen Temperature device Node number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

449 WARNING CANopen Hardware device

Node number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

450 WARNING CANopen Software device

Node number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

Manual
File: SCS_1

53
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

54(55)

451 WARNING CANopen Software inside

Node number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

452 WARNING CANopen software user

Node number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

453 WARNING CANopen Data set

Node number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

454 WARNING CANopen Additional module Node number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

455 WARNING CANopen - Monitoring

Node number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

456 WARNING CANopen CAN overrun

Node number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

457 WARNING CANopen CAN error passive Node number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

458 WARNING CANopen Lifeguard or


heartbeat

Node number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

459 WARNING CANopen Recover from bus


off

Node number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

460 WARNING CANopen - Transmit COB id

Node number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

461 WARNING CANopen General


communication

Node number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

462 WARNING CANopen General protocol

Node number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

463 WARNING CANopen PDO not processed Node number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

Manual
File: SCS_1

54
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

SCS2

Manual
Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2004-12-08 13:51

Version:

Page:

11

55(55)

464 WARNING CANopen PDO length


exceeded

Node number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

465 WARNING CANopen External error

Node number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

466 WARNING CANopen Additional


functions

Node number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]

467 WARNING CANopen Device specific

Node number

468 WARNING CANopen Node missing

Node number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401] and
slave user manual
Check CAN connections and spreader
program.

469 INFO

Changed to node
number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader.

470 WARNING CANopen Node id chage


failed

Node number

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader.

471 WARNING TTDS No sensors

Message stored in log and displayed on


Spreader

Manual
File: SCS_1

CANopen Node id changed

55
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

2004 Bromma Conquip AB

Spreader Control System


2

2:nd generation

SCS Anybus Gateway

Rev 1.0

05-03-08

Document:

Project:

Project No

Manual

SCS Anybus Gateway

Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2005-03-08 10:41

Version:

Page:

11

2(13)

General ......................................................................................................................................................................... 3
1.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 DICTIONARY AND ABBREVIATIONS .......................................................................................................................... 3
1.3 DOCUMENT LAYOUT ................................................................................................................................................ 3
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................. 4
2.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................. 4
2.2 THE NODES .............................................................................................................................................................. 5
Software........................................................................................................................................................................ 5
3.1 BOOT PROGRAM ...................................................................................................................................................... 5
3.2 SYSTEM PROGRAM ................................................................................................................................................... 5
3.3 SPREADER PROGRAM ............................................................................................................................................... 6
Hardware Overview .................................................................................................................................................... 6
4.1 BCAN - STATUS LEDS ........................................................................................................................................... 6
4.2 THE ANY BUS CARD ................................................................................................................................................. 6
4.3 POWER CONNECTOR ................................................................................................................................................. 6
4.4 BCAN CONNECTOR ................................................................................................................................................. 7
4.5 NODE ADDRESS KEY SWITCHES ................................................................................................................................ 7
4.6 SERIAL PORT CONNECTOR ........................................................................................................................................ 7
4.7 GROUND CONNECTION ............................................................................................................................................. 7
4.8 FIELD BUS CONNECTIONS. ....................................................................................................................................... 8
4.8.1
Mapping of I/O .............................................................................................................................................. 8
4.9 FAULT FINDING TABLE........................................................................................................................................... 10
Software tools............................................................................................................................................................. 10
5.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................................................. 10
5.2 ABE....................................................................................................................................................................... 10
5.3 BMS ...................................................................................................................................................................... 10
Miscellaneous ............................................................................................................................................................. 11
6.1 DATA SHEET........................................................................................................................................................... 11
6.2 DIMENSIONS .......................................................................................................................................................... 12
Appendix A (Error messages)................................................................................................................................... 13

Manual
File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual

2
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41

2005 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

Manual

SCS Anybus Gateway

Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2005-03-08 10:41

Version:

Page:

11

3(13)

General
1.1

Overview

This document serves as a user manual and shall be used by the those installing and using the Bromma SCS2 Anybus
Gateway. Software as well as hardware routines and descriptions are covered in this document.

1.2

Dictionary and abbreviations

ABE
BMS
Boot program
CAN
PWM
Spreader Program
SCS2
System Program
Anybus Gateway

1.3

Application Builder Environment. A tool for building control logic.


Bromma Monitoring System. A tool for monitoring the SCS2.
The part of the software in the SCS2 that is executed at power up. This part is responsible for the
loading of the program verifying that the system is set up correctly.
Controller Area Network. A two wire serial bus used for high speed, high reliability communication.
Pulse Width Modulator.
The control logic that controls the functionality of the SCS2.
Spreader Control System generation 2. The control system described in this user manual. The system
will be referred to as SCS2 in this document.
The program that serves as a base for the execution and control of the spreader program.
A node that can be used in the Spreader Control System generation 2.

Document layout

Chapter 3, System overview, gives a brief description of the SCS2.


Chapter 4, Software, describes how the different software parts correlates.
Chapter 5, Hardware overview, describes the hardware in the SCS2.
Chapter 6, External interfaces, describes all the external interfaces in the SCS2.
Chapter 7, Software tools, describes the supporting tools to the SCS2.
Appendix A, Error messages, shows all error messages and their meaning (see main SCS2 manual for details).

Manual
File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual

3
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41

2005 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

Manual

SCS Anybus Gateway

Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2005-03-08 10:41

Version:

Page:

11

4(13)

Introduction

The core of the Bromma Smart Spreader is the Spreader Communications System (SCS2). In 1991 when Bromma decided
to develop a new and highly advanced communications system a close look at the available bus systems revealed a
number of shortcomings, such as temperature range, EMC (Electro Magnetic Compatibility) protection and mechanical
roughness.
Bromma therefore decided to design a bus system that met the demands made on an electronic system for a tough
Spreader application. We decided to develop a modular programmable controller, with a heavy-duty field bus interface
that complies with European and international standards for control equipment in this area. The SCS2 solution is a single
control product that can be used as I/O, as a PLC, and as distributed control for up to 528 I/O points. SCS2 nodes are
simple to install. You can connect up to 11 devices using just a single pair of wires. With its modular and scaleable
architecture, intuitive features and unparalleled ease of use, it will help save crane builders and end users time and money.

2.1

General

As a universal I/O, SCS2 gives you the freedom to connect to a wide variety of host controllers, including PLC's, DCS
and PC-based control systems by way of DeviceNet, Profibus-DP. SCS2 can be networked as a slave to Profibus-DP or
you can choose a DeviceNet master module for easy third-party integration. Designed by Bromma engineers for reliable
performance in the particularly challenging environment of container handling the system corporate four basic elements:
Crane Node

A device directly interfacing with the cranes control systems, computer and
monitoring screens, providing an optional serial bus interface for
programming or diagnostic communications, as well as an interface to the
spreader node.

Crane-Spreader Communications Link

A two-wire conventional cable CAN communications between the crane


control system and the spreader.

Spreader Node

A device that interfaces directly with the spreaders sensorsand actuators.


One of the Spreader nodes normally acts as Master.
Sensors and Switches
Conventional sensors, switches, and actuators on the spreader.
The system is divided into several hardware blocks called nodes. The nodes are located on the spreader and in the crane.
The nodes are connected to each other via a CAN network, see figure 1. The number of nodes required is based on the
number of I/O needed.
The only difference is their identity, id. Depending on their location the nodes have different ids. They are numbered
from 0 to 11 where:
0 is the master called B1
1-7 are slave nodes located on the spreader called B2-B8
8-11 are slave nodes located in the crane called A1-A4.

Manual
File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual

4
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41

2005 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

Manual

SCS Anybus Gateway

Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2005-03-08 10:41

Version:

Page:

11

5(13)

Crane PLC
Crane field bus
Anybus Gateway A1

CAN network (BCAN)

B1 Master

I/O

B2 Slave

...

SCS2

B8 Slave

Spreader
Figure 1. The figure shows SCS2 connected to the spreader and the crane via I/O. The nodes are also connected internally
via a CAN network.

2.2

The Nodes

The SCS2 is built up of several nodes co-operating in the system. Each node has a specific role, either slave or master.
There must be only one master node in the system and the rest are slaves.
The master node makes all the calculations and decisions. The slave nodes act as remote I/O to the master.

Software

The SCS2 software consists of three types of programs; Boot Program, System Program and Spreader Program.

3.1

Boot Program

When the power is applied to the Boot Program starts to run. It will take approximately 5 seconds to boot up the system.
During system Program updates it will take longer.
The Boot program is responsible for
Initialising hardware
Verifying that all system versions match.
Performing a program download

3.2

System program

After the Boot program is finished, the System will execute until the system is switched off. The System program is
responsible for
Interpreting the Spreader program (only on Master node)
Supporting any connected PC-connection via the RS232 port
Monitoring the supply voltage and some internal voltages
Logging events in the event log
Reading input signals and writing output signals

Manual
File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual

5
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41

2005 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

3.3

Project No

Manual

SCS Anybus Gateway

Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2005-03-08 10:41

Version:

Page:

11

6(13)

Spreader Program

The Spreader Program is the specific application program that controls the spreader. This program is created in ABE, see
chapter 5.2 for a brief description.

Hardware Overview

Figure2 is a SCS2 Anybus Gateway node equiped with a Profibus slave card. The different parts are explained in the
following chapter. This view shows a Profibus card, this can naturally be exchanged for any other available fieldbus.
AnyBus
(Profibus) card
status LEDS

Status LEDs

AnyBus
(Profibus) card
address
selectors

Power connector
BCAN connector

AnyBus
(Profibus) card
terminator
switch

Node address key


switches
Serial port connector

AnyBus
(Profibus) card
fieldbus
connector

Figure 2. The SCS2 Anybus Gateway node equiped with a Profibus slave card.

4.1

BCAN - Status LEDs

There are three green LEDs for Power, BCAN and Anybus indicating operating status and one red LED indicating error
status.
Power LED is lit when power is applied and system starts to execute.
BCAN LED is lit when the BCAN communication interface is operating normally and flashing when the communication
interface is not working as inteded.
Anybus LED is flashing when the Anybus interface is not configured and lit when configured and operating normaly.
Error LED is unlit when system is running normally and lit when an error has occurred.

4.2

The Any bus card

For details regarding the specific field bus card connection, termination, addressing and status LEDs, please see the
separate manual for that specific type of card.

4.3

Power connector

The power connector is a Phoenix Contact 2-pin header (MC1,5/2-G-3,81).


Name
VCC
GND

Manual
File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual

Description
10 to 28 V DC
Ground

Pin number
1
2

6
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41

2005 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

4.4

Project No

Manual

SCS Anybus Gateway

Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2005-03-08 10:41

Version:

Page:

11

7(13)

BCAN connector

The BCAN connector is a Phoenix Contact 3-pin header (MC1,5/3-G-3,81).


Name
CAN H
CAN L
CAN GND

4.5

Description
CAN high
CAN low
CAN ground, not required by BCAN

Pin number
1
2
3

Node address key switches

There are five switches selecting node address, where the DIP switch 1 corresponds to LSB.
The nodes are addressed according to the following table:
DIP setting
0=off, 1=on
00000
00001
00010
00011
00100
00101
00110
00111
01000
01001
01010
01011
01100
01101
01110
01111
10000
10001
10010
10011-11110
11111

4.6

Node
name
Test
A1
A2
A3
A4
B1
B1
B1
B1
B2
B2
B2
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
Not Used
Test

Spreader
stop

Redundancy block and override


of landing pins

No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No

No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No

Serial port connector

The serial port connector is a standard DSUB 9-PIN female connector. A pin-to-pin cable is needed when connecting the
SCS2 Anybus Gateway to a computer serial port.
Name
Tx
Rx
Signal GND
CTS
RTS
Not connected

4.7

Description
Transmitted data RS-232
Received data RS-232
Ground
Clear to send RS-232
Request to send RS-232
Not connected

Pin number
2
3
5
7
8
1, 4, 6, 9

Ground connection

The SCS2 Anybus Gateway chassis must be properly connected to protective earth, for example by mounting the unit on a
grounded DIN rail.

Manual
File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual

7
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41

2005 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

4.8

Project No

Manual

SCS Anybus Gateway

Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2005-03-08 10:41

Version:

Page:

11

8(13)

Field bus Connections.

By using the AnyBus the crane can utilise the SCS2 as an integrated slave on the PLC network or an AnyBus card can be
used as a Master bus for an internal I/O bus on the Spreader. The principal behind the AnyBus is that the interface card
translates a number of different bus protocols to a standardised format on the address and data bus of the node. To change
between different buses one can then simply change the type of interface card. For details regarding configuration of a
specific bus, please view the user manual for that specific card and the electrical documentation for your specific project.
The size of the data exchange area between the SCS2 and the Anybus card is configurable up to 64 bytes in and 64 bytes
out. The configuration is done via HMS standard files. This interface must be configured in the same way for both the
Master and the SCS 2 slave for the bus to work correctly. For each project a document has to be sent to the customer
describing the used parts of the interface. When referring to in/out we view it from the SCS2 side, hence input for the
SCS2 is an output from the master in the crane. Hence the crane PLC and the AnyBus card must have corresponding
addresses and the nymber of bytes configured for input/output data have to be the same on both sides of the
communication link i.e. the crane PLC and the SCS2.

4.8.1

Mapping of I/O

OUT

IN

Byte 0-63
Project
specific
outputs

Byte 0-63
Project
specific
inputs

Output Segment
In the output segment it possible to use a number of bytes for diagnostic information in the form codes. The code sent
will be equivalent with the code displayed in the onboard display, hence there will be three levels of this code INFO,
WARNING, ERROR. Apart from the code and the byte for indicating the type of code a counter will be incremented
each time a code is sent. The counter is a 16bit value and therefore will begin from 0 if the counter overflows. The value
of this counter will be sent each time that a new diagnostic message is transmitted.

Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2-3 (WORD)
Byte 4-5 (WORD)
Byte 6-7 (WORD)

4.8.1.1 Spreader diagnostic area.


=> Type of error (info, warning, error)
=> Node ID (the number of the node from which the message originates)
=> Diagnostic code
=> Sub Code for diagnostics
=> Sequential counter value (message number)

4.8.1.2 System diagnostic area.


This part is named the assert diagnostics and is basically only used to find discrepancies in the SCS2 system. The
objective of it is mainly for Bromma Conquip ABs R&D to identify unforeseen weaknesses in the system. If the
customer wishes to implement/decode this it can help Bromma Conquip AB improve its equipment further, however the
customer might find little or no use in this information on their own behalf. The assert part is configured in the following
way.
Byte 8
=> Node ID
Byte 9-10
=> Row Number (of source code)
Byte 11-16
=> Filename (1:st 6 char.)
Byte 17-18
=> sequential counter
Manual
File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual

8
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41

2005 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

Manual

SCS Anybus Gateway

Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2005-03-08 10:41

Version:

Page:

11

9(13)

The remaining bytes for output will be assigned the interface with the crane and will vary on each project. The
assignments here are discrete outputs from the Spreader and current values (pressure etc.) from devices on the Spreader.
These assignments shall be are documented in the electrical documentation of the project.
Input Segment
The entire range of the input area is configurable per project. The assignments here are discrete inputs to the Spreader and
set point values for the Spreader. These assignments shall be documented in the electrical documentation of the project.

Manual
File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual

9
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41

2005 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

4.9

SCS Anybus Gateway

Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2005-03-08 10:41

Version:

Page:

11

10(13)

Fault Finding table

Symptom
Power Supply
The node wont start. The power LED
is off.

RS-232
BMS system can not communicate
with the node.

CAN
The node can not communicate with
the other nodes.

Node ID
The unit stops at start-up.

Project No

Manual

What to do

Comment

Measure the main supply. The voltage


should exceed 10V DC and be less
than 30V DC.

The power LED should be on.

Probe TxD and RxD lines with


oscilloscope while trying to
communicate. Ensure that connection
cables arent damaged.

Data lines should show square waves


between 10V to +10V relative to
GND pin.

Probe bus lines with oscilloscope.


CAN high should show square waves
pointing downwards and CAN low
should be showing square waves
pointing upwards.

Check that CAN high and CAN low


are not mixed up.

Check selected node ID.

This can indicate that the node has


wrong id strapped telling the node to
participate in the system with wrong
role.

Software tools
5.1

Overview

There are some related tools to the SCS2, which support it in different ways. A brief description of these tools is given
below.

5.2

ABE

ABE (Application Builder Environment) is a tool for developing and configuring the spreader program, which controls
the logic of the spreader. ABE generates a load file. For more detailed see the separate manual.

5.3

BMS

BMS ultra light (Bromma Monitoring System ultra light) is a tool for monitoring events and reading status of I/O in the
SCS2. BMS can also be used to download new programs to the SCS2. For more detailed see the separate manual.

Manual
File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual

10
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41

2005 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

Manual

SCS Anybus Gateway

Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2005-03-08 10:41

Version:

Page:

11

11(13)

Miscellaneous
6.1

Data sheet

Parameter

Note

Min

Max

Unit

Operating voltage
Current consumption
Temperature
EMC conformity

Power connector
Operating voltage 24 V DC
Operating temperature
In accordance with 89/336/EEC:

10
50
-20

28
200
+85

V DC
mA
0
C

EN 61000-6-4:2001 (Emission requirements)


EN 55011 (Radiated emission)
EN 61000-6-2:2001 (Immunity requirements)
EN 61000-4-2 (Immunity: ESD)
EN 61000-4-3 (Immunity: RF electromagnetic field)
EN 61000-4-4 (Immunity: Fast transients)
EN 61000-4-5 (Immunity: Surge) (2)

Controller
Memory

32bit controller running at 16MHz quartz


Program 1.4Mb
Log 128kb
Scan time
System scan time
50
ms
Node scan time
5
ms
Serial interfaces
BCAN Bromma CAN based bus
RS232 For PC communication
Field bus slave to those field buses supplied by
HMS.
Diagnostics
System diagnostics
Spreader functionality diagnostics
Event and error log
FB programming
Basic binary functions (AND, OR etc.)
Basic Analogue functions (compare, add etc.)
Basic controller functions(PWM, regulators etc.)
Spreader controller functions
Note 2) For compliance with EN 61000-6-2 the power cable and the serial port cable have to be limited to 10 meters in
length

Manual
File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual

11
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41

2005 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

6.2

Project No

Manual

SCS Anybus Gateway

Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2005-03-08 10:41

Version:

Page:

11

12(13)

Dimensions

Figure 3. The SCS2 Anybus Gateway node equiped with a Profibus slave card. All dimensions are in mm.

Manual
File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual

12
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41

2005 Bromma Conquip AB

Document:

Project:

Project No

Manual

SCS Anybus Gateway

Prepared by:

Date:

Andy Lewis

2005-03-08 10:41

Version:

Page:

11

13(13)

Appendix A (Error messages)

The error messages, which are generated by the system, can be viewed in the display as well as in the log (using the
BMS). See main system manual for list of codes.

Manual
File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual

13
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41

2005 Bromma Conquip AB

11 Fault finding diagnostics


Fault finding in hydraulic system
NOISY PUMP OR EXCESSIVE HEAT
Check oil level and that filter is clean.
Check that pump is functioning correctly as illustrated in the "system test".
Particularly check that setting of pressure relief valves are correct (as
enclosed sheet) and that the pump suction line (inlet) is not blocked.
Pump suction is checked by removing drain line and measuring flow at
running pressure of 100 BAR.
Maximum flow should be 1 litre/min. If greater than this, replace the pump.
TWISTLOCKS DO NOT OPERATE
Check manual operation of the solenoid valve.
If twistlocks work then check electrical supply & solenoid.
NOTE! Blockading pin must be in the "up" position!

IF TWISTLOCKS DO NOT WORK


Check that pump pressure is correct.
Check pressure relief valve.
When valve is operated manually the pressure should remain at working
pressure. If it decreases check the seals in the cylinder.
Remove the cylinder and ensure that the twistlocks are free to rotate.
Check directional valve.

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

11 01 ENG
rev.

Fault finding in electrical system


HYDRAULIC PUMP MOTOR STOPPED
Possible cause
3 phase supply missing.
Motor contactor not functioning.
Feed from crane missing.

Action______________
____
Check cable, plug, socket.
Check crane control signal.
Check connection.

HYDRAULIC PUMP MOTOR RUNS BUT KEEPS TRIPPING OUT


Action________________
__
Possible cause
Pump pressure too high or pump faulty. Refer to Hydraulic section.
Pump motor faulty.
Change motor.
Motor supply has one missing phase.
Check to find where supply is
connected and repair.
TWISTLOCKS WILL NOT LOCK/UNLOCK
Possible cause__________________
Pumps stopped.
Crane spreader is fitted with the safety
feature only work with all four landing
switches actuated.
If timer fitted timer faulty set wrongly.
Check if fault is hydraulic by
operating valve by hand.
Check supply to solenoid if yes.
Check leads and plugs to solenoids.
Check blockading circuit.
Check supply at B and C junction boxes.

FLIPPER WILL NOT OPERATE


Possible cause
Pump stopped.
Check if fault is mechanical or hydraulic
by operating valve by hand.
Check supply to solenoid if yes.
Check flipper supplies from crane.

Action________________
__
Check pump procedure.
Check that the spreader is correctly
landed on the container.
Replace or set to 0,5 or 2 sec.
Refer to hydraulic section.
Replace solenoid.
Repair or replace
Check relays, check limit switch and
adjust or replace. Check connection.
Check connections. Replace main
supply cable.

Action________________
__
Check pump procedure.
Carry out mechanical hydraulic
procedure.
Replace solenoid.
Check crane controls. Check plugs,
socket and cable.

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

11 02 ENG
rev.

12 Appendices
Units & conversion tables
LENGTH
1 ft
1m
1 in
1 mm

= 0,3048 m
= 3,2808 ft
= 25,4 mm
= 0,03937 in

WEIGHT
1 lb
1 kg
1 ton
1 Lt
1 tonne

= 0,4536 kg
= 2,2046 lb
= 1 t = 2000 lb = 907 kg = 0,893 Lt= 0,907 tonne
= 2240 lb = 1016 kg = 1,016 tonne = 1,120 ton
= 1 mT = 2204 lb = 1000 kg = 0,9842 Lt = 1,103 ton

VOLUME
1l

= 0,21997 UKgal = 0,26417 USgal

PRESSURE
1 bar

= 10 N/cm2 = 1,02 Kp/cm2 = 14,503 lbf/in2

POWER
1 Hp
1 kW

= 0,746 kW
= 1,341 Hp

TORQUE
1 Kpm

= 9,81 Nm = 7,233 lbf

FORCE
1 Kgf = 1 kp = 9,81 N = 2,2046 lbf
TEMPERATURE
dgr C = 5 (dgr F-32)
9
A = ampere
o
C = degrees centigrade
c/s = cycles per second
o
F = degrees Fahrenheit
ft = foot
gal = gallon
Hp = horse power
Hz = hertz
in = inch
kg = kilogramme
Kgf = kilopond force

l = litre
lb = pound
lbf= pound force
m = meter
min= minute
n = newton
s = second
t = tonne
v = volt
w = watt
m = micron

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

12 01 ENG
rev.

Hydraulic symbols

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

12 02 ENG
rev.

Electrical symbols

BROMMA CONQUIP AB

12 03 ENG
rev.

PEINER Greifer

DOCUMENTATION
Greifer-Typ / Grab type:
MZGL 10000-3-L
Auftrags-Nr. / Com.-no.:
AB00001867
Werks-Nr. / Serial-no.:
2291 / 2292

Salzgitter Maschinenbau AG
Windmhienbergstrae 20-22
38259 Salzgitter/Germany

Telefon:
-^49 5341 302 647
Telefax:
H-49 5341 302 424

E-Mail:
peiner@smag.de
Internet
vmfw.smag.de
www.peiner.de

Vorstand:
Sebastian H. Brandes (Vorsitzender)
Jrgen Bialek
Vorsitzender des Aufsichtsrates:
Ulrich Decker

Sitz der Cesellschaft Salzgitter Bad


Registergericht
Amtsgericht Braunschweig
Registernummen
HRB 201389

13.01.2000

OSMAG

Salzgitter Maschinenbau

BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER

Tl

FEINER Greifer

Sortier-Nr.

Biatt-Nr.

A 01.0186-1 D

1-1

I n h a l t s v e r z e i c h n i s

Blatt-Nr.
1.0

Maschinenkarte

2.0

Beschreibung und bersichten

2.1
2.1.1

Grundgert: Bau- und Funktionsbeschreibung


Baubeschreibung

2.1.2

Funktionsbeschreibung

2.2

Schaltplan, hydraulisch 2303.3934

2.4

Teiiebenennungsplan

3.0

Betriebsanleitung

3.1

Hinweise auf Beachtung der U W

3.2
3.2.1

Inbetriebnahme
Erst-Inbetriebnahme

3.2.2

Tgliche Inbetriebnahme

3.3

Hinweise fr den Betrieb

3.4

Auerbetriebnahme

3.5

Wieder-Inbetriebnahme

3.6

Transport

4.0

Instandhaltung

4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5

Pflege und Wartung


lwechsel
Schmieranweisung
lfilter
Motor
Kondenswasser

Salzgltter Mascliinenbau AG
Wlndmhienbergstrae 20-22
38259 Salzgltter / Germany

Telefon:
+49 (0)53 41 / 302 647
Telefax:
+49 (0)53 41 / 302 424

E-mail:
pelnergismaa.de
Internet:
www.smag.de
www.pelner.de

Sortier-Nr.

3-1
4/1-3

A 01.0252 D
A 01.0316/1-3 D

5/1-2

A 01.0419/1-2 D

7-1

A 01.0465 D

8/1-2

A 01.0551/1-2 D

8/1-2
8/1-2

A 01.0551/1-2 D
A 01.0551/1-2 D

9-1

A 01.0126 D

9-2

AOI.0580 D

9-2

A 01.0580 D

9-2

A 01.0580 D

10-1
10-1
10-1
10-1
10-1

A 01.0602/1-2 D
A 01.0602/1-2 D
A 01.0602/1-2 D
A 01.0602/1-2 D
A 01.0602/1-2 D

Vorstand:
Sebastian H. Brandes (Vorsitzender),
Jrgen Bialek
Vorsitzender des Aufsichtsrates:
Ulrich Decker

Sitz der Gesellschaft: Salzgltter Bad


Registergericht:
Amtsgericht Braunschwelg
Registernummer:
HRB 201 389

13.01.2000

OSAAAG
I M H H SalzgitterMaschinenbau

BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER

PEiNERGreifer

Sortier-Nr.

Biatt-Nr.

A 01.0186-2 D

1-2

I n h a l t s v e r z e i c h n i s

Blatt-Nr.

Sortier-Nr.

4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3

Durchzufhrende Prfungen
lstand prfen
Druckprfung und Einstellung
Sonstige Prfungen

10-2
10-2
10-2

A 01.0657/1-2 D
A 01.0657/1-2 D
A 01.0657/1-2 D

4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
4.3.5

Instandsetzung
Allgemeines
Demontage
Reparatur
Montage
Steuerblock

10-3
10-3
10-4
10-5
10-6

A 01.0751/1-2 D
A 01.0751/1-2 D
A 01.0804 D
A 01.0020 D
A 01.0904/1-2 D

4.4

lempfehlung

11/1-2

A 05.1800/1-2 D

5.0

Strung - Kennzeichen - Fehlerquellen

5.1

Greifer arbeitet nicht

12/1-2

A 01.0955/1-2 D

5.2

Greifer bringt keine Leistung

12/1-2

A 01.0955/1-2 D

5.3

Strungen an der Hydraulik

12/1-2

A 01.0955/1-2 D

6.0

Ersatzteilliste

Saizgitter Maschinenbau AG
WindmOhlenbergstrae 20-22
38259 Salzgltter/Germany

Telefon:
+49 (0)53 41 / 302 647
Telefax:
+49 (0)53 41 / 302 424

E-mall:
pelnerlgismao.de
Internet:
www.smag.de
www.pelner.de

Vorstand:
Sebastian H. Brandes (Vorsitzender),
Jrgen Bialek
Vorsitzender des Aufsichtsrates:
Ulrich Decker

Sitz der Gesellschaft: Salzgltter Bad


Registergericht:
Amtsgericht Braunschwelg
Registernummer:
HRB 2 0 1 3 8 9

Maschinenkarte / Technische Daten

Salzgitter Maschinenbau

Auftrags-Nr.:

AB00001867

Erzeugnis:

MZGL 10000-3-L

Materlal-Nr.:

1000052928

Werks-Nr.:

2291 / 2292

Baujahr:

2011

Eigengewicht:

7085 kg

erf. Krantragfhigkeit:

17.085 kg

Betriebsanleitung: A 01.0186

Fllvolumen / zulssige Tragfhigkeit

( )

Fllvolumen [m^]

Schttgewicht [t/m^]

zul. Tragfhigkeit / SWL [t]

Vi = 10,0

1,0

10,0

Schttgutkrnung:

1,0 - max. 50 mm

Theoretische Arbeitszeiten (frei im Raum / ohne Schttqutaufnahme)

Greifer ffnen
Greifer schlieen

50 Hz

60 Hz

8 sec.
14-18 sec.

sec.
sec.

Elektrische Daten

Betriebsart:
IVIotor-Typ:
Aussetzbetrieb:
Motorleistung:
Spannung:
Frequenz:
Strom art:
Nennstrom:

28
400
50
57

Schutzart:
Isolierklasse:
max. Schalthufigkeit:
Schaltplan-Nr.:
Steckvorrichtung:
Steuerspannung

S6
180L-4
40 % ED
kW
V
Hz
Drehstrom
A + 10%

IP65
H
2307.9520
ODU-UW
220 V/50Hz

Hvdrauiische Daten
max. Betriebsdruck

Messstelle MA
Messstelle MB
Messstelle MP
Messstelle MPI
Messstelle MP2
Messstelle MLS
Pumpentyp:
Steuerblock:
Zylindergre:
eingefllte lsorte:
Inhalt ltank:
Filtertyp:
Filterfeinheit:
zul. Betriebstemperatur:
Erstellt:

12.04.2011 / GK-Heuer

Greifer ffnen [10 bar]

Greifer schlieen [10 bar]

230
120
V30D-075
AV 4298 NG20 E
180/110x750 Hub
HLP 46
255 1
Argo
i6(c) = 200 Exapor
-5C bis +85C

A(
Salzgitter Maschinenbau

Abmessungen

Erstellt:

12.04.2011 / GK - Heuer

Maschinenkarte / Technische Daten

05.11.2008

OSAAAG
UMI!*

Salzgitter AAaschinenbau

BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER

PEINER Greifer

2.0

Beschreibung und bersichten

2.1

Grundgert: Bau- und Funl<tionsbeschreibung

2.1.1

Baubeschreibung (siehe Blatt-Nr. 7-1

Sortier-Nr.

Biatt-Nr.

A 01.0252 D

3-1

Der PEINER Motor-Zweischalengreifer hat folgenden Aufbau:


Die beiden Schalen", sie dienen zur Aufnahme des Schttgutes, sind mittels Bolzen an
der Unteren Traverse" angelenkt. Diese Bolzen bilden die Drehpunkte der Schalen. Die
Schneiden der Schalen" bestehen aus verschleifestem Werkstoff.
Die Untere Traverse" ist als lbehlter ausgebildet. Auf der Traverse senkrecht
aufgebaut ist das Hydrauiikaggregat"; bestehend aus Motor und einer im lbehlter
hngenden Hochdruck-Axial-Regelpumpe, sowie der Steuereinrichtung. Zum Schutz ist
das Hydrauiikaggregat" mit einer Haube abgedeckt. Durch die tiefe Anordnung des
Hydraulikaggregates" erhlt der PEINER Motor-Zweischalengreifer eine geringe
Bauhhe und gnstige Schwerpunktlage.
Beidseitig des Hydraulikaggregates" sind die Hubzylinder" angeordnet. Ihre Festpunkte
sind in der Unteren Traverse" und Oberen Traverse". Durch Ein- bzw. Ausfahren der
Kolbenstangen werden die Schalen" geschlossen bzw. geffnet. Die Kolbenstangen
der
Hubzylinder
sind oberflchenbehandelt
und
korrosionsgeschtzt.
Die
Steuereinrichtung ist ber Hydraulikschluche mit den Hubzylindern" verbunden.
Als Verbindungsglied zwischen der Oberen Traverse" und den Schalen" sind die
Lenkarme" angeordnet.
Ebenfalls an der Oberen Traverse" befindet sich die Aufhngung". Sie wird mit dem
Tragmittel des vorhandenen Hebezeuges verbunden.
Die Stromzufhrung zum Motor" erfolgt ber Steckvorrichtung" und Gummischlauchleitung. Um Schden vorzubeugen, wird die Steckvorrichtung" mittels Zugentlastung"
entlastet.
Smtliche Baugruppen und Teile bestehen aus hochwertigen Baustoffen und sind gut
austauschbar. Die Lagerbuchsen sind aus seewasserbestndigem Werkstoff gefertigt.
PEINER Motor-Zweischalengreifer mit Einschubelementen (siehe Teiiebenennungsplan,
Blatt-Nr. 7-1) knnen nach Entfernen dieser Einschubelemente Schttgter mit grerer
Schttgutdichte aufnehmen. Verschiedene Schttgutdichten sind in der Maschinenkarte
genannt.

13.09.1999

OSMAG
I B B ^ Salzgitter Maschinenbau

2.1.2

FEINER Greifer

BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
Sortier-Nr.

Biatt-Nr.

A 01.0316-1 D

4-1

Funktionsbeschreibung (siehe Bl.-Nr. 5-1, Schaltplan)


Durchlaufbetrieb (S6)
Regelpumpe (Leistungsregler plus LS-Regler)
Steuerblock NG-20-E / NG 30-E
Grundstzliches:
Betriebsart S6 bedeutet, da bei in Betrieb genommenem Greifer der Antriebsmotor und
damit auch die Hydraulikpumpe nur in eine Drehrichtung rotiert. Die Umsteuerung der
Bewegungsrichtung der Arbeitszylinder wird mittels jeweils einem 2-Wege-Einbauventil
fr "Greifer ffnen" und "Greifer schlieen" bewerkstelligt. Wird bei rotierendem
Antriebsmotor kein Ventil zugeschaltet (Verbraucher), d. h. die Greiferschalen bewegen
sich weder in Richtung "Greifer ffnen" noch in Richtung "Greifer schlieen", saugt die
Hydraulikpumpe nur soviel l an, wie zur Aufrechterhaltung von Schmierung und Betriebssicherheit der Pumpe erforderlich ist. Dieser Betriebszustand der Pumpe wird
nachfolgend auch mit dem Begriff "Null-Hubregelung" beschrieben.
Der Load-Sensing-Regler, kurz LS-Regler genannt, wird lediglich als "Min./Max.Schalter" eingesetzt, d. h. mittels LS-Regler erkennt die Pumpe,
1.

da ein Verbraucher zugeschaltet worden ist und die Pumpe auf max. Frdermenge ausschwenken mu,

2.

da ein Verbraucher weggeschaltet worden ist und die Pumpe in die "Null-Hubregelung" zurckschwenken mu,

3.

da ein am Druckbegrenzungsventil (DV1 bzw. DV2) eingestellter Systemdruck erreicht worden ist und die Pumpe in Richtung "Null-Hubregelung" zurckschwenken
mu, um nur noch soviel l zu frdern, wie zur Aufrechterhaltung des Systemdruckes erforderlich ist.

Der Leistungsregler der Pumpe ist auf die maximale Leistung des Antriebsmotors abgestimmt, d. h. in Abhngigkeit von der Antriebsleistung wird bei berschreiten eines
bestimmten Betriebsdruckes die Frdermenge der Pumpe bei weiter ansteigendem Betriebsdruck kontinuierlich der Leistungsabgabe des Antriebsmotors angepat. Die hydraulische Leistung, das Produkt aus Frdermenge und Druck, bleibt somit konstant.

Funktionsbeschreibung "Greifer ffnen":


Magnet (M2) wird vom Vorsteuerventil des 2-Wege-Einbauventiles (WV2) geschaltet.
Sobald das Vorsteuerventil die Schaltposition erreicht, schwenkt die Pumpe aus der
"Null-Hubregelung" und frdert den maximalen Volumenstrom. Gleichzeitig wird das
Hauptventil (Kegelsitzventil) vom 2-Wege-Einbauventil (WV2) rckseitig entlastet, d. h.
Steuerl kann ber den Anschlu (T1) in den ltank entweichen. Der anstehende
Pumpendruck ffnet das Hauptventil (WV2) und das l fliet durch die Druckleitung
(Po) ber das geffnete Hauptventil (WV2), den internen Blockanschlu (P2), das Rckschlagventil (R2), den Steuerblockanschlu (B) und eine Schlauchleitung zur Kolbenseite (KS) der Arbeitszylinder.

13.09.1999

OSMAG
iHMiiiiiww

SalzgitterMaschinenbau

BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER

PEINER Greifer

Sortier-Nr.

Biatt-Nr.

A 01.0316-2 D

4-2

Gleichzeitig wird ber die Steuerleitung (St1) das Sperrventil (SV1) geffnet und ber
die Steuerleitung (St2) das Sperrventil (SV2) geschlossen. Weiterhin wird ber das
Wechselventil (WV) die Signalleitung (LS) der Funktion "Greifer ffnen" zugeschaltet.
Mit der Hubbewegung der Arbeitszylinder entweicht das l aus der Kolbenstangenseite
(KSS) der Arbeitszylinder und wird ber eine Schlauchleitung, den Blockanschlu (A)
und das geffnete Sperrventil (SV1) der Druckleitung zugefhrt, d. h. zum ffnen des
Greifers addieren sich die Frdermengen von Pumpe und rckflieendem l (Eilgangschaltung).
Wird der am Druckbegrenzungsventil (DV2) eingestellte Systemdruck "Greifer ffnen"
erreicht, ffnet das Druckbegrenzungsventil (DV2) und l wird ber den Anschlu (T)
und den Rcklauffilter in den Tank geleitet. Die Dse (D2) ist so bemessen, da weniger l aus der Druckleitung Po nachflieen kann als ber das Druckbegrenzungsventil
abfliet. Der daraus resultierende Differenzdruck in der Leitung (LS) wird als Signal auf
den "LS-Regler" bertragen. Die Pumpe schwenkt zurck und frdert nur noch soviel l,
wie zur Aufrechterhaltung des Systemdruckes erforderlich ist.
Jetzt kann der Magnet (M2) abgeschaltet werden und die Leitung (LS) kann sich ber
das Vorsteuerventil des 2-Wege-Einbauventiles (WV2) und den Anschlu (T1) zum
Tank hin druckentlasten. Die Pumpe schwenkt in die "Null-Hubregelung".
Zur zustzlichen Systemabsicherung (z. B. Ausfall der Pumpenregeleinheit) befindet
sich in der Druckleitung (Po) ein Druckbegrenzungsventil (DV3), das fest auf 280 300 bar eingestellt ist. Je nach Pumpentyp kann dieses Ventil auch pumpenintern angeordnet sein.

Funktionsbeschreibung "Greifer schlieen":


Durch Schalten von Magnet (M1) des 2-Wege-Einbauventiles (WV1) wird der Schlievorgang eingeleitet.
Der Ablauf gestaltet sich analog der Beschreibung "Greifer ffnen" mit der Ausnahme,
da beim Einfahren der Kolbenstangen das aus der Kolbenseite (KS) der Arbeitszylinder entweichende l ber eine Schlauchleitung, den Blockanschlu (B), das geffnete
Sperrventil (SV2), den Blockanschlu (T) und den Rcklauffilter (F) zum Tank geleitet
wird. Zum Schlieen des Greifers steht also lediglich die einfache Pumpenfrdermenge
zur Verfgung.
Der beim Schlieen der Schalen ansteigende Druck in der Leitung A, wird durch den
Druckschalter DS begrenzt. Wird der am Druckschalter DS eingestellte Systemdruck
Greifer schlieen" erreicht, unterbricht ein im Druckschalter eingebauter elektrischer
Kontakt die elektrische Verbindung zum Magnet (M1) und mit der Magnetabschaltung
kann sich die Leitung (LS) ber das Vorsteuerventil des 2-Wege-Einbauventiles (WV1)
und den Anschlu (T1) zum Tank hin druckentlasten. Die Pumpe schwenkt in die NullHubregelung. Das Druckbegrenzungsventil (DV1) liegt in der Druckeinstellung ber dem
Einstellwert des Druckschalters DS", d. h. DV 1 ist bei der Funktion Greifer ffnen" und
Greifer schlieen" ohne Funktion (siehe Tabelle Standard Druckeinstellung")

13.09.1999

BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER

MAG

Salzgitter Maschinenbau

FEINER Greifer

Sortier-Nr.
A 01.0316-3 D

Biatt-Nr.
4-3

Der maximale Druck in der Leitung A wird durch den Druckschalter (DS) bestimmt. Bei
Erreichen des max. Druckes an DS wird das Magnet (M1) abgeschaltet (siehe Grundstzliches unter Punkt 2).
Bei abgeschalteten Ventilen (WV1, WV2) verhindern die Rckschlagventile (R1, R2)
und die Sperrventile (SV1, SV2) ein selbstttiges ffnen bzw. Schlieen des Greifers.

Leistungsregelung:

ACHTUNG!

Die Drehrichtung der Pumpe ist rechts, mit Blick auf die Pumpenantriebswelle!

Sollte bei der ersten Inbetriebnahme der Greifer weder ffnen noch schlieen, knnte
der Motor die falsche Drehrichtung haben. Zuleitung zum Motor umklemmen.

Standard-Druckeinstellung:
Greifer schlieen

DS
230 bar

DV1
250 bar

DV2

120 bar

Greifer ffnen

DV3

280-300 bar

Sicherheitsventil
Einstellwerte siehe auch Maschinenkarte.

Manometeranschlsse:
Die Systemdrcke knnen an den hierfr vorgesehenen Mestellen berprft werden
(Drcke siehe Maschinenkarte).
Schlieen:
ffnen:

MP1,MA
MP2, MB

Pumpendruck:
LS-Druck:

MP, MP1,MP2
MLS

Rattern der Schalen:


Um whrend des Schlievorganges das Rattern der Schalen zu verhindern, sollte das
entsperrbare Rckschlagventil SVl leicht angedrosselt werden. (Einstellung durch
Stellschraube siehe Bl.-Nr. 10-6)
ACHTUNG !

SV1 nicht zu weit zudrehen, da sich sonst das l sehr stark erwrmt!

13.09.1999

0 SAAAG
Salzgitter IVlaschinenbau

2.2

BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER

PEINER Greifer

Sortier-Nr.

Blatt-Nr.

A 01.0419-1 D

5-1

Schaltplan 2303.3934 (mit Druckschalter)


Durchlaufbetrieb (S6)
Regelpumpe (Leistungsregler plus LS-Regler)
Steuerblock NG 20-E, Eilgangausfhrung
h

KSS

KS

mi>SV2j-

05

MA

"iSVI

512 i

LU Iii
o
I CM
o O
CM z
o
O _o
z
I
_
g c
CO o
X3
u

513

SU

V RZ

WV

02

Ol
DV2

DVI

-6MP1
CD
CO

PI

!P2

Wh

JS

B-1
WV1

WV2

Tl

4
300

bar

n.

c
o
o

Mij

MP
Po

(D
CO

0) 0)

LS

13.09.1999

l ^ ^ l SalzgitterMaschinenbau

BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
PEiNERGreifer

Sortier-Nr.

Blatt-Nr.

A 01.0419-2 D

5-2

Bezeichnungen:
A
B
D1,D2
DS
DV1,DV2
DVS
E
F
KS
KSS
LS
M
M1,M2
MA, MB, MP
MP1,MP2
N
P
Po
P1,P2
R1,R2
St1 - St4
SV1
SV2
T
T1
WV
WV1, WV2

Leitung (Greifer sclilieen)


Leitung (Greifer ffnen)
Dse
Drucksciialter
Druckbegrenzungsventil
Druckbegrenzungsventil (Sicherheitsventil)
Eilgangausfhrung
Filter
Kolbenseite
Kolbenstangenseite
Signalleitung "Load Sensing"
Elektromotor
Magnet
Manometeranschlu
Manometeranschlu
Normalausfhrung
Hydraulikpumpe
Druckleitung
Pumpenanschlu
Rckschlagventil
Steuerieitung
Sperrventil mit Hubbegrenzung
Sperrventil
Hydrauliktank
Tankleitung
Wechselventil
Wegeventil

03.05.2001

BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
Sortier-Nr.

Biatt-Nr.

A 01.0465 D

7-1

13.09.1999

Salzgitter AAaschinenbau

BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
PEINER Greifer

3.0

Betriebsanleitung

3.1

Hinweise zur Beachtung der U W

Sortier-Nr.

Blatt-Nr.

A 01.0551-1

8-1

Bestimmungen der UW-Lastaufnalimemittel sind zu beachten.


ACHTUNG !

Beim Besteigen des Greifers mu sich das Bedienungs- und


Wartungspersonal zur Vermeidung von Unfllen in geeigneter
Weise und entsprechend der Unfallverhtungs-vorschriften vor
Absturz und anderen Gefahren sichern bzw. schtzen.

3.2

Inbetriebnahme

3.2.1

Erst-Inbetriebnahme
- Vorhandene Spannung mit Spannung des Greifers prfen, (siehe Maschinenkarte).
-

lstand prfen (siehe 4.2.1). Evtl. beim Transport verlorengegangenes l nachfllen


(siehe lempfehlung Bl.-Nr. 11-1).

Bei Temperaturen unter -10C l anwrmen oder Greifer im geschlossenen Zustand


gegen Schlieen fahren, bis sich das l auf ca. 0C erwrmt hat.

- Aufhngung mit Tragmittel verbinden, Tragfhigkeit des Hebezeuges beachten.


-

Schutzkappen der Steckvorrichtung entfernen.

Greifer mit Steckvorrichtung verbinden. Auf Drehrichtung achten!


Bei nicht montierter Steckvorrichtung diese nach Schaltplan anschlieen.

Zugentlastung anbringen;
Steckvorrichtung ausben.

Greifer probefahren; vorher Punkt 4.3 beachten.

Gummischlauchleitung

darf

- Verschraubung auf Dichtheit prfen.


-

Nach ca. 50 Betriebsstunden lfilter wechseln (siehe Bild).


Normal-Ausfhrung

keinerlei Zug

auf

die

13.09.1999

OSMAG

3.2.2

Salzgitter Maschinenbau

BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
FEINER Greifer

Sortier-Nr.

Blatt-Nr.

A 01.0551-2

8-2

Tgliche Inbetriebnahme
-

lstand prfen (siehe 4.2.1).

l anwrmen bei Temperaturen unter -10C oder Greifer im geschlossenen Zustand


gegen Schlieen fahren, bis sich das l auf ca. 0C erwrmt hat.

Steckvorrichtung auf einwandfreien Sitz und Zugentlastung prfen.

- Verschraubungen, Schluche und Zylinder auf Dichtheit prfen.

27.11.2003

OSAAAG
i Salzgitter AAaschinenbau

3.3

BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
PEINER

Greifer

Sortier-Nr.

Biatt-Nr.

A 01.0126 D

9-1

Hinweise fr den Betrieb


Bei Sciittgtern, bei denen der Greifer nicht einwandfrei schliet, empfiehlt es sich,
beim Schlievorgang den Greifer etwas anzuheben. Um den maximalen Fllungsgrad
zu erreichen, sollte der Greifer nach Mglichkeit gerade aufgesetzt werden.
Greifer nie mit groer Geschwindigkeit auf das Schttgut aufschlagen lassen.
Starkes Anschlagen des Greifers ist zu vermeiden, um Beschdigungen zu verhindern.

ACHTUNG!

Der Antriebsmotor sollte nach Erreichen der Position Greifer


geffnet" abgeschaltet werden, da sonst das Hydraulikl whrend
des normalen Umschlagbetriebes unntig erwrmt wird.

05.11.2008

BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER

OSMAG

Salzgitter Maschinenbau

3.4

PEINER

Greiter

Sortier-Nr.

Biatt-Nr.

A 01.0580 D

9-2

Auerbetriebnahme
-

Der Greifer ist im geschlossenen Zustand abzustellen, so da die Kolbenstangen


eingefahren sind.
Beim Abstellen an Bord von Seeschiffen sollte zwischen den Bodenschneiden ein
Spalt von 1 - 2 cm eingestellt sein (Wasserablauf).
Das freie Ende der Kolbenstange zum zustzlichen Schutz vor Korrosion mit Haftschmierstoff einstreichen.
Wird der Greifer langfristig auer Betrieb genommen, sind grundstzlich alle
Schmierstellen mit Fett zu versorgen.
Ferner ist bei lngerer Auerbetriebnahme darauf zu achten, da der Greifer in
Abstnden von ca. 3 Monaten mehrere Male bettigt wird, um eine Korrosionsbildung
bzw. ein Verharzen des Hydraulikles in den Steuerelementen zu verhindern.

3.5

Die Belftungsffnungen sind durch Aufsetzen der Kunststoffhaube zu verschlieen,


(siehe auch Hinweisschild auf der Oberen Traverse).

Die Steckvorrichtung ist mit Schutzkappen zu versehen.

Wiederinbetriebnahme
- Alle Punkte von 3.2 beachten.
- Auf eventuelle Beschdigungen prfen.

3.6

Transport
Greifer senkrecht stellen und gegen Kippen sichern.
Kolbenstangen gegen Beschdigungen schtzen, wenn Greifer im geffneten Zustand transportiert wird.

05.11.2008

QSMAG
1

Salzgitter Maschinenbau

4.0

Instandhaltung

4.1

Pflege und Wartung

4.1.1

lwechsel

BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
PEiNERGreifer

Sortier-Nr.

Biatt-Nr.

A 01.0602-1 D

10-1

Der erste lwechsel ist nach ca. 500 Betriebsstunden vorzunehmen. Weitere lwechsel
nach jeweils 1000 Betriebsstunden - sptestens nach 1 Jahr.
Auergewhnliche Betriebszustnde knnen eine unzulssig hohe Verunreinigung oder
eine Alterung des les verursachen. In solchen Fllen wird empfohlen, bereits vor dem
flligen lwechsel eine lanalyse im Labor des lherstellers durchfhren zu lassen.
-

larten, siehe Tabelle: lempfehlung Bl.-Nr. 11-1

Durchfhrung:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

geffneten Greifer absetzen


lmestab herausschrauben (Tankbelftung)
geeigneten Auffangbehlter unter die lablaschraube positionieren
lablaschraube entfernen und reinigen
Tankfllung ablassen (bei betriebswarmer Anlage)
Tank reinigen
lfiltereinsatz wechseln
lablaschraube einschrauben
Tank fllen (ber Filter)
lstand prfen (siehe 4.2.1)
Tank luftdicht verschlieen, wenn Greiferschalen geffnet sind

05.11.2008

OSAAAG
BIM8I

4.1.2

Salzgitter AAaschinenbau

B
PEINER

BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER

Greifer

Sortier-Nr.

Blatt-Nr.

A 01.0602-2 D

10-1

Schmieranweisung
Alle Schmierstellen (rot gekennzeichnet) G, H und K sind wchentlich abzuschmieren.
Schmierstelle I alle 6 Monate schmieren. (Fettempfehlung siehe Bl.-Nr. 11-2;
Schmierstellen im Teiiebenennungsplan Bl.-Nr. 7-1 gekennzeichnet).
Grundstzlich sollten vor jeder Wiederinbetriebnahme alle Schmierstellen mit Fett
versorgt werden.

4.1.3

lfilter
Bei Neuanlagen ist der Filtereinsatz nach etwa 50 Betriebsstunden auszuwechseln ansonsten nach jedem lwechsel. Ferner ist der lfilter nach Reparaturarbeiten an der
Hydraulik zu kontrollieren und ggf. der Filtereinsatz zu reinigen bzw. zu wechseln.

4.1.4

Motor
Nach 15000 Betriebsstunden Lager reinigen und zur Hlfte mit lithiumverseiftem Fett,
Tropfpunkt 160-180 C, fllen.

4.1.5

Kondenswasser
Kondenswasser ablassen. Dazu Kondenswasserablaschraube entfernen (nur bei UWBetrieb).

13.09.1999

BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER

QSAAAG
E M

PEINER Greifer

Salzgitter Maschinenbau

4.2

Durchzufhrende Prfungen

4.2.1

lstand prfen

Sortier-Nr.

Blatt-Nr.

A 01.0657-1 D

10-2

Der lstand wird im geschlossenen Zustand, also bei eingefahrenen Kolbenstangen


gemessen.

Greifer mssen gerade stehen.

Maximaler oder minimaler lstand wird am lmestab abgelesen.

- Zuviel l erzeugt berdruck im Tank.


- Zuwenig l fhrt zur berhitzung der Hydraulikanlage und kann Pumpenschden zur
Folge haben.
4.2.2

Bei erforderlicher lnachfllung siehe lempfehlung Bl.-Nr. 11-1.

Druckprfung, Druckeinstellung (siehe Bild)


Die Druckprfung kann an folgenden Stellen vorgenommen werden:
Bei geschlossener Haube ffnungsdruck am Hubzylinder Mestelle MB und
Schliedruck am Hubzylinder MA.
Bei geffneter Haube ffnungsdruck am Steuerblock Mestelle MB und Schliedruck
am Steuerblock Mestelle MA.
An der Steuerplatte kann man (bei geffneter Haube) den Hauptpumpendruck und den
Load-Sensing-Druck messen.
Bei Druckeinstellung mu die Haube geffnet werden. Einstellung des ffnungsdruckes
erfolgt durch Verstellen des Vorsteuerventils fr Druckbegrenzungsventil DV2.
Einstellung des Schliedruckes erfolgt durch Verstellen des Vorsteuerventiles fr
Druckbegrenzungsventil DVI. Daten siehe Maschinenkarte Pkt. 1.0.
Ellgangausfhrung
quick-motion design

MA
MB
MPI
MP

= Greifer schlieen
= Greifer ffnen
= Pumpendruck schlieen
= Pumpendruck

DVI
DV2
MP2
MLS

=
=
=
=

Schlieen
ffnen
Pumpendruck ffnen
Load-Sensing

13.09.1999

OSMAG
W^^si

4.2.3

SalzgitterMaschinenbau

BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
PEiNERGreifer

Sortier-Nr.

Blatt-Nr.

A 01.0657-2 D

10-2

Sonstige Prfungen
-

Schluche auf Beschdigung prfen.

- Verschraubungen und Hubzylinder auf Dichtheit prfen.


-

Schraubenverbindungen prfen.

Lagerverschlei kontrollieren.

Steckvorrichtung und Zugentlastung prfen.

ltemperatur berwachen.

05.11.2008

BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
Sortier-Nr.
A 01.0751-1 D

4.3

Instandsetzung

4.3.1

Allgemeines

Biatt-Nr.
10-3

Bei der Instandsetzung mu grundstzlich folgendes beachtet werden:


Greifer stromlos machen. Nach jeder Demontage bzw. Reparatur ist eine berprfung
der Betriebsdrcke erforderlich. Bei der Druckeinstellung unbedingt die Angaben auf Bl.Nr. 10-2 beachten. Geeignete Prfmanometer sind zu verwenden.

4.3.2

Demontage
1. Schalen
Greifer im geffneten Zustand abstellen. Untere Traverse auf Bcke auflegen, damit
Bolzen entspannt sind. Untere Lenkarmbolzen entfernen. Schalenbolzen entfernen
(eventuell mit Abziehvorrichtung).
2. Lenkarme
Greifer abstellen wie unter Punkt 1 beschrieben. Untere und obere Lenkarmbolzen
entfernen.
3. Hydrauiikaggregat
Greifer im geffneten Zustand abstellen. Zuleitung zum Motor in Steckvorrichtung
abklemmen. Haube komplett entfernen. Schluche entfernen und auslaufendes l
auffangen. Behlterdeckelschrauben herausdrehen. Seil in Motor-Tragsen einhngen und Hydrauiikaggregat herausheben. Je nach Verschmutzungsgrad l filtern
oder erneuern. ltank abdecken (Verschmutzungsgefahr).
4. Pumpe
Das Hydrauiikaggregat, wie unter Punkt 3. beschrieben, demontieren. Hydrauiikaggregat, mit Motor nach unten, auf Bcke abstellen. Rohrleitungen von der Pumpe
zum Behlterdeckel entfernen. Befestigungsschrauben der Pumpe herausdrehen
und Pumpe abnehmen.
5. Steuerblock
Haube ffnen und Schluche am Steuerblock entfernen. Befestigungsschrauben
lsen und Steuerblock herausheben.
6. Motor (in Verbindung mit Punkt 3)
Zuleitung zum Motor in Steckvorrichtung abklemmen. Demontage des Steuerblockes
wie unter Punkt 5 beschrieben. Befestigungsschrauben entfernen. Seil in MotorTragsen einhngen und Motor herausheben.

05.11.2008

H ^ ^ h I

Salzgitter AAaschinenbau

BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
PBNER

Greifer

Sortier-Nr.

Biatt-Nr.

A 01.0751-2 D

10-3

7. Hubzylinder
Greifer im geffneten Zustand abstellen und Hubzylinder in senkrechter Position
fixieren. Die Sicherungsschrauben (Gewindestifte) an den Hutmuttern der Kolbenstangenbefestigung (obere Traverse) lsen und die Hutmuttern entfernen. Mit Hilfe
der Greiferhydraulik knnen die Kolbenstangen aus den Aufnahmekltzen gezogen
werden. Dazu wird die Hydraulik in Betrieb genommen und der Greifer auf
Schlieen" gefahren. Sollten sich die Kolbenstangen nicht lsen, kann durch vorsichtiges Erwrmen der Aufnahmekltze bei gleichzeitiger Bettigung der Hydraulik
(Schlieen") die Verbindung Kolbenstange / Aufnahmeklotz gelst werden. Wenn
die Kolbenstangen vollstndig eingefahren sind, knnen nach Entfernen der Zylinderfhrungsmuttern die Stangendichtungen, Abstreifer und Fhrungsbnder bzw.
Fhrungsbuchsen gewechselt werden.
Sollen die Hubzylinder vollkommen ausgebaut werden, so sind diese nach den Entfernen der Schlauchverbindungen in ein geeignetes Hebezeug einzuhngen. Nach
Lsen der Achshalter an der unteren Traverse mssen die unteren Befestigungsbolzen durch leichtes Anheben der Hubzylinder entlastet werden und die Zylinderbefestigungsbolzen lassen sich seitlich austreiben.
Die Hubzylinder werden auf geeignete Unteriagen abgelegt, d.h. es ist insbesondere
darauf zu achten, da die Kolbenstangen bei der Lagerung und bei Montagearbeiten
nicht beschdigt werden knnen.

22.09.1999

^ ^ ^ ^ Salzgitter AAaschinenbau

4.3.3

BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
PEINER Greifer

Sortier-Nr.

Biatt-Nr.

A 01.0804 D

10-4

Reparatur
1.

Schalen- und Lenkarmlagerbuchsen erneuern


Demontage wie unter 4.3.2 besclirieben. Versclilissene Buclisen durcli neue
ersetzen und mit geeignetem Kleber (z. B. Loctite, Typ 638) sichern.

2.

Bolzen erneuern
Bei Erneuerung der Lagerbuchsen ist die Laufflche der Bolzen zu berprfen.
Bei stark verschlissener Laufflche sollten auch die Bolzen erneuert werden.

3.

Hubzylinder-Dichtungen auswechseln
3.1 Stangendichtung
a)

Flansch entfernen. Defekte Dichtung entfernen und durch neue ersetzen.

b)

In Sonderfllen kann auch zum Austauschen eine geteilte Stangendichtung eingesetzt werden. Bei Ersatzteilbestellung mu dann der
Hinweis geteilte Ausfhrung" in der Bestellung angegeben werden.
Die Vorgehensweise gem Punkt b) sollte wirklich nur in Sonderfllen
zum Tragen kommen.

3.2 Kolbendichtung und O-Ringe


Hubzylinder bis auf den Hubzylinderbolzen demontieren (wie unter 4.3.2 Punkt 7 beschrieben). Stangenfhrung lsen und Kolbenstange komplett, aus
dem Zylinderrohr herausziehen. Es ist hierbei zweckmig, alle Dichtungen
komplett zu wechseln.

4.

Pumpe
Eine eigenstndige Reparatur der Pumpe ist nicht empfehlenswert. Defekte
Pumpe evtl. durch die SMAG reparieren lassen.

5.

Steuerblock
a)

Druckbegrenzungsventil auswechseln - siehe Bl.-Nr. 10-6

b)

Sperrventil wechseln - siehe Bl.-Nr. 10-6.

Beide Deckel entfernen und kompletten Sperrventileinsatz wechseln. Es mssen


alle zum Sperrventileinsatz gelieferten Teile komplett ausgetauscht werden, damit
eine einwandfreie Funktion gewhrleistet ist.

05.11.2008

BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER

4.3.4

Sortier-Nr.

Blatt-Nr.

A 01.0020 D

10-5

Montage
Die Montage ist in umgekelirter Reifienfolge der Demontage vorzunehmen. Bei den
mit Dichtungen versehenen Teilen ist darauf zu achten, da diese beim Einbau nicht
beschdigt werden.
Fr Gelenklager drfen keine Fette mit Bestandteilen aus MoS2 (Molydndisulfid)
venwendet werden, sondern nur druckfeste, lithiumverseifte Fette nach DIN 51825K2k.
Nach erfolgter Montage ist der auf der Maschinenkarte angegebene Betriebsdruck
zu berprfen.

ACHTUNG!

Bei greren Instandsetzungen bitte Kundendienst anfordern!

13.09.1999

B [ ^

4.3.5

Salzgitter AAaschinenbau

BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
PEiNERGreifer

Sortier-Nr.

Biatt-Nr.

A 01.0904-1 D

10-6

Steuerblock NG 20 - Normal- und Eilgangausfhrung

Stellschrauben nur verstellen, wenn Greifer beim ffnen oder Schlieen rattert. Bei
erforderlicher Verstellung folgendermaen vorgehen:
Stellschraube vollkommen herausdrehen und so weit wieder einschrauben, bis Rattern
aufhrt. Der angestaute Druck soll 30 bar nicht berschreiten, da sonst unntige ierwrmung auftritt oder die einwandfreie ffnungs- und Schliefunktion des Greifers nicht
gewhrleistet ist.
Bei Verschmutzung Druckbegrenzungsventileinheit reinigen.

13.09.1999

^ B B ^ Salzgitter

flAaschinenbau

BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER
PEiNERGreifer

Sortier-Nr.

Blatt-Nr.

A 01.0904-2 D

10-6

2/2-Wege-Einbaupatrone

IVIagnet

05.11.2008

BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
LEMPFEHLUNG

4.4

Sortier-Nr.

Biatt-Nr.

A 05.1800-1 D

11-1

Tabelle: lempfehlung - Hydraulikle


Fr den normalen Betrieb ist ein Hydraulikl der ISO-Viskosittsklasse VG 46 zu
verwenden. Fr Sommerbetrieb bzw. Winterbetrieb ist entsprechend der
Umgebungstemperatur ein Hydraulikl der ISO-Viskosittsklasse VG 68 bzw. VG 32 zu
verwenden.
Nachfolgend sind einige geeignete lsorten aufgefhrt; weitere knnen nach den o. g.
Kriterien ausgewhlt werden:
^

ISO-Viskosittsklasse

Winter

Sommer ^

VG 32

VG 46

VG 68

HVLP 32

HLP 46

HLP 68

nach DIN 51524/3 HV

nach D1N51524/2

nach DIN51524/2

ltennperaturberelch

-20C bis +80C

-5C bis +80C

O X bis +80C

Umgebungstemperatur

< -5C bis -20C

-5C bis +30C

> +30C

Vitam HF 32

Vitam GF 46

Vitam GF 68

ENERGOL SHF 32

ENERGOL HLP 46

ENERGOL HLP 68

HYSPIN AWH 32

HYSPIN AWS 46

HYSPIN AWS 68

ESSO

UNIVIS J 32

NUTO H 46

NUTO H 68

MOBIL

DTE 13

DTE 25

DTE 26

SHELL

Tellus Oel T 32

Tellus Oel 46

Tellus Oel 68

Rando Oil HD AZ-32

Rando Oil HD B-46

Rando Oil HD C-68

Norm

ARAL
BP
CASTROL

TEXACO

Sollten diese le nicht beschaffbar sein, kann auf ATF-le (Automatic-TransmissionFluid) ausgewichen werden.
ATF-le gem Spezifikation

DEXRON - Qualitt

Typ A, Suffix A
ARAL

Getriebel SGF 84

Getriebel ATF 22

BP

Autran ATF

Autran DX II

CASTROL

Castrol TQ

Castrol TQ-Dexron II, Fluid 9226

ESSO

ATF-Type A Suffix A

ATF Dexron

MOBIL

ATF 200

ATF 220

SHELL

Donax TM

Donax TA

DEA

Deafluid 1585

Deafluid 4011

05.11.2008

OSAAAG

k O

i I Salzgitter AAaschinenbau

PEiNERGreifer

BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
LEMPFEHLUNG
Sortier-Nr.

Blatt-Nr.

A 05.1800-2 D

11-2

Haftschmierstoff

Lithiumverseiftes Schmierfett

DIN 51513 B C

DIN 51825/2 KTA-L2k

AGIP

FIN 332/F

Longlime Grease 2

ARAL

Sinit FZL 3

Aralub HL 2

AVIA

Avilub BB 21

Avilub Spezialfett WL

BP

Energrease l\/IP-l\/IG2

Energrease LS 2

Calypsoi

Eculit ST

Calypsoi H 442

Castrol

Spheerol SX2

Spheerol AP 2 LZV-EP
Spheerol E PL 2

DEA

Trixolit 2X

Glissando 20

DEFROL

Defrol BC

Defrol Fett KTA-L2k

ESSO

Surett Fluid 4K

Beacon 2

FINA

Cabline 1060

Marson LU

Fuchs

Duotac F 310 L

Renolit MP

Mobil Oil

Mobiltac D

Mobilux 2

Shell

Cardium Fluid C

Alvania R 2
Alvania G 2

25.08.2000

BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER

OSAAAG

PEINER Greifer

PfPP''"* Salzgitter AAaschinenbau

5.0

5.1

5.2

Sortier-Nr.

Biatt-Nr.

A 01.0955-1 D

12-1

Strung - Kennzeichen - Fehlerquellen

- Strung

Kennzeichen

Greifer arbeitet
nicht

Motor luft nicht, Motor


erhlt keine Spannung

Spannung vorhanden

Motor luft

ffnungs- oder
Schliezeiten merklich
vedangsamt

Greifer bringt keine


Leistung

Fehlerquellen

Sicherungen
Schtze
Schlauchleitungen
Anschluklemmen
Schleifringe und Brsten der
Kabeltrommel
- Steckvorrichtung
Motor defekt

Kupplung defekt
Magnete M3, M4 (M1 oder M2)
schalten nicht
- Druckleitung von der Pumpe zum
Steuerblock defekt
- Druckfeder im Druckbegrenzungsventil gebrochen (siehe Bl.Nr. 10-6)

Druckbegrenzungsventil verstellt
(siehe 4.2.2)
- Pumpe verschlissen
- Druckbegrenzungsventil verschmutzt oder Feder ermdet.
Drucknachstellung erforderlich
(siehe Bl.-Nr. 10-6)
- lstand im Tank zu niedrig
ACHTUNG!
Wenn die Pumpe hierbei Luft
ansaugt, fhrt es meistens zur
Zerstrung der Pumpe.
Zuleitung von der Pumpe zum
Steuerblock hat sich gelst oder
ist beschdigt.
Zylinderdichtungen undicht

25.08.2000

QSMAG
i ^

5.0

LB

SalzgitterMaschinenbau

PEiNERGreifer

5.3

Sortier-Nr.

Biatt-Nr.

A 01.0955-2 D

12-2

Strung - Kennzeichen - Fehlerquellen

Strung
5.2

BETRIEBSANLEITUNG
MOTORGREIFER

Greifer bringt keine


Leistung

Strungen an der
Hydraulik

Kennzeichen

Fehlerquellen

Schalen ffnen oder


schlieen selbstttig

Sperrventil im Steuerblock
(Schlie- bzw. ffnungsseite)
O-Ring fr Sperrventilkrper beschdigt
Zylinderdichtungen
Eine Rohrverschraubung ist undicht.

Schalen ffnen und


schlieen nicht

Der Motor hat die falsche Drehrichtung; siehe auch 5.1

Schalen rattern beim


ffnen und Schlieen

Drosselquerschnitt nicht richtig


eingestellt (siehe Bl.-Nr. 10-6)

ltemperatur zu hoch

Die Magnete sind nach Beendigung des Schlie- bzw.


ffnungsvorganges zu lange
eingeschaltet
- Drosselquerschnitt nicht richtig
eingestellt (siehe Bl.-Nr. 10-6)
- Im ltank befindet sich zu wenig
oder ungeeignetes l.
- Wegeventil WV4 defekt. Pumpe
wird nicht auf Frdermenge 0
geregelt.

13.09.1999

OSMAG

Salzgitter Maschinenbau

PEINER

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
MOTOR GRABS

Greifer

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 01.0186-1 E

1-1

C o n t e n t s

Page-no.
1.0

Data sheet

2.0

Description and Survey of Features

2.1
2.1.1

Base unit: Constructional and Functional Description


Constructional Description

3-1

2.1.2

Functional Description

4/1-3

2.2

Hydraulic diagram 2303.3934

5/1-2

2.4

Parts list

7-1

3.0

Operating instructions

3.1

Observation of U W regulations

3.2
3.2.1

Putting into Operation


Initial start-up

3.2.2

Daily start-up

3.3

Information for Operation

3.4

Shut-down

3.5

Reoperation

3.6

Transportation

4.0

Maintenance and repair

4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5

Maintenance
Oil changes
Lubrication instructions
Oil filter
Motor
Condensation water

Salzgltter Maschinenbau AG
WindmhlenbergstraBe 20-22
3B259 Salzgltter / Germany

Telefon:
+49 (0)53 41 / 302 647
Telefax:
+49 (0)53 41 / 302 424

E-mail:
pelnerPsmaa.de
Internet:
www.smag.de
www.pelner.de

Class-no.

A 01.0252 E
A 01.0316/1-3 E
A 01.0419/1-2 E
A 01.0465 E

8/1-2

A 01.0551/1-2 E

8/1-2
8/1-2

A 01.0551/1-2 E
A 01.0551/1-2 E

9-1

A 01.0126 E

9-2

A 01.0580 E

9-2

A 01.0580 E

9-2

A 01.0580 E

10-1
10-1
10-1
10-1
10-1

A
A
A
A
A

Vorstand:
Sebastian H. Brandes (Vorsitzender),
Jrgen Blalel<
Vorsitzender des Aufsichtsrates:
Ulrich Decker

01.0602/1-2 E
01.0602/1-2 E
01.0602/1-2 E
01.0602/1-2 E
01.0602/1-2 E

Sitz der Gesellschaft: Salzgitter Bad


Registergericht:
Amtsgericht Braunschwelg
Registernummer:
HRB 201 389

13.09.1999

OSAAAG

Salzgitter AAaschinenbau

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
IVI Q T O K G R A B S

PBNER Greifer

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 01.0186-2 E

1-2

C o n t e n t s

Page-no.

Class-no.

4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3

Required cliecl<s
Ciiecl< oil level
Check and adjust pressure
Miscellaneous checks

10-2
10-2
10-2

A 01.0657/1-2 E
A 01.0657/1-2 E
A 01.0657/1-2 E

4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
4.3.5

Repair
General
Disassembly
Repair works
Assembly
Control block

10-3
10-3
10-4
10-5
10-6

A
A
A
A
A

4.4

Table of recommended hydraulic oil

11/1-2

A 05.1800/1-2 E

5.0

Failure - Symptoms - Sources of failures

5.1

Grab not functioning

12/1-2

A 01.0955/1-2 E

5.2

Grab malfunctioning

12/1-2

A 01.0955/1-2 E

5.3

Failure of hydraulic system

12/1-2

A 01.0955/1-2 E

6.0

Spare parts list and electric equipment

Salzgltter Maschinenbau AG
Wlndmhienbergstrae 20-22
38259 Salzgitter/Germany

Telefon:
+49 (0)53 41 / 302 647
Telefax:
+49 (0)53 41 / 302 424

E-mall:
pelner@smaq.de
Internet:
www.smag.de
www.pelner.de

Vorstand:
Sebastian H. Brandes (Vorsitzender),
Jrgen Bialek
Vorsitzender des Aufsichtsrates:
Ulrich Decker

01.0751/1-2 E
01.0751/1-2 E
01.0804 E
01.0020 E
01.0904/1-2 E

Sitz der Gesellschaft: Salzgltter Bad


Registergericht:
Amtsgericht Braunschwelg
Registernummer:
HRB 201 389

Data Sheet / Technical Data

Salzgitter IVlaschinenbau

Order no.:

AB00001867

Product:

MZGL 10000-3-L

Material no.:

1000052927

Serial no.:

2291 / 2292

Year of construction:

2011

Deadweight:

7085 kg

Required crane lifting capacity:

17.085 kg

Operatina instructions: A 01.0186

Fillinq volume/admissible liftinq capacitv


Filling volume [m^]

Piled density [t/m^]

adm. lifting capacity / SWL [t]

Vi = 10,0
V2 =
V3 =
V4 =
V5 =

1,0

10,0

Bulk material grain size:

1,0 - max. 50 mm

Theoretical workinq times (free in space / without pickinq up bulk material)


60 Hz

50 Hz

8 sec.
- 14-18 sec.

Opening of grab
Closing of grab

sec.
sec.

Electric Data

Mode of Operation:
Motor type:
Intermittent service:
Motor power:
Voltage:
Frequency:
Current:
Rated current:

28
400
50
57

S6
180L-4
40 % duty cycle
kW
V
Hz
three phase
A10%

System of protection:
Insulation class:
max. duty Classification:
Circuit diagram no.:
Plug-in connector:
Control voltage:

IP65
H
2307.9520
ODU-UW
220 V / 50 Hz

Hvdraulic Data
max. service pressure

Measuring point MA
Measuring point MB
Measuring point MP
Measuring point MPI
Measuring point MP2
Measuring point MLS
Pump type:
Control block:
Cylinder size:
Filled oil quality:
Oil tank capacity:
Filter type:
Filter mesh:
Admissible service temperature:
Author:

12.04.2011 / GK - Pape

Opening of grab [+10 bar]

Closing of grab [10 bar]

230
120
V30D-075
AV4298-NG20E
180/110x750 stroke
HLP 46
255 1
Argo
i6(c) = 200 Exapor
- 5 C up to + 85 C

Salzgitter Maschinenbau

Dimensions

Author:

12.04.2011 / GK - Pape

Data Sheet / Technical Data

05.11.2008

OSMAG
fBBKH Salzgitter Maschinenbau

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
MOTOR GRABS

PEiNERGreifer

2.0

Description and surveys

2.1

Basic unit: Description of construction

2.1.1

Description of construction (see page-no. 7-1)

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 01.0252 E

3-1

The structure ofthe PEINER Motor Dual-Scoop Grab is as follows:


The two scoops, provided to pick up the bulk material, are pivoted at the lower traverse
by means of pins. These pins forms the pivot points of the scoops. The lips of the
scoops consist of wear-resistant material.
The lower traverse is designed to serve as oil tank. The hydraulic unit, consisting of a
motor, a variable high-pressure axial pump being suspended in the oil tank and a control
unit, is vertically mounted onto the traverse. The hydraulic unit being protected by a
hood is arranged in a low position on the grab thus permitting a small overall height and
a favourable position of the centre of gravity of the grab.
The lifting cylinders are mounted on both sides of the hydraulic unit and are fixed to the
lower and upper traverse. The scoops are opened and closed by retraction and
extension of the piston rods. The piston rods are surface-treated and corrosionresistant. The hoist cylinders are connected with the control unit via hydraulic hoses.
The link arms are fitted to connect the scoops with the upper traverse. The Suspension
device which forms the connection between the grab and the existing lifting equipment is
mounted to the upper traverse.
The motor is supplied with current by means of a plug-in connector as well as by means
of a rubber hose. In order to prevent damages a tension relief is provided to discharge
the plug-in connector.
All components and parts are made out of high-quality material and are easily
interchangeable. The bearing bushes are made of seawater-resistant material.
PEINER Motor Dual-Scoop Grabs with kick plates (see parts list, page no. 7-1) are able
to handle material with high-density after the kick plates have been removed. Please
see data machinery card concerning various material densities.

13.09.1999

OSMAG
Salzgitter Maschinenbau

2.1.2

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
MOTOR GRABS
PEINER Greifer

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 01.0316-1 E

4-1

Functional description (see page-no. 5-1, hydraulic diagram)


Operating mode:

Continuous duty (S6)


Variable delivery pump (Power regulator plus Load-Sensing
regulator)
Control block NG 20-E / NG 30-E

General:
Operating mode S6 means tliat when the grab is in Operation the drive motor and thus
also the hydraulic pump turn in only one rotational sense. The change of the motional
sense of the working cylinders is controlied by one bidirectional valve for the open grab"
function and one bidirectional valve for the close grab" function. If, with drive motor
rotating, no valve is connected (consumer), i. e. the grab Shells do not close nor open,
the hydraulic pump only sucks as much oil as is required to maintain the lubrication and
the operational safety of the pump. This operating working order of the pump is
hereinafter described under the term zero-lift regulation".
The Load-Sensing regulator, for short LS regulator, only functions as a min./max.regulator", i. e. via the LS regulator the pump recognizes that,
1.

a consumer has been connected and the pump must switch to max. output,

2.

a consumer has been disconnected and the pump has to return to zero-lift
regulation",

3.

a System pressure pre-set at the pressure relief valve (DV1 or DV2) has been
reached and that the pump has to return towards zero-lift regulation" in order to
suck only as much oil as is required to maintain the system pressure.

The power regulator of the pump is adapted to the maximum drive motor power, i. e.
depending on the drive power, the output of the pump is continuously adjusted to the
Output of the drive motor in case a determined operating pressure is exceeded and
continues to increase.
Functional description open grab":
The soienoid valve (M2) of the pilot control valve of the bidirectional valve (WV2) is
actuated. As soon as the pilot control valve reaches the switch position, the pump
changes over from the zero-lift regulation" to suck the maximum flow volume. At the
same time the main valve (bevel seat valve) is relieved at the rear side by the
bidirectional valve (VW2), i. e. hydraulic oil can escape via the connection (T1) into the
oil tank. The present pump pressure opens the main valve (WV2) and the oil flows
through the pressure line (Po) via the opened main valve (WV2), the internal block
connection (P2), the non-return valve (R2), the control block connection (B) and a hose
line to the piston side (KS) of the working cylinder.
At the same time, the non-return valve SV1 is opened via the control line (St1) and the
non-return valve (SV2) is closed via the control line (St2). Furthermore, the directional
valve (VW) connects the signal line (LS) to the open grab" function.

13.09.1999

Salzgitter Maschinenbau

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
MOTOR GRABS
PEINER Greifer

Class-no.
A 01.0316-2 E

Page-no.
4-2

Upon the lifting motion of the working cylinder, the oil escapes from the piston rod side
(KSS) of the working cylinder and is led to pressure line via a hose line, the block
connection (A) and the opened non-return valve (SVl), i. e. to open the Grab the output
ofthe pump and the returning oil quantity are added (quick motion mode).
If the System pressure open grab" pre-set at the pressure relief valve (DV2) is reached,
the pressure relief valve (DV2) is opened and oil is led via connection (T) and the return
filter into the tank. The nozzle (D2) is dimensioned in such a way that less oil can follow
from the pressure line Po than escapes via the pressure relief valve. The resulting
pressure difference in line (LS) is transmitted in form of a signal to the LS-regulator".
The pump switches back and only sucks as much oil as is required to maintain the
System pressure.
Now the soienoid valve (M2) can be disconnected and the line (LS) can be relieved from
pressure via the pilot control valve of the bidirectional valve (VW2) and the connection
(T) towards the tank. The pump switches to zero-lift regulation".
As an additional system protection (e. g. if the pump regulation unit fails), there is a
pressure relief valve (DV3) in the pressure line (Po), which is permanently set to 2830Mpa. Depending on the pump type, this valve can also be located inside the pump.
Functional description "close grab":
The closing procedure is initiated by switching the magnet (M1) ofthe bidirectional valve
(WV1).
The procedure is analogue to the description open grab", except that when retracting
the piston rods, the oil getting out of the piston side (KS) of the working cylinders is lead
to the tank via a hose line, the control block connection (B), the opened non-return valve
(SV2), the connection (T) and the return filter (F). This means that for closing the grab
only the normal pump delivery rate is available.
The pressure in line A, which increases upon closing the scoops, is limited by pressure
switch DS. If the system pressure for close grab" adjusted on the pressure switch is not
reached, an electrical contact incorporated in the pressure switch disconnects the
electrical connection to the magnet (M1) and thanks to the disconnection ofthe magnet,
the line (LS) can be relieved towards the tank via pilot control valve of the bidirectional
valve (WV1) and the connection (T1). The pump goes over to zero-lift-regulation. The
pressure adjustment of pressure relief valve (DV1) is higher than the value set on the
pressure switch DS", i. e. for the functions open grab" and close grab", DV1 does not
have any function (please refer to the table Standard pressure adjustment").
The maximum pressure in line A is defined by the pressure switch (DS). When reaching
the maximum pressure on DS, the magnet (M1) is switched off (see general under
item 2).
If the bidirectional valves are switches off (WV1, WV2), the check valves (R1, R2) and
the non-return valves (SV1, SV2) prevent an automatic opening respectively closing of
the grab.

13.09.1999

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
MOTOR GRABS

QSMAG

PEiNERGreifer

M ^ W i Salzgitter AAaschinenbau

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 01.0316-3 E

4-3

Output regulation:

ATTENTION !

The pump's sense of rotation is to the right, while looking at the


pump's drive shaft!

If, during the initial start-up, the Grab neither opens nor cioses, the motor might have the
wrong sense of rotation. Reconnect the supply cable to the motor.

Standard pressure adjustment:


DS
230 bar

DV1
250 bar

DV2

Grab closing
Grab opening

120 bar

DV3

Safety valve

280-300 bar

For the shall values, please also refer to the machinery data card.

Manometer connections:
The System pressures can be checked at the provided measuring points (for pressures
please refer to the machinery data card).
Closing:
Opening:

MPI.MA
MP2, MB

Pump pressure:
LS-pressure:

MP, MP1, MP2


MLS

Chattering of the scoops:


In order to prevent the scoops from chattering during the closing procedure, the
unlockable non-return valve SV1 should be slightly throttied. (Adjustment by means of
set screw, see page no. 10-6).

ATTENTION!

Do not close SV1 too far, as otherwise the oil will be heated
excessively!

01.10.2002

2.2

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
MOTOR GRABS

SalzgitterMaschinenbau

PEiNERGreifer

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 01.0419-1 E

5-1

Hydraulic diagram 2303.3934


continuous duty (S6)
variable delivery pump (power regulator and LS-regulator)
control block NG 20-E, quick-motion design
KSS

KS

DS

MP2<^

01.10.2002

B ^ ^ H Salzgitter AAaschinenbau

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
MOTOR GRABS
PEiNERGreifer

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 01.0419-2 E

5-2

Leqend:
A
B
D I , D2
DS
DV1,DV2,
=
DVS
E
F
KS
KSS
LS
M
M1,M2
MA, MB, MP =
MP1,MP2
N
P
Po
P1,P2
R1,R2
St1 - St4
SV1
SV2
T
T1
WV
WV1,WV2
=

pipe (closing)
pipe (opening)
nozzle
pressure switch
pressure relief valve
pressure relief valve (security valve)
quick-motion design
filter
piston side
piston rod side
Signal line "Load Sensing"
motor
magnet
pressure gauge connection
pressure gauge connection
Standard design
pump
pressure line
pump connection
nonreturn valve
control line
stop valve with lift stop
stop valve
oil tank
tank line
Shuttle valve
directional valve

03.05.2001

^ I M M ^ SalzgitterMaschinenbau

2.4

Parts list

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
MOTOR G R A B S
FEINER Greifer

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 01.0465 E

7-1

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
MOTOR GRABS

Saizgitter Maschinenbau

PEiNERGreifer

Class-no.
A 01.0551-1 E

3.0

Operating instructions

3.1

Observation of U W regulations

Page-no.
8-1

The rules for the prevention of accidents concerning load-bearing equipment must be
complied with.
ATTENTION!

In order to prevent accidents when climbing up the grab, the


personnel for Operation and maintenance must take adequate
precautionary measures in accordance with the regulations for
the prevention of accidents in order to be protected against
falling down and other dangers.

3.2

Putting into Operation

3.2.1

Initial start-up
-

Check existing voltage with that of the grab (please refer to manual).
Check the hydraulic oil level (refer to point 4.2.1).
Refill oil which may have leaked during transportation (refer to Recommended Fluids
- sheet no. 11-1).
At temperatures below -10C either preheat the hydraulic oil or operate the closed
grab (locked against opening) until the oil has warmed up to QC.
Fit the Suspension device to the load-bearing equipment.
Check the SWL of the crane.
Remove the protective caps from plug and socket outlets.
Connect the plug-in connector to the grab. Pay attention to the sense of rotation!
Should the grab be supplied without assembled electrical device, connect an
adequate device according to the hydraulic diagram.
Fit tension relief, take care that cable does not stress the plug-in connector.
Observe point 4.3 and make a trial run.
Check if bolted joint is leakproof.
After approx. 50 operational hours change hydraulic oil filter (refer to drawing sheet
no. 10-1).
Standard desicin

oil level indicator oil drain plug

oil filter

13.09.1999

OSMAG
i

3.2.2

SalzgitterMaschinenbau

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
MOTOR GRABS
PEiNERGreifer

Class-no.

Page-no.

A 01.0551-2 E

8-2

Daily start-up
-

Check oil level. (refer to point 4.2.1).

- At temperatures below -10C, either preheat the hydraulic oil or operate the closed
grab (locked against opening) until the oil has warmed up to approx 0C.
-

Check plug-in connector and tension relief to proper fit.

Check whether bolted joints, hoses and cylinders are leakproof.

13.09.1999

AG

Salzgitter Maschinenbau

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
MOTOR GRABS
PEINER Greifer

Class-no.
A 01.0126 E

3.3

Operation

3.3.1

Information for Operation

Page-no.
9-1

When handling bulk material which impedes the perfect cl